The “One Bite” pizza reviewer and Barstool Sports founder Dave Portnoy threw his support behind Yum! Brands’ campaign to temporarily rebrand Pizza Hut, praising the pizza chain’s strategic marketing move as “brilliant” while pitching company executives on directing advertising dollars toward Barstool Sports during football season.

“At first, I didn’t really get it. But I’ll say this, Stuart. We do business with Pizza Hut. And we want them to spend lots of money with Barstool. So I think it’s a brilliant move. Whoever came up with that, I like it,” Portnoy said on “Varney & Co.” Friday.

“They’re thinking smart. It’s football season. There it is, the football with the ‘Hut.’ And you know, they’re gonna spread this message. They gotta find some new media vehicles that cover football,” he continued, “and maybe do a little bit of an ad spend to let people know what’s going on so they don’t get confused.”

CANCEL ME IF YOU CAN: DAVE PORTNOY TAKES AIM AT CANCEL CULTURE CRITICS WHO ‘ALREADY DECIDED’ THE VERDICT

FOX Business host Stuart Varney replied: “And Barstool Sports is ideally situated to pick up a little pizza business, right?”

“You don’t say!” Portnoy responded.

On Wednesday, the chain announced that it will go by “Hut” for the next 25 weeks, coinciding with the 2026 NFL season.

“You can just call us HUT for the next 25 weeks,” Pizza Hut wrote in a social media post announcing the temporary rebrand.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The company showed off the change at a restaurant in Plano, Texas, where a banner featuring a football covered the word “Pizza” on the restaurant’s exterior sign. Pizza Hut, which is headquartered in Plano, also changed its social media profile images to a logo without the word “Pizza.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

FOX Business’ Brittany Miller contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

When Jim Dausch joined restaurant operator Yum Brands in late 2024, one of his first orders of business was to find a way to ensure Pizza Hut’s food was delivered as hot as possible.

Previously, the software that connected the chain’s kitchen and fleet systems processed orders in a rudimentary “first in, first out” flow. An order would come into the restaurant and a ticket would immediately be generated to tell the kitchen to put the pizza in the oven. But there were plenty of times where the the order would sit idle waiting for an available driver.

Dausch and his team created a data-forward automation layer that changed the workflow, telling cooks not to make the pizza until the system knew with greater certainty that further down the chain, a driver would be available for pickup. The change led to hotter food deliveries and a “meaningful” increase in customer satisfaction scores, according to Dausch.

“We are sort of step-by-step going through what it takes to run our restaurant and finding every way we possibly can to automate those things,” says Dausch.

Dausch joined Yum Brands, which recently saw sales take a hit from a cyclospora outbreak, in December 2024 as global chief digital and technology officer of Pizza Hut. He was promoted 11 months later to hold that same title across the entire enterprise, which includes the Taco Bell and KFC brands. He oversees Yum’s websites and apps, digital order platforms, corporate systems, AI and data, and restaurant technology across 63,000 global locations that are operated by around 1,500 franchisees.

Yum is Dausch’s first foray into the restaurant sector, but he says that his thinking around technology closely mirrors his 20 years of experience at hospitality giant Marriott. All of his technology investments focus on customers, workers, and the franchisees. For the franchisees, food and labor have traditionally been their largest expenses, but increasingly, they’ve had to increase their investments in technology. Still, Dausch says they have little appetite to just accept every new tool without a clear return on investment.

“When we talk to our franchisees, they’re very worried about that,” says Dausch. “If we can’t prove that what we’re putting in place is either going to meaningfully improve the customer experience in a way that drives higher same-store sales growth, or meaningfully reduce food waste in a way that is going to ultimately pay for itself, obviously the franchisee is going to kind of resist.” 

With ROI in mind, there are times when Dausch has to say no. Robotics have generated buzz among franchisees, but no single prominent use case has emerged that Yum deems worthy of chasing. He’s also cautious when buying the AI capabilities pitched by software-as-a-service vendors, saying higher chip costs and other infrastructure expenses have made pricing for these features too frothy.

Some bigger technology bets Dausch has placed include digital kiosks, which have been rolled out to around two-thirds of restaurant locations globally and consistently produce higher check averages than in-person orders. An automated, voice AI ordering system has been rolled out to more than 900 Taco Bell U.S. restaurants, also with the intention of boosting order sizes, while also improving accuracy and increasing customer satisfaction.  

Dausch acknowledges that the voice AI system has been a “learning journey,” requiring Yum to make tweaks to the system so that the handoff between the AI and human workers is smoother.  

Across the quick-service restaurant industry, kiosks have been one of the biggest tech hits with diners, but even there, Dausch sees an opportunity for improvement. He’s added a step where consumers can enter their loyalty program information so that kiosks can make more personalized offers based on the data the restaurant has from past orders.

At Yum, which ranks #474 on the Fortune 500, Dausch also oversees Byte, a proprietary SaaS restaurant technology platform that was designed to consolidate online and mobile app ordering, point of sale, kitchen and delivery, menu management, inventory, and labor management tools and systems. For now, Byte is completely an internal platform, though the intent is that it will have an external customer in Pizza Hut, which Yum agreed to sell for $2.7 billion in June.

Dausch credits former CEO David Gibbs, who retired earlier this year, for setting the vision that Yum would need to prioritize technology and AI to compete aggressively in the restaurant sector. A typical restaurant location was managing up to 30 software vendors, and it could take a day or longer to pull insights from some of those systems. Byte operates as a single platform with just one data source.

“The challenge was that the restaurants often did not have a common line of sight across all of those systems to how their business was doing in real time,” says Dausch.

One example of how Byte has helped improve restaurant operations has been in inventory ordering. Yum’s automation system has led to an 85% reduction in “stockouts,” which is when a restaurant would run out of ingredients, resulting in lost sales when menu items aren’t available.

Yum has authorized enterprise licenses for OpenAI’s ChatGPT for district managers and franchise leaders, who are also mandated to take courses through an “AI Academy” that teaches them how to understand prompting, create digital executive assistants, and encourage the development of more than 400 AI agents.

All that said, Dausch knows he’s only one piece of the pie. “I don’t know anyone that has ever just selected a restaurant to go to based on the technology,” says Dausch, who adds that craveable food at a fair price is what wins diners. “It’s important for us that we don’t lose the plot.”

John Kell

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian is publicly pressing Tehran to end its war with the United States, arguing that Iran should pursue an agreement now while it can still claim it is negotiating from a position of strength.

“We should end the war now, when we are in a position of power and dignity,” Pezeshkian said, claiming that the world recognizes what he characterized as Iran’s success against the United States.

The message was directed as much toward Iran’s own political establishment as toward Washington.

Powerful hard-line factions inside the Islamic Republic have resisted concessions and continue to portray prolonged confrontation as proof of revolutionary strength. Pezeshkian’s argument is that extending the conflict could squander whatever leverage Iran believes it still possesses while deepening the economic damage at home.

Vice President JD Vance recently described the division inside Tehran bluntly, saying some Iranian officials want the war to end while “crazy radicals” want it to continue. Pezeshkian’s latest remarks appear to confirm that a real internal struggle remains over whether Iran should accept a negotiated settlement or continue fighting.

The timing is critical. President Donald Trump’s administration is preparing what Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent has called the toughest sanctions ever imposed on Iran. The measures, expected to be detailed Monday, are designed to isolate Tehran from oil revenue, foreign trade and international financial channels while reducing the need for another major American military escalation.

Iran is already facing a U.S. naval blockade, restricted oil shipments and the loss of important regional commercial connections. The United Arab Emirates, historically one of Iran’s most important trading gateways, has suspended trade following Iranian missile attacks.

Pezeshkian is therefore attempting to present diplomacy not as surrender, but as a way to preserve Iran’s remaining leverage before the country’s economic position deteriorates further.

Hard-liners are offering the opposite message. Parliament Speaker Mohammad Baqer Qalibaf said Friday that Iran must develop ways to overcome what he called “unjust sanctions,” urging deeper trade with Iraq and greater use of national currencies to reduce dependence on the U.S. dollar.

The competing statements expose Tehran’s central choice: negotiate while claiming victory, or continue a confrontation that Washington is increasingly shifting from the battlefield to Iran’s economic lifelines.

JBizNews Desk | Tehran

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. dollar has acquired an unusual new source of pressure: the government department responsible for financing America’s $40 trillion debt load.

Citigroup strategists led by Daniel Tobon have turned bearish on the dollar over the next three months, cutting their forecast for a broad dollar index from 102.12 to 98.34. The shift follows the Treasury Department’s decision to at least double certain purchases of older, long-dated government bonds.

Beginning Sept. 9, Treasury will raise the ceiling for buyback operations covering bonds with 10 to 30 years remaining from $2 billion to at least $4 billion apiece. The objective is to improve trading conditions and relieve pressure in a market where the 30-year yield recently reached 5.34%, its highest level since 2007.

But the government is not eliminating debt. It generally must sell new securities to finance the repurchase of old ones. In practical terms, Treasury could remove more long-term bonds from the market while issuing more short-term bills—a change in the maturity of the debt rather than a reduction in what Washington owes.

That distinction is behind the dollar warning.

Reducing the supply of long bonds can push their prices higher and their yields lower. Lower yields make dollar-denominated assets less attractive to overseas investors, weakening one of the principal forces drawing foreign capital into the United States.

The dollar index fell roughly 0.8% after the Treasury announcement, reaching its weakest closing level since May. The euro climbed above $1.16, while the British pound approached $1.36.

The immediate intervention is modest compared with the market it is intended to influence. A $4 billion operation represents little more than one-half of 1% of the $739 billion Treasury expects to borrow during the current quarter. Yet investors are reacting to the signal as much as the size: Washington has shown that sharply rising long-term rates can provoke an official response.

That creates a credibility problem. If traders conclude that the government intends to hold down long-term yields for political or budgetary reasons, they may demand a larger premium to own American debt. Treasury could then obtain temporary relief while increasing longer-term anxiety about inflation, deficits and government influence over markets.

For businesses, a weaker dollar produces clear winners and losers. American exporters receive more dollars when foreign revenue is converted home, while manufacturers competing against imported goods gain pricing room. Multinational companies with large overseas operations can also report stronger dollar earnings even if their underlying sales do not change.

Importers face the opposite arithmetic. A European component costing €1 million equals approximately $857,000 when the euro trades at $1.166, versus $833,000 at $1.20 per euro-dollar inverse? The useful comparison is direct: at $1.166 per euro, that component costs $1.166 million, roughly $66,000 more than when the euro was worth $1.10. Retailers, automobile suppliers and businesses purchasing foreign machinery may eventually pass part of that increase to consumers.

Investors should not confuse Citi’s short-term call with a prediction that the dollar is entering a permanent decline. The bank’s longer-range view remains more constructive because American growth and corporate earnings continue to compare favorably with many other developed economies.

The next test is whether Treasury’s expanded purchases can keep long-term yields down once operations begin—or whether investors decide that buybacks treat the symptoms of America’s borrowing problem without addressing the deficits creating it.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

China has made an unusually large spot purchase of Saudi oil, but the deal is less a return to normal buying than an emergency adjustment to a supply system reshaped by the Iran war.

State-owned PetroChina and Sinochem, along with Sinopec’s trading arm Unipec and private refiner Rongsheng Petrochemical, purchased a combined 10 million barrels of Saudi Arab Medium and Arab Heavy crude through a rare tender. Additional Saudi barrels were secured through long-term contracts.

The purchase is large enough to supply China’s refineries for roughly 20 hours. It is still small compared with the volumes that have disappeared from the country’s normal import system.

China imported 8.41 million barrels of crude a day in July, 24.3% less than a year earlier and more than 3 million barrels a day below levels seen before the conflict disrupted the Strait of Hormuz. Refineries responded by reducing fuel production, limiting exports and drawing on oil already stored inside the country.

The new Saudi cargoes are designed to reduce the shipping risk. At least 4 million barrels are expected to load from facilities outside the Strait of Hormuz, allowing the tankers to avoid the waterway that once carried approximately one-fifth of the world’s oil and gas shipments.

That alternative route has become increasingly valuable as Iranian supplies disappear. Iran’s shipments have fallen to approximately 534,000 barrels a day in August from an average of 1.4 million last year. China historically purchased more than 80% of Iran’s exported oil, much of it at discounts attractive to smaller independent refineries.

The Saudi purchase therefore does not necessarily signal stronger Chinese consumer demand. It shows Chinese refiners replacing oil they can no longer obtain safely or cheaply from Iran while protecting themselves against another tightening of Gulf shipping.

The shift matters beyond China. Saudi Arabia can charge for the security of crude loaded outside Hormuz, while Brazil, Iraq and other exporters gain an opportunity to replace Iranian barrels. Tanker operators, insurers and refiners must also recalculate the value of routes that avoid the Gulf’s most dangerous bottleneck.

China has enough stored oil to avoid panic buying, which has helped prevent the disruption from pushing global crude prices even higher. But inventories can only delay the decision. If Iranian supplies remain blocked and Chinese refineries begin rebuilding production, Beijing may have to return to the international market for far more than 10 million barrels.

JBizNews Desk | Beijing

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Treasury data confirmed last night that U.S. national debt now stands at $40 trillion, with the government now expected to spend more than $1 trillion in interest on the debt in the fiscal year of 2026.

Debt hawks have been warning policymakers for some time that the nation’s fiscal path is unsustainable, and the issue is increasingly rising up voters’ agendas in the run-up to midterms later this year.

A new report from The Conference Board throws the issue into a new light for consumers: The potential impact on their personal finances if policymakers continue borrowing at the current pace.

The Conference Board modeled a series of scenarios: Baseline (using Congressional Budget Office data based on current trends), a good-case (in which federal deficits are cut roughly in half, in line with current targeting proposals), and a bad-case (in which deficit levels grow to 9% of GDP rather than the current 6% to 7%).

The Conference Board also modeled two financial crisis scenarios—a default and an interest rate shock—which economists like Bridgewater Associates founder Ray Dalio have long been concerned about.

Even dismissing the most extreme negative outcomes, consumers still stand to lose thousands if policymakers don’t act to reduce spending.

For example, the report models a family saving to buy a $600,000 house in either 5 or 10 years, with a 20% down payment and a 30-year fixed mortgage. The report does not provide a methodology for calculating rates offered in 2031 and 2036, but concludes that total payments over three decades for a home bought in 2031 come to $2.89m, and $2.8m in 2036.

These are the payments in the baseline scenario. However, under the good-case scenario, in which the government cuts its borrowing and interest is lower, this figure is reduced by $53,000 for buyers in 2031, or by more than $100,000 for buyers in 2036.

Consumers’ spending is closely linked to the debt picture, Michael Peterson of the think tank the Peterson Institute said in a conversation with Fortune this week: “When the U.S. borrows this much … that drives up interest rates, which then increases household expenses because your mortgage goes up, your car loan, your credit card bills, and inflation more generally. So [we] may not get a bill at the end of the month for national debt, but [we] are paying that bill both in the form of taxes as well as an inflated level of expenses.”

Peterson also said programs like Social Security and Medicare are running out of cash, placing further onus on government budgets in the near future. The trust fund for Social Security is due to run dry in a little under eight years, and Medicare in a little under seven years, according to estimates by the Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget.

The Conference Board added that when those coffers run dry, the Treasury will need to decide whether to backfill the expenditure from its general fund by $2.7 trillion, per the CBO—a further burden on its budget.

In the event payouts from these trusts are cut, workers approaching retirement face a hole in their expected earnings. The Conference Board reports the reduction in monthly benefits in 2032 would be $173. However, by 2033, when the trust runs dry, this increases to $705 a month.

In 2034, it represents a $721 hole, and by 2036, a $754 shortfall compared to current expectations.

The worst-case scenarios

The above scenarios are not based on a more pessimistic scenario in which the U.S. government defaults or a financial crisis ensues. Skeptics of this outcome have some grounds: The U.S. economy has the means to lower the value of its debt thanks to the Federal Reserve. Quantitative easing, although inflationary, would avoid the extreme fallout of a default.

Likewise, while Treasury yields are elevated at present, this is only in part due to concerns over fiscal trajectories. They also reflect long-term inflation expectations and traders’ guesses on whether the Federal Reserve will increase rates.

However, should either of these realities come to pass, the threat to households is severe. Total payments for the aforementioned home bought in 2031 rocket to more than $3 million in the case of a default, and over $3.6 million in the case of an extreme interest rate shock, per the report.

The report concludes: “Neglecting the problem will not make it better and worsening our deficits will only increase the negative impacts of the debt on the rest of the economy … Addressing the national debt deserves to be a high priority for both voters and lawmakers, to benefit all Americans.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

FIRST ON FOX: A top executive at JPMorgan Chase warned that proposed federal bank capital rules could damage small businesses across the country, airing caution that Main Street may have less access to credit from banks.

As regulators move to finalize Basel III Endgame, one of the most important global financial regulatory standards to date, Chase Business Bank CEO Stevie Baron said in a memo obtained by Fox News Digital that the current framework could potentially have unintended consequences for small businesses as capital requirements could prevent lending.

“The latest revisions to the 2023 proposal are a step in the right direction, but as we reiterated to regulators, more work is needed to ensure the final rules do not increase the cost of lending or reduce access to credit for small businesses,” Baron said.

Baron specifically noted proposed changes to the Global Systemically Important Bank (GSIB) surcharge, saying that formula could encourage trading over lending, raising borrowing costs for millions of small business owners.

JAMIE DIMON SAYS HE WOULDN’T BUY STOCKS OR TREASURYS AT CURRENT PRICES

JPMorgan Chase is considered a GSIB, and is required to adhere to higher loss-absorbing equity and capital requirements than other smaller banks.

“The Fed should reconsider the proposed changes to the GSIB surcharge calculation, and, in particular, retain the current approach to the short-term wholesale funding factor that accounts for the size and funding diversification benefits of universal banks,” Baron added. “Regulators should ensure the surcharge framework does not penalize the everyday lending and banking services relied on by small businesses.”

He also argued that “capital requirements should not increase just because the economy is growing or routine activity is expanding,” and that “policymakers should ensure the capital framework operates as a coherent whole, rather than layering multiple requirements on top of the same risks.”

Baron oversees more than 7 million small and medium-sized businesses and over $19 billion in business banking average loans in fiscal year 2025. The American Dream Initiative, which was announced by JPMorgan Chase CEO Jamie Dimon on Fox News’ “Fox and Friends” in March, seeks to expand the total number of small and medium-sized businesses to ten million in additional to a number of changes at the bank to promote growth in the U.S. economy.

A senior JPMorgan Chase executive told Fox News Digital that acting Labor Secretary Keith Sonderling visited the bank’s headquarters last week to discuss the initiative and steps it is taking to implement changes under the Trump administration.

After the 2008 financial crisis, global regulators developed the Basel III regulatory package to ensure banks have enough capital and financial cushion to weather economic volatility to protect taxpayers. U.S. regulatory agencies, including the Federal Reserve, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation and the Office of the Comptroller, initially proposed the framework, dubbed Basel III Endgame in 2023 but withdrew the draft for revision after pushback.

SURVIVING SINCE LINCOLN: HOW SIX GENERATIONS BEAT THE SMALL BUSINESS CURSE

In March, Trump administration regulators proposed the latest draft of Basel III Endgame, with a comment deadline of July, though banks are still lobbying for changes as regulators move to enact permanent policy.

Top lawmakers, like Senate Banking Committee Chairman Tim Scott, R-South Carolina, have also warned about potential lending shortfalls if the framework is enacted.

“I have long said that overly complicated capital rules can slow economic growth without making our financial system safer,” Scott said in a March statement. “The Biden administration’s plan would have made it harder to get a mortgage, harder to start a business, and more expensive to make ends meet. That is the wrong direction when families are already feeling squeezed. There is still more work to do. We need rules that keep our financial system strong while making sure banks can lend, and our economy can grow.”

Baron aligned with Scott’s view that there needs to be assurance that banks will be able to lend freely, stating in his memo that small businesses could be restricted from expansion and investing in growth should there be limited access to capital.

His memo is part of a new JPMorgan Chase series titled “from the desk of,” where top executives, including Dimon, have shared their takes on various economic and political policies and how they affect America’s largest bank.

This post was originally published here

The Trump administration is threatening the American Bar Association’s longstanding authority to accredit law schools, which dates back to 1952.

The White House, along with congressional Republicans, have accused the ABA of using its dominant role in legal education to push diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI) ideology on up-and-coming lawyers.

A 500-page Department of Education report obtained by The Wall Street Journal argues that the ABA’s accreditation wing is not sufficiently independent of the law profession itself.

In a statement to Fox News Digital, the Department of Education said its staff reviewed the ABA’s accreditation standards and found the organization is “out of compliance” with federal accreditor regulations.

MCMAHON TELLS HOUSE PANEL TRUMP ADMIN MOVING TO DISMANTLE ‘FAILED’ $3T EDUCATION BUREAUCRACY

“We will not comment on details as the process is ongoing and involves multiple stages of review, including by an independent, bipartisan advisory committee in September,” said a spokesperson from the Department of Education.

The ABA’s accreditation system gives it considerable influence over law schools in the United States.

Its Council of the Section of Legal Education and Admissions to the Bar is the only accreditor of Juris Doctor programs recognized by the Department of Education, and graduation from an ABA-approved law school is the standard path to taking the bar exam in most states.

Since the Higher Education Act was passed in 1965, only accredited universities can participate in federal student financial assistance programs. Students who attend non-accredited law schools cannot access federal student loans or grants.

LIBERAL FACULTY STILL HUGELY OUTNUMBER CONSERVATIVES IN HIGHER EDUCATION: REPORT

The Department of Education’s initial recommendation to reject the ABA as a federally recognized accreditor will go to a panel for review, The Journal reported. That panel will then make its own recommendation to Undersecretary of Education Nicholas Kent.

In a statement to Fox News Digital, Melissa Hart, the chair of the ABA’s Accreditation Council, said the council is complying with federal laws and regulations.

“Although it is difficult to comment on a recommendation we haven’t yet received, we look forward to the opportunity to address any misconceptions and clarify the record at our upcoming hearing before the [National Advisory Committee on Institutional Quality and Integrity] committee next month,” Hart said.

“As a national accrediting body for American law schools, we remain focused on ensuring quality legal education that produces competent, ethical attorneys who are eligible for licensure,” she added. “The outcomes produced by Council-accredited law schools are unmatched, and we continue the important work of accrediting law schools as our recognition process proceeds.”

Under the Higher Education Act, the secretary of education has the power to terminate the federal recognition of an accrediting agency, but only after the accreditor is given notice and an opportunity for a hearing.

Accreditors are also generally given up to 12 months to come back into compliance before their recognition is terminated.

If the ABA lost its federal status as a trusted accreditor, law schools affiliated with a university would likely use the university’s accreditor to maintain access to federal student aid programs.

Freestanding law schools would face a more complicated situation, as there are no other federally recognized accreditors specifically for J.D. programs. The Trump administration has not publicly detailed how those schools would retain access to federal student aid if the Department of Education rejects the ABA’s accreditation authority.

This post was originally published here

Offers of Iranian crude to Chinese buyers have declined and prices have jumped this week as the US blockade has cut Tehran’s shipments, according to trade sources, with the threat of more sanctions from Washington looming.

The US re-imposed its blockade of Iran’s shipping and ports on July 13 as a deal to halt the war between them broke down in an attempt to cut off oil sales – Tehran’s primary source of hard currency – compounding earlier losses from wartime strikes on its energy infrastructure.

The number of offers for Iranian oil cargoes to China for September and October delivery has declined from July and August cargoes, four trade sources familiar with the matter said. The offers have declined as barrels already in ships on the water have been sold, they said.

Iran’s oil exports have fallen since mid-July, with no visible crossings of the Strait of Hormuz by supertankers carrying Iranian crude since then, according to data from ship-tracking company Kpler, although many vessels turn off their location transponders, making them difficult to track.

The squeeze threatens a key feedstock for independent refiners, known colloquially as teapots, located in China’s eastern province of Shandong, which account for about a fifth of China’s refining capacity and are the top buyers of sanctioned oil.

A vendor pumps petrol from Iranian fuel oil tankers for resale near the Bashmagh border crossing on March 11, 2026.  (credit: Ozan KOSE / AFP via Getty Images)

Three of the trade sources said some Iranian crude, typically sold at discounts, was being offered at premiums to ICE Brent futures, with one source citing a premium of about $2 a barrel. That was an abrupt shift as cargoes of Iranian Light were being offered earlier this week at a discount of around $3 a barrel, the same as a month earlier.

Iranian crude held in floating storage outside the US blockade zone has fallen to about 80 million barrels from about 105 million barrels before the blockade was reinstated, Kpler data showed.

Two of the sources estimated that only about 30 million barrels of Iranian crude remained in Asian waters, half of the usual levels.

Kpler Senior Crude Oil Analyst Muyu Xu estimated there are 40 million barrels of Iranian oil held on ships in Malaysian waters east of Singapore, though most of that has been promised to buyers.

“This suggests buyers could face virtually no new Iranian supplies available for late-September delivery onwards since no laden Iranian tankers have so far managed to break through the US blockade,” she wrote in a LinkedIn post on Friday.

Uncertain supply

With the uncertainty over Iranian supplies, one teapot bought Brazil’s Lapa crude this week, while others were looking at Iraq’s Basrah crude, two of the sources said.

“Given the thin Iranian availability amid the US blockade, Chinese teapots are now looking beyond Russia and Iran,” said Sun Jianan, a senior oil analyst at Energy Aspects.

China’s Iranian oil imports have dropped from a year ago following the start of the US-Israeli war on Iran in February that has cut Middle Eastern oil exports. Shipments fell to 785,000 barrels per day in June, the lowest since February 2023, provisional data from analytics firm Kpler showed.

Imports in July likely rose to 823,000 bpd but the intake so far in August has dropped to 534,000 bpd, the data showed.

Last year, China’s Iran purchases averaged 1.4 million bpd, according to Kpler.

Wary of sanctions

On Thursday, US Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent threatened Iran with “the toughest sanctions in history,” with details to come on Monday, to pressure Iran to reopen the Strait of Hormuz and end the war.

That has China’s independent refiners on alert for further sanctions targeting specific buyers, a source at one of the plants said.

However, the source said new sanctions were unlikely to significantly deter purchases, noting that refiners which have been previously sanctioned continued processing Iranian oil.

China, the world’s biggest crude importer, buys more than 80% of Iran’s shipped oil, according to 2025 data from Kpler. Beijing has said it rejects unilateral sanctions, and a Chinese foreign ministry spokesperson said on Thursday sanctions will not solve the conflict.

This post was originally published on here

In July, for the first time, Chinese developed models took all five top positions on OpenRouter, the neutral routing platform that has become the closest thing the AI industry has to a Nielsen rating. Xiaomi’s MiMo V2.5 ranked first by token volume, followed by models from DeepSeek, MiniMax, Alibaba’s Qwen family and Moonshot’s Kimi. Chinese models now carry more than 60% of the platform’s traffic, which exceeds 20 trillion tokens a week.

That is not a benchmark result but a usage curve.

A year ago, US models carried roughly 70% of OpenRouter’s traffic. Today they carry about 30%. Even more striking is that by mid-July, Chinese models accounted for a record 58% of tokens processed by American firms on the platform. US companies are not being forced into Chinese AI. They are choosing it, workload by workload, because the price/performance math is impossible to ignore.

The race split in two

Here is the paradox that should be on every board agenda this fall. American labs still hold the absolute frontier. GPT 5.5, Claude Fable 5, and Gemini 3.x lead on the hardest reasoning, long-horizon agents, and the most demanding enterprise work. The frontier gap is real and measured in months.

But the race split into two contests: capability and distribution. America is winning the first and losing the second. DeepSeek’s V4-Pro is priced at roughly one-twelfth the cost of GPT-5.5 at comparable benchmark performance. DeepSeek V4 Flash costs $0.14 per million input tokens, compared with $5.00 for GPT-5.5. OpenRouter’s own analysts report that Chinese open models run 60% to 90% cheaper than the leading American offerings. For high-volume production workloads, coding agents, document processing and customer operations that differential decides the purchase order.

Distribution is where ecosystems lock in. Alibaba’s Qwen family has passed one billion cumulative downloads and replaced Meta’s Llama as the most downloaded open model family in the world. Llama, which defined open weight AI in 2023 and 2024 has fallen below 1% of routed volume. Developers optimize what they can download. They build tooling around what they deploy. This is how Linux won servers and Android won phones, and it is happening again in plain sight.

Welcome to the death zone

Between the frontier and the commodity floor sits a death zone: any model, product or corporate AI strategy that is neither clearly the best nor clearly the cheapest. It is being crushed from both directions at once.

The market data shows exactly how this bifurcation works. According to analysis of OpenRouter’s usage data, Anthropic holds only about 12% of the platform’s token share yet captures roughly half of total spending. That is the premium lane with fewer tokens, priced for the work that justifies them. The commodity lane belongs to efficient open models moving trillions of cheap tokens. The middle, closed models without a decisive capability edge and enterprise deployments paying frontier prices for commodity work has no lane at all.

Most Fortune 500 AI strategic plans are standing in that middle right now. The typical enterprise signed one frontier API contract in 2024  routed everything through it, and never looked back. In 2026, that is the equivalent of running your entire logistics operation by overnight air freight.

China built this on purpose

None of this happened by accident. Export controls denied Chinese labs the largest GPU clusters, so they engineered around scarcity with token efficiency, novel attention mechanisms, efficient mixture of expert designs, higher quality data over raw volume and inference-aware architecture from day one. State support lowered the effective cost base further. Xiaomi cut MiMo API prices by as much as 99% in May.

Constraint now became strategy. American labs that prioritize efficiency as a secondary concern risk maintaining their technological edge while losing market volume, developer interest, and ultimately the whole AI ecosystem.

The builder’s playbook for 2026

For the executives and founders actually building on AI, four moves matter now more than anything else.

1. Make hybrid routing your default architecture.

Route the hardest, most regulated, highest stakes work to frontier models. Route high volume, cost sensitive tasks to efficient open models. Companies doing this are cutting inference costs 60% to 90% on the majority of their workloads without touching quality where it counts. If your AI budget runs through a single closed API, you are overpaying for most of what you do.

2. Treat efficiency as a first-class weapon.

Inference optimization, quantization, speculative decoding, and model hardware co-design are now standard practices rather than mere research curiosities. Study how the constrained labs built, and then apply those lessons with American compute behind them.

3. Differentiate above the model layer.

Proprietary data, application layer, domain fine tuning, agent frameworks and rigorous evaluation harnesses outlast any base model advantage. Base models are converging into infrastructure. Your moat was never going to be someone else’s model.

4. Get out of the middle.

If your product depends on a model that is neither the best nor the cheapest then pick a direction this year. Move up the capability curve with real differentiation, or compete hard on cost and openness. The middle does not survive 2027.

America needs an open weight answer now

My point of view is that Washington is preparing to fight the wrong battle. The instinct in Congress is to restrict Chinese models on security grounds, and for sensitive government and defense workloads, that caution is warranted. Data sovereignty concerns already limit Chinese hosted adoption across Western regulated sectors, though self-hosted open weights blunt much of that argument.

A ban is not a strategy, it’s a tariff on your own developers. Chinese open weights succeed not due to deception, but because they are high-quality, affordable, accessible, and no American lab currently releases frontier-class open-weight models on a regular schedule. Meta’s retreat left the field open and China took over quickly.

The answer is to compete with credible US and allied open weight models, released regularly and backed by procurement incentives or direct lab commitments. Open weights are how you export your ecosystem, your safety norms and your standards to the rest of the world. America understood this with the internet stack. America needs to remember it now.

The frontier still matters and the US should defend it. But the practical race in 2026 is won by mastering both contests at once with absolute capability and radical efficiency, closed excellence and open diffusion, the biggest reliable compute and the smartest use of it. Innovation under constraint should no longer be a consolation prize.

The question for the American C-suite, boardrooms, and Washington is the same one. When the next generation of global software is built, whose models will it be built on? Right now, the download numbers are answering. It is not the one America wants to hear.

The opinions expressed in Fortune.com commentary pieces are solely the views of their authors and do not necessarily reflect the opinions and beliefs of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Investors are wondering what Scott Bessent is up to. At the start of the month, the Treasury Secretary’s ‘to-do’ list included purchasing $5 to $10 billion in Japanese yen.

This week, he announced the Treasury would increase “by at least double” the size of buybacks for longer-dated securities—and is prepared to expand the “fiscal consolidation” of purchasing back the costlier debt.

Analysts are generally nonplussed. The Japanese yen—while stronger against the dollar than in its June slump—has unwound to roughly the level it started the year at. The drift back to market-perceived fair value is “hardly surprising,” quipped UBS’s Paul Donovan.

Likewise, analysts fear Bessent’s bond battle this week will amount to very little: “Despite a series of efforts to thwart bond vigilantes, we believe these measures will struggle to offset either declining Fed credibility or rising rate expectations,” the BNP Paribas Markets 360 team wrote Wednesday.

Long-dated Treasuries drifted down since the announcement, but they remain relatively elevated. As such, Daniel Casali, chief investment strategist at wealth management firm Evelyn Partners, suggested: “If policymakers are serious about capping long-end yields, more intervention may be required. Indeed, to borrow from the movie Jaws: “We’re gonna need a bigger boat …” Investors may conclude that this week’s buyback announcement is not the last one needed to stop yields rising higher.”

Bessent is apparently unimpressed by the lack of confidence. Speaking on CNBC, he suggested the Treasury is working beyond the market’s perception.

“People have bad information. I have asymmetric information,” Bessent said. “So I think that the market should think: ‘Why would we have joined the Japanese in the intervention at this time? Do we know something the market doesn’t know … in terms of being willing to do … what I would call a Treasury twist here, in terms of the bond market? What do I know that the market doesn’t know?’”

“So I think the market’s probably gotten a little ahead of itself, a lot of people have not much to do in August.”

Bessent added that further action on bonds will hinge on market reaction, maintaining that what the Treasury is “trying to do is get people to focus on the fundamentals and not trade the headlines during a quiet period in a thin market. So, we are trying to keep the market in equilibrium.”

Warsh and Bessent

On the surface, Bessent’s action seems at odds with the Federal Reserve’s strategy. New chairman Kevin Warsh has suggested tightening at the long end of the yield curve—the very thing Bessent is now trying to loosen—helps the Fed read market signals.

He said in July: “We’re seeing a tightening both in nominals and in reals, even while, at some level, we haven’t done much in 42 days, the markets have done quite a bit.”

Warsh has long been a proponent of central banks reducing distortion in markets, and has also signaled he would like to reduce the Fed’s balance sheet—potentially pushing up borrowing costs as a result.

Bessent responded: “The Treasury and the Fed would work together if there was any change in the balance sheet, and we would adjust to any kind of run-off that they’re doing.”

It might be tempting, on the surface, to see the Fed and the Treasury at cross-currents. However, Bessent and Warsh’s working relationship is clear: the pair continue the long-standing tradition of meeting for breakfast or lunch every week.

Moreover, while Warsh has been clear he wants to pull the central bank back to what he sees as its “lane,” he has been explicit that it is not the role of the politically independent Fed to stray any further, for example, into the work of the Treasury.

He told Congress last month: “The way we erode [Fed] credibility are two things: We wander outside of our lane into your lane, or into the lane of another executive branch, or we don’t deliver on our promises. The first thing we can do is to deliver on our promises, and the second thing is … stick in our lane. That’s what we’re going to do.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Target has reduced prices on more than 10,000 products as the retailer fights to win over households that are comparing prices more carefully and limiting purchases that are not essential.

The cuts span groceries, baby products, health and wellness items, household supplies and other frequently purchased goods. Target is betting that lower everyday prices will bring shoppers into its stores more often, even if they are buying fewer discretionary products such as furniture, electronics and home décor.

The strategy is showing results. Comparable sales increased 3.8% during the latest quarter, customer traffic rose 3.6% and digital sales climbed 8.7%. Target raised its annual sales forecast for the second time this year.

Lower prices normally squeeze a retailer’s profit margin, but Target received nearly $1 billion in tariff refunds during the quarter. That unusual benefit helped absorb some of the cost of its price reductions and contributed significantly to stronger earnings.

The company is also expanding baby-care and wellness products, improving store conditions and adding more affordable merchandise. Those categories are designed to make Target a more regular stop for necessities, rather than a place consumers visit mainly for discretionary purchases.

For shoppers, the price cuts are meaningful, but they also reveal how intensely major retailers are competing for households whose budgets remain strained. Target’s improvement does not necessarily mean consumers are spending freely. It means the company is becoming more effective at capturing the dollars they are still willing to spend.

JBizNews Desk | Minneapolis

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

BJ’s Wholesale Club delivered a strong second-quarter report Friday, with consumers continuing to reward warehouse clubs even as spending becomes more selective across the broader retail economy.

For the quarter ended August 1, BJ’s reported $6.23 billion in total revenue, up 15.7% from a year earlier. Net sales rose 15.9% to $6.09 billion, while net income increased 15.4% to $173.9 million. Diluted earnings were $1.36 a share, up from $1.14 a year earlier and comfortably ahead of Wall Street expectations.

The headline sales increase, however, needs some explanation. Comparable-club sales rose 11.9% overall, but only 3.1% when gasoline is excluded. That means higher fuel sales accounted for a substantial portion of the reported growth. Even so, the 3.1% merchandise increase was stronger than analysts expected and showed that shoppers were still increasing purchases inside BJ’s clubs.

Membership is becoming an increasingly important part of the business. Membership-fee income rose 9.9% to $135.6 million, and BJ’s said its member count reached a record 8.5 million. The growth came from new-member acquisition, strong retention and more customers moving into higher-priced membership tiers.

Digital shopping is growing even faster. Digitally enabled comparable sales increased about 30%, showing that the warehouse-club model is no longer dependent entirely on customers making large physical shopping trips. BJ’s is increasingly combining its traditional bulk-discount model with online ordering, pickup and delivery.

The company also produced stronger operating results. Operating income rose 16.5% to $252.4 million, while adjusted EBITDA increased 14.3% to $347.2 million. BJ’s opened three clubs and one gas station during the quarter and repurchased roughly $124 million of its own shares.

Management responded by raising its fiscal 2026 adjusted earnings forecast to $4.60 to $4.80 a share, from its previous outlook of $4.40 to $4.60. BJ’s kept its forecast for comparable-club sales excluding gasoline at growth of 2% to 3% for the year.

For consumers, the report says something broader about the economy.

Households have not stopped spending, but they are increasingly looking for a clear value proposition. Warehouse clubs benefit because they can spread lower margins across high-volume purchases while generating recurring income from memberships. Bulk groceries, household products and discounted gasoline become particularly attractive when families are trying to stretch the same paycheck further.

BJ’s results therefore sit inside a larger shift in retail. Consumers may cut discretionary purchases, postpone expensive items or trade down from premium brands, yet continue spending heavily at stores where they believe the savings are measurable.

That is why the membership number may ultimately matter as much as the quarterly sales number. A record 8.5 million members gives BJ’s a larger recurring customer base and creates a powerful incentive for those households to concentrate more of their grocery, fuel and household spending inside the BJ’s ecosystem.

For investors, Friday’s report is evidence that value-oriented retail remains one of the more resilient corners of the consumer economy — even when the headline 16% revenue increase is adjusted for the unusually strong contribution from gasoline.

JBizNews Desk | Marlborough, Mass.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The United States and Canada are heading into the final hours of a high-stakes trade negotiation that could determine whether a new 50% U.S. tariff on roughly $20 billion of Canadian goods takes effect just after midnight.

Canadian Trade Minister Dominic LeBlanc said the two sides were “very close” after lengthy negotiations in Washington, but no final agreement had been announced as of Friday morning.

Negotiators are meeting again Friday as they try to resolve the remaining issues before the 12:01 a.m. ET Saturday deadline.

The agreement under discussion could materially reduce tariffs in two of the most important cross-border industries.

U.S. tariffs on Canadian-built vehicles could fall to 15% from 25%, while tariffs on Canadian steel and aluminum could be cut to 25% from 50%.

Those percentages matter because the U.S. and Canadian manufacturing systems are deeply intertwined. A vehicle assembled in Canada can contain engines, electronics, steel and other components produced on both sides of the border. Some parts cross the border multiple times before a finished vehicle reaches a dealership.

A 25% or 50% tariff therefore does not simply hit a foreign exporter. It can raise costs for American automakers, manufacturers, builders and consumers that depend on Canadian materials and components.

There are still unresolved details, including how Canadian content will be calculated and how exemptions for auto parts would work.

The negotiations have moved rapidly. Earlier this week, President Donald Trump temporarily delayed the new tariffs for three days while the two governments continued negotiating. Canada has said important work remains even as both sides report significant progress.

For businesses operating across the northern border, Friday is therefore more than another trade-policy deadline. A deal could lower costs almost immediately in autos and metals. Failure could force companies to reconsider sourcing, pricing and production decisions beginning Saturday morning.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street opened higher Friday morning, but the rebound is beginning under the same pressure that dominated the entire week: investors are still watching the Treasury market almost as closely as stocks.

At the 9:30 a.m. ET opening bell on Friday, August 21, the Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 9.7 points to 52,768.87, the S&P 500 gained 24.5 points to 7,665.68, and the Nasdaq Composite climbed 131.7 points to 26,198.84. The early recovery follows Thursday’s sharp selloff, although all three major indexes remain on course for weekly losses. 

The encouraging part for stocks is that the bond market is no longer moving violently. The 10-year Treasury yield was around 4.70% Friday morning and the 30-year yield near 5.25%. Those levels are still high enough to pressure mortgages, corporate borrowing and expensive technology valuations, but the relative stability is giving equities room to recover. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent’s decision this week to at least double planned purchases of certain longer-term government bonds briefly pushed yields lower, although much of that relief has since disappeared. 

Then, 15 minutes after the market opened, investors received a surprisingly strong reading on the American economy.

S&P Global’s August services PMI jumped to 56.8 from 54.6, its strongest level since December 2024 and well above economists’ expectation of 54.0. The broader composite index climbed to 56.0, its highest since April 2022, while the manufacturing PMI slowed to 53.2 from 53.9, a five-month low. Any number above 50 indicates expansion. 

The important takeaway is the split beneath those numbers. American factories are still expanding, but growth is slowing as the Iran war disrupts supply chains and higher energy prices interfere with production. Services, meanwhile, are accelerating rapidly. New service-sector business grew at the fastest pace since December 2024, and hiring increased at the strongest rate in 19 months. S&P Global said the surveys are consistent with U.S. economic growth approaching a 3% annualized rate in the third quarter, roughly double the 1.5% pace recorded in the second quarter. 

That is good news for businesses and employment, but not automatically good news for interest rates. A stronger economy gives the Federal Reserve less reason to lower borrowing costs and more room to raise rates if inflation remains stubborn. Minutes released Wednesday showed several Fed officials were already prepared to raise rates in July, while others indicated a hike may become necessary if inflation does not continue moving toward 2%. 

Retail is producing one of Friday’s clearest winners. Ross Stores rallied more than 5% in early trading after beating Wall Street expectations and sharply raising its annual profit forecast. The discount retailer now expects earnings of $8.61 to $8.77 a share, up from its previous forecast of $7.50 to $7.74. Second-quarter revenue rose about 13% to $6.26 billion, and management expects comparable sales to rise 6% to 7% this quarter. 

That result is particularly interesting one day after Walmart plunged more than 9% following its slowest comparable-sales growth in six years. Consumers do not appear to have stopped spending altogether. Instead, this week’s retail results increasingly suggest they are becoming more aggressive about finding value — a trend benefiting discount and warehouse retailers while putting pressure on companies that cannot clearly demonstrate lower prices. 

Crypto stocks are another major pocket of strength. Bitcoin was trading near $77,000 Friday morning, up more than 20% for the week, after President Trump urged Congress to advance legislation establishing clearer federal rules for digital assets. The rally is also being fueled by concerns about the dollar and government debt following Treasury’s bond-market intervention. Coinbase and Robinhood were both sharply higher in early trading, while Strategy and several bitcoin miners also extended their gains. 

SpaceX is also being watched closely after approximately 319 million previously restricted shares became eligible for trading Thursday. The stock was up less than 1% early Friday, suggesting the second major unlock has so far been absorbed without the type of heavy selling some investors feared. 

Oil remains the largest outside threat to Friday’s rebound. Brent crude was trading around $94 a barrel, roughly $20 above its level before the Iran war, as Washington threatens what Bessent described as the toughest economic sanctions yet against Tehran. The continued disruption around the Strait of Hormuz has pushed oil more than 5% higher this week and is feeding directly into concerns about inflation, transportation costs and consumer spending. 

There is also a trade deadline hanging over the market. U.S. and Canadian negotiators are meeting for a third consecutive day Friday as they try to finish an agreement before new 50% U.S. tariffs on roughly $20 billion of Canadian goods are scheduled to take effect at 12:01 a.m. Saturday. Canadian officials say the two sides are close, but unresolved issues remain. Any breakthrough — or breakdown — could move industrial, transportation, construction and consumer stocks before Friday’s close. 

For the rest of the trading day, the most important number may not be the Dow. It is 4.70%.

If the 10-year Treasury yield can remain around that level or move lower despite the stronger PMI report, Friday’s rebound has room to broaden. If yields begin climbing again toward the week’s highs, technology and AI shares could quickly come back under pressure.

Oil is the second number to watch. A renewed move toward $95 Brent would reinforce inflation fears. And after this morning’s surprisingly strong services report, investors have even less margin for another inflationary shock.

Friday may therefore determine whether this week ends as a temporary bond-market scare — or the beginning of a more serious reassessment of what higher borrowing costs mean for stocks, consumers and the AI investment boom.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The longtime publisher of Stars and Stripes has announced his retirement, ending a decades-long career with the military newspaper as Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth’s Pentagon moves to exert editorial control and eliminate what it asserts are “woke distractions.”

Max D. Lederer Jr. announced his retirement, effective at the end of September, in a memo to staff on Tuesday, as well as in an interview with Stars and Stripes. In the memo, seen by The Associated Press, Lederer, the second full-time civilian in the position, wrote that it had “become clear that my philosophy of leadership, and my understanding of the value and mission of Stars and Stripes, differ in fundamental ways from the direction the leadership of the Department of Defense has for the organization.”

The announcement comes less than four months after the Pentagon fired Jacqueline Smith, ombudsman for the newspaper, whose job was to safeguard editorial independence. The news outlet is partly funded by the Defense Department, but has a legacy of independence from military and government leadership. “No one should be surprised that they’re kicking out the one person charged by Congress with protecting Stars and Stripes’ editorial independence,” Smith wrote in a column.

Stars and Stripes has recently been at the forefront of some of the reporting on conditions for sailors on the USS Abraham Lincoln and concerns for their mental health during the aircraft carrier’s long deployment — concerns that President Donald Trump has downplayed.

It’s part of larger, government-driven changes to the military publication

The Pentagon did not immediately respond to a request for comment on Lederer’s retirement, which comes seven months after the department announced in a social media post that it would essentially overhaul the newspaper to align with its current messaging.

Hegseth’s spokesman, Sean Parnell, wrote on on X in January that the Pentagon “is returning Stars and Stripes to its original mission: reporting for our warfighters.” He said the department will “refocus its content away from woke distractions.”

“Stars and Stripes will be custom tailored to our warfighters,” Parnell wrote. “It will focus on warfighting, weapons systems, fitness, lethality, survivability and ALL THINGS MILITARY. No more repurposed DC gossip columns; no more Associated Press reprints.”

More broadly, the developments at Stars and Stripes come against a backdrop of increased efforts by Hegseth to control media coverage of the department.

Last year, officials attempted to impose restrictions on journalists working inside the Pentagon, which, in turn, led most news outlets to turn in their access badges and walk out.

Then this summer, the Pentagon took another step and declared its press office a classified space — instituting a policy that journalists must be accompanied by an escort on Pentagon grounds. That policy is being challenged in court. In mid-July, a panel on the U.S. Court of Appeals for the D.C. Circuit said the policy could stand, overturning a lower court decision.

In her April column titled “The Pentagon is trying to silence me,” Smith, the former ombudsman, expressed concern over increasing restrictions on the media.

“For nearly a year, Pentagon leadership has placed more and more restrictions on the mainstream media,” she wrote. “The New York Times sued and when the Defense/War Department lost in court, instead of following the judge’s ruling Secretary Hegseth and company pivoted, finding another way to restrict journalists.”

Of Stars and Stripes, Smith wrote: “This newspaper has a long history of commitment to the military community and to journalistic values. Please don’t let it be controlled by Pentagon brass.”

The departing publisher objected to certain changes

Lederer was not made available for an interview with the AP. In the interview with Stars and Stripes, he said he did not feel the modernization efforts the Pentagon announced in March were appropriate, in particular a transitioning of print products to digital — a move he feared would limit accessibility for troops.

“I don’t feel that there’s a full recognition of the value of multiple platforms versus only a digital platform,” Lederer was quoted as saying.

In another development, Stars and Stripes said it could not confirm an account that, in recent weeks, a new deputy had been installed by the Pentagon under Lederer without the publisher’s prior knowledge.

In a letter seen by the AP, Rufus Friday, the chair of Stars and Stripes’ advisory board of publishers, wrote to congressional leaders about the arrival of the new deputy, a development he said “threatens Stripes’s editorial independence.”

Roughly half of Stars and Stripes’ budget comes from the Pentagon, and its staff members are considered Defense Department employees.

The outlet’s mission statement emphasizes that it is “editorially independent of interference from outside its own editorial chain-of-command” and that it is unique among news organizations tied to the Defense Department in being “governed by the principles of the First Amendment.”

The newspaper has been reporting about the military steadily since World War II, to an audience mainly of service members stationed overseas.

Lederer told Stars and Stripes that while his retirement is effective Sept. 30, he does not know whether the Pentagon will keep him as publisher until then or name an acting publisher.

___

Jocelyn Noveck writes about the intersection of media and entertainment for the AP.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Canadian consumers continued spending in June, but the country’s longest retail-sales growth streak in years may have ended one month later.

Retail sales increased 0.6% in June to a seasonally adjusted C$74.28 billion, according to Statistics Canada. That exceeded economists’ expectations for a 0.4% gain and marked the sixth consecutive monthly increase.

The growth was also broader than in some earlier months. Sales advanced in seven of the nine retail categories tracked by the agency, led by general merchandise stores and clothing, clothing accessories, shoes, jewelry, luggage and leather-goods retailers.

Spending excluding gasoline stations and motor-vehicle dealers—the measure that more closely reflects everyday purchases—rose for a third consecutive month. That suggests June’s strength was not simply the result of consumers paying more for fuel or purchasing expensive vehicles.

The warning came in Statistics Canada’s preliminary estimate for July, which indicated that total retail sales fell approximately 0.8%. If confirmed, it would be the first monthly decline since late 2025 and would end the six-month expansion.

The timing matters because household spending has been one of the Canadian economy’s strongest supports. A recovering housing market and improving labor conditions helped consumers continue purchasing goods despite U.S. trade tensions, higher energy costs and slower wage growth.

Some economists believe households may have maintained that spending by saving less or taking on additional debt. That becomes harder to sustain if wage growth remains weak while essential expenses absorb a greater share of household income.

The June increase points to solid consumer activity during the second quarter and supports estimates that Canada’s economy expanded at its fastest pace in roughly three years. The preliminary July decline, however, suggests that momentum may not carry fully into the third quarter.

For retailers, the question is whether July was a temporary pause after six unusually strong months or the beginning of a broader consumer pullback. Statistics Canada will revise the preliminary estimate when it publishes the complete July report.

JBizNews Desk | Ottawa

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

At 8 a.m. Eastern Time today, oil was priced at $95.29 per barrel with Brent serving as the benchmark (we’ll explain different benchmarks later in this article). That’s a loss of 11 cents compared with yesterday morning and more than $27 higher than the price one year ago.

Oil price per barrel % Change
Price of oil yesterday $95.40 -0.11%
Price of oil 1 month ago $89.12 +6.92%
Price of oil 1 year ago $67.80 +40.54%

Will oil prices go up?

It’s impossible to forecast oil prices with detailed precision. Many different elements affect the market, but ultimately it boils down to supply and demand. When worries about economic recession, war, and other large-scale disruptions increase, oil’s path can shift fast.

How oil prices translate to gas pump prices

Gas prices at the pump don’t only track crude oil. They also include what it takes to refine and move that fuel, the taxes layered on top, and the extra markup your local station adds to stay in business.

Since crude oil generally makes up a majority of the per-gallon cost, changes in its price have an outsized impact. When oil surges, gas prices typically rise in tandem. But when oil retreats, gas prices often lag on the way down, a trend sometimes described as “rockets and feathers.”

The role of the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve

In case of emergency, the U.S. has a store of crude oil known as the Strategic Petroleum Reserve. Its primary purpose is energy security in case of disaster (think sanctions, severe storm damage, even war). But it can also go a long way toward softening crippling price hikes during supply shocks.

It’s not a long-term answer and is more meant to provide temporary relief, assisting consumers and keeping critical parts of the economy running, like key industries, emergency services, public transportation, etc.

How oil and natural gas prices are linked

Both oil and natural gas are key sources of the energy we use every day. Because of this, a big change in oil prices can affect natural gas. For example, if oil prices increase, some industries may swap natural gas for some segments of their operations where possible, which increases demand for natural gas.

Historical performance of oil

To gauge oil’s performance, we often turn to two benchmarks:

  • Brent crude oil, the main global oil benchmark.
  • West Texas Intermediate (WTI), the main benchmark of North America

Between these two, Brent better represents global oil performance because it prices much of the world’s traded crude. And, it’s often the best way to track historical oil performance. In fact, even the U.S. Energy Information Administration now uses Brent as its primary reference in its Annual Energy Outlook.

Looking at the Brent benchmark across several decades, oil has been anything but steady. It’s seen spikes due to factors such as wars and supply cuts, and it’s also seen crashes from global recessions and an oversupply (called a “glut”). For example:

  • The early 1970s brought the first big oil shock when the Middle East cut exports and imposed an embargo on the U.S. and others during the Yom Kippur War.
  • Prices dropped in the mid-1980s for reasons such as lower demand and more non-OPEC oil producers entering the industry.
  • Prices spiked again in 2008 with increased global demand, but it soon plummeted alongside the global financial crisis.
  • During the 2020 COVID lockdown, oil demand collapsed like never before—bringing prices below $20 per barrel.

All to say, oil’s historical performance has been anything but smooth. Again, it’s hugely affected by wars, recessions, OPEC whims, evolving energy initiatives and policies, and much more.

Energy coverage from Fortune

Looking to stay up-to-date regarding the latest energy developments? Check out our recent coverage:

Frequently asked questions

How is the current price of oil per barrel actually determined?

The current price of oil per barrel depends largely on supply and demand, including news about potential future supply and demand (geopolitics, decisions made by OPEC+, etc.). In the U.S., prices also move based on how friendly an administration is to drilling, as it can affect future supply. For example, 2025 saw the Trump administration move to reopen more than 1.5 million acres in the Coastal Plain of the Arctic National Wildlife Refuge for oil and gas leasing, reversing the Biden administration’s policy of limiting oil drilling in the Arctic.

How often does the price of oil change during the day?

The price of oil updates constantly when the “futures” markets are open. A futures market is effectively an auction where people agree to buy or sell oil in the future. As long as people and companies are trading contracts, the oil price is changing.

How does U.S. shale oil production affect the current price of oil?

In short, shale is rock that contains oil and natural gas. Think of shale as energy yet to be tapped. The more shale the U.S. accesses, the more energy we’ll have—and the more easily oil prices can keep from spiking as much thanks to a greater supply.

How does the current price of oil impact inflation and the broader economy?

When oil is expensive, it tends to make everyday items cost more. This can be related to energy (your heating, gas utilities, etc.), but it’s also due to the logistics involved with making those items accessible to you. Shipping, for example, can affect the price of things at the grocery store, as it’s more expensive to get those products from warehouses and farms onto the shelf.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Target reported a second straight quarter of comparable sales gains on Wednesday, saying that a merchandising overhaul under the retailer’s new CEO attracted more customers and boosted sales both in stores and online.

The mass-market discount retailer also benefited from a tariff refund of $994 million after the U.S. Supreme Court ruled this year that President Donald Trump overstepped his authority when he imposed double-digit import taxes on goods from most other countries.

There is a lot of interest in how tariff refunds from the U.S. government will impact retailers and whether those refunds will be used to lower prices for customers.

Chief Financial Officer Jim Lee, when asked about tariff refunds this week, said the company continues to invest in lowering prices. Target reduced the prices of more than 10,000 items over the past year and “there’s more to come even as we’re facing headwinds overall,” Lee said.

Comparable sales, those coming from stores and digital channels operating for at least 12 months, rose 3.8% in the second quarter. The company also upgraded its annual profit and sales outlook, citing the solid performance during the first half of the year.

Target is emerging from more than a year of weak comparable sales. It started off 2025 with a 3.8% decline, but recorded a 5.6% jump in the first quarter of this year. The second-quarter gain offset a 1.9% drop during the same three months last year.

Target CEO Michael Fiddelke, a 20-year company veteran who became chief executive in February, said the latest quarter was “an important step forward in the plan we laid out earlier this year to open a new chapter of growth for Target.”

Target also reported an increase in the number of customers going to its stores and shopping on its website from May through July.

“We’re encouraged by the progress made so far, and we’re also clear-eyed about the important work still ahead,” Fiddelke said.

In March, Fiddelke unveiled a $6 billion plan to reverse Target’s sales slump and to reclaim the retailer’s reputation as a place to go for affordable yet stylish apparel and home goods.

More than half of Target’s back-to-school merchandise is new, the company said.

That includes a limited-time collection of teen and tween clothes, school supplies and accessories in pastel colors and floral prints from the women’s lifestyle brand LoveShack Fancy. Target also collaborated with Hollister on a dorm decor collection.

Target recruited fashion designer and TV personality Isaac Mizrahi this summer to fill the newly created role of creative director at large. Mizrahi has been brought in to mentor Target designers, advise on product design and innovation, and forge new partnerships.

It is Mizrahi’s second partnership with Target. He became the first major fashion designer to collaborate with the retailer in 2003 for a successful run.

Fiddelke is also remodeling Target stores and improving staffing. The company has more than 100 full-scale remodels underway, with a goal of reaching 130 this year, Fiddelke said Tuesday.

During the second quarter, comparable store sales — sales from established physical stores — increased 2.7%, while increased same-day deliveries pushed digital comparable sales up 8.7%.

Target is one of the first big retailers to report second-quarter financial results, which could give industry analysts and economists another read on whether ongoing price pressures from the conflict in Iran impacted consumer behavior.

The Commerce Department released a report Friday showing weak retail sales in July. The University of Michigan’s consumer sentiment index, also released Friday, showed greater pessimism about the economy this month, likely driven by stubbornly high prices.

Target’s overall sales increased in all six of its main merchandising categories, led by double-digit growth in what the company calls Fun 101 — a division that includes consumer electronics, toys, trading cards, sports paraphernalia, books and gaming items.

Target’s beauty and food and beverage sales were also standouts. Target plans to roll out a new Target Beauty Studio concept next month in more than 600 locations. The new area, which will offer upscale beauty products and enhanced product expertise from staff, will partly replace its in-store shops with Ulta, which ended its partnership with Target this month, the company said.

Target executives said the company still was working to improve the assortment in its clothing and home goods departments, where sales hardly grew during the latest quarter.

Net income was $1.87 billion, or $4.11 per share, for the three months ended Aug. 1, easily beating the $2.34 per share that Wall Street had expected, according to a survey by FactSet. It also outpaced last year’s $935 million, or $2.05 per share. Yet this year also included millions from tariff refunds, which amounted to $1.65 in earnings per share, Target said.

Net sales rose 5.3% to $26.54 billion for the period.

Target now expects sales to increase 5%, up from its earlier predictions for a 4% gain. It also expects earnings per share for the full year to be in the range of $9.90 to $10.90. Analysts expect $8.52 per share for the year, according to FactSet.

In May, Target reiterated its guidance from March for earnings per share to be near the high end of $7.50 to $8.50.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

An Israeli AI-based start-up has been acquired by British technology holding company Circeus less than two years after its launch, in a deal estimated at several million dollars.

The start-up, Dondy, creates AI agents which manage customer interactions for businesses, including sales, marketing, and customer service.

The company claims that its agents can resolve approximately 70% of customer interactions without the involvement of another human.

 An illustrative image of artificial intelligence.  (credit: SHUTTERSTOCK)

It currently serves over 70,000 businesses in 140 countries, and handles over one million customer interactions each year, despite never having received any venture capital funding.

Israeli friends, founders of Dondy, to remain in leadership positions

Dondy was founded by three Israeli childhood friends, Or Shreiber, Tamir Or, and Inbal Katz, who will remain in leadership positions after the acquisition.

The acquisition also marks Circeus’ first venture into Israel. Circeus serves over 250,000 businesses, and has completed 18 acquisitions over the last four years.

This post was originally published on here

The Trump administration will temporarily allow as much as 300,000 metric tons of ground beef into the United States without triggering higher tariffs, an emergency move intended to bring relief to shoppers facing record beef prices.

President Donald Trump said the imported beef would enter over the next 90 days and be sold at prices 25% below prevailing market levels. The White House has not yet identified the supplying countries, participating retailers or how the promised discount will be enforced.

The additional supply would equal roughly 660 million pounds of beef. That sounds substantial, but it represents only about 2% of the approximately 29 billion pounds Americans are expected to consume this year. The plan may therefore place some downward pressure on ground-beef prices without producing an immediate, across-the-board reduction at supermarket meat counters.

Ground beef is the administration’s focus because the United States relies on imported lean trimmings, which processors blend with fattier domestic beef to produce hamburger. Expanding that supply can reach grocery stores and restaurant chains faster than rebuilding the nation’s cattle population.

America’s cattle herd is now the smallest since the 1950s after years of drought, high feed costs and ranchers reducing their herds. Reversing that decline will take years because ranchers must retain breeding cows instead of sending them to market, temporarily tightening the supply even further.

The import plan consequently creates a difficult balance. Consumers and restaurants want immediate price relief, while American ranchers fear that a sudden influx of lower-cost foreign beef could weaken cattle prices just as they begin investing in rebuilding their herds.

Trump previously expanded the low-tariff quota for Argentine lean-beef trimmings by 80,000 metric tons in February. The new announcement is considerably broader, although critical details remain unresolved.

For shoppers, any savings are most likely to appear first in hamburger, frozen patties and other ground-beef products. Steaks and premium cuts are less likely to fall sharply because the policy is aimed primarily at the lean trimmings used in ground beef.

The administration is also pursuing longer-term measures, including support for smaller meatpacking operations and antitrust scrutiny of the country’s largest processors. Those efforts address the structure of the beef market, but the temporary import window is designed to do something far more immediate: place additional meat into the supply chain before high prices push more families and restaurants toward cheaper proteins.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Walmart experienced the slowest growth in U.S. comparable sales in six years during its most recent quarter and it offered a cautious outlook for the year, sending company shares down 6% before the opening bell Thursday.

Comparable sales in U.S. stores, which measure sales at stores open at least a year along with online sales tied to those locations, rose 2.6% in the second quarter. They rose 4.1% in the previous quarter.

Excluding the wellness category that includes Walmart’s pharmacies, comparable sales increased 3.4% in the second quarter. Those sales were hit by federal legislation that requires pharmacies to dispense some high-cost Medicare drugs at capped prices, the retailer said. That was still below analysts’ projections of a 3.8% increase, according to FactSet.

Walmart’s U.S. e-commerce business, which has become an engine of growth for the retailer, rose 24%, trailing the first-quarter pace of 26%.

Walmart is among the first batch of major retailers to report second-quarter results, which could offer industry analysts and economists another read on whether ongoing price pressures from the conflict in Iran have impacted consumer behavior.

Walmart is considered a barometer of consumer spending given its vast customer base. More than 150 million customers are on its website or in its stores every week, according to Walmart.

That may draw even more attention this quarter after U.S. data released Friday showed that retail sales were surprisingly weak in July and a new read on consumers from the University of Michigan revealed growing pessimism about the economy, with so many Americans struggling with higher costs for gas, groceries and just about everything else.

The new figures from Walmart revealed the smallest gain in comparable store sales since a 1.9% gain for the quarter ended Jan. 31, 2020, according to FactSet.

That has broadened Walmart’s customer base and the retailer has begun capturing a larger share of wealthier Americans. The biggest gains in market share for Walmart are coming from households with annual incomes over $100,000.

Walmart’s quarterly net income was $6.37 billion, or 80 cents per share, in the three-month period ended July 31. Adjusted per-share results were 81 cents, easily topping the 74 cents Wall Street had expected, according to FactSet.

Sales rose 5.9% to $187.94 billion. Analysts were predicting $186.62 billion, according to FactSet.

For the third quarter, Walmart expects earnings per share of 62 cents to 64 cents. It projects sales to be up 3% to 3.5%. That would put sales in a range of $184.88 billion to $186.23 billion. The forecasts are below analysts’ expectations of 68 cents per share and sales of $188.19 billion, according to FactSet.

For the full year, Walmart now expects earnings per share to be in the range of $2.80 to $2.87 while sales should be up anywhere from 4% to 5%. That would mean a forecast for sales in the range of $741.7 billion to $748.8 billion, according to FactSet.

Analysts expected $2.90 per share and sales of $752.06 billion for the year, according to FactSet.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Two things are happening in the grocery aisle at the same time, and they pull in opposite directions. Eggs have gotten much cheaper because the hens are back. Beef keeps getting more expensive because the cattle are not.

The average price of a dozen eggs is down 31% since President Trump took office last year, according to grocery-price data updated Wednesday by NBC News. Over the same stretch, ground beef is up 18% and orange juice is up 20%. The figures come from NIQ, a research firm that collects real checkout prices paid at grocery stores, drugstores, mass merchandisers, dollar stores, warehouse clubs and military commissaries.

The egg story is supply. Bird flu tore through American flocks in late 2024 and early 2025, farms culled birds by the millions, and the price of a dozen eggs shot past $6 last spring. Flocks have since been rebuilt, and production recovered. The Agriculture Department projects retail egg prices will fall 27.4% across 2026 as flock sizes and output continue to bounce back. Wholesale prices averaged about 67 cents a dozen in the second quarter, down nearly 28% from a year earlier — though they started creeping up again in early July.

Beef works on a much slower clock. A hen goes from chick to laying in about five months. A calf takes roughly two years to reach the meat case. The national cattle herd is in a cyclical contraction, which has kept supplies tight and pushed farm-level cattle prices 7.5% above last year, with the Agriculture Department forecasting an 11.6% rise for 2026. Wholesale beef prices were 12.7% higher in June than a year earlier. Drought across grazing country made it worse, and ranchers who sell off breeding stock to cut costs make the shortage last longer.

Put the two side by side and the arithmetic is stark. Ground beef averaged about $6.83 a pound in June; eggs averaged about $2.14 a dozen. A single pound of ground beef now costs more than three dozen eggs.

For a family running a weekly cart, the practical move is substitution. Ground pork and ground chicken carry most beef recipes at a lower price. Stretching a pound of beef with beans, rice, pasta or vegetables cuts the per-serving cost roughly in half. Eggs, cheap again, do real work as a dinner protein rather than only a breakfast one.

Overall, food inflation is running cooler than the beef number suggests. Grocery prices edged down 0.1% in July, and food overall is up 3% over the past year. But prices have climbed for most of the past six years, with the war in Iran, supply chain bottlenecks and the war in Ukraine all pressing on shoppers’ bills.

The fix for beef is not a policy lever. It is time. Herds rebuild over years, not months, and until they do, the meat counter stays where it is.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump said earlier this week that any governor or local government official should want to welcome the construction of AI data centers.

“The construction jobs are enormous. We’re building the biggest plants anywhere in the world. And I can say, if I were the mayor of a town or the governor of a state, and I had a chance to get a big plant in an AI plant or a data center, I would absolutely want it because the jobs are enormous, and the money paid, the taxes paid are just enormous,” Trump said at the White House on Wednesday. 

“And if you don’t take it, you’re going to be left behind because there are plenty of places that want it,” he added during a meeting with technology and cryptocurrency industry leaders in the Roosevelt Room. “But if I were a governor or mayor, I would want that plant in my community. And many of them are designed in a very beautiful way. It’s really very positive.”

This post was originally published here

Further escalating its battle with the Trump administration, ABC on Tuesday took the rare step of suing the Federal Communications Commission on First Amendment grounds, saying the agency’s demand for early review of its broadcast licenses posed an “existential threat” to the network.

In the lawsuit, ABC, its parent company Disney and the eight ABC-owned stations whose licenses are affected asked a federal court to stop the early renewal proceedings.

The FCC under Chairman Brendan Carr, an ally of President Donald Trump, had ordered the early review in April — itself a rare move — of all eight licenses owned by ABC, years before they are set to expire. Licenses are issued for eight-year periods. The FCC cited the network’s diversity and inclusion practices as a reason, but the development came shortly after a joke by ABC’s late-night host Jimmy Kimmel — an outspoken Trump critic — had infuriated the president, who has called for Kimmel’s firing.

“Again and again, the Administration has attacked ABC’s speech — the stories its journalists report and the viewpoints its network programs air,” the network alleged in its lawsuit Tuesday. “Over time, those attacks have escalated into express demands that ABC be stripped of its broadcast licenses because of its speech.”

“Facing this existential threat,” it added, “Plaintiffs have no choice but to seek redress from the judicial branch for the Administration’s blatant retaliation for their First Amendment speech.”

It said ABC had “no alternative means to eliminate these ongoing and immediate threats other than total capitulation to the Administration’s demands.” It asked the court to “immediately enjoin Defendants from taking or threatening to take any action against Plaintiffs in relation to the early license renewal applications.”

There are already clashes between ABC and the administration

The early license review is only one part of a long-simmering confrontation between ABC and the FCC.

The network has also been fighting Carr’s efforts to make the morning talk show “The View,” whose hosts and guests are often critical of Trump, subject to equal-time rules. That’s a question ABC says the agency itself decided — in the network’s favor — more than two decades ago. ABC argues “The View” is a bona fide news program, meaning it’s exempt from equal time rules, which require granting equal airtime to competing candidates for office.

The ABC lawsuit Tuesday also spoke of broad ramifications that go well beyond one network.

“The consequences of the Administration’s campaign against free speech reach well beyond ABC,” it said. “If the Administration gets its way, the message to every media company in the country will be unmistakable: tell only the stories the Administration deems favorable, or face the coercive machinery of the federal government. In such a world, the press could in no way be described as free.”

It added: “The FCC Chairman has left little doubt that this is his goal.”

The lawsuit also quoted Carr as saying, when Kimmel made comments that angered the administration, “We can do this the easy way or the hard way. These companies can find ways . . . to take action . . . on Kimmel, or there is going to be additional work for the FCC ahead.”

Carr, a longtime FCC commissioner, was named chairman by Trump in November 2025. He has indeed made it clear that he is considering revoking ABC’s licenses, or trying to, in what would surely be a drawn-out legal process.

Longtime free-speech attorney Floyd Abrams noted that tensions between the press and the commission are not new — but have never been this pronounced.

“There has long been a level of tension between the broadcast media, which seeks full First Amendment protection, and the FCC,” Abrams wrote in an email to The Associated Press. “But not until the Trump Administration has the government so directly, so deliberately and so dangerously sought to limit the freedom of the broadcast press to cover and discuss the news.”

The lone Democrat on the FCC praises the lawsuit

The sole Democrat on the commission, Anna Gomez, commended ABC and Disney for pushing back against the FCC’s actions.

“For months, the FCC has waged a campaign of censorship and control against Disney’s ABC stations,” she said in a statement, “using the threat of broadcast license revocations to punish a company for speech this administration doesn’t like.”

“I have long called on companies to push back against this kind of government intimidation, and I’m glad Disney has shown courage and stepped up,” she said. “This should be a welcome sign for every broadcaster who has felt the weight of this overreaching government pressure in silence.”

In late July, Carr defended his agency’s actions against ABC, saying broadcasters have a duty to “operate in the public interest.” The FCC, he said, was merely trying to restore that standard. Besides investigating ABC, Carr has also opened separate investigations into CBS News and NBC News.

Broadcasters like ABC, Carr said in an interview on the Fox Business Network, “struck a deal with the American people. You broadcasters get subsidized access, free access to a valuable public resource, the airwaves, worth billions of dollars. In exchange, you have to operate in the public interest.”

“Look, as a country, we should have a trusted, respected news media, and we’re not there,” Carr said. “So I hope more broadcasters return to their public interest obligations.”

On Tuesday, an FCC spokesperson reiterated that position.

“All broadcasters have a legal obligation to operate in the public interest — even Disney,” said a statement from the commission, responding to the lawsuit.

“The FCC has been examining claims that Disney engaged in illegal DEI discrimination for over a year. Disney is obviously very concerned about the FCC’s proceeding, as evidenced by their ongoing campaign of disinformation as well as their decision to ask a court to stop the FCC from further pursuing matters. The FCC will continue to follow the facts and law wherever they lead.”

___

Associated Press journalist Mike Catalini contributed to this report.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

When the U.S. government has to pay more to borrow money, everyone else does too. That is what happened this week. The yield on the 30-year Treasury bond reached 5.323% on Tuesday, a 19-year high, before slipping back to just under 5.3%, and lenders promptly repriced the loans ordinary Americans take out. The average 30-year fixed mortgage rate stood at 6.75% on Tuesday, up from 6.69% at the end of last week, according to Mortgage News Daily.

The mechanism is simple. Investors who lend to Washington for 30 years are demanding more compensation because they expect inflation to stay high and the government to keep borrowing heavily. The national debt is approaching $40 trillion, more than $11 trillion higher than in fiscal 2019. Banks price home loans off those same government yields, so when the government’s cost of money goes up, so does the rate on a mortgage.

The 10-year Treasury yield, the benchmark that fixed mortgages actually follow most closely, is now above 4.7%, compared with below 4% before the Iran war began at the end of February. It eased back toward 4.7% Wednesday as investors waited on the minutes of the Federal Reserve’s July meeting.

For a buyer, the arithmetic is unforgiving. On a $400,000 loan, the move from 6.69% to 6.75% adds roughly $16 to the monthly payment — small on its own. The bigger number is what the full term costs at today’s rate: about $2,594 a month, and roughly $534,000 in interest over 30 years. The buyer pays back more than twice what was borrowed.

It is not only housing. Buyers financing a new vehicle are facing rates near 7%, while used-car borrowers are contending with roughly 10.6%. Variable-rate credit cards, which move with the prime rate, are under the same pressure.

Inflation is the engine behind all of it. Consumer prices rose 3.4% in the year through July, well above the Federal Reserve’s 2% target, and up from 2.4% in January before the war. Minutes released Wednesday from the Fed’s late-July meeting showed many officials believed policy would likely have to tighten further if inflation does not come down, with some saying financial conditions may not yet be restrictive enough. The Fed has held its rate at 3.5% to 3.75%, with three members dissenting in July in favor of an increase.

So what can a buyer actually do? Lawrence Yun, chief economist at the National Association of Realtors, said borrowers should not count on a meaningful drop. “The impact on mortgage rates is directly related to higher bond yields,” he said, adding that inflation and long-term borrowing costs will keep rates elevated regardless of what the Fed does. His practical suggestion for buyers who expect to move before the fixed period runs out: a seven-year adjustable-rate mortgage, which carries a lower starting rate.

The other options are the familiar ones — a larger down payment to shrink the loan, paying points up front to buy the rate down, or a 15-year term, which carries a lower rate and far less total interest for buyers who can carry the higher monthly payment.

What would actually bring rates down is inflation cooling and the government borrowing less. Neither is in evidence this week.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wheat prices are climbing again as escalating attacks on Russian and Ukrainian Black Sea ports begin choking one of the world’s most important grain-export routes.

Chicago wheat futures have risen more than 17% since early July, as attacks on ports, ships and grain infrastructure delay cargoes during the peak export season. Russia and Ukraine are among the world’s largest wheat suppliers, which means disruption in the Black Sea can quickly reach food markets far beyond the region.

The pressure is already showing up in shipping.

Ukraine has lost roughly one-third of its Black Sea grain-export capacity, while attacks around Russia’s Novorossiysk port have disrupted another major outlet. Importers expecting cargoes this summer are now facing delays, cancellations or the need to buy grain elsewhere.

That replacement wheat is often more expensive.

Black Sea wheat has recently been offered around $260 to $280 a metric ton, while some Australian supplies have been quoted as high as $320. Buyers in Asia, the Middle East and North Africa are among the most exposed because many rely heavily on Russian and Ukrainian grain.

Egypt illustrates the dependence. More than 82% of its wheat imports in the first half of 2026 came from Russia and Ukraine.

For American consumers, the impact is less immediate but still important.

Wheat is not only flour. It sits inside bread, pasta, cereal, crackers, baked goods and animal feed. When the commodity rises sharply, food manufacturers eventually face higher input costs. Whether those costs reach supermarket shelves depends on how long the disruption lasts and how much cheaper grain can be sourced elsewhere.

The United States, Canada, Argentina and Australia can replace some lost Black Sea supply, but rerouting millions of tons of wheat across longer distances increases freight costs and puts additional demand on alternative exporters.

Global inventories provide some protection, so a 17% increase in wheat futures does not translate into a 17% increase in a loaf of bread. Wheat itself is only one part of the retail price; labor, packaging, transportation and store margins often matter more.

But the direction matters.

Consumers are already dealing with elevated energy and transportation costs. If Black Sea grain disruptions persist into the fall, another major commodity could begin pushing in the same inflationary direction.

The Black Sea has therefore become more than a battlefield.

It is again becoming a pressure point for the global grocery bill.

JBizNews Desk | Chicago

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Venezuela’s new petroleum minister sees her South American home not as a dilapidated former oil giant, but as an emerging energy economy ripe for U.S. and foreign investments in new oil and gas exploration, both onshore and offshore.

Paula Henao, who took over as the hydrocarbons minister in March after the forced U.S. removal of former leader Nicolás Maduro, told an overflowing Houston energy audience on Wednesday that Venezuela is much more than just its famed heavy-grade crude oil. There are more than 916 exploration opportunities awaiting foreign investment, she said, including natural gas and other untapped oil basins. She cited an estimated 192 trillion cubic feet of natural gas reserves, as well as the country’s world-leading proven oil reserves of more than 300 billion barrels.

“It’s an entire world waiting to be discovered, just waiting for us to reach these agreements so we can develop these new areas,” Henao said in Spanish to the crowd at the posh Post Oak Hotel in Houston.

Henao and leaders of the Venezuelan state oil company, PDVSA, were in Houston this week for meetings and a showcase event in advance of a bigger Venezuela Energy Week in February in Caracas.

“Go to Venezuela to invest, go to Venezuela to develop businesses there,” said PDVSA Vice President Jovanny Martinez, also speaking in Spanish. “We are at the right place at this historical moment. We have the energy that the world requires.”

After decades of cycling between energy reform and renationalization, including the most recent 2007 appropriation of assets from ExxonMobil, ConocoPhillips, and others, there’s still a lot of hesitancy to invest in Venezuela as it again changes its hydrocarbon laws in the aftermath of Maduro’s ouster. There’s a recognition that this could be the last great chance for the Venezuelan energy sector to thrive.

President Donald Trump has repeatedly insisted U.S. oil companies will spend more than $100 billion in Venezuela to dramatically rebuild its failing infrastructure but, apart from Chevron which never left, large U.S. energy companies are mostly taking a wait-and-see approach, despite Exxon expressing optimism. Others, such as BP and Shell, plan to invest in offshore Venezuelan gas fields near Trinidad and Tobago.

Otherwise, it’s a bevy of smaller, private U.S. oil producers jumping in first. A day prior to the Houston event, Venezuela signed new oil production agreements with the Dallas-based, private producer Hunt Oil and the major oilfield services firm SLB, which already works with PDVSA and Chevron in Venezuela. Hunt CEO Hunter Hunt said in a statement that the company is “proud to be one of the first American companies to sign an agreement with PDVSA to help expand Venezuela’s oil and gas production, and we are looking forward to expanding our presence in the country.”

Crossing continents

One of the next deals signed is expected to be with Denver-based Crossover Energy, which sees more upside in Venezuelan oil—both mature and exploratory oil fields—than in pricier shale oil and gas acreage in the U.S.

“Hopefully we can jump the line by taking a little more risk,” Crossover CEO Eric McCrady told Fortune at the Houston event. “We think that’ll open up more opportunities on the back end with more fields, and growth beyond what we have today.”

Crossover already has acquired a local Venezuelan operator to develop an on-the-ground presence and workforce and expects to sign new productive participation contracts (CPPs) with a “few days or a few weeks,” McCrady said.

The plan is to begin operating Venezuelan wells in January, he said, delayed a few months because of the devastating and fatal earthquakes that rocked the country in June.

“In the oil industry you’re always managing risks,” McCrady said. “I think the risks here are more above-ground—the labor force, equipment availability, the political situation—versus below-ground geologic risk, well failure risk, things like that. We’re comfortable taking risks. I think by being one of the leading companies to get in, it gives us an opportunity to hire the right team and hopefully get moving first so we have access to services and equipment.”

He said more work is needed within the country to build up its power grid, develop infrastructure to transport and process natural gas, and further tweak the laws for regulatory and contract certainty.

Since last year, Venezuela’s oil production has risen from just under 1 million barrels per day to more than 1.2 million barrels daily, an increase of almost 250,000 barrels each day. Largely led by Chevron, that increase primarily relied on optimizing existing oil wells, and not by bringing in new drilling rigs and teams.

Venezuela’s oil industry last churned out more than 3 million barrels daily at the beginning of this century and was still above 2 million barrels a day a decade ago.

Simon Sjøthun, a partner with the Rystad Energy research firm, said the world will need Venezuelan oil over time as existing resources run dry—especially with global oil demand projected to remain stubbornly high for decades—and that Venezuela could again exceed 3 million barrels daily by 2040.

McCrady is more optimistic, he said. He believes Venezuela can grow to 3.5 million barrels a day within five to 10 years, citing how quickly West Texas’ Permian Basin boomed to new heights in the last decade. Modern U.S. drilling techniques could do wonders in Venezuela, he said. “Venezuela has been isolated from the world stage for almost 25 years,” he said.

“With the right legal framework and bringing U.S. investment in, I think 3.5 million [barrels daily] will be reached a lot faster than 15 years. We see tremendous opportunity.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

For decades, outsiders joked about New Jersey being little more than a turnpike connecting New York and Philadelphia.

But with the Garden State recently named the second-best state to live in America — boasting strong schools, relatively low household debt and thriving coastal hubs — the secret is officially out. As national home sales stall, New Jersey’s unique mix of high-paying tech jobs, year-round beach towns and suburban “metroburbs” has transformed it into one of the nation’s leaders in home price growth.

“I think at the end of the day, it comes down to fundamentals, which is, is this a great place to live, a great place to work, a place to raise my family, to live out my life? And New Jersey has so much going for it,” Inspired by Somerset Development CEO and President Ralph Zucker told Fox News Digital.

“You have a little bit of everything, and we’re close to everything. We’re close enough to New York, close enough to Pennsylvania, but we’re no longer a place to connect New York and Philadelphia,” he continued. “New Jersey has very much come into its own, and really it’s always been there, but the secret is out.”

$150K OVER ASKING ISN’T ENOUGH: N.J. REAL ESTATE AGENT WARNS ‘AVERAGE PERSON’ IS BEING PRICED OUT

“I’ve lived in New Jersey all of my life,” longtime Asbury Park resident Karen Nelson also told Fox Digital. “I love everything about New Jersey… It’s just a convenient place to live, and it’s beautiful to live down the shore.”

Data released in July by New Jersey REALTORS showed statewide median home prices ranging between $540,000 and $585,000, reflecting a year-over-year increase of roughly 4.5% to 5.4%. Last week, WalletHub’s 2026 ranking of the best states to live in ranked New Jersey at No. 2, citing its low premature death and obesity rates, among other factors.

Zucker has spent more than 30 years developing residential and commercial spaces in New Jersey, and his firm has more recently leaned into the development of “metroburbs” — suburban spaces that don’t sacrifice urban culture — and changing workplace dynamics.

Bell Works in Holmdel, which Zucker bills as the world’s first “metroburb” and became famous as a filming location for Apple TV’s “Severance,” was 98% leased as of 2025, according to Zucker, who said rental rates have nearly doubled since 2020.

“We coined the term literally to say that you can have a great metropolis in an awesome suburban location. You can have your cake and eat it, too,” he said. “If we could create that metropolis in suburbia… without the commute, without the heartache, without all the stress that comes with getting in and out of, quote unquote, the city or downtown, we would have more subscribers than we could imagine, and that’s exactly what happened.”

“It took time for people to recognize it,” Zucker said. “People understand the ‘metroburb’ model. They understand what it is to be in a great, inspiring place. Our entire methodology is: work inspired. You don’t have to work in a mind-numbing place. You can work and be inspired at the same time. You could live your life at work.”

Beyond changing workplace dynamics, some Jersey Shore communities, including Asbury Park and other parts of Monmouth County, have increasingly attracted year-round residents rather than only seasonal vacationers. Some Monmouth County shore towns have seen year-over-year home-price appreciation between 6% and 10%, according to Zucker, outpacing parts of Florida where prices have declined in some markets.

“A lot of people, especially when they retire, they go to Florida, and I’m not really a Florida type of person, and I know a lot of people do the half-and-half, which I thought about, but I love Asbury all year-round,” Nelson explained. “It’s become more of an all year-round kind of place. So [I’m] happy here.”

“I think it’s actually just going to get better. People want to be here, and a lot of new businesses are evolving, restaurants, and everybody wants to be in Asbury,” she added. “So I think it’s just going to be bigger and better. So I’m actually looking forward to the future of this town. We just went to a brand-new restaurant last night. We have reservations for another new restaurant next week. I think in a couple of years, it’s even going to be better.”

After living in Asbury Park for 17 years, Nelson recently purchased a preconstruction unit at LIDO Asbury Park, a project for which Inspired by Somerset Development secured $211 million in construction financing. A penthouse at the development sold for $7.6 million, setting a record for the most expensive condominium sale in New Jersey.

Nelson also said that buying a preconstruction unit can allow buyers to bypass competitive open-market bidding wars and lock in a purchase price before the home is completed.

“With LIDO, the prices were the prices. So there wasn’t any kind of bidding war in that market because it was new construction. I just recently sold my place. So it didn’t end up in a bidding war, but I got close to ask,” Nelson said. “But a lot of places right now, they’re going way above market. Which is nice. But [at] LIDO, I’m secure in my purchase price now, even though it’s still a year and a half out.”

“I think the big thing to remember is when you are buying new construction, you are securing that price, so you don’t have to worry… You’re still locking into that price,” she continued. “So that’s a big thing because the market right now is going to continue to escalate. Who knows where it’s going to be?”

Amid concerns that new development is pricing some buyers out of parts of Monmouth County, Zucker argues that high property taxes and elevated interest rates remain major financial hurdles for Garden State buyers and that municipal zoning bottlenecks and lengthy government approval timelines suppress housing inventory.

“Restricted government policies raise the pricing… Builders, developers… We aim for public good,” the CEO said. “I will proudly say that the way I make a living is by making great places for great people, but I do it as a business. So the less impediments that government puts in my way while making sure that I do my job correctly with the right professionals will actually increase supply and lower the price to the consumer.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“The best way to protect the public interest and, at the same time, allow proper development to proceed at a better pace is to allow qualified professionals to do their job,” he continued. “Government can protect the public and, at the same time, accelerate and not cause the cost associated with long and arduous application process, inspection processes that do nothing to protect the public, do everything to slow the process down and increase the cost to the consumer.”

“People are going to tell you in real estate, as a developer, focus on the bottom line. And I’m telling you, focus primarily on the end user, on the people. Also, focus on the bottom line — if you do that, you’ll be successful both at creating great places and being profitable. And I think that’s an important distinction.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Australia has passed a sweeping new law that can impose a levy of up to 2.5% of Australian advertising revenue on major technology platforms that fail to strike enough commercial agreements with local news publishers.

The legislation applies to digital platforms generating more than A$250 million, or about $178 million, in Australian advertising revenue, putting companies such as Google, Meta, TikTok and Microsoft’s LinkedIn directly in scope. 

The structure is designed less as a tax than as a pressure mechanism.

Platforms can reduce or eliminate the levy by reaching qualifying deals with Australian news organizations. To avoid the charge entirely, companies generally must reach agreements with at least eight publishers by the end of their financial reporting period. 

That is what makes the law important.

Australia is not simply ordering technology companies to write checks to media organizations. It is creating a financial penalty large enough to make negotiating those deals more attractive than refusing them.

The government says the policy is intended to preserve public-interest journalism at a time when much of the advertising revenue that once supported newspapers and broadcasters has migrated to large digital platforms.

The underlying economics have changed dramatically over the past two decades.

A local newspaper can spend money reporting a story, but much of the audience may ultimately encounter that journalism through search engines, social networks or other digital platforms. Those platforms can then sell advertising around the attention generated by the content without necessarily paying the publisher that produced it.

Australia has been trying to rebalance that relationship for years.

Its earlier News Media Bargaining Code pushed Google and Meta into more than 30 commercial agreements with Australian media companies. But officials concluded that the system had a major weakness: a platform could threaten to remove news rather than negotiate.

The new levy is intended to make that strategy much less attractive.

Even if a company stops displaying news, it could still face the charge because the liability is tied to Australian advertising revenue rather than simply to whether the platform carries news content. 

The law also gives platforms stronger incentives to deal with smaller publishers.

Commercial agreements with large publishers can receive a credit equal to 150% of their value against the levy, while deals with small and medium-sized publishers receive a 200% credit, although individual agreements are subject to caps. 

That detail matters because one criticism of earlier bargaining systems was that the biggest media companies had the negotiating power to capture most of the money.

Australia is now deliberately trying to push more of it toward smaller outlets.

For Google, Meta and other platforms, the immediate decision becomes financial.

They can negotiate with publishers and direct money toward journalism, or potentially surrender as much as 2.5% of their Australian advertising revenue to the government.

For publishers, the law could create a more predictable stream of revenue at a time when traditional advertising and subscription models remain under pressure.

The bigger question is whether other countries copy it.

Governments around the world have struggled with the same problem: how to support the companies paying reporters, editors and photographers when much of the advertising market has migrated to technology platforms.

Australia is now testing one of the most aggressive answers yet.

Instead of asking Big Tech to support journalism, it is putting a price on refusing to do so.

JBizNews Desk | Canberra

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

South Korea estimates North Korea possesses between 80 and 120 nuclear warheads, its defence minister said on Thursday, citing a range significantly higher than US President Donald Trump‘s recent assertion that Pyongyang has 57 nuclear weapons.

Defence Minister Ahn Gyu-back told lawmakers that North Korea was generally believed to have around 80 to 120 warheads, although he cautioned it was difficult to determine an exact figure.

“We usually see it as around 80 to 120, but it is considerably limited to state an exact number,” Ahn told a parliamentary committee.

Later, Ahn clarified that the figure was derived from estimates by private research organisations, adding that South Korea‘s military could not officially confirm the numbers.

Asked about Trump’s comment a day earlier that Kim possessed 57 “very powerful nuclear weapons”, Ahn said, “the numbers appear somewhat different.”

U.S. President Donald Trump meets with North Korean leader Kim Jong Un at the demilitarized zone separating the two Koreas, in Panmunjom, South Korea, June 30, 2019 (credit: KEVIN LAMARQUE/REUTERS)

Trump made the remark at the White House on Wednesday while discussing North Korean leader Kim Jong Un and his plans to meet him later this year.

South Korea has traditionally avoided publicly disclosing detailed estimates of North Korea’s nuclear stockpile and does not officially recognize Pyongyang as a nuclear weapons state under its long-standing policy supporting denuclearisation.

Ahn reiterated that position when asked whether the government acknowledged North Korea as a nuclear-armed state.

“We cannot officially acknowledge that,” he said.

He also declined to comment on whether Trump’s reference to 57 warheads amounted to US recognition of North Korea’s nuclear status, saying it would not be appropriate for South Korea’s defence minister to comment on the US president’s remarks.

Ahn said South Korea would continue to rely on the US nuclear umbrella, in line with Seoul’s longstanding non-nuclear policy.

‘We cannot develop nuclear weapons’ South Korea’s defence minister says 

“We cannot develop nuclear weapons. Nor should we accept the deployment of US tactical nuclear weapons,” Ahn said.

The comments came as Trump seeks to revive engagement with Kim after ordering a scale-back of joint US-South Korean military drills, which he described as “hostile” to North Korea.

North Korea responded coolly to the move. Kim Yo Jong, the influential sister of the North Korean leader, said the reduced exercises remained provocative and aggressive despite their shortened duration.

She dismissed any suggestion that Pyongyang would view the move as a meaningful goodwill gesture and said she was unaware of any recent contacts between Trump and Kim, although she described the personal relationship between the leaders as “excellent.”

Trump said at the White House on Wednesday that he expected to meet Kim later this year, potentially reviving diplomacy that stalled after a series of unprecedented summits in 2018 and 2019 collapsed over disagreements on sanctions relief and North Korea’s nuclear weapons programme.

This post was originally published on here

It’s no secret Meta is one of the wealthiest companies in the world. Last year, it brought in nearly $201 billion in revenue, and at the end of this June, it was sitting on more than $90 billion in cash and marketable securities. 

Now, a federal trial underway in Oakland, Calif., is testing what it would actually take to financially hurt a company that big. California, Colorado, Kentucky, and New Jersey have accused Meta of misleading the public about the risks its platforms pose to young users and of designing features on Instagram and Facebook that keep children and teenagers hooked. The four states are going first in a case brought by a coalition of 29 state attorneys general that sued the company in 2023.

Meta is already fighting child-safety lawsuits across the country, but this case carries an added threat because of who is bringing it. State attorneys general can bring claims that private plaintiffs cannot, including claims under the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act, or COPPA. They can also seek remedies to address alleged harms affecting potentially millions of people.

“The stakes might be higher in this case because the damages awards are going to measure potentially many millions of people’s harms,” Eric Goldman, co-director of Santa Clara University School of Law’s High Tech Law Institute, told Fortune. “And there might be extra remedies because of the specific claims that the attorney general can bring.”

That helps explain the almost incomprehensible number hanging over the trial: $1.4 trillion. 

That’s how high Meta says potential penalties could climb under the states’ theory of the case, putting the theoretical maximum in the neighborhood of the value of the company itself

“It’s a number that boggles the mind, frankly,” Goldman said.

At its most extreme, Goldman said, the potential damages Meta has described could effectively transfer the value held by Meta’s stockholders to the public.

“Essentially, it’s asking Meta to turn in the keys and walk away,” he said.

Actually getting anywhere near that $1.4 trillion is another matter. The eight-person jury hearing the case is advisory, leaving U.S. District Judge Yvonne Gonzalez Rogers with the ultimate decision on liability and remedies.

James Grimmelmann, a professor of digital and information law at Cornell University, told Fortune he does not expect the bellwether trial to end with a penalty that bankrupts Meta.

“It’s always hard to guess with damage awards,” Grimmelmann said. “The jury is purely advisory, so whatever it concludes won’t be binding on the court, and even if it comes in with an extremely high number, the judge could revise it and so could other courts on appeal.”

New Mexico may offer a glimpse of what a major state-level financial hit could look like. A jury there found Meta liable for 75,000 violations of the state’s consumer protection law earlier this year, resulting in $375 million in civil penalties. A judge later found Meta’s platforms constituted a public nuisance and ordered the company to pay another $567 million toward addressing youth mental-health harms, bringing its total financial liability in the case to $942 million. Meta is appealing.

But the Oakland case is about more than how many zeroes Meta could be ordered to put on a check.

What Meta says the states get wrong

“The State AGs may call this a landmark case, but their limited claims are unsubstantiated and their financial demands are vastly disproportionate,” Meta spokesperson Stephanie Otway told Fortune in an emailed statement.

Meta argues the states have not shown anyone in their states was misled or harmed by the features at issue, and that the AGs are attempting to penalize the company for what it calls “industry-wide challenges like age verification,” Otway said.

“Rather than sticking to the facts or the law, the states have instead decided to chase an outlandish payout,” Otway said. “We stand by our record of creating strong protections for teens, and look forward to making our case in court.”

Less than 1% of Meta’s revenue comes from teens on Instagram, but Goldman emphasized the share of Meta’s business directly tied to those users doesn’t answer the central question in the case.

“The relevant question is how much harm is Meta causing in society,” Goldman said.

Goldman said millions of young people still use Meta’s services. If the states convince the court those users were harmed, the potential liability is not necessarily limited by how much revenue Meta directly makes from teens on Instagram.

And money is only one way Meta could lose.

The fight over how social media works

The attorneys general are challenging choices Meta made about how its platforms are designed and how content is presented to users. That distinction is central to how the case got this far.

Section 230 generally protects internet companies from being held liable for content posted by their users. The states argue they aren’t suing Meta over what users post; they are challenging Meta’s own decisions about how that content is presented to users.

Goldman doesn’t think those two things can be separated so cleanly.

“To me, that distinction is illusory. That makes no sense,” Goldman said. “You can’t separate out the editorial function and say we’re going to extinguish the content and the way it’s presented. Those are the same thing in my mind, but Judge Rogers disagreed, and that’s why this case has gotten to trial.”

Goldman also raised a First Amendment concern. He compared Meta’s decisions about how it presents users’ posts to the editorial choices a publication makes about which stories receive more prominence, like how large a headline appears or whether a story includes photographs. In his view, those decisions are themselves expressive choices protected by the First Amendment. Those arguments have not stopped the case from reaching trial.

The result of that fight could matter well beyond whether Meta pays hundreds of millions, billions, or anything approaching $1.4 trillion.

TikTok, YouTube, and Snapchat face similar litigation over alleged harms to young users. Goldman said a victory for the states in Oakland could provide a playbook for challenging how other social media platforms are designed.

And it may not stop at social media. Goldman pointed to lawsuits already testing similar theories against generative AI, video games, and social gaming.

That makes the potentially enormous penalty only one part of what is being decided in Oakland. Meta can challenge a damages award on appeal. A legal theory that survives the case can be picked up and used again.

“That’s why I say that the internet is on trial in Oakland right now, because it’s not just Meta and it’s not just social media,” Goldman said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

CEO Agenda provides unique insights into how leaders think and lead and what keeps them busy in a world of constant change. We look into the lives, minds and agendas of CEOs at the world’s most iconic companies.


Ana Botín doesn’t have “normal” days.

As the decade-long executive chair of Santander, one of Europe’s largest banks by total assets, she’s always flying from one part of the world to another (when she chatted with Fortune, she was back in Madrid from a visit to Mexico, gearing up to head to Doha and New York in subsequent weeks). 

In 2014, when Botín succeeded her father, Emilio, the longtime chairman of Santander credited with making the bank a household name globally, she had big shoes to fill. Today, she’s one of the few women to lead a major bank, counting over 170 million customers. Yet she doesn’t let that burden get in the way of her jubilance. Santander’s blockbuster profits of €12.6 billion last year, up 14% from 2023, followed by plans to return €10 billion to investors through share buybacks over the next two years, may be part of the reason for this.

Santander spent the better part of the 21st century expanding its business and navigating Europe’s regulatory thicket. However, some of its business bets, such as its focus on digital banking, have started to pay off. Santander has recently benefited from a confluence of other factors as well, including higher interest rates following the COVID-19 pandemic, robust retail spending, and a strong performance from its investment banking business in the U.S. 

10

Santander’s rank on the Fortune 500 Europe

The Spanish lender has continued to multiply its customers, eclipsing the same figures at behemoths like JPMorgan Chase and Bank of America (as Botín pointed out to President Donald Trump at a World Economic Forum panel in January). 

From left to right: Banco Santander, Ana Botin, Bank of America, Brian Moynihan, TotalEnergies, Patrick Pouyanne and Blackstone Group, Stephen Schwarzman. President Donald Trump (on screen).
FABRICE COFFRINI/AFP via Getty Images

Santander’s shares have more than tripled in value since the fall of 2020. On Tuesday, Santander’s market cap surpassed €100 billion, making it the first bank in the European Union to cross that threshold in the last decade, ahead of rivals like BNP Paribas and Intesa Sanpaolo.

Botín says experiencing Santander’s boom has left her feeling “like Jeff Bezos,” a fellow leader
who weathered a decade of stock market under-performance in the 2000s before investors globally recognized the tremendous value he’d created in Amazon.

Today, a key piece of Botín’s job goes beyond the bread and butter of banking; she needs to stay abreast of trends like AI and regulation. How she does that is with a trait she looks for in those she hires at Santander: a sense of urgency.

“When you want to change an organization of 200,000 people, it’s almost like changing a government,” Botín told Fortune. 

Botín may be the most celebrated female leader in Europe’s financial sector, but there’s more to her than a clear passion for the bank she leads: She’s a keen golfer and wearer of Zara jackets who maintains a policy of no email after 7:30 p.m. 

“When you want to change an organization of 200,000 people, it’s almost like changing a government.”

Ana Botín tells Fortune

Her typical routine consists of wellness rituals that keep her active. She has also accepted that her lifestyle isn’t without its sacrifices, given her high-stakes gig: “I’m a very happy person, but I cannot enjoy my hobbies as much as I would like, because I need to be—literally—like an Olympic athlete,” she said. “If you have a mission that matters … it’s worth it.”

Following the Santander board’s €6.3 billion dividend announcement, we sat down with Botín
to discuss business, life, and more. 

This interview has been edited for brevity.


Down to business

Fortune: Which long-term trend are you most bullish about for society and the economy at large? 

The rise of AI and automation is going to be the defining trend of the 21st century and will be a disruptive force in society. It will bring increased prosperity in the long run but requires [us] to rethink how government builds new frameworks together with the private sector and academia that rewrite the rules of competition, taxes, education, and pensions, amongst others, to address disparities that exist already and will widen between different sectors of the economy and people. 

How can European leaders address the productivity gap with the U.S.? 

We are in an era of disruption, and we have to be honest with society about the scale of the challenge and the urgency of the need for change. To do that there are some quick wins, like focusing on reducing regulatory and supervisory complexity. But longer term, we must do much more to embrace innovation and enterprise, creating a business environment and culture that rewards smart risk-taking. And a new “social compact” is essential. 

Being productive

What time do you get up, and what part of your morning routine prepares you for the day? 

My usual morning routine involves waking up at 6 a.m., spending 10 to 20 minutes relaxing and drinking warm water with fresh organic lemons—very alkaline—followed by Americano coffee with cashew milk, and doing e-mails. 

“The rise of AI and automation is going to be the defining trend of the 21st century and will be a -disruptive force in society.” 


The Santander head approaches AI with equal parts enthusiasm and caution

I then do 45 minutes to one hour of cardio and weights, followed by breakfast: homemade gluten-free bread; avocado with a spoon of apple cider vinegar, which regulates insulin and glucose levels; olive oil; and protein—two eggs and/or turkey or sardines.

How late do you work? Do you continue sending emails during the night and on weekends? 

I try to stop sending emails after 7 or 7:30 p.m., both during the week and [on] weekends. I also try to not send emails on Saturdays, so we all can take a day off (not always possible). I generally use Sunday mornings to work on reading and writing, and Sunday afternoons (not always) to catch up on one-to-ones with the team. I follow the same routine every day and skip dinner at least five days a week.

What apps or methods do you use to be more productive?

My Olympic gold medalist nephew, Diego, introduced me to the Oura Ring four or five years ago, and I also use Fitbit to track cardio health [and] sleep. I measure daily what helps me sleep better so I am able to have the energy for sports and work and to enjoy my free time (there’s not much).

Botín, an avid golfer, is inspired by one of the world’s best, Seve Ballesteros.
Oisin Keniry/R&A/R&A via Getty Images

Who is on your “personal board”—that is, who inspires and motivates you?

My family is the biggest inspiration for me: My mother, Paloma O’Shea, has given me a great education and has been an example of hard work and aiming high. She literally founded the Escuela Reina Sofía in a garage 25 years ago. Today it ranks alongside Curtis Institute and Juilliard as a top musical education school. The school’s orchestra will perform at Carnegie Hall in November.

My husband, Guillermo Morenés, has also been an amazing partner. We have three sons together and made a deal at the start that we would share responsibilities for the family 50/50. This support has been essential, and I could not have been able to balance career and family without him.

Finally, Seve Ballesteros, a two-time Masters tournament champion golf player, taught me golf and also how to trust yourself for those impossible Seve shots.

Getting personal

As a consumer, what is your favorite company and why?

Inditex, owner of Zara. I have a Zara €50 jacket that I got eight years ago, which I still use and gets mistaken for Chanel. This is my aim for [Santander’s digital] Openbank: a bank that works for everyone, from the young 20-year-old to the investment manager to the retired pensioner, that is also an “aspirational” brand, affordable but “cool” and fashionable. Zara’s ability to constantly innovate while maintaining its core values is truly inspiring.

And to end on a lighter note: What’s your favorite cuisine to cook and eat?

I love to cook a tortilla de patatas [a Spanish omelet]. The ingredients are simple: just eggs, potatoes, onion, and a little oil. Delicious.

CEO Agenda provides unique insights into how leaders think and lead, and what keeps them busy in a world of constant change. We look into the lives, minds and agendas of CEOs at the world’s most iconic companies. Dive into our other CEO Agenda profiles.

This article appears in the April/May 2025 issue of Fortune with the headline ‘CEO Agenda: A Q&A With Ana Botín’.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A former engineering director at Meta who has testified before Congress about child safety on Instagram told jurors Wednesday at a landmark trial that the company took a “don’t ask, don’t tell” approach on kids under 13 on its platforms.

During his second day of testimony, Arturo Béjar said Meta consistently prioritized profits over safety in designing its products, focusing on how often and for how long people used them, even if it was detrimental to their mental well-being.

“If you step away from the product, they are not going to make any money,” he said.

The trial that began Tuesday in federal court in Oakland, California, pits Meta against the states of California, Colorado, Kentucky and New Jersey and is expected to last about six weeks. The four states were among 29 that sued the tech giant in 2023 over child safety and privacy — the other 25 will go to trial later. The company also faces lawsuits in state courts, including one underway in Tennessee.

The lawsuit accuses Meta of contributing to the youth mental health crisis by knowingly and deliberately designing features that addict children to its platforms and hide these harms from the public. It also argues that Meta routinely collects data on children under 13 without their parents’ consent, in violation of federal law.

Meta says users must be at least 13 years old to create an account, in line with the law, called the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act, or COPPA.

“The attitude in particular on Instagram was ‘Don’t ask, don’t tell,’” Béjar said in response to a question about his perception of the company’s attitude towards users under 13.

The company has rejected the claims and said evidence at the trial will show its commitment to safety.

“You will hear over the course of this case a lot of important issues, issues like teen mental health, issues like social media, issues like how teens use social media,” Meta lawyer Paul Schmidt said Tuesday. “Those are important issues, and they’re issues where Meta believes that it has a responsibility. It has a responsibility to act on its own. It has a responsibility to try to work with teens and parents in partnership to try to address those questions.”

Plaintiffs’ witness says safety was an ‘afterthought’

Béjar worked at Facebook from 2009 to 2015, attracting wide attention for his work to combat cyberbullying. He returned from 2019 to 2021 as a contractor to work on safety issues. He testified before Congress in 2023 about social media and the teen mental health crisis, saying that Meta executives, including CEO Mark Zuckerberg, knew about harms Instagram was causing but chose not to make meaningful changes to address them.

In his testimony Wednesday, Béjar said employee performance reviews and compensation for those who worked on user-facing products were mostly focused on user numbers and how long they spend with those products.

“In that context, safety was an afterthought,” he said.

The states are seeking changes to user experiences for Facebook and Instagram as well as financial damages, which could include billions of dollars in penalties. In a written statement, the office of California’s attorney general said if Meta loses, the amount of any damages would be set by the court.

“This case is about stopping Meta from offering a dangerous product to teens, and from lying to teens, families, and the public about the dangerousness of their platforms. The primary remedy under our state consumer protection law is an injunction,” the statement said.

Béjar walked through Meta features he said were designed for adults and are “inherently unsafe for teenagers.”

This includes video autoplay, which can mean teens see videos that may cause them harm even if they don’t click on them; as well as various counters that track how many people liked, viewed or commented on your content or how many followers you have.

Child development experts have noted teenagers are more susceptible to social comparison than adults, so products that reward popularity can be more harmful to their mental health.

Age verification has been criticized for not going far enough

Despite Meta’s statements that it works to find kids under 13 on its platforms and ban them, Béjar testified that he found “tens of thousands” of kids under 13 on Instagram through his research. He said it was “common knowledge” at the company that such young children were on Instagram.

“Meta has one of the most sophisticated infrastructures in the world to detect fake accounts,” he said. But despite that, he added, there were “no goals, no metrics” to detect and check kids’ ages who were suspected to be under 13.

Over the years, Meta has introduced features it says are designed to make the experience safer for young people. But Béjar said these did not work.

For instance, a tool called “Take a Break,” introduced in 2021, is a feature that is “designed to fail,” he said. First, it is a setting that people have to turn on if they want to use it. Béjar said that in his experience building settings, very few users actually go through the trouble of turning them on. He compared it to an airbag that drivers have to turn on every time they get in a car.

“A safety tool has to be on by default,” he said.

The feature can also be dismissed with a tap of a finger. If Meta was serious about wanting users to take a break, Béjar said, it would not be so easily swiped away.

___

AP Technology Writer Kaitlyn Huamani contributed to this story from Los Angeles.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

“Claims of US munitions shortages are false,” Pentagon spokesperson Sean Parnell told the Wall Street Journal on Wednesday.

“America’s military remains the most powerful fighting force on earth. We have everything required to strike at the time and place of the President’s choosing,” Parnell added

A Reuters report on August 4 found that the US Army had used up “virtually all” of its stockpile of highly accurate long-range missiles during its five-month war with Iran.

These long-range munitions allow the military to carry out accurate strikes from a safe distance, playing a crucial role in the US-Iran conflict. 

White House disputed reports of shortages

When asked for comment on the stockpile data, the White House issued a statement from Trump, saying the US had “far more munitions than anyone in the world” and “far more than we need,” Reuters reported.

Sean Parnell speaks on stage, on the day Republican presidential nominee and former US President Donald Trump returns for a rally in Butler, Pennsylvania, US, October 5, 2024. (credit: REUTERS/BRIAN SNYDER)

“Our defense companies are, at this moment, making more munitions than they have ever made before, in addition to expanding their plants and equipment at record levels,” Trump said.

The Washington Post found that in the first month of the conflict with Iran, the US had fired more than 850 Tomahawk cruise missiles and over 1,000 Terminal High Altitude Area Defense missiles, and used at least 1,300 tactical ballistic missiles.

Additionally, Reuters reported that between February and July the US had used around 65% of its Patriot interceptors.

“The US has massive amounts of ‘munitions'” Trump wrote in a post on Truth Social on August 6, adding that claims of any munitions shortage were fabricated.

Pentagon orders plan for rapid weapons production

The Pentagon told US defense industry leaders to prepare plans to escalate production and delivery of weapons as reports of munitions shortages escalate, The Washington Post reported on August 8, citing a Defense Department memo. 

Deputy Defense Secretary Steve Feinberg wrote that the leaders had no more than 21 days to present plans to “drive significantly faster, more aggressive delivery schedules and/or increased production for critical capabilities,” on Wednesday, according to the memo.

“Years-long development cycles are not acceptable. We must dramatically accelerate our program schedules and expand our production capacity now.”

Danya Saperstein contributed to this report.

This post was originally published on here

Consumers are getting fed up with AI slop found on online marketplaces, and companies are beginning to take note.

About a year ago, online 3D model marketplace CGTrader introduced the ability for designers to upload AI-generated assets for purchase on the platform, in addition to the digital models they rendered themselves. The site has more than two million 3D models for sale, which serve as the foundational component for architects, video producers, game designers, and other creatives to build their product around.

But CGTrader may be a case study for how having more AI-generated products for sale does not guarantee the technology’s popularity, and why buyers still favor human-made goods. A recent report from the company found that despite one in six models uploaded to its platform being AI-generated, those assets accounted for just $1 out of every $90 in generated revenue, and just 2.6% of sales.

“AI is entering the catalog rapidly, but buyers aren’t yet opening their wallets for it,” the report said.

The report, which drew data from marketplace sales between June 2025 and May 2026, noted that only 5% of CGTrader’s customers tried an AI model and found it worked well, as compared to the 20% who tried it and found the assets inadequate. 

CGTrader CEO Dalia Lasaite pinpointed the reason why the company’s customers turned away from its AI offerings: It’s not that they hate AI; it’s just that they valued what humans had to offer more—not least of all because humans simply make better stuff.

“Buyers are looking for really high quality when they are shopping at the marketplace,” Lasaite told Fortune. “And as a result, they tend to prefer human-created 3D models, at least at this point.”

As AI adoption increases, consumers’ feelings toward the technology, particularly its application for creative uses, has become tangled. A 2025 Stanford University study found that when participants were given access to an online marketplace with both AI-generated and human-produced art, they gravitated toward AI-generated pieces, with the number of generative AI images on the platform rapidly increasing. However, a Pew Research Center poll last year found half of Americans said they liked a painting less after learning it was made by AI. In a report published on Tuesday, Pew found 52% of American adults were “more concerned than excited” about greater AI use in data life, as compared to 38% who said the same thing in 2022.

But Dennis Zhang, a professor of marketing and supply Chain, operations, and technology at Washington University in St. Louis’s Olin Business School, said more AI-generated products in marketplaces reflects more than just how people feel about AI right now; it also hints at the role AI could play in the economy more broadly.

“One side of economists always tells you, ‘Don’t worry about AI. For every technology revolution in human history, people re-pivot to something else to do,” Zhang told Fortune. “What we’re saying is something else: It’s not only people as workers will re-pivot to something else to do, it’s also people as consumers will re-pivot to the dimension that humans will matter more.”

The rise of AI in the marketplace

In his recent working research, Zhang measured the proliferation of smartphone app launches after the wide release of coding agents Claude Code and Codex. He initially found that compared to 2023 and 2024, the number of apps launched steadily increased, a trend that continued through 2026. But additional analyses controlling for other variables found that the impact of coding agents on app production was about a 160% increase in apps by April 2026 compared to the period two years prior.

Then Zhang looked at how people were engaging with this influx of apps on the marketplace. The number of apps with more than 10 reviews dropped significantly after the AI launches, suggesting people engaged less with AI-generated apps than human-made ones. These results were not causal.

“There is some slight evidence showing that the products that are helped by AI in production are less attractive than the products where we had observed before, where it’s mostly human-crafted on the coding side,” he said. “However, it’s not like the AI products are unloved by everyone, right? It’s still creating utilities for the market.”

Looking more deeply, Zhang hypothesized that for apps where humans still had a larger hand in the concept and development for the app, increased unpopularity could be simply because the apps aren’t as soon as the fully human-generated ones, which were likely developed by programmers who have been in the industry longer, and are therefore more sensitive to factors like user interface. In other words, AI has enabled more vibe coders to design more apps, but lack of experience means those apps just aren’t as good; it’s a labor issue.

On the other hand, for apps that are obviously completely AI-generated, consumers may have snubbed them because they value product scarcity and are seeking out tools with human-added value; it’s a consumer psychology issue.

Put together, Zhang posited, these attitudes toward AI-generated products can begin to paint a picture about the future of how automation is integrated into work and society: “I would actually think people’s affection or judgments of products is going to shift from the parts which are created by AI to the parts which are less likely to be created by AI,” he said.

Zhang sees evidence that AI will transform labor, not largely displace jobs. While how AI is being deployed in the workplace informed this view, he likewise believes that how consumers respond to AI in the marketplace—not completely eschewing the technology, but rather valuing human touches—affirms humans’ place in the economy.

CGTrader CEO Lasaite came to a similar conclusion. When AI was first introduced in 3D modeling, creators were apprehensive, she said, but that sentiment has slowly changed as AI-generated models became faster and cheaper to produce.

“Over time, we all realized that AI will be some kind of part of our life, and we adapt,” she said. “Maybe we can be more productive and just keep the best parts of our job to ourselves, and use the AI to help with the rest.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Israeli Ambassador to the United States Yechiel Leiter told The Jerusalem Post that Israel had received clear intelligence indicating that Turkey intended to significantly expand its military presence in Syria, a move Jerusalem viewed as crossing a red line.

“We are not seeking escalation or war with either Turkey or Syria. But a red linewas crossed,” he said.

His comments came following Israel’s strike in Syria and subsequent criticism from both the Syrian and Turkish governments.

“This was supposed to be a blatant Turkish violation of the understandings,” Leiter said. “Those who needed to be exposed to the intelligence received it. Those who needed to know what was coming knew. We made clear that this was a violation of our understandings – and that is why Israel acted as it did.”

Military personnel stand on the walls of the Damascus Citadel overlooking crowds attending the Syria Summer Family Festival in Damascus, Syria, on August 9, 2026; illustrative (credit: Omar Albam/Middle East Images/AFP via Getty Images)

According to Leiter, the failure to heed those warnings led Israel on Tuesday to strike the Abu al-Duhur airbase in Syria, near the city of Aleppo, where Turkish forces were reportedly expected to arrive. Syrian officials said the airfield was targeted in at least eight strikes, while satellite imagery released afterward showed damage to its runways.

Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu said on Wednesday that “Israel made the message clear: Don’t.”

Israeli ambassador to Post: Turkish presence in Syria ‘froze the existing situation’

Leiter said the Turkish move contradicted understandings reached during the Biden administration between Israel and the administration of Syrian President Ahmed al-Sharaa, which “froze the existing situation” in the country.

According to Leiter, those understandings were reaffirmed at a meeting in Paris in January 2026 attended by Syrian Foreign Minister Asaad al-Shaibani, US Syria envoy Tom Barrack, Leiter, then-National Security Council chief Gil Reich, and Netanyahu’s military secretary Roman Gofman, now Mossad director.

“The freeze means that just as the Turks don’t move, neither do we – and they don’t force us to withdraw,” Leiter said. “And it is important to understand that while we are sitting on only 78 sq. miles in Syria, in a security zone, the Turks have carried out a creeping annexation of 3,500 sq. miles in northern Syria over the past several years – about 5% of the country’s territory.”

With the exception of US Syria envoy and ambassador to Turkey Tom Barrack, senior US officials have not condemned the Israeli strike in Syria.

“The administration’s policy is that the freeze agreed upon in the past will continue, which is why even Trump did not condemn the strike,” Leiter said.

Israel, Syria do not want to escalate war with each other 

Despite the tensions, Leiter stressed that Israel understands that Syria is not seeking an escalation or war.

“It is clear to us that the Syrians do not want a confrontation with us,” he said. “That is why we are telling the Turks not to create conflicts. There is more than one indication that the move planned by Turkey was imposed on the Syrians.”

Leiter said the apparent disconnect was also evident in conflicting Turkish and Syrian statements following the strike.

“While Syrian Foreign Minister Shaibani acknowledged that there had been a Turkish delegation in Syria several days before the strike, the Turks denied it. They should sort it out among themselves.”

He did not rule out a return to direct talks with Syria, as has taken place in the past, but he said the conditions would have to be right.

“The negotiations can be renewed. We want to continue the face-to-face dialogue that we previously held with the Syrians,” the ambassador said.

Leiter added that Israel was also not seeking a confrontation with Turkey and remained open to dialogue with Ankara.

“We are certainly open to dialogue with them, but according to statements by senior officials in the country, they would prefer to wipe Israel off the map.”

He was referring to repeated statements by Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdogan accusing Israel of crimes against humanity, as well as Turkish Foreign Minister Hakan Fidan’s statement that “Israel is a stain on humanity.”

“At a time when Turkey is hosting Hamas leaders and transferring funds to Hezbollah and Hamas, Iran’s arm against Israel, it is not appropriate for them to begin expanding their influence in Lebanon and Syria,” Leiter said.

“Under the current circumstances, Turkey cannot be a force that helps calm the region.

“I wish we could return to the situation of several decades ago in relations between Jerusalem and Ankara. Then, we would be open to Turkish influence in the region. But it is not logical for Turkish influence in the region to grow while Turkey is funding terrorist organizations.”

This post was originally published on here

“We are going to collapse this [the Iranian] regime,” US Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent told CNBC in an interview on Thursday.

“You are either with us or against us,” he added, “we are going to squash the economy of this murderous regime.”

Bessent explained that the US will be increasing economic pressure pressure on Iran, reiterating US President Donald Trump’s statements on Truth Social on Wednesday night, when the president announced that Iran would face “an ECONOMIC D-DAY.” 

He added that he will be holding a press conference on Monday to discuss exactly what the economic pressure will entail, noting that if any of American allies continue doing business with Iran, whether transferring money, or buying their oil, “then the US Treasury and the US government, they will put its full might and force toward enforcing against you.”

“I see lots of reports that said, ‘oh, well, this has never worked.’ It does work, because we have a combination. It is a one-two punch,” Bessent told CNBC. “We have the blockade, and we are going to have the toughest sanctions in history. And I will tell you, this will work. It worked in Venezuela once we put up the blockade. It is working in Cuba right now. And it is going to work in Iran, and we are going to collapse this regime.”

US Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent looks on as he speaks to the media after two days of meetings with a Chinese delegation, in Paris, France March 16, 2026 (credit: REUTERS/Abdul Saboor)

Bessent also echoed Trump’s claim that the US, not Iran, controls the Strait of Hormuz.

“We do have control of the strait,” he said, adding “You would have seen media reports that large amounts of energy are getting out. And I think that we can continue doing that in the southern lane, and that I think oil markets are misinterpreting what this economic pressure means.”

“The economic pressure means that we are going to, all of our allies, and this is going to be the greatest coordinated economic isolation in the history of the world.”

Bessent’s comments follow statements from Trump about economic sanctions

Trump warned on Wednesday of economic consequences against any country that provided “any type of lifeline to Iran.”

In a post on Truth Social, Trump promised “Economic Warfare and Isolation on an unprecedented scale,” although details were limited.

“ANY country that allows its financial institutions, businesses, airports, or government entities to provide any type of lifeline to Iran will itself face TREMENDOUS Economic Consequences,” Trump wrote.

However, Iran Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi said in a post on X/Twitter that Trump’s comments were an attempt to divert American public opinion away from domestic financial problems, including record debt and rising interest rates.

Trump did not say what specific steps the US would take against such a country.

Jerusalem Post Staff contributed to this report.

This post was originally published on here

Before Boeing named Kelly Ortberg as CEO in August of 2024, the airplane-maker was an enterprise in crisis, and faith was fading that arguably the most iconic of American manufacturers would ever regain its lost luster. 

Just as Boeing was slowly recovering from the Lion Air and Ethiopian Airlines 737 Max crashes in 2018 and 2019 that killed 346 passengers and crew, a Max door-plug blowout over Portland, Ore. in January of 2024 trained the spotlight on its manufacturing practices, which had increasingly put profits over quality. Federal regulators cracked down, freezing Max production at a third below its prior peak. Boeing’s defense and space division, meanwhile, was booking multi-billion losses on federal contracts spouting big cost overruns. 

The laundry list of problems got longer: The challenge of integrating stricken Spirit AeroSystems, the fuselage supplier Boeing had sold two decades and just agreed to re-acquire, greatly upped its risk profile going forward. To make matters worse, Boeing was facing a potentially crippling strike from its powerful union of 33,000 machinists in the Puget Sound area, whose leaders claimed that since management couldn’t do it, the rank-in-file needed to “save Boeing from itself.”

The job looked so tough that Boeing struggled to find a taker. Among the marquee names the airplane colossus reportedly courted, sans sale, were CEOs Larry Culp of GE Aerospace, Dave Gitlin of Carrier Global, and its own chairman, Steve Mollenkopf, the former Qualcomm chief.

Ortberg was a total dark horse. He’d served successfully as CEO of aerospace and defense manufacturer Rockwell Collins for five years. United Technologies acquired Rockwell in 2018, and then sold to RTX less than two years later. Soon thereafter, Ortberg retired. By the time he took the Boeing job, Ortberg hadn’t filled an operating role for over four years. 

Ortberg’s demeanor is so understated, and he keeps such a low public profile, that the scale of his achievement since then hasn’t gotten the kudos it deserves—but that’s beginning to change. Put simply, Boeing’s en route to one of the most dramatic, and quickest, comebacks on record for a formerly ailing corporate giant. “Boeing found its change-agent in Ortberg,” says Scott Mikus, an analyst at Melius Research. “Thanks to Ortberg, the dream of a great industrial company is still alive.” 

A seasoned engineer

Ortberg brings the right stuff as a seasoned engineer who features a history of promoting smooth labor relations. He’s reinstated “an engineering-first” culture at Boeing, a sharp departure from the falling interest and lack of investment in innovation, and focus on share buybacks, that reigned in the pre-Max-crash period from 2014 to 2018. Ortberg’s following a nothing-flashy, back-to-basics, step-by-step approach that targets big improvements in quality, reliability and on-time delivery. He’s also going for win-win agreements with suppliers, in contrast to Boeing’s former penchant for antagonizing partners by severely gouging them on pricing.

As a young engineer, Richard Safran––an analyst at Seaport Securities––saw Ortberg in action at Rockwell Collins. “That’s why unlike most people, I wasn’t surprised by his coup at Boeing,” says Safran. “He’s a Midwesterner who takes the ‘no decision before its time’ approach. He’s methodical about checking all the boxes one after another. He’s such a good engineer that he knows just enough about everyone’s job to be dangerous. And he knows how to make money.”

A person who’s seen regimes come and go, and worked alongside Ortberg at Boeing, marvels at the shift in culture. “He’s set a new tone in the place,” says this observer. “He measures people not just on what they do, but how they do it. You need to reach out and get feedback from colleagues. His approach calls for tying pay and promotions to how people treat and respect one another, in addition assessing their work. Are there still people in senior places who don’t treat people well? Yes, but it’s a good start.” 

This individual also stresses that Ortberg’s own people skills set the template: “He’s a good listener with high EQ. His theme is getting Boeing back to what it needs to be.”  Ortberg’s also renowned for high expectations that colleagues are always well prepared when he quizzes them about their businesses. 

What’s particularly remarkable about Ortberg’s turnaround is that it faced an almost instant hurdle: Within a month of his arrival, the mechanics strike sent production of its best-selling 737 MAX fleet from the already FAA-reduced cadence to virtually zero. Ortberg took a typically conservative stance, raising over $24.3 billion in new capital to cover the coming losses and bolster Boeing’s balance sheet. 

He resolved the stoppage in a relatively fast 53 days, and a string of victories quickly followed. In March of last year, Boeing won the Air Force’s Sixth Generation fighter program in a stunning upset over the competitor that previously cornered the market, Lockheed Martin. The contract opens the way for a new era of profitability in the defense and space sector: After booking an operating loss of over $5.4 billion in 2024, the legacy of grossly underbidding on military aircraft initiatives, the division turned slightly profitable last year, and in Q1 of 2026, earned $233 million for a resurgent operating margin of 3.1%.

In commercial aircraft, Boeing’s largest franchise by far, the campaign to revamp manufacturing safety measures began in the post-crash period, under the close supervision of the FAA. But Ortberg’s relentlessly systematic approach hastened the progress, and the results are now showing in a big way. 

He’s managed to get the FAA cap on the Max, Boeing’s workhorse aircraft, lifted from 38 to 42 a month, and expects to exit 2026 sending 52 off the assembly line, around the peak number eight years ago. Due largely to the jump in Max output and deliveries, Ortberg predicts that Boeing’s heading to $10 billion in free cash flow. Though he doesn’t provide a date, both Mikus and Safran believe Boeing will hit that milestone in the 2028 timeframe. And on the Q1earnings call, CFO Jesus Malave stated that Boeing’s aiming higher. “I think the potential for our cash flow supports being above $10 billion,” said Malave. Getting beyond that figure would take Boeing back to near its top numbers ever in 2017 and 2018—but back then profits roared largely via curbs in R&D and workforce as a share of sales, strategies that robbed from the future.

Ortberg wins high praise from airline customers. “Boeing’s doing a pretty miraculous job of turning around,” United Airline CFO Michael Leskinen said recently. “Our confidence that our Max aircraft will be delivered on time has never been greater during my [over eight year] tenure at United.” 

Still, Captain Kelly faces big challenges in getting Boeing’s wings full level for maximum speed of ascent. Boeing still suffers from ongoing supply chain, quality and certification issues, though they’ve declined. For example, wiring problems on the Max have pushed deliveries scheduled for Q1 into Q2, and a shortage of business class seats is delaying output on its widebody stalwart, the 787. 

Up ahead: Labor challenges, and a new plane

A crucial test looms in October: Boeing’s contract with its 16,000 engineers, which predates Ortberg, is expiring. It’s essential that Ortberg, the engineer’s engineer, secure an agreement that satisfies all parties, and avoids an extremely lengthy strike, as he did with the machinists. “That would send a message that Boeing’s cultural transformation is real,” says Mikus.

Indeed, Boeing will need the world’s best engineering talent to develop an all-new plane that will match if not beat Airbus in narrow-bodies where the Max and A220s and A320s play, and that comprise the biggest airplane class. Since 2010, its archrival has captured around 60% of that market, chiefly due to the superior range of its A320neo and A320XLR families. Ortberg has stated that Boeing must wait until the technology’s right before committing to the crucial new design that will largely chart its future. A major part of that process will involve choosing a highly advanced engine from GE, RTX, or Rolls Royce that delivers both big fuel savings of around 20% and greater longevity that will curb the high repair costs on the current versions. 

The big question: Will Ortberg, whose caution has so far worked well, move fast enough? “By concentrating on getting cash flow up, are they crowding out next-gen aircraft development?” queries one industry veteran. By contrast, Airbus has been highly aggressive in collaborating alongside GE Aerospace in testing the so-called RISE engine—which, in part by removing the nacelles that enclose the fan blades, fashioning the blades from super-strong, lightweight carbon fiber and making them longer, could achieve new frontiers in energy efficiency. 

But Boeing also harbors an ace: the new chief of commercial aircraft development Brian Yutko. The appointment of Yutko, an MIT PhD in aeronautics who at around age 40 stands among the world’s top experts in revolutionary airplane design, signals that Boeing will be carefully weighing all of the most-avant garde options on the market, and decreases the risk the rebounding giant will move too late.

 By Wall Street’s best estimates, the earliest Boeing could commit to a new greenfield plane is 2029 or 2030, with production coming around 2037. Keep in mind that Ortberg just turned 66. “He took the job at an age when most top executives at retiring,” says the aerospace insider. Indeed, Ortberg could stay at the controls for several more years, and even make the call on the all-new plane. 

But for the Boeing board, job one is setting a succession plan, and it will have a jumbo-sized presence to replace. Fortunately, the directors will hold a far stronger hand than when it recruited Ortberg. Then, things were so bleak that even Boeing’s immense size and vaunted legend wasn’t enough to lure the top brand, practicing CEOs. This time, the job’s going to be a lot more attractive. Credit the unlikely pick who fit the times: Kelly Ortberg.

This story ran in the June/July 2026 issue of Fortune as part of a feature called “Innovation Giants on the Rebound.” For more Fortune 500 innovation stories, click here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Thousands of off-road motorcycles are being recalled over a braking defect that could cause serious injury or death from a crash, according to federal regulators.

KTM North America Inc., of Amherst, Ohio, is recalling about 21,040 GASGAS and Husqvarna off-road motorcycles in the U.S., the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission announced Thursday. 

Another 4,140 were sold in Canada, according to the commission.

FROZEN DOG FOOD RECALLED OVER SALMONELLA CONTAMINATION THAT LED TO MULTIPLE PET ILLNESSES

The recall affects certain 2021 through 2024 GASGAS and Husqvarna off-road motorcycle models.

“The rear brake caliper can crack or break, reducing the brake system’s effectiveness, posing a risk of serious injury or death due to crash hazard,” the commission said in its notice.

NEARLY 1M CHRYSLER, JEEP, DOGE AND RAM VEHICLES RECALLED OVER CAMERA GLITCH

The GASGAS off-road motorcycles are red with the white GASGAS logo on both sides of the shrouds, while the Husqvarna motorcycles are white, blue and yellow with the Husqvarna logo on both sides of the shrouds.

The motorcycles were sold at GASGAS and Husqvarna authorized dealers from September 2020 to June 2023 for between $7,300 and $13,000.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Consumers are urged to stop riding the recalled motorcycles immediately and contact an authorized GASGAS or Husqvarna Motorcycle dealer to schedule a free repair at the dealership.

No injuries have been reported thus far in connection with the recalled motorcycles.

This post was originally published here

Everyone agrees that someone is calling the shots on a corporate AI strategy. It’s just that a lot of executives aren’t clear on who that is. 

Only 34% of C-suite executives in a new Pearl Meyer survey said it’s consistently clear which executive or team makes calls about AI, which was the lowest of all the cohorts polled. Among corporate board members, the figure rose to 53%. But when the question was asked of senior managers and professionals below the C-level, the figure rose even higher to 57%. 

Essentially, the group of executives likely to be blocking and tackling on-the-ground AI implementation are the least convinced that anyone is clearly owning the decisions and results. Those who are furthest away from owning the messiness of implementation, are more likely to feel the matter is settled. The survey found 78% of executives below the C-suite report that their companies have the senior talent required to effectively implement and oversee AI across the whole company. 

Significant gaps between the uppermost rungs at companies and other executives run through much of Pearl Meyer’s Q2 2026 Market Intelligence Survey. The poll of 116 board members, CEOs, C-suite execs, and senior managers below them was conducted in May and June and shared exclusively with Fortune ahead of its release on Thursday. 

The results, which show that AI deployment isn’t going as smoothly as some CEOs had hoped, comes at a high-stakes and expensive moment. Total AI spending, including capital expenditures on AI infrastructure, is poised to reach $2.5 trillion this year, a 44% increase in spending over last year, according to research and advisory firm Gartner. Next year spending is projected to rise to $3.3 trillion, the firm found. At that level of investment, CEOs know their heads could be on the chopping block if they fall behind relative to competitors and if they fail to deliver at their own companies. A survey of 900 CEOs published in May revealed that 80% of U.S. CEOs think their job is at risk if their AI projects wither on the vine, while 81% believe a fellow CEO will be ousted due to an AI failure or crisis. 

“Ambition for AI outcomes is currently outpacing the leadership structure needed to deliver on them,” the Pearl Meyer study, published on Thursday, states. “Additional investment without clear ownership will only widen that gap.”

But at this point, expectations for how much of an impact AI will have on individual companies doesn’t seem rooted in how much progress has been made in implementing it. Brad Jayne, a principal at Pearl Meyer and co-author of the study, said confidence that AI will deliver significant gains within 18 months holds at about 50% among leaders of companies at every stage of maturity including the pilot phase, experimentation, enterprise-level deployment, and companies that haven’t started anything yet. 

“There’s an impact-versus-speed tension,” said Jayne. Handing out licenses for ChatGPT or Copilot is quick and easy, he said. “Building big systems around that and pushing them through the organization and making sure it’s not making errors, that takes a lot longer.”

CEOs may also be overly optimistic when it comes to how close to burnout their employees are. When asked if employees could tackle additional organizational change without feeling stretched too thin, with AI implementation as an example, 63% of CEOs responded affirmatively, with only 33% of the C-suite and 40% of non-C-suite executives in agreement. 

Boards, for their part, may be in the dark as to how much more change is coming. Asked whether achieving strategic goals will require significant changes to how the organization operates within three years, 88% of CEOs and 79% of C-suite executives said yes. Only 42% of directors agreed. 

Coupled with the change-fatigue response, said Jayne, “that’s an alarm bell for me.”

“The board is basically saying, ‘We’re good. We’ve made investments, we’re structured right, go make changes,’” said Jayne. “And the management team is saying, ‘Whoa, whoa, whoa. In order to be effective here and get our strategy done, we’re going to have to make big changes in how we operate together.’”

Jayne’s worry is about what happens when spending has to be justified in a year. If boards and management teams can’t successfully connect AI spending to outcomes investors can recognize and appreciate, there could be problems. 

“I worry about finger pointing,” said Jayne. It could be culture, learning agility, or insufficient experimentation with AI tools. 

“It might come to some turnover,” said Jayne. “I think we’re in for a bumpy ride.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Pizza Hut is temporarily dropping “Pizza” from its name as the restaurant chain leans into football season while its parent company moves ahead with a multibillion-dollar sale of the iconic brand.

The chain said this week that it will go by “Hut” for the next 25 weeks, coinciding with the 2026 NFL season.

“You can just call us HUT for the next 25 weeks,” Pizza Hut wrote in a social media post announcing the temporary rebrand.

The company showed off the change at a restaurant in Plano, Texas, where a banner featuring a football covered the word “Pizza” on the location’s exterior sign. Pizza Hut, which is headquartered in Plano, also changed its social media profile images to a logo without the word “Pizza.”

YUM BRANDS IN TALKS TO SELL PIZZA HUT TO PRIVATE EQUITY FIRM: REPORT

The football-themed marketing push comes at a pivotal time for Pizza Hut, as parent company Yum! Brands moves ahead with plans to sell the iconic restaurant chain.

FOX Business reported in June that Yum! was in exclusive talks with private equity firm LongRange Capital over a potential sale of Pizza Hut. At the time, no agreement had been reached, and LongRange was among several firms that had explored acquiring the chain.

Yum! later announced that LongRange agreed to acquire Pizza Hut’s operations outside mainland China for approximately $1.5 billion, while Yum China Holdings agreed to purchase the chain’s mainland China operations in a separate $1.2 billion deal.

The transactions value the operations at a combined $2.7 billion, with Yum! expecting approximately $2.3 billion in net proceeds.

YUM BRANDS SELLS PIZZA HUT FOR $2.7B, SHARPENS FOCUS ON TACO BELL AND KFC

“Under LongRange and Yum China, Pizza Hut will be well positioned for future growth with ownership that brings deep expertise in the restaurant industry,” Yum! CEO Chris Turner said.

“Pizza Hut was built by the passion and dedication of our team members, employees and franchisees, and we’re excited for the next chapter.”

The sale follows a prolonged period of pressure on Pizza Hut’s U.S. business. FOX Business reported in June, citing Reuters, that Pizza Hut generated about 12% of Yum!’s revenue in 2025 and had posted declining U.S. comparable sales for 10 consecutive quarters.

Yum! had been evaluating strategic alternatives for Pizza Hut, including a potential sale, as the chain worked to reverse its sales slump.

LongRange emerged as a potential buyer after Apollo Global Management and Sycamore Partners were also reported to have explored bids for Pizza Hut.

Yum! said earlier this month that the sale remained on track to close in August.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The “Hut” branding, however, isn’t permanent. After its 25-week football promotion ends, Pizza Hut is expected to return to the name consumers have known for decades.

FOX Business’ Bradford Betz contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Meta is once again on trial over dangers its platforms may pose to children. It is once again arguing that it works tirelessly to keep them safe.

pivotal trial for the parent company of Instagram and Facebook kicked off in a California federal court Tuesday, with four states seeking billions of dollars in damages as well as fundamental changes to how Meta runs its platforms.

A jury will decide whether the states’ attorneys general have made their case that the tech giant designed its apps to “hook the users, hold them for as long as they can, harvest their data and hide the truth from the public,” as Megan O’Neill, a deputy attorney general for the California Department of Justice, put it in her opening statement.

California, Colorado, Kentucky and New Jersey were among the 29 states that sued the tech giant in 2023 over child safety and privacy — the other 25 will go to trial later. The company also faces lawsuits in state courts, including one underway in Tennessee.

The lawsuit accuses Meta of contributing to the youth mental health crisis by knowingly and deliberately designing features that addict children to its platforms and hides these harms from the public. It also argues that Meta routinely collects data on children under 13 without their parents’ consent, in violation of federal law.

The company has defended its safety record and said it has a strong case.

States argue Meta exploited research on child development

O’Neill laid out the states’ case for the eight jurors during opening statements in federal court in Oakland, California.

“You’re going to hear that Meta knew a lot about kids’ brains,” O’Neill said. This includes how they are constantly seeking rewards, how they are sensitive to social feedback and “how they are still developing their ability to control impulses the way adults do.”

Meta, she said, researched these vulnerabilities and talked about how it could change Instagram to respond to them.

“ ‘The young ones are the best ones’ is a title of a Meta study we are going to show you,” she said, telling jurors that for Meta, “kids are the product.”

Meta, O’Neill said, also knew that kids under 13 were using its products even though they were banned from it, and “failed to take the simplest most obvious steps to keep them off.” For instance, she said, when Meta found that someone on Facebook was under 13, it would disable the person’s Facebook account but not their connected account on Instagram.

The states called as their first witness former Meta executive Arturo Béjar, who worked as an engineering director at Facebook from 2009 to 2015, attracting wide attention for his work to combat cyberbullying. He returned from 2019 to 2021 as a contractor to work on safety issues.

Béjar said that, contrary to Meta’s statements, the company’s research on safety issues was not being used to improve products.

For example, regarding eating disorder content, Meta’s engineers “had very good ideas on how to make it better” so that users, especially young ones, would not be exposed to it.

“But once it was reviewed, it got whittled down to a little pebble that didn’t make a difference,” he said.

Meta attorney highlights company work on safety

Meta lawyer Paul Schmidt laid out his case beginning with what is not disputed in the trial — that even though kids under 13 are not supposed to be on its apps, some lie about their ages; that some teens struggle to manage their time; and that some people post “negative content” on Facebook and Instagram.

But he said he will focus on the work Meta does to make its platforms safer and share information with the public.

“Much of this lawsuit is about the government attorneys and their witnesses saying in trying to improve, we’d do it a little differently,” Schmidt said. “In talking about how to improve, we disagree with how you talk about it. It’s meaningful, and the evidence will be meaningful, these efforts Meta has taken to improve.”

U.S. District Judge Yvonne Gonzalez Rogers in Oakland is overseeing the proceedings, which are expected to last six weeks with testimony from Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg and other executives and former employees. Gonzalez Rogers, appointed to the bench by President Barack Obama in 2011, has overseen a bevy of complex, high-profile cases involving Big Tech. These include Elon Musk’s lawsuit against OpenAI and its founders as well as Epic Games’ lawsuit against Apple over its app store.

If Meta loses the trial, the court would have wide discretion over the size of any financial penalty. Meta has said if it loses, the case could leave it liable for damages amounting to $1.4 trillion, but legal experts say anything close to that amount would be unlikely.

Meta faces thousands of lawsuits, angry parents

The trial is the latest in an avalanche of lawsuits against Meta Platforms and other social media companies including Google’s YouTube, TikTok and Snap, over arguments that their platforms harm young people, illegally collect their data and are deliberately designed to addict them.

As the trial began, child safety advocates and parents who trace their children’s deaths to social media harms gathered outside of the courthouse Tuesday. Many parents held photos of their late children as they spoke to reporters outside, at times speaking through tears.

Several parents held a banner with the names and ages of children who died from social media-related harms. It was several feet long.

Mary Rodee, whose son Riley Basford died by suicide at age 15 after being sextorted on Facebook Messenger, was among the parents and said she had helped write the names. They have had to add 39 new ones to the banner since March, she said.

“It’s not just a banner,” Rodee said. “Every name that I wrote on there is a promise that these children will never be forgotten and that their stories will force accountability where silence once reigned.” ___

Huamani reported from Los Angeles.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A coalition of major national business groups sued New Jersey on Thursday seeking to block a new state law that can charge employers hundreds of dollars for every worker or dependent enrolled in Medicaid.

The lawsuit was filed by the National Retail Federation, American Hotel & Lodging Association, International Franchise Association and Restaurant Law Center, putting some of the country’s largest retail, hotel, restaurant and franchise interests directly against the state.

The new law applies to employers with 50 or more workers or dependents receiving Medicaid.

The annual charge depends on the size of the employer:

Companies with 50 to 249 Medicaid recipients would pay $325 per person.

Those with 250 to 499 would pay $525 per person.

Employers with 500 or more would pay $725 per person.

For a large company with 1,000 workers or dependents on Medicaid, that could translate into a bill of roughly $725,000 a year.

New Jersey estimates the program could raise approximately $145 million annually, money the state says is needed to help absorb rising Medicaid costs.

Gov. Mikie Sherrill signed the measure in June as New Jersey prepared for federal Medicaid funding changes that state officials expect will place additional pressure on its healthcare budget.

The state’s argument is straightforward: large employers whose workers rely heavily on taxpayer-funded health coverage should contribute toward those costs.

The business groups see it very differently.

They argue the law effectively penalizes companies for employing lower-wage workers and could make businesses think twice about adding employees in New Jersey.

Their federal lawsuit also argues that the state measure conflicts with ERISA, the federal law governing employer-sponsored benefit plans, and raises due-process and privacy concerns.

That creates an important issue for employers.

A company does not necessarily control whether an employee or dependent qualifies for Medicaid. Eligibility can depend on household income, family size and other circumstances that may have little to do with the health coverage an employer offers.

Yet under New Jersey’s system, the employer can still receive a bill based on those enrollments.

For industries employing large numbers of hourly workers — including retailers, restaurants, hotels, warehouses and franchises — the cost could become substantial.

Consider a large retailer with 2,000 workers or dependents enrolled in Medicaid.

At $725 each, the annual assessment could reach $1.45 million.

A company operating hundreds of locations would then have to decide whether to absorb the expense, change employee benefits, reduce hiring, increase prices or shift investment elsewhere.

That is why the case matters beyond New Jersey.

Other states are confronting many of the same Medicaid budget pressures. California has already considered a similar approach.

If New Jersey successfully defends the law, states around the country could begin looking at large employers as another source of Medicaid funding.

That could create an entirely new employment cost for companies with large hourly workforces.

Businesses already calculate payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health insurance, paid leave and other costs before deciding whether to add another employee.

Medicaid assessments could eventually become another number in that calculation.

For New Jersey, the dispute ultimately comes down to who should absorb the rising cost of public healthcare.

The state says large employers should contribute more when substantial portions of their workforce depend on Medicaid.

Businesses argue that shifting those costs onto employers could make hiring those very workers more expensive.

A federal court will now decide whether New Jersey is legally allowed to do it.

JBizNews Desk | Trenton

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

BMW plans to recall 27,720 cars across three model lines over a driveshaft issue that could result in the vehicle rolling away.

The recall impacts vehicles in the luxury car manufacturer’s 5 Series, 7 Series, and 8 Series, according to filings made with the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA).

The recall stems from the connection between the driveshaft and the rear differential, which may experience excessive wear over time. 

SUBARU RECALLS OVER 540,000 SUVS AFTER FEDERAL REGULATORS FLAG WEIGHT CALCULATION ERROR: NHTSA

The excessive wear can lead to a loss of power to the rear wheels, which increases the risk of a crash or vehicle rollaway if the vehicle isn’t secured by the parking brake.

The notice affects 18,150 5-Series vehicles produced from 2021 to 2023 (540i, 540i xDrive and M550i xDrive), 7,372 8-Series vehicles from 2022 to 2026 (840i and 840i xDrive), and 2,198 750e xDrive models made from 2024 through 2026 (750e xDrive plug-in hybrid).

KIA ISSUES NEW RECALL OF 460,000 VEHICLES AFTER PREVIOUS FIX TO FIRE RISK FAILED

BMW has not received any reports of accidents or injuries related to the drivetrain issue, the notice states.

FOX Business has reached out to the automaker. BMW plans to send notification letters to vehicle owners by Oct. 2.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

BMW dealers have been instructed to perform the recall for affected vehicle owners for free. Technicians will either apply an adhesive to the affected part or replace the driveshaft and rear differential.

This post was originally published here

Michael Cohen has converted one of America’s most bitter political and legal feuds into a high-value media moment, interviewing President Donald Trump for the first public conversation between the two men in eight years—even as Cohen seeks a presidential pardon.

The taped telephone interview aired Thursday on 77 WABC, where Cohen recently began hosting the weekly program “When You Know, You Know.” An extended version is scheduled to air Sunday.

The reunion gives Cohen’s young radio program the kind of exclusive that established broadcasters spend years pursuing. It also gives WABC a highly marketable event built around two figures whose relationship has generated criminal proceedings, bestselling books, congressional testimony and years of national headlines.

Cohen spent more than a decade working for Trump and the Trump Organization before becoming one of his fiercest critics. He pleaded guilty in 2018 to charges including tax evasion, campaign-finance violations, bank fraud and lying to Congress, and later served more than a year in prison.

He subsequently testified against Trump in the Manhattan criminal case that produced 34 felony convictions for falsifying business records. Cohen also built a second career from the rupture, publishing books, hosting a podcast and becoming a frequent television commentator on Trump’s conduct.

Now, the commercial and political incentives have shifted.

Cohen told CNN that he applied for a pardon from Trump after former President Joe Biden denied his request for clemency. He has also said that he felt pressured and coerced by prosecutors seeking testimony against Trump—a reversal that has angered many of the anti-Trump followers who supported his post-prison media career.

During the WABC conversation, Cohen again called Trump “boss,” while Trump praised him for having “recanted” his previous claims. Their discussion extended beyond the reconciliation to Iran, public opinion and the administration’s record, giving Trump access to Cohen’s audience while allowing Cohen to present himself as the person capable of securing an interview few expected ever to happen.

The pardon request nevertheless leaves a question hanging over the broadcast: whether Cohen’s change in tone represents personal reconciliation, a genuine reassessment of the prosecutions—or an effort to obtain clemency from the only person who can grant it.

For WABC, the answer may be less complicated. The station secured a national media event from a weekly program that had been on the air for barely more than a month.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Two US senators have sent a letter to TikTok executives demanding answers about an experiment the company ran that withheld a safety feature from millions of users, including a teenager who died by suicide. The senators, co-sponsors of an online child safety bill, called TikTok’s decision to conduct the test “depraved.”

The existence of the experiment, discussed in detail in a confidential 2023 company document, was reported by Bloomberg Businessweek this month. It prompted the letter sent Wednesday by Republican Senator Marsha Blackburn of Tennessee and Connecticut Democrat Richard Blumenthal to TikTok Inc. Chief Executive Officer Shou Chew and Adam Presser, CEO of the company’s US spinoff.

“We write regarding disgusting new reports that TikTok knowingly withheld a critical safety measure for millions of American users — including children — in order to determine whether protecting users would impact its financial bottom-line,” the four-page letter began. The Businessweek story’s “appalling” revelations, the senators wrote, “raise serious questions about TikTok’s repeated assurances to Congress, parents and the American public that it prioritizes the safety and well-being of young people over profit.”

Read More: TikTok Kept a Safety Feature From Millions. One Died by Suicide

The TikTok document, handed over in litigation against the world’s biggest social media companies and placed under a court-ordered seal, shows the company intentionally switched off an algorithmic safeguard from 10% of US users, turning them into a control group. The safeguard was designed to break up online echo chambers of harmful content. At the time, that control group would have been approximately 15 million people. One was 16-year-old Chase Nasca, of Bayport, New York. His account, the document said, was fed thousands of videos about sadness, hopelessness, loneliness and suicide right up until he killed himself. Chase was randomly selected for the algorithm experiment on Jan. 25, 2022. Within a month, he was dead.

The document explains why Chase’s account received what it called an “onslaught” of dark content: “TikTok’s filter bubble prevention strategies did not take effect on this user by design.” And it states why the company turned off the safety setting for some: “The user impact decision was a delicate balance across safety and the ability to measure impact on DAU (daily active users) and core metrics.” 

TikTok didn’t respond to a request for comment about the letter. But in a statement for the Businessweek story, a TikTok spokesperson said the company was “deeply committed to the safety and well-being of users,” especially teens. “Our hearts break for any family that experienced a tragic loss,” the spokesperson said. “To help protect our community, we continue to invest significantly in Trust & Safety, including robust detection systems and dedicated enforcement teams that proactively remove content that violates our Community Guidelines.”

In their letter, Blumenthal and Blackburn pointed out that Congress had raised concerns about TikTok’s algorithm driving young users toward harmful content since October 2021 — before the company rolled out the experiment. The revelations, the senators wrote, “are made even more sinister because TikTok was on notice about the effects of its recommendation algorithms on children.” 

The senators demanded answers to 13 questions, including the names of every employee informed of the experiment; an explanation for why the company permitted minors to be included in the test; details on when executives learned about the experiment; and a “complete, unredacted version” of the document reported on by Businessweek. They also asked for a list of every algorithmic experiment in the US where TikTok has “withheld, disabled, delayed, or reduced a safety feature,” the number of users involved and how many were minors. The senators gave the company until Sept. 1 to respond.

“The fact that they did this knowingly and that they used their users as an experiment is something that just seems inconceivable,” Blackburn said in an interview after the Businessweek story was published but before the letter was sent. “It shows you how when our children are on these social media platforms — they are the products.”

To Blackburn, the experiment is a clear example of a company prioritizing “making money and capturing eyeballs” over safety. “Look at the fact that this was a happy, 16-year-old boy with no mental health issues and then, over this short window of time, the impact of feeding video after video after video and post after post after post about depression and suicide and what it did to this child. It is frightening — and this is something that these platforms need to be held to account for.”

Florida Republican Representative Gus Bilirakis echoed Blackburn’s concerns in a written statement, saying the report was deeply troubling and demonstrated the “devastating consequences that can occur when engagement metrics and corporate profits are prioritized over the safety and well-being of our children.” During a hearing in March 2023, weeks after the confidential document was created, Bilirakis had questioned TikTok CEO Chew about Chase Nasca and said, “Your technology is literally leading to death.” Chew responded saying the company takes these issues “very seriously” and provides mental health resources to users who search for suicide content.

Bilirakis and Blackburn both said American families have waited too long for protections for children online and called for child safety bills to be fast-tracked. Blackburn pushed for the Kids Online Safety Act (KOSA), a Senate bill she co-authored with Blumenthal to force tech platforms to prioritize child safety above profits. The bill died in the House in 2024 but was reintroduced this legislative session. Bilirakis championed the Kids Internet and Digital Safety (KIDS) Act, which includes most of the Senate bill, as well as laws for AI chatbots and video games. It passed in the House in June. 

The House bill stripped a so-called duty-of-care provision from the Senate’s version, which would force tech companies to exercise reasonable care to prevent mental health harms to minors, including anxiety, depression and compulsive usage of the social media products. This provision was removed over First Amendment concerns. 

On Aug. 5, the day after the Businessweek story was published, the Senate Committee on Commerce, Science and Transportation voted to advance the original, revived KOSA, with the duty-of-care provision. That provision, Blackburn said in the interview, would help to prevent future experiments like this because social media platforms would be required to prioritize safety in their products’ design, especially for teens.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Jerusalem Deputy Mayor Aryeh King is calling for Israel’s Shin Bet security agency to investigate severe damage to Jewish graves at the Mount of Olives cemetery, warning that the vandalism could represent more than an isolated criminal act.

Photographs published by King on X Thursday show multiple stone grave markers broken and cracked at the ancient cemetery overlooking Jerusalem’s Old City. King said the damage was documented three days earlier and described the images as unlike anything recorded there in decades.

“I very much hope that the Shin Bet investigated the matter thoroughly,” King wrote.

King said similar attacks against the cemetery 25 to 28 years ago were used as “entry tests” for terror cells that later carried out attacks against Jews. He did not present evidence connecting the latest vandalism to a terrorist organization, and no suspect or motive has been publicly identified.

His warning places pressure on Israeli authorities to determine whether the graves were targeted as an act of antisemitic vandalism, organized nationalist violence or ordinary criminal damage.

The Mount of Olives contains one of the world’s oldest and most sacred Jewish cemeteries, with graves dating back thousands of years. Prominent Jewish religious leaders and national figures are buried there, including former Prime Minister Menachem Begin, Nobel laureate S.Y. Agnon and Rabbi Abraham Isaac Kook.

The cemetery has endured repeated desecration throughout its history. During Jordanian control of eastern Jerusalem between 1948 and 1967, tens of thousands of gravestones were damaged, destroyed or removed. More recent decades have brought recurring incidents of smashed headstones, theft and attacks against visitors.

The latest images raise renewed questions about security at a location that carries exceptional religious and national importance. As of Thursday evening, neither the Shin Bet nor Israel Police had publicly announced an investigation or identified those responsible.

JBizNews Desk | Jerusalem

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The internet has crossed a historic threshold: Machines now generate more online traffic than people.

Bots accounted for 53% of web traffic during 2025, up from 51% one year earlier, according to Thales’ 2026 Bad Bot Report. Human activity fell to 47%, meaning businesses can no longer assume that most visitors reaching their websites, applications and digital storefronts are actual customers.

Some automated traffic is useful. Search engines crawl websites to index pages. Banks use bots to monitor transactions, retailers automate inventory updates and legitimate AI agents increasingly compare products or perform tasks for consumers.

The alarming number is underneath the total: 40% of all internet traffic was attributed to malicious bots. Only approximately 13% came from useful automation.

Bad bots do not merely visit websites. They attempt to break into customer accounts, steal inventory, scrape prices and proprietary content, create fake advertising impressions, overwhelm customer-service systems and distort the information companies use to make decisions.

AI is accelerating the problem. Thales said AI-enabled bot attacks increased from approximately 2 million per day to 25 million in one year—a 12.5-fold increase. The company blocked 17.2 trillion automated requests during 2025.

The change is not simply more volume. Earlier bots followed predictable scripts and could often be blocked by identifying unusual speeds or repeated actions. AI-powered bots can alter their behavior, move a computer cursor, pause between requests and imitate the browsing patterns of a real customer. That makes legitimate AI assistants, ordinary consumers and sophisticated attackers increasingly difficult to distinguish.

For retailers, the damage often begins before a customer reaches checkout. Bots can rapidly purchase limited merchandise, reserve inventory they never intend to buy or test thousands of stolen credit-card numbers through inexpensive transactions. Genuine shoppers see products listed as unavailable while criminals resell them elsewhere.

Bots also distort the numbers executives use to run their companies. A marketing campaign may appear to generate thousands of visits even though few came from people. Businesses then spend more money chasing audiences that do not exist, misjudge which products customers want and overestimate the effectiveness of their advertising.

This is especially costly because digital advertising is frequently priced by impressions or clicks. When a bot views or clicks an advertisement, the advertiser may still pay, although there was never a potential customer behind the activity. In severe cases, companies can spend substantial portions of their marketing budgets advertising to machines.

Financial institutions face the greatest direct exposure. The sector received 24% of recorded bot attacks and 46% of account-takeover attempts. Criminals use automated systems to test stolen usernames and passwords across banks, investment platforms and payment applications, exploiting the fact that many people reuse credentials.

The attack surface is also moving away from visible websites. Twenty-seven percent of bot attacks now target application programming interfaces—the digital connections that allow applications, payment systems and business partners to exchange information. By attacking an API directly, a bot can bypass the webpage and operate against a company’s underlying systems at machine speed.

Publishers and other content businesses face a different threat. AI crawlers can copy articles, images, product descriptions and databases without sending readers back to the original source. Cloudflare found that 52% of crawler requests in June were connected with AI training, up from 22% in spring 2025.

That breaks the traditional economic bargain of the open internet. Search engines historically copied enough information to index a page, then directed users to the website, where publishers could earn advertising or subscription revenue. AI systems can absorb the material and provide the answer directly, leaving the company that created it with the server expense but no reader, advertisement or payment.

Businesses cannot solve the problem by blocking every bot. Doing so could remove their products from search results, prevent legitimate AI shopping agents from finding them and disrupt outside services that depend on automated access. The challenge is deciding which machines create value, which should pay for access and which must be stopped.

Companies are responding with behavioral analysis, device verification, rate limits, stronger account authentication and tighter controls around APIs. Some website operators are beginning to charge AI crawlers for access, potentially replacing part of the advertising model with licensing or machine-access fees.

Consumers experience the consequences through additional verification screens, blocked transactions, disappearing inventory and stricter login requirements. Those inconveniences are the visible price of an internet in which a business no longer knows whether the visitor at its digital door is a person, a helpful assistant or a machine preparing an attack.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A multistate salmonella outbreak linked to fresh jalapeño peppers has now sickened 431 people and hospitalized 57 across 32 states, according to federal health officials.

The latest figures represent an increase of 86 illnesses, 21 hospitalizations and five states since the outbreak stood at 345 cases and 36 hospitalizations across 27 states earlier this month.

No deaths have been reported.

Federal health officials say the outbreak is probably larger than the confirmed case count because people with mild infections often recover without seeking care or getting tested. Recent illnesses can also take several weeks to be linked to an outbreak.

18 PREPARED FOODS UNDER ALERT AS JALAPEÑO SALMONELLA OUTBREAK SICKENS 345

The outbreak has been tied to jalapeños grown in Sinaloa, Mexico, and distributed in the U.S. by Coast Citrus Distributors. The peppers have prompted recalls of prepared foods and ready-to-eat products sold by major retailers.

Of 224 people interviewed as part of the investigation, 91% said they ate at a Mexican-style restaurant before becoming sick. Federal health officials have identified 28 illness clusters tied to restaurants across eight states.

Chipotle Mexican Grill and QDOBA received jalapeños imported by Coast Citrus Distributors from the Sinaloa grower linked to the outbreak, according to the Food and Drug Administration.

Chipotle began switching its jalapeño supplier for affected locations on July 20 and is no longer serving the implicated product. QDOBA stopped using jalapeños at all of its restaurants on July 28.

SALMONELLA OUTBREAK LINKED TO JALAPENOS SPREADS TO MULTIPLE STATES, DOZENS HOSPITALIZED

The FDA said the actions taken by the restaurant chains mean there is no current ongoing outbreak risk to consumers eating at those establishments.

People who have become sick range in age from 1 to 85 years old. Illnesses began between June 19 and Aug. 2, while meals associated with the restaurant investigation were eaten between June 14 and July 16.

The outbreak has also prompted an expanding series of recalls involving products made with the affected jalapeños.

NatureBest Precut & Produce voluntarily recalled certain NatureBest and H-E-B products on Aug. 8, including pico de gallo, soup mix, stuffed mushrooms and diced jalapeños. The products were distributed to retail locations in Texas and Louisiana from July 3 through Aug. 5.

DOG FOOD LINKED TO NEARLY 200 REPORTS OF POTENTIAL CANINE VISION LOSS, PROMPTING MASSIVE RECALL

Other downstream recalls listed by the FDA include products from Taylor Fresh Foods and Whole Foods, as well as jalapeños distributed by Hardie’s Fresh Foods.

The outbreak previously prompted a public health alert covering at least 18 ready-to-eat meat and poultry products containing recalled jalapeños. Those products included wraps, bowls and salads sold through major retailers including Walmart, Kroger, H-E-B, Albertsons, Randalls, Tom Thumb, Wawa, Hannaford, RaceTrac and Dillons.

Federal regulators previously said there were no confirmed illnesses linked specifically to the recalled meat and poultry products.

Coast Citrus Distributors agreed to recall the remaining implicated product and stop importing jalapeños from the grower linked to the outbreak, according to the FDA.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Salmonella can cause diarrhea, fever and stomach cramps, with symptoms typically beginning six hours to six days after infection. Most people recover within four to seven days without treatment.

Severe illness can occur, particularly among young children, older adults and people with weakened immune systems.

FOX Business’ Bonny Chu contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Starbucks is laying off over 200 corporate workers as it moves forward with the turnaround strategy that it began two years ago under CEO Brian Niccol.

The coffee giant on Thursday published a layoff notice under the WARN Act, clarifying plans to cut over 200 corporate roles after it previously disclosed plans to reduce the corporate workforce by about 300 jobs.

The WARN filing indicated that about 120 of the employee separations are associated with workers from its support team focused on designing and developing coffeehouses who declined the opportunity to relocate from Seattle, Washington, to Nashville, Tennessee.

Additionally, about 104 cuts are organizational changes resulting from restructuring plans detailed in May.

STARBUCKS’ TURNAROUND PLAN SHOWS PROMISE IN US AS SALES GROWTH RETURNS FOR FIRST TIME IN 2 YEARS

The expected date of the first separations will be Oct. 19, 2026, with all completed by Nov. 1, 2026.

Starbucks indicated the organizational changes aren’t altering the company’s coffeehouse strategy, and it is moving forward with its “third place experience” of uplifting coffeehouses and expanding and developing its portfolio.

The filing represents the last component of Starbucks’ remaining organizational changes from the restructuring announced in May so that it can focus on improving the experience at its coffeehouses and those of its employee partners and customers, according to the company.

STARBUCKS TO CLOSE STORES, CUT JOBS AS PART OF TURNAROUND STRATEGY

The company is building a new regional corporate office in Nashville that comes with a price tag of $100 million and will house about 2,000 employees, though it is keeping its headquarters in Seattle.

After Niccol took the helm at Starbucks in September 2024, becoming the company’s third CEO in a two-year period, he put the company on a turnaround plan to spur more business in coffeehouses.

STARBUCKS CEO SAYS COFFEE CHAIN IS ‘AHEAD OF SCHEDULE’ IN MAJOR TURNAROUND EFFORT AFTER ONE YEAR

The plan has featured efforts to redesign interiors to encourage customers to linger, along with “personal touches,” like writing names on cups and serving drinks in mugs.

It’s also working to ensure proper staffing at stores, streamlining mobile orders, letting customers handle their own condiments and committing to having all drinks ready in four minutes or less.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Last year, Starbucks moved to close some underperforming stores and cut 900 non-retail partner roles, while also freezing many open positions as it restructured.

This post was originally published here

WASHINGTON — A lawsuit filed Wednesday with the U.S. District Court for the District of Columbia alleges federal agencies improperly rewrote the nation’s dietary guidelines. 

The suit, brought by the Physicians Committee for Responsible Medicine, a nonprofit that advocates for plant-based diets, claims the Department of Health and Human Services and the U.S. Department of Agriculture used a “secret panel” of scientists backed by the beef and dairy industries to flip the food pyramid. It also alleges the government disregarded federal law that dictates how advisory committees function.

Read the rest…

This post was originally published here

CUPERTINO, Calif. — ChatGPT can now do something fundamentally different on a Mac: enter Apple’s Messages app, search conversations and send a text through the same account a person uses for iMessage.

Until now, a user could ask ChatGPT to write a response and then copy it into Messages. With the new Apple Messages integration, ChatGPT can work inside the messaging system itself — reading and searching iMessage, SMS and RCS conversations, preparing replies and, when permission is granted, sending them.

That makes the feature considerably more useful.

It also creates a privacy question that is easy to understand: the better ChatGPT becomes at helping with your messages, the more access it needs to conversations that may contain some of the most private information on your computer.

A user could ask ChatGPT to find what a contractor said last month, summarize a family group chat, locate an address buried inside an old conversation or draft a response to a customer without manually searching through hundreds of messages.

The integration is available through ChatGPT’s Mac desktop experience, including ChatGPT Work and Codex, and works with Apple Messages rather than turning an iPhone itself into a ChatGPT texting interface.

The important distinction is that Apple’s end-to-end encryption has not suddenly disappeared.

Encryption protects an iMessage while it travels between devices.

Once that message arrives on a Mac, is decrypted and becomes readable inside the Messages app, software with the proper permission can potentially work with that information.

That is the layer ChatGPT is now entering.

By default, actions such as sending a message can require the user to approve what ChatGPT is about to do. The user can see the proposed action before it happens.

But ChatGPT’s broader app-permission system can also allow users to reduce how often they are asked for approval.

That convenience creates the real trade-off.

Approving every outgoing message provides another human checkpoint.

Giving an AI assistant continuing permission to act makes the system faster, but it also gives the software more autonomy over communications coming from the user’s own account.

For businesses, the productivity potential is significant.

A salesperson could ask ChatGPT what a customer said about pricing last week.

A small-business owner could search months of customer messages without remembering the exact wording.

An executive could summarize a long thread and prepare a response.

An employee could ask ChatGPT to find a meeting location or phone number buried inside a conversation.

But there is another privacy issue that has nothing to do with whether Apple’s encryption remains secure.

Your messages contain other people’s information too.

A conversation with an accountant may contain financial information.

A message from a doctor’s office may contain medical information.

A customer thread may contain confidential business details.

A family group chat can contain personal information belonging to several people.

Allowing an AI system to search Messages therefore does not expose only information the user personally created.

It gives the system access to information other people sent to that user as well.

That distinction could become particularly important for companies operating in regulated industries or handling confidential customer data.

OpenAI’s app system allows administrators in managed workplaces to restrict whether connected applications can only read information or can also take actions, and whether employees must approve those actions before they occur.

That means businesses adopting the feature will have to make a decision that is becoming increasingly common across corporate AI deployments: how useful do we want the AI to be, and how much authority are we willing to give it to achieve that usefulness?

Users can also disconnect app access later, while businesses can limit permissions centrally depending on their ChatGPT workspace configuration.

The Apple Messages integration is part of a much larger shift in how ChatGPT works.

The original chatbot waited for a question.

The next generation of AI assistants is being designed to enter the software people already use, retrieve information from it and increasingly perform actions on their behalf.

That is why Messages matters.

Reading a private conversation is more sensitive than answering a web question.

Sending a message is more consequential than drafting one.

And sending that message from a person’s own Apple account begins to blur the line between software that assists someone and software that acts as them.

For Apple, the development also highlights a difficult tension.

The company has built a substantial part of its reputation around privacy, device security and tight control over personal information.

At the same time, modern AI assistants become more useful when they can reach deeper into the user’s digital life.

Those two goals are not necessarily incompatible.

But they require users to understand exactly what access they are granting.

The practical rule is therefore simple: users who enable the feature should pay close attention to its permissions and keep approval requirements in place when they want direct control over what ChatGPT sends.

The larger change is harder to ignore.

Messages was once simply where conversations lived. Now it can also become information an AI assistant searches, summarizes and acts upon.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Hyundai Motor Group’s luxury brand Genesis is launching a new electric SUV with more than 300 miles of estimated range and a cabin packed with technology

The new GV90 is expected to travel about 310 miles on a full charge. Genesis says its battery can charge from 10% to 80% in about 22 minutes when using a 350-kilowatt fast charger, according to a Wednesday announcement from the brand.

“Our new flagship SUV represents our vision for the future while embodying the very best of Genesis, staying true to the distinctly Korean values of hospitality and craftmanship that have shaped our journey,” José Muñoz, president and CEO of Hyundai Motor Company, said in a statement.

The SUV will be offered in standard and Neolun versions. 

HYUNDAI STOPS SALES OF CERTAIN SUVS AFTER 2-YEAR-OLD GIRL’S DEATH

The standard GV90 features traditional doors, while the Neolun model uses coach-style doors that open in opposite directions. 

The design creates a wider opening, which Genesis says makes it easier for passengers to get in and out of the vehicle.

Safety features include 12 airbags, with a new roof airbag designed to deploy across the glass roof during severe rollover crashes

The SUV also includes reinforced structural components, enhanced battery safety and an in-cabin monitoring system, according to Genesis.

HYUNDAI MOTOR BRINGS BOSTON DYNAMICS’ ATLAS HUMANOID ROBOT TO FIFA WORLD CUP IN GROUNDBREAKING ACTIVATION

Inside the vehicle, the GV90 comes with a pop-up OLED cinematic display, a 25-inch head-up display, Hyundai Motor Group’s Pleos Connect “infotainment” system and a generative AI assistant called Gleo AI.

It also features a 25-speaker Bang & Olufsen 3D audio system.

The Neolun version adds motorized front seats that can rotate 180 degrees while the SUV is parked.

“Occupants can now engage in a face-to-face lounge-like configuration, ideal for socializing or conducting business,” as noted in the announcement.

KIA AND HYUNDAI ISSUE MAJOR RECALLS FOR OVER 335,000 VEHICLES DUE TO FUEL TANK MELTING RISK

Hyundai Motor Group Executive Chair Euisun Chung described the GV90 as a “new vision for luxury mobility.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Technology alone does not create luxury, and design alone does not define luxury,” Chung said. “The value of innovation lies in transforming the customer experience in intelligent and intuitive ways to improve people’s lives.”

Hyundai Motor Group did not immediately respond to FOX Business’ request for details on when the GV90 will go on sale.

This post was originally published here

The USS George Washington aircraft carrier has arrived in the Middle East, US Central Command announced on Thursday, as a US official told The New York Times that the USS Abraham Lincoln began its journey back to the US on the same day.  

This comes a week after US Senator Richard Blumenthal demanded a formal inquiry into the conditions aboard the Lincoln amid reports of low morale, suicide attempts, supply shortages, water contamination, and several other issues.

CENTCOM refuted claims that soldiers had tried to jump off the Lincoln in a post on X/Twitter. 

In the post, CENTCOM said, “USS Abraham Lincoln has maintained among the highest crew reenlistment rates (84.4%) of all aircraft carriers in the US Navy. The Sailors and Marines of the Abraham Lincoln Carrier Strike Group remain resilient and resolved after more than 260 days at sea, 10,000 aircraft flights, and 1.5 million pounds of ordnance expended.”

USS Abraham Lincoln (CVN 72) conducts US blockade operations related to the Strait of Hormuz on April 16, 2026. (credit: Handout Photo by the U.S. Navy via Getty Images)

Footage purporting to show conditions on Lincoln released

Footage purporting to show the poor conditions aboard the USS Abraham Lincoln (CVN 72) aircraft carrier was published in a TikTok post by a US Navy sailor on Sunday. 

The footage, allegedly recorded onboard the ship, shows one of the carrier’s bathrooms, with the sailor describing the conditions as “atrocious.”

CENTCOM condemned what it called “rampant misreporting” as a disservice to those serving aboard the Lincoln. 

“The Sailors and Marines of the Abraham Lincoln Carrier Strike Group remain resilient and resolved after more than 260 days at sea, 10,000 aircraft flights, and 1.5 million pounds of ordnance expended,” CENTCOM wrote in a post on X. 

Miriam Sela-Eitam and Esther Davis contributed to this report.

This post was originally published on here

WASHINGTON — President Donald Trump has personally put Iran’s trading partners on notice, using Truth Social to warn that countries continuing to provide Tehran with an economic lifeline could face serious economic consequences from the United States.

The warning was followed Thursday by Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, who said Washington is preparing what he described as the toughest sanctions campaign in history against Iran and specifically urged China to cooperate.

China is the critical target.

More than 80% of Iran’s exported oil goes to China, making Beijing by far Tehran’s most important remaining energy customer and one of the biggest reasons Iran has been able to continue generating oil revenue despite years of U.S. sanctions.

Trump’s message broadens the pressure campaign beyond Iran itself.

Rather than focusing only on Iranian banks, oil companies and government entities, Washington is increasingly threatening the foreign companies, financial institutions, refiners, shipping networks and governments that help Iran move money and goods.

That is what makes the strategy potentially far more powerful.

Sanctions against Iran can be circumvented by companies willing to operate outside the U.S. financial system. Secondary sanctions create a different calculation by threatening those companies with consequences in the American market.

A refinery may be willing to buy discounted Iranian crude.

It may be far less willing to do so if that transaction jeopardizes access to U.S. banks, dollar clearing, insurance markets, American suppliers or customers.

China has built substantial infrastructure around Iranian energy trade.

Iranian crude has moved through networks of intermediaries and shipping companies, while some transactions are conducted outside the dollar-based financial system. Independent Chinese refiners have also played a major role in buying Iranian oil.

That makes Beijing the most difficult test of Trump’s new strategy.

China is large enough to absorb economic pressure in ways smaller countries cannot, and many of the Chinese companies involved in Iranian oil purchases have limited exposure to the United States.

But China also has enormous interests tied to the American and global financial systems.

That gives Washington leverage.

Asked Thursday whether Chinese companies or institutions could face additional sanctions if Beijing continues purchasing Iranian oil, Bessent did not rule out further action, saying some discussions were better conducted privately.

The message itself was unmistakable.

Washington wants countries doing business with Tehran to decide which commercial relationship matters more.

Iran’s exposure extends beyond China.

Turkey maintains billions of dollars in annual trade with Iran and receives natural gas from the country.

Iraq remains deeply dependent on Iranian gas and electricity-related imports while maintaining significant cross-border commerce.

Pakistan has been seeking to expand bilateral trade with Tehran, while Oman and other regional economies retain commercial connections to Iran.

The United Arab Emirates has historically served as one of Iran’s most important commercial gateways, particularly through Dubai’s banking, shipping and re-export networks. But the UAE has recently moved to suspend financial dealings with Iran amid escalating regional tensions.

That is exactly the kind of response Washington hopes to replicate elsewhere.

The objective is not simply to prevent Tehran from selling oil.

It is to make every bank, refinery, insurer, shipowner, exchange house and trading company involved in Iranian commerce reconsider whether the revenue is worth the potential cost.

That calculation becomes especially powerful for multinational companies.

A business earning millions of dollars from Iran-linked trade may have billions of dollars of business tied to the United States or the dollar-based financial system.

Secondary sanctions force that company to choose.

The pressure campaign also carries risks for Washington.

China is one of the world’s largest energy importers and a major supplier of manufactured goods, industrial components and strategically important materials to the United States.

If Washington aggressively targets large Chinese financial institutions or major companies over Iranian commerce, Beijing could retaliate.

That could turn an Iran sanctions campaign into a wider U.S.-China economic confrontation.

Energy markets are already paying attention.

Oil prices climbed sharply Thursday after Trump’s warning, with Brent crude settling near $93.78 a barrel and U.S. crude near $87.83, reflecting concern that tougher sanctions could further restrict Iranian supply or complicate flows through the Strait of Hormuz.

For businesses and consumers, that means Trump’s economic offensive has consequences far beyond Tehran.

Stronger sanctions could squeeze Iranian revenue.

They could also raise oil prices, increase transportation and manufacturing costs and deepen tensions with countries that continue buying Iranian energy.

Bessent is expected to provide additional details on the sanctions strategy Monday.

The central question is no longer whether the United States can impose more sanctions on Iran.

It is whether Trump is prepared to impose enough pressure on China and Iran’s other trading partners to make continued commerce with Tehran more expensive than walking away from it.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump and top financial regulators hosted key figures in the cryptocurrency and digital assets industries at the White House on Wednesday as a major legislative priority for the administration and those industries nears the finish line.

Cody Carbone, CEO of The Digital Chamber, attended the meeting and said in an interview with FOX Business that the “main takeaway was that the U.S. is not going to slow down in its objective of becoming the crypto capital of the world.”

“There was a lot of talk about the CLARITY Act, this legislation that’s in front of us, and that there was a desire and need to get this done,” Carbone said, noting there is bipartisan support for the bill and that President Trump indicated he hopes to sign it into law in September.

“It was very clear from the president’s comments and from the discussion that the U.S. government and the Trump administration are not going to wait, necessarily, for legislation,” he said. “The SEC and the CFTC have been given the authority from this White House and the mandate to move very quickly.”

COINBASE CEO SAYS CRYPTO BILL COULD TRANSFORM US FINANCIAL SYSTEM AS SENATE VOTE APPROACHES

The CLARITY Act would establish legal definitions for digital assets, network tokens, digital commodities and more, while also creating mandates for regulatory agencies, including the SEC and CFTC, to regulate the sector without creating overlapping or contradictory rules.

“The biggest thing that the bill will do is durability. People need to understand that the regulatory framework that is going to be created by the CLARITY Act is not just going to be here for decades and decades to come,” Carbone said, noting it will help builders, issuers and platforms certainty about regulatory compliance.

“It’ll give retail investors, institutional investors more consumer protections, more disclosures,” he said. “When you pass clear rules of the road, like we saw with the GENIUS Act, the market responds immediately. The stablecoin market in the post-GENIUS Act world in the first year almost doubled overnight in the U.S. – CLARITY will do that for the rest of the market.”

TRUMP-LINKED WORLD LIBERTY CRYPTO VENTURE GETS PRELIMINARY APPROVAL FROM CURRENCY COMPTROLLER

The Senate is expected to begin the procedural process of considering the CLARITY Act in mid-September, when the upper chamber is scheduled to be in a three-week session before a lengthy recess in October ahead of the midterm elections this November.

“There is a ton of motivation, not just from the administration as we saw [Wednesday], but from Republicans and Democrats in Congress to get this done – especially before the election. It just becomes too hard to legislate after September: then you’re in the October recess, then it’s the election, and then it’s the lame duck,” Carbone said.

“We don’t want to leave this up for chance. This is the time. We’ve never been closer to enacting a market structure bill,” he said.

ANDREW CUOMO WARNS CONGRESS IS RUNNING OUT OF TIME ON BLOCKCHAIN REGULATION, SAYS FAMILIES COULD SAVE ON FEES

Carbone said that if the CLARITY Act stalls in September with no path forward, the focus is likely to shift to agencies like the SEC and CFTC. He noted that SEC Chairman Paul Atkins and CFTC Chairman Michael Selig indicated they would look to implement many of the bill’s provisions through the regulatory process.

“They all want to see CLARITY done, just like we do. But if the ultimate fate of CLARITY over the next six weeks is that it will not pass, and we’re hoping that’s not the case, then I would imagine the SEC and the CFTC will get even more active very, very quickly, shortly thereafter,” he said.

The meeting was also attended by representatives from more traditional corners of the finance sector, including exchanges, and included an overarching theme of American innovation and technological leadership spanning not just digital assets and blockchain but also artificial intelligence (AI).

“This was pretty remarkable to hear the president double- and triple-down that it’s not just about the U.S. being the crypto capital of the world, but we need to be the envy of the entire world on all innovation,” Carbone said. “That’s pretty amazing to hear.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“It was a breath of fresh air and almost a sigh of relief,” Carbone said, explaining that while there “may be some disappointment about where the legislation stands right now, that this administration is not going to let up. They’re going to do everything that they can to make sure that U.S. entrepreneurs feel very, very comfortable, U.S. investors feel very, very comfortable, that they can continue to build wealth and to invest in new products right here in the U.S.”

This post was originally published here

The United States on Thursday issued fresh sanctions targeting Lebanon’s Hezbollah, including re-designating it over actions on behalf of the Iranian government, according to a statement seen by Reuters.

The Treasury Department redesignated the group “for service to the Iranian regime under the command of Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps-Quds Force,” according to the statement.

A US official, who spoke on condition of anonymity, said the redesignation was intended to show that Hezbollah is acting on behalf of the Iranian government, specifically Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps-Quds Force. 

Hezbollah was designated as a Foreign Terrorist Organization in 1997 and a Specially Designated Global Terrorist in 2001.

Hezbollah is both a political party and an armed group in Lebanon. Sanctions seek to disrupt funding networks and isolate targets by imposing asset freezes, banning banks from dealing with named entities, and prohibiting the flow of goods, services, and material support.

 Hezbollah members parade during a rally marking al-Quds Day, (Jerusalem Day) in Beirut's southern suburbs, Lebanon April 5, 2024.  (credit: MOHAMED AZAKIR/REUTERS)

Sanctions not part of new actions vowed by Trump

The US official said Thursday’s move was not part of new actions the US has vowed it will take against Iran.

US President Donald Trump warned on Wednesday of economic consequences against any country that provided “any type of lifeline to Iran” as the United States looks to resolve a war it began alongside Israel nearly six months ago.

US Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said earlier on Thursday that he would hold a press conference on Monday about “the toughest sanctions in history” that Washington plans to impose on Iran.

The US sanctions on Thursday also designated 10 people whom it accused of smuggling cash for Hezbollah, targeting a Turkish businessman who Washington said manages a network of couriers moving money between countries in the region and Hezbollah’s base in Lebanon.

The businessman uses Turkey-based exchange houses as fronts and provided front companies and bank accounts for money transfers connected with the Quds Force, according to the statement.

Several couriers were targeted in the action. 

Iran’s Revolutionary Guards founded Hezbollah in 1982 during Lebanon’s 1975-90 civil war, part of Tehran’s effort to export its ‌1979 Islamic Revolution and fight Israeli forces that had invaded Lebanon in 1982.

Hezbollah runs its own social services, including schools and hospitals, and has solid backing among Lebanon’s Shi’ite Muslims.

This post was originally published on here

New applications for unemployment benefits fell to 206,000 last week, reinforcing one of the strangest features of the U.S. labor market: companies have sharply slowed hiring, but they still are not laying off large numbers of workers.

Initial jobless claims declined by 6,000 in the week ended August 15, according to Labor Department data released Thursday. Economists had expected about 210,000.

That keeps claims near the low end of this year’s range and suggests businesses remain reluctant to cut existing staff even as the broader job market has weakened.

The other side of the picture is more complicated.

Continued claims — people remaining on unemployment benefits after their initial application — rose by 18,000 to 1.799 million.

That combination matters.

Low initial claims indicate that relatively few workers are being newly laid off. Rising continued claims can suggest that people who do lose jobs are having a harder time finding another one quickly.

In other words, the labor market increasingly looks less like a traditional downturn and more like a freeze.

Businesses are not aggressively expanding payrolls.

But they are also holding tightly to workers they already have.

That makes sense after several years in which employers struggled to recruit and retain staff. Companies that remember labor shortages may be reluctant to cut trained employees unless demand deteriorates much more sharply.

July’s employment report showed how weak hiring has become.

The U.S. economy lost 23,000 jobs in July, driven largely by declines in local-government education, while private employers added only about 30,000 positions.

Yet the unemployment rate remained at 4.1%, still low by historical standards.

That is why weekly jobless claims have become particularly important for investors and the Federal Reserve.

If claims suddenly begin climbing, it would signal that slower hiring is turning into outright job destruction.

So far, that has not happened.

For workers, however, the distinction is important.

Someone already employed may still have relatively strong job security.

Someone trying to enter the workforce, switch careers or recover from a layoff may face a much more difficult environment because fewer companies are creating new positions.

The trend also complicates the Federal Reserve’s interest-rate decisions.

A sharply weakening labor market would strengthen the argument for lower rates. But persistently low layoffs give policymakers less reason to rush, particularly while inflation remains above the Fed’s 2% target.

The latest claims report therefore captures the current economy unusually well.

America is not experiencing a wave of layoffs.

It is experiencing something quieter: fewer companies are hiring, fewer workers are leaving, and the people who do lose jobs may be spending longer trying to get back in.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street’s Thursday selloff was about more than Walmart. The bond market’s brief relief disappeared, oil climbed above $93, and investors received an uncomfortable set of signals from the American economy: companies are still reluctant to lay workers off and factories are getting busier, yet the country’s largest retailer says shoppers are increasingly making trade-offs.

Markets — Dow Drops Nearly 700 Points as Wednesday’s Bond Relief Vanishes

The S&P 500 closed at 7,642.69, down 0.85%. The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 681.62 points, or 1.27%, to 52,781.43, while the Nasdaq Composite dropped 1.00% to 26,067.81

The important move was again in bonds. The 10-year Treasury yield moved back toward 4.7% and the 30-year yield climbed again after Wednesday’s Treasury intervention had temporarily pushed long-term borrowing costs lower. Investors are increasingly questioning whether government bond buybacks can counter the larger forces pushing yields higher: government borrowing, inflation risk and enormous corporate capital needs. 

Oil added another layer of pressure. Brent crude climbed 2.4% to roughly $93.78 a barrel, while U.S. crude moved above $87 as Middle East supply risks remained unresolved. Higher energy costs hit airlines, cruise companies and consumer stocks while supporting the energy sector. 

Among Thursday’s major movers, Walmart fell 9.6%, Advance Auto Parts plunged 26.7%, Deere gained 6.8%, Norwegian Cruise Line dropped 5.3% and United Airlines fell 4.1%. 

Retail — Walmart Just Gave the Clearest Warning Yet About the Consumer

Walmart reported its slowest comparable-sales growth in six years, with U.S. comparable sales increasing only 2.6% versus the 3.8% Wall Street expected. Store-traffic growth slowed to 1.5%, while average spending per transaction increased just 1.1%, down sharply from 3.1% a year earlier. 

That is particularly significant because Walmart has been one of the biggest beneficiaries when households become more price conscious. Consumers normally trade down toward Walmart during difficult economic periods. Weakness there therefore suggests something different: some families may no longer simply be changing where they shop — they may be reducing what they buy.

Walmart said gasoline prices above $4 were forcing shoppers to make trade-offs and now expects roughly $2 billion more in fuel costs than previously forecast. The company is responding aggressively, rolling back prices on about 11,000 products, partly using $2.9 billion in tariff refunds to finance the reductions. Its e-commerce business remained much stronger, growing 24%, while advertising revenue jumped 43%. 

The contradiction is important. Walmart actually raised its full-year sales and profit forecast, yet investors erased tens of billions of dollars from its market value because they were more concerned about what the quarter revealed about the consumer.

For retailers, restaurants and other consumer-facing businesses, Thursday’s Walmart report may be more useful than a government survey: the customer is still spending, but increasingly deciding what can wait.

Industrial Economy — Deere Finds a New Growth Engine in AI Data Centers

John Deere reported its first quarterly profit increase in three years, but the surprise was where much of the strength came from.

Deere’s construction and forestry sales rose 18%, becoming its fastest-growing business as spending on infrastructure and the enormous buildout of AI data centers increases demand for heavy machinery. Customer backlogs in the division now extend well into fiscal 2027. 

Meanwhile, Deere’s traditional large-farm machinery business remains weak. Production and Precision Agriculture revenue declined 6% as lower crop economics continue to discourage purchases of expensive tractors and combines. Deere still believes 2026 will mark the bottom of the agricultural-equipment cycle. 

That makes Deere an unusually useful window into the U.S. economy.

Farmers are pulling back while data-center builders are buying.

Deere now expects full-year net income of $4.75 billion to $5 billion, raising the lower end of its prior forecast. It also received a $110 million tariff refund during the quarter, although management expects net tariff costs of about $750 million this year and approximately $1 billion in 2027. 

The AI boom is therefore no longer just creating revenue for Nvidia, chip designers and cloud providers. It is selling excavators and construction machinery.

Global Technology — Alibaba’s AI Bet Is Growing Faster Than Its Profits Can Handle

Alibaba reported a dramatic 75% decline in quarterly net profit even though revenue rose 9%.

The reason was not collapse in the underlying business. It was spending.

Alibaba is pouring enormous amounts of capital into AI infrastructure, cloud computing and chips. Capital expenditure jumped 75% to about 67.7 billion yuan, while cloud and AI-services revenue surged 45% to 48.44 billion yuan

Alibaba has already spent roughly half of the 380 billion yuan — about $56 billion — it plans to invest in AI between 2026 and 2029. CEO Eddie Wu said the company believes those investments can reach break-even within roughly three years. 

The business question is becoming familiar across the technology industry: companies no longer need to prove that AI demand exists.

They need to prove that the extraordinary amount of money required to serve that demand will eventually produce acceptable returns.

Alibaba’s U.S.-listed shares fell about 4.6% Thursday as investors confronted that arithmetic. 

Economy — Factories Are Accelerating Even as Consumers Become More Cautious

Thursday’s economic data complicated the slowdown narrative.

Initial unemployment claims fell by 6,000 to 206,000 for the week ended August 15, below economists’ expectation of 210,000. Continuing claims rose to 1.799 million but remain relatively low. The picture is increasingly one of a low-hire, low-fire labor market: companies are reluctant to add workers aggressively, but they are not conducting widespread layoffs either. 

Manufacturing data were considerably stronger.

The Philadelphia Federal Reserve’s manufacturing index jumped to 47.4 in August from 41.4 in July, its highest reading since April 2021. Nearly 57% of surveyed manufacturers reported increasing activity, while the employment index rose to its highest level since April 2022. 

Perhaps most striking, the index measuring manufacturers’ expectations for activity six months from now surged to 73.6, its highest reading since August 1983

But there is a catch for business owners: 38% of manufacturers said customers have become more price sensitive since last quarter. Among firms expecting near-term industry cost changes, 80% believe competitors will respond by raising prices. 

That is an unusual combination — businesses are increasingly optimistic about production while becoming more aware that customers may resist higher prices.

Food Distribution — A $1 Billion Hedge-Fund Bet Puts AI Inside Sysco’s Trucks and Warehouses

D.E. Shaw has accumulated a stake worth more than $1 billion in Sysco, the world’s largest food distributor.

The investment is particularly important because the hedge fund is supporting Sysco’s attempt to use artificial intelligence, automation and technology to transform its enormous distribution network. Sysco expects those initiatives to produce roughly $100 million in savings during fiscal 2027

Sysco is also adding directors with technology, e-commerce and food-distribution experience as it prepares for its planned acquisition of Restaurant Depot. D.E. Shaw is expected to help the company raise capital for that transaction. 

For restaurants and food businesses, this is more than an activist-investor story.

AI is increasingly moving into one of the least glamorous but most consequential parts of the economy: predicting how much food businesses need, routing trucks, automating orders, managing warehouses and reducing spoilage.

Enterprise AI — Anthropic Moves to Give Businesses More Control of Their Data

Anthropic is preparing to give enterprise customers greater control over how their data are retained when using advanced Claude models, according to a person familiar with the company’s plans.

The company is also preparing a new safety system expected later this year. 

For corporate AI adoption, data retention has become one of the biggest obstacles standing between experimentation and full deployment. Businesses are increasingly willing to use AI, but banks, healthcare companies, law firms, manufacturers and large corporations remain cautious about where confidential prompts, documents and outputs are stored.

Anthropic’s change shows where the enterprise AI competition is moving.

The winning model may not simply be the smartest one.

It may be the one a company’s legal, compliance and cybersecurity departments are willing to approve.

What to Watch Friday

BJ’s Wholesale Club reports Friday morning, with its earnings call scheduled for 8:00 a.m. Eastern. After Walmart’s rare sales miss, BJ’s becomes a particularly useful second reading on value-oriented consumers and whether warehouse clubs are seeing the same trade-offs in grocery, fuel and discretionary spending. 

At 9:45 a.m. ET, S&P Global releases its flash August U.S. manufacturing and services PMIs. Economists are looking for manufacturing activity to remain in expansion territory around the mid-50s, making the report important after Thursday’s exceptionally strong Philadelphia Fed reading. 

At 10:00 a.m. ET, the Bureau of Labor Statistics releases July state employment and unemployment figures. The report will show where the national labor slowdown is actually concentrated and could be particularly important for businesses evaluating regional hiring conditions. 

Oil and Treasury yields may still matter more than any single earnings report.

If Brent remains above $90 while long-term Treasury yields continue climbing, businesses could face a difficult combination going into the weekend: expensive financing, expensive energy and a consumer who is becoming increasingly careful about every dollar.

That was Thursday’s real business story.

The economy is not collapsing. Factories are busy, layoffs remain low and AI-related investment is booming.

But the cost of running a business is rising again at precisely the moment customers are becoming harder to convince to spend.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SpaceX shares failed their second major post-IPO supply test on Thursday, falling 4.1% as approximately 319 million shares held by employees and early investors became eligible for sale.

The stock closed at $133.94, down $5.71, after falling as low as $130.43 during the session. That left SpaceX below its $135 IPO price for the first time at the close since its powerful rebound earlier this month.

At Thursday’s closing price, the newly unlocked shares carried a theoretical value of approximately $42.7 billion. That does not mean $42.7 billion of stock was sold. An unlock simply removes contractual restrictions and allows qualifying shareholders to sell, transfer or lend their shares.

The distinction matters because Thursday’s release did not create new stock or dilute existing shareholders. It increased the potential supply available to the market — and investors showed less willingness to absorb that supply at recent prices.

SpaceX’s first major unlock produced the opposite reaction. On Aug. 6, approximately 911.5 million shares became eligible for sale, yet the stock rose 6.1% that day to $114.92. It then jumped nearly 16% the following session and gained approximately 23% for the week, as buyers overwhelmed whatever selling emerged.

Thursday’s smaller unlock delivered a weaker result. SpaceX traded nearly 119 million shares during the session, meaning the entire 319 million-share tranche was equivalent to almost three times one day’s actual trading volume.

The pressure is not over. Another approximately 319 million shares are scheduled to become eligible in September, followed by a much larger release tied to SpaceX’s third-quarter earnings. Additional shares are expected to unlock in December.

Elon Musk’s holdings remain subject to longer restrictions and were not part of Thursday’s release.

For investors, the arithmetic is straightforward: the first unlock showed that additional supply can be absorbed when demand is strong. The second showed that the market’s appetite has limits — especially when the stock is approaching its IPO price and billions of additional shares are still waiting to enter the tradable market.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A female suspected of having ties to the Islamic State (ISIS) was arrested on Wednesday for plotting to blow up the New York State Capitol building in Albany, The New York Times reported on Thursday, citing three sources with knowledge of the matter.

US Attorney’s Office prosecutors in New York‘s Northern District are expected to formally announce the charges later Thursday, according to the report, and law enforcement officials are also set to hold a press conference on the case at that time.

NBC News identified the suspect as 35-year-old Jessica Bowie, with the report citing a criminal complaint filed in the US District Court for the Northern District of New York as saying that she allegedly asked a source for help learning to make explosives.

The complaint cited by NBC claims that Bowie converted to Islam five years ago, with several social media accounts traced back to her having posted content that supported terrorism.

In addition, Bowie communicated with an FBI agent who was posing as an ISIS facilitator, according to the complaint, telling the agent about her plans to blow up the New York State Capitol building.

FBI agents monitor suspicious activity; illustrative. (credit: Andrey_Popov/Shutterstock)

“I want to destroy as much of the building as possible and kill the senators while they are meeting,” the complaint accuses her of saying, noting that she claimed to want to “harm the enemies of God.”

The complaint cited by NBC also noted that Bowie preferred to bomb the White House with US President Donald Trump inside, but decided against it because it was “an even harder job.”

Bowie hoped to get away with attack, strike again

According to NBC, Bowie sought to escape following the attack and return to strike additional targets in the future if she managed to evade authorities.

The report added that Bowie received $200 from the FBI agents, which she spent at a Home Depot on August 5 on materials involved in bomb-making. She allegedly later gave the items to agents at an in-person meeting.

She further allegedly inquired of an agent how to obtain a firearm so she could “shoot back” if the police came after her.

Bowie allegedly told the agents that she would feel remorse if Muslims, children, or pregnant women were killed in the attack, noting that she hoped “Allah” would forgive her, NBC added.

An American citizen, Albany resident with ISIS ties

According to the NYT, Bowie is a US citizen, lives in the Albany area, and has either shown ties to or pledged allegiance to ISIS.

It is still unclear how long the attack has been planned for, nor whether the suspect has a lawyer, the report noted.

Bowie faces a court date on Thursday and is charged with attempting to provide material support to a designated foreign terrorist organization, NBC reported.

This post was originally published on here

European stocks slipped for a seventh consecutive session Thursday, their longest losing streak since September 2023, as rising oil prices revived inflation concerns and placed fresh pressure on travel, retail and other fuel-sensitive businesses.

The pan-European Stoxx 600 closed 0.12% lower at 650.35. The daily decline was small, but the uninterrupted run of losses points to a broader change in investor confidence after European shares approached record highs earlier this month.

Brent crude climbed more than 2% and moved above $90 a barrel as stalled U.S.-Iran negotiations and continued Middle East instability raised concerns about energy supplies. Higher oil prices benefit producers, but they also increase transportation, manufacturing and heating costs across a European economy that remains especially exposed to imported energy.

Energy stocks gained about 0.9%, while travel and leisure shares fell 0.7%. France’s CAC 40 declined 0.6%, hurt by weakness in luxury companies including LVMH and Kering. Germany’s DAX also finished lower, while Britain’s FTSE 100 was roughly flat.

Fresh German data added to the concern, showing producer prices rising at their fastest pace in more than three years as energy and goods costs increased. That creates a difficult calculation for the European Central Bank: slowing economic activity would normally support lower interest rates, but another inflation wave could prevent policymakers from providing relief.

JD Sports Fashion became one of the day’s largest corporate casualties, plunging more than 14% after cutting its profit outlook because of weaker North American sales. Danish biotechnology company Novonesis moved sharply in the opposite direction, gaining nearly 10% following strong results and a share-buyback announcement.

Europe’s decline remains modest in percentage terms, and the Stoxx 600 is still up for the year. The warning is in the consistency: investors have now sold the market for seven straight sessions as expensive energy, elevated borrowing costs and weaker corporate guidance begin pressing against the continent’s previously resilient earnings outlook.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Thai police launched a sweeping operation against foreign business networks suspected of using Thai citizens as nominee shareholders to conceal foreign ownership of companies, land and restricted businesses, with arrest warrants issued for 20 Israelis on Koh Samui, Walla reported on Wednesday.

The Koh Samui Provincial Court issued warrants for the Israelis as part of the investigation, more than for citizens of any other foreign country included in the operation, excluding Thai nationals themselves.

Among the Israelis arrested was prominent real estate developer Gal Bieber, 45, who was detained on Saturday by officers from the Bo Phut Police Station and immigration police from Surat Thani Province.

According to police, Bieber is suspected of providing false information to public officials that led to false details being entered into official documents, unlawfully managing businesses restricted to Thai citizens, and using Thai citizens and corporations to conceal foreign ownership and management of businesses. At this stage, these remain allegations.

A view of the city at twilight as the sun sets, in Bangkok, Thailand, May 15, 2025.  (credit: REUTERS/ATHIT PERAWONGMETHA)

Thai police issue warrants for 20 Israelis in Koh Samui business crackdown

According to the suspicions made public, Gal and his wife, Roni, established a multilayered corporate structure and placed Thai citizens as shareholders in name only.

Authorities allege that the network of companies was used to operate an international school without a license and to purchase, hold, develop, sell and rent luxury villas, mainly to Israeli clients.

Thai authorities said a review of company records showed that one of the companies linked to the couple was initially registered under the names of Thai shareholders, with most of its shares transferred about a month later to Roni Bieber. The shareholders, directors, company capital and areas of business activity were subsequently changed repeatedly.

In total, authorities examined 12,906 companies registered on Koh Samui. Authorities found foreign shareholders in 8,254 of them, while 875 were flagged as having characteristics that could indicate the use of nominee shareholders.

After screening the information, the operation focused on 61 companies that held 42 plots of land and buildings spanning more than 53 dunams, valued at an estimated 1.5 billion baht, or approximately NIS 140 million.

Authorities opened 60 cases against 88 suspects, including 26 Thai citizens and 62 foreigners. Arrest warrants were issued for all 62 foreign suspects, including 20 Israelis, 17 Russians, 12 French nationals and two citizens each from Ukraine and Germany. Authorities said 27 suspects, including two Israelis, were arrested on the day of the operation.

During searches, police seized incorporation documents, accounting books, computers, mobile phones and digital information. Police said they would use the material to expand the investigation and identify additional individuals involved both inside and outside Thailand.

On Monday, two days after the Koh Samui operation, Israeli Ambassador to Thailand Dr. Alona Fisher-Kamm and members of the embassy delegation met Surat Thani Provincial Police commander Sawat Suksri and Tourist Police Division 3 commander Satasak Yimcharoen.

The meeting took place amid a rise in the number of Israelis on Koh Samui and nearby islands, recent tensions and friction between local residents and Israelis, and increased enforcement against businesses suspected of illegal activity.

The meeting also aimed to strengthen coordination, ensure the safety of Israeli tourists, and encourage responsible tourism in the country. The ambassador thanked police for assisting Israelis and said the overwhelming majority obey the law, while acknowledging that “there are also exceptional cases of improper behavior.” She stressed that the embassy briefs Israelis traveling to Thailand on local laws, customs and culture.

She asked authorities to contact the embassy directly in any incident involving Israelis to enable a swift and coordinated response. Thai authorities, for their part, said they enforce the law transparently and equally against everyone, regardless of nationality.

The Koh Samui operation is the seventh stage of a Thai government campaign against concealed foreign control of land and businesses in tourist areas. During the previous six stages, authorities examined 238 companies and 272 plots of land across seven provinces, including Phuket, Krabi, Phang Nga and Chonburi. So far, authorities have issued 178 arrest warrants as part of the operations, and 91 suspects have been arrested.

Roni Bieber: “All our actions were accompanied by a Thai lawyer and accountant”
Roni Bieber told Walla, “We reject the claims raised against us. The businesses were established and operated with the guidance of local professionals and with the intention of complying with the requirements of Thai law. This was not a case of using nominee shareholders, and all the partners involved are real people who were part of the business activity.

“We are cooperating fully with the authorities through our lawyers and are providing all the required documents and information. Gal reported as required and has been released on bail while the legal proceedings are underway.

“Since the matter is currently under examination and in legal proceedings, we cannot address every detail, but we believe the facts will become clear and our names will be cleared. We respect Thai law and the authorities. All our actions were accompanied by a Thai lawyer and accountant who told him how to do everything and accompanied us when the companies were opened and the businesses were established. We placed our full trust in them and did as they instructed, but when the law changed, they disappeared and took no responsibility, and because they are Thai, they are free from law enforcement.

“We ask that partial information or premature conclusions not be published before the examination is completed.”

This post was originally published on here

A second Gidon tanker touched down at Nevatim Airbase on Thursday, marking a significant milestone for the IDF’s aerial refueling and cargo capabilities.

The Gidon, converted from a Boeing KC-46 airframe through a joint program between the US Air Force and the IAF, is described by the officer who oversees its operation as the most advanced aerial refueling aircraft in the world.

It first entered IAF service earlier this year, becoming the flagship of a new refueling squadron that will only continue to grow. Israel has ordered six of the aircraft to date, with the possibility of expanding the fleet further down the line.

“First and foremost, it is a tanker aircraft, and its capabilities are extensive and very important for the State of Israel,” an IAF source told The Jerusalem Post, explaining that, beyond refueling, the aircraft can carry cargo and passengers simultaneously, evacuate wounded personnel, and may take on additional roles the Air Force and Defense Ministry develop for it over time.

“Our goal is to provide the State of Israel with the strongest capability we possibly can. And, of course, regional cooperation and cooperation with our American partners are strategic and critical for the country,” the source said.

Israel's new KC-46 refueling aircraft, named ''Gideon,'' on its maiden flight, May 4, 2026. (credit: BOEING)

The Gidon refuels other aircraft primarily through an advanced boom system, which will serve as the backbone of the IAF’s refueling missions going forward. The aircraft is also equipped with a secondary drogue-based refueling system, which Israeli aircraft are not built to use, but it could eventually support aerial refueling for other air forces as part of regional cooperation efforts.

The source explained that what specifically sets the Gidon apart from the aircraft it is replacing is its raw capacity paired with precision.

Gidon carries ‘significantly more’ fuel, cargo, passengers than predecessor, IAF source says

“It can carry significantly more fuel, significantly more cargo, and significantly more passengers,” he said, “and it can do all of that with greater precision, in more complex environments, and on a larger scale.”

The aircraft can carry up to 18 pallets of cargo and can conduct refueling and cargo missions at the same time.

The Gidon also carries civilian and military systems that the officer described as among the most advanced of their kind anywhere in the world. The officer said they feature a mix of flight-safety and communications technology found on top-tier commercial aircraft, alongside classified military systems developed by the US Air Force.

Its core mission, the source explained, is extending the reach of Israeli combat aircraft on long-range operations.

“Our goal is to get the Air Force as far as it needs to go, to all the points it needs to reach, and to bring all of its capabilities across the Middle East, or even farther if necessary,” he said.

Source: New tanker aircraft can also serve international humanitarian aid delivery missions

But the aircraft’s reach isn’t limited to combat missions. As the source explained, the Gidon can also be used to deliver aid across the world.

“This aircraft can bring the State of Israel and all of its capabilities to help populations and countries – whether Jewish communities or other countries – anywhere in the world,” he said, noting that the Home Front Command and other state agencies could now reach nearly any destination on a direct flight to deliver or retrieve equipment.

The Gidon program has been closely watched since the first aircraft arrived in Israel earlier this year as part of a deal funded through US Foreign Military Financing, replacing the IAF’s fleet of Boeing 707 “Re’em” tankers, which have been in service for roughly six decades.

This post was originally published on here

Some of America’s biggest companies are receiving hundreds of millions of dollars in tariff refunds, or booking even larger financial benefits. However, many consumers are wondering if those refunds will find their way back into their wallets. 

After the Supreme Court ruled that the International Emergency Economic Powers Act did not give the president authority to impose tariffs, major Fortune 500 companies, including Amazon and Target, have received hundreds of millions of dollars in tariff refunds. Some have pledged to issue refunds to consumers who bore increased costs thanks to the tariffs, while others have stayed mum on the subject. 

The Trump administration said as of July 31, it certified $100 billion in tariff refunds, including interest, out of the $166 billion it collected. 

Companies that received cash

Amazon, ranking No.1 on the Fortune 500, stands out as one of the largest companies to have already collected refunds. The e-commerce giant said “we received approximately $640 million of tariff refunds under the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (“IEEPA”),” during the second quarter of 2026, according to its SEC filing. The amount represented the “significant majority of refunds” it expects to receive. Amazon has said it may offer refunds to only a limited number of customers impacted by the tariffs.

Target received almost a billion dollars in refunds during the second quarter, it said on Wednesday. The department store received $994 million in tariff refunds, adding $752 million to net earnings for a total of $1.88 billion and $1.65 to earnings per share. 

Target CFO Jim Lee confirmed the company will not issue refunds as a result of the company’s IEEPA refunds, but will use the money towards bringing lower prices. “We have, and we will continue to, invest in price to ensure our guests are getting tremendous value each and every time they visit us at Target,” Lee told Modern Retail.

Nike has also recovered most of what it was owed. The sportswear company said it expected to recover $986 million. According to its filing, Nike had received $302 million as of May 31, and recorded another $684 million as “outstanding IEEPA tariff receivable.” Nike has remained quiet on whether consumers will see any refunds, even as consumers sue the company for not refunding tariff-related costs.

FedEx is a different case—the company and its competitor UPS have begun returning refunds to consumers earlier this month. The delivery company said its reported cash balance included approximately $800 million in IEEPA tariff refunds, but that money was being held for refunds to customers, according to its filing. FedEx previously sued the federal government seeking a full refund of tariffs it had paid.

Received refunds, but unclear how much

The results are mixed for automakers. Ford reported a $1.3 billion one-time tariff benefit reflecting tariffs it paid between March 2025 and February 2026, per its filing, even as the company sued the Trump administration over refunds. Similarly, General Motors separately recorded a $500 million favorable adjustment tied to previously charged tariffs, which GM said it believed were refundable in its filing. Neither disclosure, however, confirms that the full amount had already been received in cash. Stellantis, the maker of Jeep and Ram, received a tariff refund of €400 million (about $467 million).

Other companies have reported large financial benefits without making clear how much has actually been received.

Apple reported a boost from tariff refunds, disclosing that the refunds added approximately two percentage points to its fiscal third-quarter gross margin and contributed 11 cents to diluted earnings per share. Apple said it will invest its tariff refund into domestic manufacturing

For other major companies, the tariff refund situation is unclear after they sued the Trump administration for refunds. 

Costco said it would issue tariff refunds to consumers after being hit with four class action lawsuits alleging the company passed on the tariffs costs and raised prices. Kohl’s, which paid about $190 million in tariffs, applied for roughly $140 million in refunds but said in its latest quarterly filing that it had not received any payments. Home Depot said in its May quarterly filing that it received an “immaterial amount” after the quarter ended, and its Aug. 18 earnings release said its guidance “includes IEEPA tariff refunds, which are expected to partially offset unplanned fuel, energy, and other product input costs.” Other companies that also sued the Trump administration include Revlon, J. Crew, and Bumble Bee Foods. 

Walmart said in a May disclosure that its financial guidance did not assume any impact from tariff refunds, saying it won’t offer refunds to consumers but that it will put that money toward lowering prices. Tesla was similarly cautious in its latest quarterly filing, stating that it may be eligible for refunds of previously paid tariffs, but that the recoverability and timing remained uncertain. The company previously sued the Trump administration over its China tariffs in 2020. 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Apple’s camera-equipped AirPods are still expected to arrive in late 2027, despite an apparent company video leak that made the unusual artificial-intelligence product appear ready for an earlier release.

The 13-second video was discovered inside the release-candidate version of macOS Tahoe 26.7, software normally distributed shortly before a public update. It shows a man wearing AirPods while looking at a physical book and asking Siri to remember it. The assistant describes a feature called Visual Intelligence that makes the user’s surroundings “saveable.”

The demonstration matters because it provides the clearest evidence yet of how Apple intends to move artificial intelligence beyond the iPhone screen. The cameras would not primarily take photographs or record conventional video. They would give Siri low-resolution visual information about whatever is in front of the wearer, allowing the assistant to identify an object, understand its context and respond to a spoken request.

A shopper could look at a product and ask Siri to remember it, compare it or locate it later. Someone preparing dinner could ask for recipes based on ingredients on a counter. Travelers could receive directions based on landmarks, while users with limited vision could ask the assistant to identify objects or describe their surroundings.

The leak, however, does not necessarily reveal the exact product Apple plans to sell in 2027.

Apple is reportedly developing at least two camera-equipped AirPods projects under the internal designations B790 and B798. References found inside macOS indicate that the leaked demonstration may involve B790, while the more advanced B798 model has been associated with the late-2027 release schedule. The video could therefore represent an earlier hardware version, a software demonstration or a product Apple is using internally to prepare Visual Intelligence before the final consumer device is ready.

That distinction is important because the most difficult part of the project is not placing a small camera inside an earbud. Apple must build visual-AI models capable of interpreting a constantly changing environment without producing dangerous or embarrassing mistakes. A phone camera is deliberately pointed at an object. Earbuds move with the wearer’s head, can be covered by hair or clothing and may capture incomplete or blurred information.

The project was reportedly intended for an earlier release but slipped partly because of Apple’s prolonged difficulties delivering its more advanced Siri. Without a reliable assistant capable of understanding context, remembering previous requests and connecting visual information with applications, camera-equipped AirPods would offer little more than expensive sensors.

Apple is also trying to solve a hardware problem that competing AI companies have approached through glasses. Meta’s camera-equipped Ray-Ban glasses place cameras near the wearer’s eyes, giving them a direct view of the scene. AirPods are less visually intrusive and already familiar to hundreds of millions of consumers, but the camera angle from a moving earbud could be less stable and less precise.

Privacy may become the largest obstacle. AirPods are small enough that people nearby may not realize they contain cameras. Apple reportedly does not intend the earbuds to function as covert recording devices and may include an external indicator when visual information is being processed or transmitted. But the company has not explained whether images would be analyzed entirely on the device, temporarily sent to an iPhone or uploaded to cloud servers.

Those details will determine whether consumers view the product as a useful assistant or an invisible surveillance device.

For Apple, the commercial opportunity is larger than selling another premium pair of earbuds. If AirPods can continuously connect Siri with the physical world, they could become an AI interface that users wear for hours—reducing the need to remove an iPhone, open an application and type a question.

The leaked video shows that Apple’s concept is no longer merely experimental. But it does not mean the finished product is imminent. The company still needs to prove that Visual Intelligence can see accurately, respond quickly, protect bystanders’ privacy and deliver enough practical value to justify putting cameras into one of the world’s most common personal accessories.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said the United States is unlikely to restart large-scale combat against Iran, signaling that Washington intends to rely on financial isolation and a continuing maritime blockade to pressure Tehran.

Bessent said the administration is preparing what he called “the toughest sanctions in history,” describing the combination of the blockade and expanded economic restrictions as a “one-two punch” designed to deprive Iran of oil revenue, foreign currency and access to international trade.

The strategy depends heavily on enforcement beyond Iran itself. Washington is expected to target foreign banks, refiners, shipping companies and trading networks that continue facilitating Iranian commerce, effectively forcing governments and businesses to choose between dealing with Tehran and retaining access to the American financial system.

China presents the largest test. It purchases more than 80% of Iran’s shipped oil and remains Tehran’s most important economic lifeline. Bessent urged Beijing to cooperate, arguing that China also has a major interest in stabilizing the Persian Gulf because roughly half of its energy supplies originate in the region.

Bessent said stronger economic pressure should reduce the likelihood that the United States will resume an expensive, large-scale military campaign. The administration’s calculation is that Iran can survive isolated strikes more easily than the sustained loss of oil revenue, banking access and commercial relationships.

The approach is not without risk. Cutting Iranian barrels from the market while shipping through the Strait of Hormuz remains constrained could push energy prices higher. Brent crude climbed above $94 Thursday as traders assessed whether the new campaign would further restrict supplies moving out of the Persian Gulf.

Bessent is expected to disclose additional details Monday, including how aggressively Washington will pursue companies and countries that continue doing business with Iran.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Rebel Creamery’s founders say they designed the company’s logo and ice cream pint packaging themselves in Adobe Illustrator. But that DIY branding design landed them in a nearly $24 million legal dispute.

The Utah-based, low-carb ice cream maker, whose products are sold at Target, Kroger, and Walmart nationwide, filed for bankruptcy on Aug. 14, days after appealing a federal judge’s order to pay rival Van Leeuwen Ice Cream millions over a trade-dress dispute.

According to a Chapter 11 filing in the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the District of Utah, the maker of Rebel ice cream listed $13.78 million in assets and $23.85 million in liabilities. The bankruptcy follows a July 16 ruling over allegations Rebel deliberately copied Van Leeuwen’s design. 

The dispute stems from Rebel’s packaging: solid-colored pint containers with a minimalist design and prominent black cursive lettering. Rebel’s founders told the court they designed the company’s logo and trade dress themselves in late 2017 using Adobe Illustrator, and claim not to have retained any drafts or initial records of the design.

In a July 16 memorandum and order, U.S. District Judge Eric Komitee found Rebel had intentionally infringed and diluted Van Leeuwen’s trade-dress, a legal term for the distinctive visual appearance of a product or its packaging.

“The evidence at that trial left no doubt that Rebel infringed and diluted Van Leeuwen’s trade dress and did so intentionally,” Komitee wrote.

Komitee issued Rebel to redesign its pints, writing the brand used “a near-identical color scheme and script on their packaging, with slight design differences to convey dietary information.”

“Van Leeuwen and Rebel are distributed at the same grocery stores often on the same shelf and are frequently intermingled,” Komitee wrote.

On Aug. 12, Rebel appealed Komitee’s ruling, and in the company’s bankruptcy filing two days later, Rebel listed the $24 million claim from Van Leeuwen “disputed” and “under appeal.”

“We are appealing the decision, and our products will continue to be widely available,” a spokesperson for Rebel told Fortune

The similar trade-dresses led to customer confusion

Van Leeuwen’s founders first noticed Rebel after an employee sent them a social media post of the company’s similar pint cup design in late 2018 or early 2019, according to the memorandum

They were “shocked,” telling the court  “it looked almost exactly like our packaging.” 

Van Leeuwen eventually sued Rebel in 2021, alleging Rebel’s packaging copied the look of its ice cream pints, and sought $36.4 million from its competitor’s profits. Rebel appealed the ruling, and reduced the final award to just under $24 million, allowing Rebel to claim one-third of sales for customers specifically seeking keto-friendly ice cream.

Van Leeuwen’s trade dress was created by the design studio Pentagram, which kept record of every iteration of the ice cream pint and logo design, and became key evidence used in court. 

Rebel formally stated they were unaware of Van Leeuwen’s existence when designing their trade dress in 2017, and were only made aware of the company a year later in a meeting with grocery store chain Wegmans. 

The ruling cited evidence from customer mix-ups in stores, including a 2024 complaint from a shopper who said her husband returned from the grocery store with a pint of Rebel instead of Van Leeuwen. 

“Your product was placed right next to Van Leeuwen and looked the same,” the customer wrote in a message to Rebel, according to the memorandum. “I nearly did the same thing when I shopped! Later, my friend shared the same experience on the other side of the country!”

Grocery store employees also reportedly confused the two brands when stocking the pints on shelves, and often accidentally assigned the wrong price stickers. At Walmart, Van Leeuwen had its own designated shelfspace, but some sections unintentionally housed many wrongly placed Rebel pints, according to the lawsuit.

Rebel and Van Leeuwen’s origin stories

Rebel was founded in late 2017 by married couple Austin and Courtney Archibald and initially raised money through a Kickstarter campaign, hitting their goal in only three hours and ultimately raising $80,000. The founders marketed their brand as a keto-friendly ice cream and claimed it had the lowest glycemic index on the market.

Van Leeuwen, meanwhile, was founded in New York City in 2008 by brothers Ben and Pete Van Leeuwen and Laura O’Neill, a friend of the Van Leeuwens, and Ben Van Leeuwen’s future wife. The trio opened their first bright yellow ice cream truck using $60,000 raised through crowdsourcing from 15 friends and family members. The brand focused on formulating ice cream with simple ingredients by limiting dyes and preservatives to offer dairy ice cream and vegan alternatives.

“We wanted every single guest who came into the store to feel like they were getting just as good of an experience as any other guests, regardless of their dietary restrictions,” Ben Van Leeuwen told Fortune in 2024.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

“Israeli companies are betting big on Texas, investing $3.2 billion and creating more than 4,200 jobs across our state,” Texas Senator Ted Cruz posted on X/Twitter.

The figures in Cruz’s post on Wednesday are based on US Bureau of Labor Statistics data from the 2024 financial year, which revealed that trade between Texas and Israel reached roughly $4b. in 2024. Texas exports to Israel totaled $757.9 million, and imports from Israel reached $3.2b.

This is the culmination of years of partnership.

In the last decade, Israeli companies reported 34 investment projects into Texas and, as mentioned, more than 4,200 new jobs.

During that same time period, Texas companies reported seven investment projects into Israel, $178.6m. in capital investment, and more than 545 new jobs.

Wiz is one of the Israeli companies with the highest capital investment in Texas over the past decade, according to Texas state officials. (credit: FLASH90)

Israel ranks among top sources of foreign investment, jobs in Texas

Israel is the 19th-largest source country for foreign direct investment (FDI) projects into Texas and the 17th-largest source for new jobs created by FDI. Texas itself is the number 1 exporting state in the USA and the leading state for FDI over the last two decades.

According to the Texas Governor’s Office and the Texas Economic Development & Tourism Office, the Israeli companies with the highest capital investment in Texas over the last 10 years are: Nofar; Doral; Wiz; Elbit Systems; Ellomay; Tower Semiconductor; Starplast; Incredo Sugar; Percepto; and BOS.

“Now that investment is expanding into AI, cyber, defense, water, and agriculture,” said Cruz. “Texas gets the jobs, the capital, and the technology. That’s a partnership worth growing.”

Additionally, the State of Texas Israel Office was approved during the 89th Legislative Session in 2025. As of August 2026, Texas is still in the process of establishing the office, having issued a request for proposals in June seeking a contractor to operate a physical office in Jerusalem. This marks a slight delay from the early-2026 planned launch date.

The deepening economic relationship is also reflected in capital markets.

Texas doubles investment in Israel Bonds to $280 million

In February, Acting Texas Comptroller Kelly Hancock announced that Texas was doubling its investment in Israel bonds from approximately $140m. to $280m., marking the largest one-time investment in Israel bonds in Texas history.

“Texas proudly stands with Israel,” Hancock said at the time. “This expanded investment reinforces our long-standing relationship and shared commitment to faith, freedom and economic opportunity. Texas and Israel have built a partnership that stretches beyond finance, and this step reflects both our solidarity and our belief in what we can accomplish together.”

In the private sphere, Commissioner Grant Moody has suggested potential collaboration between the Tel Aviv Stock Exchange and the planned Texas Stock Exchange in Dallas.

Moody, who represents Bexar County, spoke of opportunities around dual listings, cross-border investment, and institutional cooperation.

Texas currently operates two state-run trade offices in Mexico and Taiwan, but the Jerusalem-based office would mark Texas’ first permanent economic outpost in the Middle East.

The Jerusalem Post reached out to Ted Cruz’s office for comment.

This post was originally published on here

Five Americans were among seven people killed Wednesday when a helicopter carrying guests on a luxury safari crashed in the remote mountains of northern Kenya, turning a short flight between wildlife destinations into an international aviation investigation.

The Eurocopter EC130 B4 went down at approximately 9:13 a.m. near Mount Ololokwe in Samburu County, according to the Kenya Civil Aviation Authority. All six passengers and the pilot died.

The aircraft was flying from the Loisaba Conservancy toward the Ewaso Nyiro area, a route across one of Kenya’s most celebrated—and geographically isolated—safari regions. The excursion had been arranged for guests of luxury travel company &Beyond, while the flight itself was operated by Lady Lori Kenya.

That distinction will become important to the investigation. Safari companies often assemble a trip using independent aviation operators, lodges, guides and ground-transportation providers. Investigators will need to determine not only what happened in the air, but who controlled the aircraft, maintained it, approved the flight and assessed the conditions along the route.

Among those killed was José Alberto Suárez, a longtime Telemundo executive who served as president and general manager of the network’s stations in Orlando, Tampa and Fort Myers-Naples. NBCUniversal said Suárez had spent nearly two decades within its television operations and remembered him as a deeply respected leader.

Miami businessman Roger Edward Duarte was also killed. Duarte built George Stone Crab and later co-founded My Ceviche, developing a food business that earned him recognition on Forbes’ 30 Under 30 list.

The other American victims were identified as Adam Martin Hlavaty, Henry Parra and Stephany Maria Hollihan Vásconez.

Hollihan Vásconez was traveling with her husband, Michele Sensi-Contugi Ycaza, the director general of Ecuador’s Strategic Intelligence Center. Ecuador’s government confirmed his death, adding a national-security dimension to an accident that had initially been reported as a tourist aviation disaster.

The pilot, Josh Outram, also died.

The crash occurred in rocky, difficult-to-reach terrain, and a fire at the site complicated the initial recovery operation. Images from the region show why helicopters are used there: wildlife conservancies and river destinations can be separated by mountains, unpaved roads and hours of ground travel. Aircraft can turn that journey into a short transfer, but they also place passengers over areas where emergency crews cannot arrive quickly.

The EC130 B4 is a single-engine light helicopter commonly used for sightseeing and passenger transport because of its wide cabin and panoramic visibility. The aircraft type alone does not indicate what caused the crash, and Kenyan authorities have not reported evidence of a mechanical failure, pilot error or weather-related problem.

The Kenya Air Accident Investigation Department is leading the inquiry. Investigators are expected to examine the helicopter’s maintenance history, pilot records, weather conditions, flight planning and any recoverable aircraft data. The wreckage pattern and evidence of fire will also be analyzed to determine whether the aircraft experienced trouble before impact or whether the fire began afterward.

Lady Lori said it was cooperating with authorities. &Beyond said the cause remained unknown and that it was supporting those affected by the disaster. The U.S. State Department confirmed the deaths of five American citizens and said the U.S. Embassy was working with Kenyan authorities and assisting their families.

The crash strikes directly at Kenya’s high-end safari industry, where private aviation is not simply an attraction but part of the transportation system. Luxury itineraries frequently connect remote conservancies by helicopter or small aircraft, allowing travelers to reach wilderness areas that would otherwise require long and difficult drives.

That system depends heavily on confidence: confidence in operators, maintenance standards, pilots and the local regulators overseeing them. Until investigators determine why this helicopter went down, the most consequential question for Kenya’s safari business will remain unanswered—whether this was an isolated tragedy or a warning about a broader weakness in the aviation network carrying tourists into its most remote destinations.

JBizNews Desk | Samburu County, Kenya

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A dollar wired to Israel today buys less than it did a month ago. The Bank of Israel set the representative rate on Monday, Aug. 17, at NIS 2.95 to the dollar, and over the past month the shekel has gained about 2.5% against the American currency — enough to make it the best-performing currency in the world over that stretch, according to Meitav.

The arithmetic is easy to follow. Send $1,000 to Israel in mid-July and it converted to roughly 3,020 shekels. The same $1,000 today comes out around 2,950 — about 70 shekels less. A family covering NIS 8,000 a month in Jerusalem rent for a child in school is now paying close to $66 more each month for the identical apartment. Nothing about the rent changed. The exchange rate did.

Two things are pushing in the same direction. The dollar itself has sagged to its weakest level in roughly two months, after softer American economic data cooled expectations for another Federal Reserve rate increase. Traders now put the odds of a hike at the Fed’s next meeting near one in three, down from about three in four at the end of July. At the same time, a strong run on Wall Street — the S&P 500 has added more than 3% in a month — tends to pull money toward the shekel, a pattern Israeli strategists have tracked for years.

The shekel is also simply outrunning its peers. The euro gained 1.5% against the dollar over the same month and the British pound 1.8%. Israel’s currency did better than both.

Inside Israel, the strong shekel is doing quiet work on prices. Imported goods, fuel and anything priced in dollars cost less in shekel terms, and annual inflation has drifted down to 1.5%, below the midpoint of the Bank of Israel’s 1% to 3% target range. IBI chief economist Rafi Gozlan cautions that the relief is temporary: much of the recent moderation came from the currency itself, and as that effect fades against a tight labor market with more demand for workers than supply, inflation is likely to pick back up later this year.

The pain sits with Israeli exporters and manufacturers, who collect revenue in dollars and pay wages and rent in shekels. Every point of appreciation shaves their margins. Their trade groups have spent months pressing the central bank for deeper interest rate cuts and for dollar buying to slow the climb — a tool the Bank of Israel used sparingly in June and has otherwise kept holstered.

That is the decision in front of Governor Amir Yaron. Cutting rates or buying dollars would ease the squeeze on factories and tech firms but risks reigniting the inflation that the strong shekel has been suppressing. For American families and businesses sending money to Israel, the practical takeaway is narrower: the cost of doing so has been rising for a year, and nothing in this month’s numbers suggests it is about to reverse.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Federal agencies are warning that hackers are actively targeting industrial control systems used across U.S. water plants, factories, energy facilities and other critical infrastructure.

The NSA, FBI, Department of Energy, EPA and Cybersecurity and Infrastructure Security Agency said Wednesday there is an “active threat” targeting Siemens S7 Series programmable logic controllers.

Siemens said Thursday that it had not detected an increased level of attacks or any previously unknown vulnerabilities affecting its industrial control systems products.

The devices are used to monitor and control industrial equipment across sectors including manufacturing, energy, water and wastewater, chemicals, food and agriculture.

A successful attack could disrupt critical operations, force facilities offline, damage equipment and create safety hazards, according to the advisory. Officials also warned that breaches could trigger cascading disruptions across interconnected systems.

THOUSANDS OF NORTH KOREAN IT WORKERS ARE INFILTRATING CORPORATE AMERICA

The government said hackers are increasingly using artificial intelligence to make such attacks easier, dramatically reducing the expertise and time needed to develop tools capable of exploiting industrial systems.

According to the advisory, attackers are scanning the internet for exposed or poorly protected Siemens controllers and using AI-generated tools to help gain access to them.

Federal agencies said the activity appears aimed in part at studying targeted systems and developing the ability to disrupt operations in the future.

Such attacks could affect production, public services and supply chains, while also causing equipment damage or prolonged downtime.

Officials also warned that some operators may not realize their systems are exposed, particularly when outside vendors have remote access to industrial equipment.

The warning comes amid a recent wave of cyberattacks against local water systems that cybersecurity experts suspect may have links to Iran, though federal officials have not formally attributed those incidents to Tehran.

CISA warned July 30 of a significant increase in attacks targeting programmable logic controllers. Days earlier, the agency said Iranian-affiliated hackers had been exploiting industrial equipment made by Siemens, Rockwell Automation and Schneider Electric.

RUSSIAN HACKERS EXPLOITING VULNERABLE INTERNET ROUTERS, NSA WARNS

Concerns intensified after Minnesota became the first state to report a wave of at least 30 cyber incidents involving local water systems on July 26 and July 27.

Federal officials have stopped short of blaming Iran for those attacks. President Donald Trump said July 31 that he did not believe Tehran was responsible and instead criticized Minnesota over the incidents.

The latest warning underscores the vulnerability of operational technology — systems that control physical equipment rather than simply store corporate data.

HACKERS ARE GOING AFTER WHATEVER THEY CAN ATTACK TO MAKE NEWS, RUBRIK CEO SAYS

Unlike conventional cyberattacks focused on stealing information, attacks on industrial control systems can have direct physical and economic consequences, potentially interrupting utilities, shutting down production or damaging costly equipment.

Siemens told FOX Business that it is aware of the alert and is coordinating with CISA.

“Siemens will provide updates around this issue to potentially affected customers through our ProductCERT team,” a company spokesperson said. “At this point in time, we have not identified increased attack levels or unknown vulnerabilities in Siemens ICS products.”

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The potential fallout can extend beyond an individual facility, affecting businesses and services that rely on interconnected industrial systems.

Reuters contributed to this report. 

This post was originally published here

New York Governor Kathy Hochul warned Holocaust survivors and their families on Wednesday about potential restitution-related fraud.

This follows an alert by the New York State Department of Financial Services (DFS) regarding correspondence issued by an entity referring to itself as the “Jewish Holocaust Claims Center” or “JHCC,” urging individuals to contact them to submit a claim for compensation.

DFS said it cannot verify the identity, services, or legitimacy of the entity calling itself the JHCC, and encouraged Holocaust survivors and their families to exercise caution when contacted regarding potential eligibility for compensation or restitution.

DFS has referred the scam to the appropriate law enforcement authorities, and reported the entity’s website to its hosting provider. The fraudulent website has since been removed.

“Scamming and stealing from Holocaust survivors and their families is the lowest of lows,” Hochul said.

New York Gov. Kathy Hochul arrives for the annual New York State Financial Control Board meeting on August 12, 2026 in New York City. (credit: MICHAEL M. SANTIAGO/GETTY IMAGES)

“This program delivers justice to Holocaust survivors who’ve suffered through the unspeakable, and I’m committed to ensuring New York State protects survivors and their families, and provides the assistance and assets these New Yorkers deserve.”

DFS Acting Superintendent Kaitlin Asrow said her department is committed to ensuring that Holocaust survivors and their families can pursue restitution without fear, and that it will keep working to protect survivors and help families recover assets that were wrongfully taken from them.

DFS’s Holocaust Claims Processing Office (HCPO) was created in 1997 to help Holocaust victims and their descendants recover assets deposited in banks; unpaid proceeds of insurance policies issued by European insurers; and artworks that were lost, looted, or sold under duress. The HCPO does not charge claimants for its services.

Claims Conference cautions Holocaust survivors over unsolicited claims

The Claims Conference also warned against the scam, and encouraged Holocaust survivors and their families to always exercise caution when receiving unsolicited communications concerning compensation, restitution, or Holocaust-related claims.

“The Claims Conference is not affiliated with this organization, has not authorized these communications, and is not involved in sending or administering these letters. This letter is not legitimate. We are not familiar with this organization and cannot verify its identity, services, representations, or legitimacy.”

It recommended that individuals do not provide personal, financial, identification, banking, family history, or other sensitive information to an organization or individual whose identity and legitimacy they have not independently verified.

The Claims Conference stressed that it does not charge survivors or their families a fee to apply for compensation programs, and it does not require applicants to retain a lawyer or other paid intermediary to apply for benefits administered by the Claims Conference.

Targeting families in Atlanta

The fraudulent JHCC also reached out to several families in Atlanta. One recipient, Gary Alleman, shared the letter with a local Atlanta media site.

The letter, sent by alleged JHCC Regional Officer Coordinator Lisa Shakespeare, claims that it has “records [that] indicate that your family name has been identified among those potentially eligible for compensation.”

It attaches a mailing address in Vancouver, as well as a telephone number, email, fax, and reference number. The Jerusalem Post checked the address and found it to be the physical address of the Jewish Community Center of Greater Vancouver. There were no returns on individuals named Lisa Shakespeare.

Multiple individuals have since posted on social media that their parents received the same letter, with the same text.

Stacy Hydrick, director of the Antisemitism Response Network at Jewish Federation of Greater Atlanta, said, “The Jewish Federation of Greater Atlanta is aware of these communications and is working with the Georgia Commission on the Holocaust to ensure community members have accurate information.”

“We encourage anyone who receives suspicious communication regarding Holocaust reparations not to provide personal information and to verify its legitimacy through trusted sources.”

This is not the first Holocaust restitution-related scam to occur in the US.

In 2013, the US Department of Justice uncovered a decade-long scheme involving employees of the Conference on Jewish Material Claims Against Germany and outside recruiters. These parties stole more than $57 million from compensation programs intended for Holocaust survivors by submitting thousands of fraudulent applications to the Claims Conference’s Hardship Fund and Article 2 Fund. In total, 31 people were charged in connection with this scheme, including 10 former Claims Conference employees.

This post was originally published on here

The U.S. economy is currently “worse” than when former President Joe Biden departed office last year, economic and political commentator Peter Schiff asserted, warning that the nation faces the “threat” of a Democratic socialist winning the White House during the 2028 presidential election.

President Donald Trump is “unpopular because the economy is worse now than it was when Biden left office,” Schiff, chief economist and global strategist of Euro Pacific Asset Management and host of “The Peter Schiff Show” podcast, told Fox News Digital during an interview on Wednesday. 

“So Trump ran promising to fix what Biden broke,” but then “broke it more,” Schiff asserted. 

“He said that prices will come down on day one as soon as I become president,” Schiff said, adding “inflation is a bigger problem now than it was when Trump was elected.”

Fox News Digital reached out to the White House on Thursday.

TRUMP’S APPROVAL RATING PLUMMETS TO NEW LOW AHEAD OF CRITICAL MIDTERMS: ‘MORE WORK TO DO’

While Republicans currently hold majorities in both chambers of Congress, Schiff said that he thinks the GOP will lose many House seats in the midterm elections this year and that they “have a real chance of losing the Senate too.”

Schiff said he expects the party to lose control of the Senate in 2028 if they haven’t lost their majority in the chamber before then and that he thinks the GOP will lose the presidency in 2028 as well. He warned that “the real threat” looming over the 2028 White House contest is the possibility of “a real Democratic socialist” getting elected as president.

Schiff, who is involved in selling precious metals through SchiffGold, made a case for people buying gold and silver. “Buy real money. That will preserve its purchasing power,” he said.

HOW MUCH HAS THE NATIONAL DEBT GROWN UNDER PRESIDENT TRUMP?

He argued that investors should be diversifying into “stocks in international markets” to protect against “a weak U.S. dollar.”

Schiff said “stagflation” will “be a big problem for the U.S. economy for years to come,” warning of a “crisis” pertaining to “sovereign debt” as well as “currency.”

“But I want people to understand that this is not about a failure of capitalism. It’s about a failure to have capitalism. It’s a failure of central planning, central government, central banking. It’s big government that interfered with the free market that created the problem. And the solutions that are gonna be proposed by government to increase the size of government, to have even more regulation, to have even more taxes, they will just make all the problems worse,” Schiff said.

The U.S. national debt has surpassed $40 trillion, according to the U.S. Treasury.

“We need to rein in government. We need massive cuts to government spending, deregulation, we need free market forces,” he said.

US NATIONAL DEBT HITS $40 TRILLION MILESTONE FOR FIRST TIME EVER

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Schiff said that “Republicans are in a predicament because doing the right thing economically is probably political suicide, which is why they won’t do it.”

This post was originally published here

Mortgage rates fell for the second week in a row, mortgage buyer Freddie Mac said Thursday.

Freddie Mac’s latest Primary Mortgage Market Survey, released Thursday, showed the average rate on the benchmark 30-year fixed mortgage fell to 6.65% from last week’s reading of 6.67%. 

The average rate on a 30-year loan was 6.58% a year ago.

SLOWING LABOR MARKET CREATES NEW HURDLE FOR FIRST-TIME HOMEBUYERS FACING AFFORDABILITY SQUEEZE

The average rate on a 15-year fixed mortgage fell to 5.95% from last week’s reading of 5.96%.

Mortgage rates are affected by several factors, including the Federal Reserve and geopolitics. Though mortgage rates are not directly affected by the Fed’s interest rate decisions, they closely track the 10-year Treasury yield. The 10-year yield hovered around 4.7% as of Thursday afternoon.

This post was originally published here

Investors have poured approximately $366 billion into California companies since the beginning of 2026—more than three times the venture capital raised by companies in the other 49 states combined.

The arithmetic is difficult to overstate. The rest of the country together attracted less than approximately $122 billion. New York, the runner-up, received about $27 billion, meaning California raised more than 13 times as much as its nearest competitor. The state has already collected nearly twice as much venture funding as it did during its previous record year in 2025.

One industry explains most of it. OpenAI raised $122 billion in March, the largest financing round in Silicon Valley history. Anthropic secured another $95 billion across two rounds. Those two artificial-intelligence companies alone account for $217 billion—nearly 60 cents of every venture dollar invested in California this year.

That is enough money to distort an entire national map. Remove OpenAI and Anthropic, and California would still lead the country. Include them, and two companies headquartered within the same technology cluster raised substantially more than all startups in the other 49 states combined.

It is important to understand how the count works. Venture funding is generally credited to the state where the company is headquartered, not necessarily where the money will ultimately be spent. If a San Francisco AI company raises billions and uses part of it to purchase chips or build data centers in Texas, Georgia or another state, the entire financing round still appears in California’s column.

California therefore receives the investment headline, while other states can receive the construction jobs, electricity demand, land purchases and equipment orders created by that money.

The boom is broader than two enormous financings, although the largest rounds dominate the total. More than 4,000 California startups have raised capital this year. Torrance-based defense manufacturer Hadrian Automation announced a $1.37 billion round in August, while live-commerce company Whatnot raised $545 million.

Southern California is developing its own version of the boom around defense, aerospace and advanced manufacturing, while the Bay Area remains the center of AI models, software and venture financing. The result is not one California investment story but two: concentrated AI wealth in the north and a growing defense-and-space cluster in the south.

The jobs tell a more complicated story. California’s technology sector has lost roughly 110,000 positions since 2022, even as investment reached unprecedented levels. Technology companies are directing more capital toward chips, computing capacity, electricity and highly compensated AI specialists while reducing payrolls elsewhere.

Record venture funding, in other words, does not mean record hiring. A $10 billion AI financing can lift California’s investment total without creating anything close to the number of jobs once associated with a similarly large factory or corporate expansion.

The money is nevertheless reaching California’s broader economy. The state collected approximately $147 billion in personal-income taxes during the fiscal year that ended June 30, compared with the $126 billion previously projected. Rising technology compensation, stock-market gains and AI-related wealth helped produce the difference, giving Sacramento additional room for education, reserves and infrastructure.

California is also trying to protect its advantage. Gov. Gavin Newsom signed legislation in July extending the California Competes Tax Credit, which offers businesses tax incentives to remain, expand or create jobs in the state. That extension comes as California confronts high housing costs, extensive regulation and a proposed one-time 5% billionaire tax that critics warn could drive wealthy founders and investors elsewhere.

Tax incentives alone, however, do not explain the $366 billion. Capital is following a cluster that took decades to assemble: Stanford and Berkeley researchers, experienced founders, semiconductor specialists, AI engineers and investors capable of writing multibillion-dollar checks.

Other states may not be able to reproduce that network quickly. Their more immediate opportunity lies beneath it—providing the power plants, transmission lines, data centers, construction crews and land required to operate the AI systems California companies are financing.

That is the divide hidden inside the record. California is collecting the capital and creating much of the intellectual property. A growing share of the physical economy needed to support it may be built somewhere else.

JBizNews Desk | San Francisco

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump’s administration has told Congress it is sending more than $206 million for a proposed Gaza peacekeeping force, the first significant funding for the stalled US plan to rebuild the devastated enclave.

In two July 30-dated notifications seen by Reuters, the State Department informed Congress it will provide $200 million for the International Stabilization Force’s (ISF) equipment, infrastructure, vehicles and operational costs. An additional $6 million would repurpose US armored vehicles to support the force.

The notifications, which were addressed to key appropriations and foreign affairs committees in Congress, have not been previously reported.

The funding is the first concrete US spending on the peacekeeping force and signals the administration’s determination to press ahead with Trump’s Gaza roadmap even as both Israel and Hamas have balked at conditions needed to advance the plan.

“The ISF will lead security operations, support comprehensive demilitarization, and enable the safe delivery of humanitarian aid and reconstruction material to Gaza,” one of the notifications said, while noting the final composition of the force was still being negotiated.

PRIME MINISTER Benjamin Netanyahu meets with Gaza Board of Peace Director Nickolay Mladenov, May 13, 2026. (credit: MA'AYAN TOAF/GPO)

The administration has not said how much money will ultimately be needed to fund the force.

Trump set up a Board of Peace to oversee his ambitious plan to end Israel’s war in Gaza and rebuild the shattered territory. His plan envisioned that the peacekeeping force would deploy to Gaza to secure areas after Israeli forces withdraw and would train new Palestinian police forces and support aid deliveries.

Much of Gaza remains ​in ruins from two years of war triggered by the Hamas-led attacks on Israel on October 7, 2023.

But since the announcement of an agreement in late July, the effort has stalled, with both Israel and Hamas refusing to fulfill conditions that would allow the deal to move ahead.

Trump’s envoy and son-in-law Jared Kushner held meetings with Hamas officials on Sunday and Israeli leaders on Monday in Jerusalem but left without a breakthrough, with both sides standing firm on key demands.

An official from the Board of Peace described the last two weeks as a period of “significant advances” and said the board had sought additional funding pledges as a result.

The official, who was granted anonymity to speak freely with media, said the funding was needed for the construction of a base for forces inside Gaza among other reconstruction projects.

Member countries had initially pledged $17 billion for reconstruction efforts inside Gaza but Reuters reported in April that only a fraction of the funds had been received. The Board of Peace has not made public the amount that it has received so far.

The State Department did not immediately provide comment for this story.

Stalled plan

On July 30, Trump announced what he described as a breakthrough: that Hamas had agreed to lay down its arms in phases, ⁠as Israel’s military withdraws from Gaza. Hamas said it agreed to the roadmap but implementation depends on ​Israel first meeting its own commitments, including halting attacks and withdrawing.

Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, whose ruling coalition trails in opinion polls ahead of an October national election, rejected the deal this month, insisting that ​Israel would not pull back until Hamas is completely disarmed.

Five countries have committed troops to the ISF so far: Indonesia, Morocco, Kazakhstan, Kosovo and Albania, while Egypt and Jordan have committed to train police. It remains unclear when any troops would be able to deploy.

The first of the two congressional notifications addressed the $200 million in funding. The second, with the same date and worth around $6.3 million, said the US was repurposing nine armored personnel carriers previously destined for Nepal to support the ISF and that Albania and Kosovo would be the initial recipients of this equipment as part of their role in the ISF.

The ceasefire plan reduced violence in Gaza but has not ended Israeli attacks or secured the militants’ disarmament. More than 1,200 Palestinians and four Israeli soldiers have been killed in Gaza since a ceasefire was reached in October, ​according to Gazan health officials and the Israeli military.

Netanyahu ⁠and Kushner also agreed that Gaza’s reconstruction would not start until Hamas is disarmed, an Israeli official told Reuters earlier this week.

This post was originally published on here

The damage from artificial intelligence in the job market is not spread evenly across the economy. It is concentrated in a handful of industries and falls hardest on the people trying to get their first job.

Goldman Sachs published the findings Wednesday in a report titled “Global Economics Comment: Is AI Impacting Global Labor Markets?” The bank found that industries more exposed to AI automation have seen slower growth in job openings since the second half of 2022, with the effect most pronounced in the United States, Germany and Australia.

The onset of generative AI tools, the report said, “may have led companies in highly exposed industries to reevaluate their hiring plans.”

The clearest casualty is the call center. Call center employment in the U.S. now runs 39% below where the long-run trend says it should be. Canada is 33% below, Germany 27%. That is not subtle. Roughly two out of every five call center jobs that would ordinarily exist in America are not there.

Software publishing, management consulting and advertising show the same pattern, and employment across information and communication services has slowed in nearly every major developed economy since 2022. Outside the U.S., however, employment in those industries still sits near or above its long-run trend — meaning American workers in these fields are absorbing more of the hit than their counterparts abroad.

The age split is the sharpest finding. Across more than 800 occupations, a 10% level of AI exposure costs about 0.1 percentage points of annual headcount growth overall in the U.S., France and Canada. For entry-level roles in the U.S., that drag runs above 0.2 points — double the effect. The work that used to train a new hire, summarizing documents, drafting first passes, answering routine calls, is precisely the work software now does for a fraction of the cost.

The scale is real but not catastrophic. Goldman’s earlier research estimated AI was trimming about 16,000 jobs a month from U.S. payroll growth, later revised to roughly 11,000 by June as hiring in construction and other less-exposed sectors offset the losses. That reflects roughly 25,000 positions displaced monthly against about 9,000 created around AI tools. Set against an economy that typically adds 150,000 to 250,000 jobs a month in an expansion, AI is shaving off something on the order of 1 in 20 of those gains.

Goldman economists also note a counterweight: when technology cuts the cost of producing something, buyers often want more of it, which pulls workers back in. Hiring tied to data center construction and broader productivity gains is not captured in the bank’s current estimate.

The practical read for anyone entering the workforce is to look at exposure, not headlines. Call centers, entry-level marketing and junior consulting are contracting. Construction, skilled trades, healthcare and the physical buildout supporting AI itself are not. The pressure, Goldman concludes, is measurable and visible in the data — but still confined to a relatively narrow set of industries and workers.

For now.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Retired Indian Maj.-Gen. Gagan Deep Bakshi warned that the growing alignment among Turkey, Saudi Arabia, and Pakistan could pose a strategic threat to India, while stressing that New Delhi would not sacrifice its ties with Iran to accommodate Israel’s security concerns.

Speaking to the New Delhi-based network, Republic World, Bakshi argued that the emergence of what he calls a “Sunni NATO” in the Middle East is a source of strategic concern for India.

At the same time, he sent a clear message to Israel: The alliance between the two countries is important, but New Delhi will not give up its interests with Iran simply because of the war between Jerusalem and Tehran.

According to Bakshi, the agreement that took shape in Mecca among Turkey, Saudi Arabia, and Pakistan has created a new regional reality from India’s perspective. “A Sunni NATO comprising Turkey, Saudi Arabia, and Pakistan has been established in the Middle East, in Mecca, and that is a serious cause for concern,” he said.

Bakshi stressed that, from India’s perspective, Shi’ite Iran serves as an important counterweight to Pakistan.

Iran as a counterweight to Pakistan

“We very much need Shi’ite Iran to be on our side because Pakistan is our primary security headache. China may be the main threat, but together with it, Pakistan is our biggest security headache,” he said.

Bakshi compared the threat Iran represents in Israel’s eyes with that posed by Pakistan from India’s perspective.

“Iran does not have even a single nuclear bomb, and yet it is perceived as an existential threat to Israel. And what about Pakistan? A fundamentalist, jihadist Islamic state that possesses 180 nuclear warheads,” he claimed.

He added that India had not seen Israel display similar concern over Pakistan’s nuclear arsenal.

“We have not seen Israel losing sleep over the bombs in Pakistan’s hands because they are considered a threat only to India,” he said.

According to Bakshi, the rapprochement between Ankara and Islamabad is not merely theoretical. He cited Turkish assistance to Pakistan during Operation Sindoor, claiming that Turkey supplied it with nearly 1,000 unmanned aerial vehicles and helped operate them.

“This was already a ‘Sunni NATO,’ with or without an agreement. Turkey and Pakistan are already in an undeclared practical alliance,” he said.

Bakshi also noted that during the confrontation, Turkey sent a warship to the port of Karachi, arguing that this was another expression of the close security ties between the two countries.

“Turkey has the largest army in NATO,” he said, while questioning its ability to intervene directly in a war between India and Pakistan because of the geographical distance.

According to Bakshi, any Turkish force attempting to come to Pakistan’s aid would have to travel through the Mediterranean Sea and the Arabian Sea.

“The Indian Navy can tear apart any Turkish armada that tries to come to Pakistan’s aid,” he said.

India will not sacrifice its interests with Iran

A central part of Bakshi’s remarks was directed squarely at Israel. He stressed that India views Israel as a friend, but would not agree to subordinate its own interests to Israeli needs, particularly when it comes to Iran.

“I am afraid that at some point Israel will also have to be sensitive to Indian concerns,” he said. “We are not the 51st state of the United States, and for that matter we are also not an appendage or client state of Israel. We are friends, certainly. But vassals? No, sir.”

“You cannot simply whistle and make our senior leaders go here and there, and ask us to sacrifice our interests,” he said.

Bakshi specifically addressed possible pressure on India to distance itself from Iran because of the war.

“You cannot tell us: Throw Iran away because you are at war with it. When it comes to Iran, you cannot ask us to sacrifice our interests.”

According to Bakshi, relations with Iran are vital to India economically and geostrategically as well. He pointed to the possibility of purchasing Iranian oil at low prices, refining it at Indian refineries, and subsequently exporting the products to other markets.

Beyond that, he stressed Iran’s importance as an overland route for India.

“Iran provides India with the land bridge to Central Asia and the land bridge to Afghanistan, and these are of vital importance to us.”

India cannot afford to give up those routes because of the war between Israel and Iran, he said.

“We cannot close these land routes because Israel is at war with Iran.”

Bakshi concluded that the friendship between India and Israel remains important, but that from New Delhi’s perspective, it has clear limits when major security and economic interests are at stake. Against the backdrop of growing ties between Turkey and Pakistan, and Indian concerns over a broader Sunni alliance, he believes that India’s relationship with Iran is becoming more important, not less.

This post was originally published on here

The Treasury Department on Thursday moved forward with new rules for investments in Trump Accounts that aim to exclude investment funds rooted in environmental, social and governance (ESG) criteria, FOX Business has learned.

The rules restricting ESG funds from being included in Trump Accounts come alongside other rules ensuring that investment options in the accounts have low fees to ensure investors keep more of their money.

“Corporate America has rejected ESG ideology, and we will not allow it to be a part of Trump Accounts,” Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent told FOX Business in a statement.

“These accounts exist to build financial security for America’s children, not to advance political activism or ideological agendas,” Bessent added.

WHITE HOUSE UNVEILS TRUMP ACCOUNTS MOBILE APP AHEAD OF JULY 4 ROLLOUT

A Treasury Department official told FOX Business that under the proposed eligibility framework, an index would have to be designed primarily to measure the performance of a broad segment of the U.S. or global equity market using objective financial criteria.

The rule is intended to give families clear, transparent investment choices that are focused on cost, diversification and long-term financial performance.

ESG funds have faced criticism for their focus on other criteria, like the environmental and social policies of companies or their governance structures, ahead of investor returns.

WHAT ARE THE INVESTMENT OPTIONS FOR TRUMP ACCOUNTS?

Trump Accounts officially launched on July 4, and a Treasury spokeswoman said that in the month and a half since the launch, the number of families who have signed up for Trump Accounts has risen above 7 million.

Over 2 million of those who have enrolled to date are eligible for the $1,000 seed fund from the federal government, which is available for children born between the start of 2025 and end of 2028 under the One Big Beautiful Bill Act.

Trump Accounts may also be created for children under the age of 18, although those who were born outside the 2025 to 2028 window aren’t eligible for the government’s seed money.

MICHAEL DELL CELEBRATES AMERICA’S 250TH BIRTHDAY WITH GIFT TO SEED THE AMERICAN DREAM FOR MILLIONS OF KIDS

The Treasury spokeswoman also noted that since the launch there has been over $1.5 billion in investment contributions from individuals as well as contributions from pilot programs.

That figure doesn’t include philanthropic contributions, such as the $6.25 billion contributed by billionaires Michael and Susan Dell, who helped fund $250 initial seed deposits into accounts for children under age 10.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

Washington Dulles International Airport is moving ahead with one of the largest airport reconstruction projects in U.S. history—a $19.9 billion overhaul that will rebuild its terminal, add new concourses and finally replace the slow passenger vehicles that carry travelers across the tarmac.

The Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority approved the plan Wednesday. It includes $6.2 billion to reconstruct the main terminal and $3.75 billion for underground tunnels and an automated passenger-transit system.

The tunnels would eliminate Dulles’ distinctive “people movers,” the aging mobile lounges that raise and lower passengers between the terminal and aircraft areas. Once considered innovative, the vehicles have become one of the airport’s most common passenger complaints.

The project will add or renovate approximately 5 million square feet. Work on the main terminal is expected to begin in late 2027, while major portions of the new transit system, terminal renovations and concourse construction are targeted for completion beginning in 2034. Other concourse work could continue into 2039.

Dulles needs the additional capacity. Passenger traffic increased 6.4% last year to a record 29 million, making it the fastest-growing large U.S. airport. United Airlines, which handles approximately 70% of Dulles traffic, will also begin using a new 14-gate concourse this fall.

Most of the overhaul will be financed through approximately $14.2 billion in municipal bonds rather than direct federal funding. But travelers may ultimately feel the cost. The amount airlines pay the airport for each boarding passenger is projected to rise from about $13 today to between $60 and $65 by 2038—an increase carriers could eventually reflect in ticket prices.

The approved $19.9 billion package also does not include the enormous parking garage and transportation center contained in President Donald Trump’s broader $22 billion vision for Dulles. Those additions would require separate approval and financing.

JBizNews Desk | Dulles, Virginia

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street opened lower Thursday as Walmart delivered a rare sales disappointment, Treasury yields moved back toward uncomfortable levels and another jump in oil prices reminded investors that the Iran confrontation is still capable of changing the inflation outlook almost overnight.

At the opening bell on Thursday, August 20, the Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 81.8 points to 53,381.22, the S&P 500 dropped 17.5 points to 7,690.49, and the Nasdaq Composite lost 119.6 points to 26,211.52.

The numbers themselves are not dramatic. The pressure underneath them is.

Long-term Treasury yields are climbing again after Wednesday’s extraordinary intervention by the Treasury Department, which announced it would at least double purchases of certain longer-dated government bonds. The move temporarily relieved a bond market that had been demanding increasingly high interest rates to finance Washington’s growing debt load, but Thursday morning the 10-year yield was again hovering near 4.7%.

Oil is adding to that pressure. Brent crude climbed to roughly $94 a barrel, while U.S. crude approached $87, after President Trump threatened a much tougher economic campaign against Iran. Higher oil prices matter far beyond energy stocks: they raise transportation and production costs and can make it harder for inflation to continue cooling.

Thursday’s economic data gave investors an unusual combination of low layoffs and very strong manufacturing activity.

New applications for unemployment benefits fell by 6,000 to 206,000 for the week ended August 15, below economists’ expectations of about 210,000. Continuing claims rose by 18,000 to 1.799 million. The message is that companies still are not laying workers off aggressively, even as hiring has softened.

At the same time, the Philadelphia Federal Reserve’s manufacturing index unexpectedly climbed to 47.4 in August from 41.4 in July, crushing expectations near 25 and reaching its strongest level in years. Employment inside the survey jumped sharply as well, while the prices-paid index dropped to 40.9 from 53.9.

The arithmetic for the Federal Reserve is complicated. A resilient labor market and stronger factory activity argue against rushing to lower rates, while easing price pressures argue that inflation may still be moving in the right direction. Investors already knew from Wednesday’s Fed minutes that a September rate increase has not completely disappeared from the discussion.

The biggest corporate story is Walmart.

Shares fell about 6% around the opening after Walmart’s U.S. comparable sales increased only 2.6%, versus expectations for roughly 3.8%. That was Walmart’s first comparable-sales miss in at least five years and a notable warning because the retailer has been one of the biggest beneficiaries of consumers trading down in search of lower prices.

Walmart itself is hardly collapsing. Quarterly revenue rose nearly 6% to $187.9 billion, U.S. e-commerce sales jumped 24%, its advertising business grew 43%, and the company actually raised its full-year sales forecast.

The concern is underneath those numbers: store traffic growth slowed and the average amount spent per transaction increased only 1.1%. Walmart also expects third-quarter adjusted earnings of 62 to 64 cents a share, below Wall Street expectations around 68 cents.

For investors trying to understand the consumer, that distinction matters. Americans are still shopping. They are simply becoming more selective about where the money goes.

Elsewhere, Alibaba’s U.S.-listed shares fell after adjusted profit missed expectations as the Chinese technology giant increased spending on artificial-intelligence infrastructure by 75%. Its cloud business is growing quickly — AI cloud and computing revenue jumped 45% — but investors are being reminded again that the global AI race requires enormous amounts of capital before those investments translate into profits.

Crypto is moving in the opposite direction. Bitcoin pushed above $70,000 after Trump urged Congress to pass the stalled Clarity Act following his White House meeting with cryptocurrency executives. Coinbase, Strategy, Circle, Robinhood and several crypto miners moved sharply higher.

Moderna, meanwhile, pulled back after Wednesday’s extraordinary 177% surge following successful late-stage results for its personalized mRNA melanoma treatment with Merck. The retreat is less a reversal of the medical news than investors recalibrating after one of the largest single-day moves ever for a major pharmaceutical company.

For the rest of Thursday, three markets deserve as much attention as the Dow itself: Treasury yields, crude oil and Walmart.

If the 10-year yield pushes materially above 4.7%, expensive technology and AI shares could again come under pressure. If oil continues climbing toward $90 in the U.S., the market will begin recalculating inflation expectations. And if Walmart’s decline spreads into other retailers, investors may start treating its sales miss as evidence of a broader consumer slowdown rather than a Walmart-specific quarter.

The Conference Board’s July Leading Economic Index is also scheduled for release at 10 a.m. ET and could provide another read on where the economy is headed.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited

American refineries are processing more crude oil than at any point since before the pandemic, and it still is not enough to bring prices down.

Refineries ran 17.4 million barrels of crude a day last week, according to Energy Information Administration figures reported Wednesday — above the previous wartime peak set in late July and the highest weekly pace since September 2019. Jet fuel output topped 2 million barrels a day for an 18th consecutive week, with gasoline and other fuels rising as well.

Here is why that matters. A refinery is the middle step between the oil well and the gas pump: it takes raw crude and turns it into gasoline, diesel and jet fuel. Early in the war, the problem was getting crude out of the Persian Gulf. The problem now sits one step further down the chain. Refineries are squeezed between the war and export restrictions, which limits how much crude they can convert into the fuels that actually move the economy. The world has crude. It is short of the finished product.

Drivers are paying for it. The national average for regular gasoline reached $4.07 a gallon Tuesday, up 30% from a year ago. Diesel is 48% more expensive than it was last summer.

Diesel is the one that reaches households indirectly. It powers the trucks, trains and farm tractors that move food and goods, so its price gets folded into the cost of nearly everything on a store shelf. Researchers at Brown University’s Climate Solutions Lab estimate higher diesel prices have cost American consumers close to $40 billion since the war began — roughly $300 per household.

The profit refiners are earning on that diesel explains why every plant in the country is running hard. The gap between the cost of a barrel of crude and what a barrel of diesel sells for hit $102 on Monday, an all-time record and nearly triple the level before the war. A barrel holds 42 gallons, so refiners are clearing roughly $2.40 on every gallon of diesel above what the crude cost them. Damage to Russian refineries has widened those margins further.

The uncomfortable part is what comes next. Refineries typically use the softer demand of autumn to shut down units for repairs. Plants running at maximum for months on end need that maintenance, and skipping it invites breakdowns that take capacity offline without warning. Deferring repairs to chase today’s margins is a bet that nothing breaks.

There is no quick fix available to Washington. Releasing crude from the strategic reserve does not help when the bottleneck is refining rather than oil supply. Building new refining capacity takes years. The realistic paths are a durable reopening of Gulf shipping, restored refining capacity in the Middle East and Russia, or demand cooling as consumers cut back.

For now, the fuel gauge is the honest indicator: American refineries have not run this hard in nearly seven years, and gas is still above $4.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

More than 100 people were killed when an artisanal gold mine collapsed in the Central African Republic on Tuesday, a senior official at a local mining association said. 

A prosecutor confirmed there had been a mine collapse in the village of Zamboye near the border with Cameroon but said the number of deaths and other details were still being established.

The prosecutor said in a statement that rescue efforts were continuing and an investigation would be opened to establish the cause and who was running the site.

A diamond and gold dealer inspects nuggets of gold in his shop on March 15, 2021 in the capital Bangui, Central African Republic. (credit: Siegfried Modola/Getty Images)

Cameroonian authorities ready to receive, treat any injured people crossing border

Cameroonian authorities said they were ready to receive and provide medical care to any injured people who crossed the border.

Artisanal mining supports livelihoods across Africa, but weak regulation and poor safety standards often lead to deadly accidents.

This post was originally published on here

A surprise staff strike at Ben-Gurion Airport concluded at 3:00 p.m. after workers halted all check-in counters an hour earlier on Thursday, declaring a “crisis” due to operational difficulties, challenges loading and unloading aircraft, and a shortage of parking stands.

According to N12 News, the majority of flights set to depart from Ben-Gurion today will do so without any luggage, with most of the airport’s employees yet to return.

Flights were grounded from 2:00 p.m after the Israel Airports Authority (IAA) said the union-directed work disruptions affected airport operations and services to the traveling public.

Approximately 100,000 travelers were expected to pass through Ben-Gurion Airport today, as more than 20 American refuelers occupy parking stands adjacent to Terminals 3 and 1.

This is lengthening the transport times of luggage to and from aircraft, as well as the shuttling of passengers to and from planes not connected to jet bridges.

Travellers at Ben Gurion International Airport. AUgust 11, 2026. (credit: NATI SHOHAT/FLASH90)

The Public Transport Authority confirmed its management has issued a demand to employees to “immediately cease any action that harms regular work and to restore operations to full routine. The Authority views with utmost severity any deliberate action liable to harm the traveling public and the proper functioning of Ben-Gurion Airport, especially during summer peak loads and high operational volumes.”

Labor leader Pinchas Idan calls it ‘torture,’ Miri Regev threatens severe action

Pinchas Idan, leader of the strike, said, “They give us such hard labor; management has no shame – they are torturing the employees of Ben-Gurion.”

‘Italian’ strike, work-to-rule strategy employed at airport

Employees have reportedly resorted to an “Italian” strike, also known as a “work-to-rule” or “slowdown” labor protest strategy, in which employees technically comply with their duties by following official rules and regulations while grinding work to a halt. 

This tactic is often used by sectors that are legally restricted from striking, such as customs agents, air traffic controllers, baggage handlers, and the like.

Senior sources in the Transportation Ministry emphasize that if it turns out to be an Italian strike at the peak of the travel season, “heads will roll and workers will go home.”

The director-general of the Transportation Ministry said, “We are investigating the incident; we are in a peak period with refuelers present, but if the investigation reveals an Italian strike, we will act with a very heavy hand against whoever is behind this.”

Udi Etzion and Jerusalem Post Staff contributed to this report.

This post was originally published on here

US President Donald Trump warned of economic consequences against any country that provided “any type of lifeline to Iran” as the United States looks to resolve a war it began alongside Israel nearly six months ago.

“This will be an ECONOMIC D-DAY,” Trump announced, adding that the US needed all its allies to aid in isolating Iran.

Thousands have been killed in the war, which quickly drew in Gulf nations and shocked global markets as Iran flexed its ability to curb shipping through the Strait of Hormuz, which carried about a fifth of the world’s traded oil before February.

The US and Iran have twice announced ceasefire deals, in April and June, aiming to restore the free flow of shipping through Hormuz on a path towards ending the conflict, but both quickly crumbled even as Israel has largely withdrawn from the fighting.

Trump promises ‘economic warfare, isolation on an unprecedented scale’

In a social media message on Wednesday, Trump promised “Economic Warfare and Isolation on an unprecedented scale,” although details were scant.

“ANY country that allows its financial institutions, businesses, airports, or government entities to provide any type of lifeline to Iran will itself face TREMENDOUS Economic Consequences,” Trump wrote.

Satellite imagery shows a broad overview of the Strait of Hormuz. July 16, 2026. (credit: Maps4media via Getty Images)

Iran Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi called Trump’s comments an attempt to divert American public opinion from domestic financial problems, including record debt and rising interest rates.

He said Washington’s insistence on policies he described as failed would bring further failures and alienate Iranians.

“America’s economic terrorism threatens the global economy and the national sovereignty of countries around the world,” he said on X.

Trump’s social media threats and announcements do not always get implemented as written, and he did not say what specific steps the US would take against such a country, which would appear to include US allies that have helped mediate peace talks, but he did not identify any.

UAE suspends all trade activities with Iran

On Tuesday, the United Arab Emirates, which hosts a major US military base, said it was suspending all trade activities, commercial exchanges and financial transactions with Iran until further notice.

The step came after the UAE defense ministry said it had detected two missiles launched from Iran that fell into the sea, a report Iran dismissed as baseless.

China buys more than 80% of Iran’s shipped oil, 2025 data from analytics firm Kpler shows, but the US risks retaliation should it engage in further economic warfare with China, a major exporter of items such as vital rare earth minerals to the US

Iran remains open to dialog with the US but does not confuse negotiations with surrender, Mohammad Mokhber, an adviser to Iran’s supreme leader, said on Tuesday, according to the semi-official Fars news agency.

Military pressure and sanctions would not break Iran’s resolve, Mokhber added.

On Tuesday, Trump said no talks were taking place with Iran. A day earlier, Jared Kushner, his son-in-law and special envoy, struck an upbeat tone, saying talks were still underway and “probably more robust” than ever.

Trump wants to seize Iran’s stockpile of highly enriched uranium and is seeking a new, more restrictive agreement curbing its nuclear energy and research programs, to replace one from which he unilaterally withdrew the US in 2018.

This post was originally published on here

Dr. Heidi Overton, a top White House aide, has been picked to lead the Food and Drug Administration, President Donald Trump announced Wednesday.

Overton is a medical doctor and deputy director of the White House Domestic Policy Council who has worked on several of Trump’s second-term health initiatives. She has become a trusted administration figure and a champion of the Republican president’s goals.

If confirmed by the Senate, she would have to balance a raft of competing priorities, including Trump’s fixations, the anti-regulatory interests of traditional Republicans and the anti-corporate posture of Health Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr.

Those challenges dogged the tenure of the previous FDA head, Dr. Marty Makary. He resigned in May, leaving behind unfinished projects such as work on ultraprocessed foods, antidepressants and COVID-19 shots.

Referring to her as “Dr. Heidi” in a Truth Social post, Trump said Overton was a smart and respected “rockstar” who would deliver on his priorities of faster cures, innovation, lower drug prices and more wins for Kennedy’s “Make America Healthy Again” movement.

Kennedy posted on X that Overton has “exceptional judgment, professionalism, discipline and an unwavering commitment to the American people.”

Overton has promoted Trump’s health priorities

Overton attended medical school at the University of New Mexico and has a doctoral degree in clinical investigation from Johns Hopkins University, according to her LinkedIn profile. Before joining Trump’s second administration, she was the chief policy officer at the America First Policy Institute, a conservative think tank.

In recent months, she has appeared with the president to announce major projects, including some of his “most favored nation” deals with drug companies to lower prices to those of other developed countries and his recent vaccine order that sought to split the combined measles, mumps and rubella (MMR) vaccine into three separate immunizations — against the advice of medical groups.

At an Oval Office event to promote that order, she stood by Trump as he falsely suggested the number or timing of vaccines could play a role in rising rates of autism spectrum disorder. Scientific consensus and decades of studies have firmly concluded there is no link.

Overton has been critical of abortion pills and, if confirmed, would be positioned to roll back FDA rules that made them more accessible. U.S. abortion opponents have expressed frustration that the administration has not acted to stem the flow of such pills prescribed online, a situation they view as undermining state abortion bans.

Mifepristone is typically used with misoprostol in medication abortions that make up close to two-thirds of abortions in the U.S. Medical professionals call it “among the safest medications” ever approved by the FDA.

To be confirmed, Overton must seek approval from a narrowly Republican-led Senate and face questions from the Senate Health, Education, Labor and Pensions Committee. Its chair, Republican Sen. Bill Cassidy, a physician from Louisiana, has been a vocal critic of some of Trump’s actions to sow doubt in vaccinations, including the MMR order.

Cassidy posted Wednesday that while he respects Overton’s medical background, he has “strong concerns” about the nomination, mentioning her lack of managerial experience and her participation in the recent vaccine order, which he called “almost disqualifying.”

Democratic senators slammed the nomination.

“Heidi Overton is a far-right, anti-abortion extremist who has no business leading the FDA,” posted Washington Sen. Patty Murray, a committee member.

Makary’s replacement will face challenges he left behind

Before he left the FDA, Makary had drawn complaints from health industry executives and anti-abortion activists. The frustration with him came to a head over the agency’s lack of movement on flavored e-cigarettes. Companies such as R.J. Reynolds are seeking to market to adult smokers, but sweet-flavored vapes have long been blamed for the trend of teenage vaping. FDA scientists have hesitated to endorse those products to curb adult smoking.

Days before Makary’s departure, the agency opened the door to allowing more unauthorized electronic cigarettes and nicotine pouches onto the U.S. market, in a policy change that essentially bypassed FDA experts.

Pharmaceutical companies will be looking for changes at the agency, too, after rejections or reversals of biotech drugs intended for rare diseases. Complaints from biotech companies, investors and patient groups have grown and been taken up by conservative lawmakers.

Makary tried to assuage industry grievances, in part by announcing new programs designed to streamline or accelerate drug approvals. Some of those initiatives, however, have meant new headaches for the agency.

Several of Makary’s deputies also exited the agency.

Dr. Vinay Prasad, the vaccine and biotech chief, stepped down in April following intense criticism from drugmakers, patients and investors. Dr. Tracy Beth Hoeg, who was involved in scrutinizing the safety of antidepressants, COVID-19 vaccines and other widely used therapies, was replaced as FDA’s acting drug center director.

MAHA has high expectations of FDA’s next head

Overton would also need to tend to the priorities of Kennedy’s health movement, some members of which are already skeptical of her.

Kelly Ryerson, an activist critical of pesticides who is known to her supporters as “Glyphosate Girl,” told The Associated Press that Overton parroted pesticide manufacturer Bayer’s talking points in a MAHA roundtable at the White House in April.

“I was stunned by the blatant, undisguised corruption,” Ryerson said.

One major decision for the next commissioner is what to do about peptide regulation. A panel of federal health advisers selected by Kennedy recently recommended easing access to several peptides that are popular with wellness influencers and celebrities, despite warnings from FDA scientists that the chemicals have not been shown to be safe or effective.

The agency recently proposed a rule change that would require food manufacturers to notify regulators before introducing new ingredients or additives into processed or packaged foods. But it is still working with the White House to finalize a first-of-its-kind definition of ultraprocessed foods, which Kennedy blames for elevated rates of diabetes, obesity and other chronic conditions.

Under Kennedy, the FDA has set up extra hurdles for vaccine testing and blocked the publication of research into the effectiveness of COVID-19 shots. Kennedy stood by Trump recently as the president signed the executive order aimed at upending childhood vaccinations in the U.S. despite unprecedented financial and logistical challenges.

The FDA also has an ongoing review of widely used antidepressants, including whether they may increase the risk of autism and other disorders when used during pregnancy. The medicines have long been a target of Kennedy, who was a leader in the anti-vaccine movement before joining the government.

In recent weeks, the agency has been investigating two summertime foodborne illness outbreaks: a cyclospora outbreak linked to tainted iceberg lettuce that has sickened thousands of people and a multistate salmonella outbreak linked to jalapeño peppers.

___

Swenson reported from New York. Associated Press journalist Laura Ungar contributed from Louisville, Kentucky.

___

The Associated Press Health and Science Department receives support from the Howard Hughes Medical Institute’s Department of Science Education and the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation. The AP is solely responsible for all content.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Walmart just delivered one of the clearest signals yet that American consumers are becoming more cautious.

U.S. comparable sales rose 2.6% in the latest quarter, the weakest increase in six years and sharply below the 4.1% growth Walmart posted in the previous quarter. Wall Street had expected roughly 3.8%.

The last time Walmart’s comparable U.S. sales grew more slowly was the quarter ending January 2020, when the increase was 1.9%.

That matters because Walmart sees more than 150 million customers each week and sells everything from groceries and prescriptions to televisions and clothing. When spending patterns change there, they often say something broader about the American household.

Consumers are still buying necessities. Grocery volumes remained relatively strong, but discretionary spending is under more pressure as higher gasoline and everyday living costs eat into household budgets.

The weakness was also partly technical. New federal rules limiting prices on certain high-cost Medicare drugs reduced pharmacy revenue. Excluding Walmart’s health-and-wellness business, comparable sales would have risen 3.4% — better, but still below expectations.

Online shopping remains the bright spot. Walmart’s U.S. e-commerce sales climbed 24%, although that too slowed from 26% in the previous quarter.

Overall company revenue rose 5.9% to $187.94 billion, and quarterly net income reached $6.37 billion. Walmart also slightly raised its full-year sales and profit outlook, helped by growth in e-commerce and its highly profitable advertising business.

But the consumer message inside the numbers was difficult to miss.

Walmart has already cut prices on more than 7,000 items, and the retailer says it plans to use much of a multibillion-dollar tariff refund to hold down or reduce prices through the end of the year.

That is an unusually aggressive move for a company that already competes primarily on price.

Walmart shares fell about 6% in premarket trading after the report, as investors focused on the sales slowdown and cautious outlook for the coming quarter.

The company still expects to grow this year. What changed is the speed.

For six years, Walmart managed to keep comparable sales growing faster than this. Now even the country’s largest retailer — and one of the biggest beneficiaries when consumers trade down — is seeing shoppers become more selective.

JBizNews Desk | Bentonville, Arkansas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Bitcoin climbed above $70,000 and Ether rose more than 3% after President Donald Trump urged Congress to pass legislation that would establish long-awaited rules for the American cryptocurrency market.

Bitcoin gained 3.4%, while Ether advanced 3.3%. The rally spread across the industry: Coinbase, Strategy and major crypto-mining companies rose between 3% and 10%, while equipment maker Canaan surged roughly 20%.

Trump delivered the message alongside crypto and financial executives at the White House, renewing his pledge to make the United States the “crypto capital of the world.”

The Clarity Act would answer the question that has hung over the industry for years: when is a digital asset a security regulated by the Securities and Exchange Commission, and when is it a commodity overseen by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission?

That distinction determines how tokens may be issued, traded and offered to customers. Clearer rules could make banks and institutional investors more willing to enter the market without fearing that regulators will later classify an asset differently.

The bill remains stalled amid disagreements over ethics provisions intended to prevent presidents and other senior officials from profiting through personal cryptocurrency ventures. The Senate is expected to revisit the legislation in September.

Crypto also benefited from the Treasury Department’s expanded purchases of long-term government debt, which pushed bond yields lower and increased investor demand for riskier assets. Even after the latest rally, however, Bitcoin remains roughly 18% lower for the year.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A new report by Wells Fargo spotlights how GLP-1 weight loss drugs are reshaping the healthcare industry by addressing obesity.

Wells Fargo released a report Thursday which notes that much of the American healthcare system has been structured around obesity, given it has become a foundational condition in the country with 40.3% of adults considered obese and 9.4% severely obese.

Usage of GLP-1 drugs surged in recent years, rising over 140% from 2022 to 2024, which had a significant impact on hospital services aimed at treating obesity. In that same timeframe, bariatric surgery volumes fell 34.1%.

MAJOR PBMS TO BOOST PRESCRIPTION DRUG PRICE TRANSPARENCY THROUGH TRUMPRX

“GLP-1s may be marketed as weight-loss drugs, but they’re rapidly becoming one of the most disruptive economic forces in healthcare,” John Teasley, market executive for Wells Fargo Healthcare Banking, told FOX Business. “We’re seeing a medication class with the potential to reshape how providers generate revenue, where investors allocate capital, and how consumers engage with their health.”

The report said that the healthcare system and hospitals in particular are having to adapt to a changing landscape caused by the rise of GLP-1 semaglutide drugs, as obesity patients who previously would’ve undergone surgery after attempting to diet now have a pharmaceutical alternative that is “visible, reversible, and socially normalized.”

AMERICANS SAVE MORE THAN $700M ON PRESCRIPTION MEDICATIONS THROUGH TRUMPRX, WHITE HOUSE SAYS

GLP-1s may also have an impact on cardiology, with a trial showing that their use reduced major cardiovascular events by 20% in overweight or obese adults without diabetes. If that trend prevails at scale, hospitals would see fewer procedures, repeat admissions, complications and other downstream interventions – leading to a sizable reduction in demand for those services.

Other aspects of managing chronic obesity may also evolve with increased use of GLP-1 therapies, with more longitudinal management, outpatient visits, side effect monitoring and medication management. It could also have implications for treating comorbidities driven by obesity, like knee and hip replacements, sleep apnea and metabolic liver disease, the Wells Fargo analysts noted.

“The biggest takeaway from our research isn’t that healthcare is shrinking, it’s that healthcare is being rewired,” Teasley said.

ROUGHLY 23 MILLION AMERICANS TRAPPED IN JOBS THEY WANT TO LEAVE OVER ONE COSTLY FEAR

The report said that the rise of GLP-1 treatments is also reshaping the development strategies of pharmaceutical companies, noting an analysis by Deloitte that obesity drugs are now the largest component of the late-stage pipeline after surpassing oncology treatments for the first time in 16 years.

GLP-1 drugs drove that increase almost exclusively, raising obesity treatments from 1% of the pipeline in 2022 to about 25% now, while oncology slipped to 20% after being at 32% in 2022.

“Obesity therapies have already taken cancer as the pharmaceutical industry’s leading area of investment, reflecting growing confidence that these treatments could improve the health of millions of Americans while fundamentally reshaping one of the country’s largest industries,” Teasley said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The Wells Fargo report concluded that the likely winners in the healthcare industry will opt against trying to defend the old model, and instead reposition ahead of it – such as by reallocating capital and talent toward obesity medicine, integrated cardiometabolic care and specialty pharmacy services.

This post was originally published here

The founder of the world’s most-indebted property developer was sentenced to life in prison in China for fraud and bribery – five years after his China Evergrande Group collapsed, roiling the Chinese economy and financial markets.

Hui Ka Yan, 67, was convicted in a court in the southern city of Shenzhen on Thursday and the companies were fined a total of more than $2.3 billion for financial crimes, including inflating the group’s assets and concealing its liabilities that ran more than $300 billion.

“The amount involved is exceptionally large, the circumstances are particularly egregious, and extraordinarily heavy economic losses have been caused,” the court wrote in a statement. “The harm to society is extremely serious. Therefore, severe punishment should be given in accordance with the law.”

Hui, also known as Xu Jiayin, abused his position in orchestrating fraud and misappropriating company assets, the court found.

COURT ORDERS CHINA’S BANKRUPT EVERGRANDE TO LIQUIDATE

Evergrande group was fined 8.82 billion yuan ($1.31 billion) and Evergrande Real Estate Group was fined 7 billion yuan ($1.04 billion).

Hui’s sons, Xu Tenghe and Xu Zhijian, were also sentenced alongside senior Evergrande executives and others linked to the group, according to China’s official Xinhua News Agency. A total of more than 50 individuals were sentenced to imprisonment of between 22 months and 18 years.

Photos released by the court showed a gray-haired Hui standing between two officers in a navy collared shirt as the sentence was announced. He had largely disappeared from public view after Chinese authorities detained him in 2023.

His life sentence is a dramatic end to the career of a man who built one of China’s largest real estate empires in a rags-to-riches story. Born in 1958 into a rural family in central China’s Henan province, he worked in the steel industry in the 1980s before establishing Evergrande, which then prospered during China’s housing market boom. He was one of many businessmen who also gained political influence by joining a major advisory organization, the Chinese People’s Political Consultative Congress (CPPCC).

EMPTY BUILDINGS IN CHINA’S PROVINCIAL CITIES TESTIFY TO EVERGRANDE DEBACLE

The Shenzhen Intermediate People’s Court ordered the confiscation of Hui’s personal property after he pleaded guilty in April to eight charges that included fundraising fraud, illegally taking public deposits, fraudulently issuing securities and bribery.

Chinese authorities cracked down on excessive borrowing in the real estate industry in 2020, triggering a crunch among many developers that brought on a downturn in the property market.

Evergrande, founded by Hui in 1996, expanded aggressively during China’s decades-long property boom, borrowing heavily as it built projects across the country. At its peak, the company became China’s largest developer by contracted sales, while Hui amassed a fortune that made him Asia’s richest man in 2017, with an estimated net worth of more than $45 billion, according to Forbes.

Its collapse helped ignite a broader crisis in China’s real estate sector, where falling home sales, unfinished projects and developer defaults have weighed on economic growth and consumer confidence for years.

CHINA’S EVERGRANDE: WHAT TO KNOW

The fallout also reached millions of ordinary Chinese investors and homebuyers. Evergrande’s inability to repay wealth-management products prompted protests after investors saw savings wiped out, while buyers of unfinished apartments were left uncertain about whether their homes would ever be completed.

Comments by Evergrande homeowners in a social media group included: “All ordinary citizens have paid the cost,” “Imprisonment is meant to protect him. If he comes out, his life is in jeopardy,” and, “What about our money?”

Chinese authorities said revenues were overstated by tens of billions of dollars in 2019 and 2020.

Hui had already faced regulatory punishment before Thursday’s criminal sentence. In 2024, China’s securities regulator fined him roughly $6.5 million and barred him from the country’s securities markets for life over inflated financial results and other violations.

Evergrande’s corporate demise has continued even as Hui’s criminal case moved through the courts.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

A Hong Kong court ordered the company into liquidation in 2024, and its shares were later delisted from the Hong Kong Stock Exchange.

Reuters and The Associated Press contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

The birth mother of Democratic US Senate candidate Abdul El-Sayed worked for a designated terror group that financed Hamas and the Taliban, the Midwesterner first revealed on Tuesday. The information in the report was separately verified by The Jerusalem Post.

El-Sayed was mostly raised by his Egyptian father, Mohamed El-Sayed, and his father’s second wife, Jacqueline. He does not mention his mother – Fatten Fathy Elkomy – often in his campaigns, as she remarried and returned to the Middle East when he was young.

However, the Midwesterner was the first to suggest that this omission might be intentional.

It revealed that for five years (1999-2004) Elkomy worked for the Islamic American/African Relief Agency (IARA). Headquartered in Khartoum, Sudan, with 40 offices throughout the world, IARA purported to work on health care, orphans, and disadvantaged people in areas of conflict.

However, according to a US Department of the Treasury announcement on October 13, 2004, IARA engaged in a joint program with an institute involved in providing assistance to Taliban fighters, and also was responsible for moving funds to the Palestinian territories for use in terrorist activities, notably serving as a conduit to Hamas in one Western European country.

Abdul El-Sayed, winner of the Michigan US, Democratic Senate primary, waits with Curtis Hertel, Chair of the Michigan Democratic Party, before a press conference in Detroit, Michigan, US August 5, 2026.  (credit: REUTERS/REBECCA COOK)

IARA was designated, along with five officials, on the same date.

Subsequently, the Treasury revealed that IARA was tied to Maktab Al-Khidamat (MK), an organization co-founded and financed by Osama Bin Laden and which was the precursor organization of al Qaida.

It also revealed that international offices of IARA provided direct financial support for Osama Bin Laden, and that a former Bin Laden lieutenant served as the director of IARA’s operations in Afghanistan.

In March 2007, the Department of Justice charged IARA-US with a 33-count indictment for illegally transferring funds to Iraq.

Evidence used to secure those convictions in USA v IARA included 945 exhibits detailing phone calls, faxes, wire transfers, tax forms, emails, bank statements and other documents. Within the list of exhibits, filed in U.S. District Court for the Western District of Missouri in May 2010, Elkomy was mentioned 14 times, relating to eight wire transfers, five recorded phone calls, and a IARA transfer request of $24,607.34 to IARA’s Iraq office.

Mohamed Elkomy, her brother (and el-Sayed’s uncle) is also mentioned dozens of times in the exhibits.

Neither Mohamed or Fatten Elkomy were charged or indicted as co-conspirators in the case. No IARA individuals were actually charged with terrorism, but the organization did plead guilty to conspiring to violate financial sanctions to send money to Iraq, and the organization dissolved in 2016.

When interviewed by the St. Louis Post-Dispatch in 2004, El-Sayed’s mother denied any connections between IARA and terrorists, adding that she has “been working there serving orphans and children with at least one deceased parent, and it breaks my heart they’re not going to get any help.”

According to her LinkedIn, she has worked as a psychiatric Nurse Practitioner for Missouri Behavioral Health Services since July 2013.

Who is El-Sayed?

Abdulrahman Mohamed El-Sayed, was born in 1984 in Michigan to Egyptian immigrant parents.

He studied at the University of Michigan, Oxford as a Rhodes Scholar, and Columbia University, where he earned his MD. He also has a doctorate in public health.

He ran unsuccessfully for Michigan governor in 2018 and became nationally known as a progressive/left-wing Democrat. He recently won the Democratic nomination for US Senate in Michigan in August 2026, defeating Rep. Haley Stevens. He will face Republican Mike Rogers in November.

If elected, he would become the first Muslim elected to the US Senate.

Central to his campaign is his criticism of Israel’s conduct in Gaza and a war he describes as genocide.

El-Sayed was condemned for comments he made following an attack on a Michigan synagogue in March, saying, “Hurt people hurt people.”

This post was originally published on here

In New York City, a six-figure salary is no longer enough to meet the traditional definition of financial comfort.

A single adult now needs to earn approximately $158,954 a year to cover necessities, afford some discretionary spending and consistently save money, according to SmartAsset’s 2026 analysis of 100 major American cities. That places New York first in the country, narrowly ahead of San Jose, California, at $158,080.

The difference between the two cities is only $874 a year. But the larger comparison is with the rest of the country: a single adult in San Antonio, the least expensive city in the study, needs $83,242—barely more than half of New York’s threshold.

The New York number circulating in some television reports, $124,342, comes from a separate SmartAsset study covering New York State. The statewide figure includes substantially less expensive communities outside the city and ranked New York fourth among states, behind Hawaii, Massachusetts and California.

For New York City itself, the correct figure is nearly $159,000.

SmartAsset did not define “comfortable” as luxurious. It used the familiar 50/30/20 budgeting rule: 50% of after-tax income for necessities, 30% for discretionary spending and 20% for savings or debt repayment.

The basic expenses came from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology’s Living Wage Calculator and included housing, food, transportation, healthcare, taxes and other unavoidable costs. SmartAsset treated those necessities as half of a sustainable budget, then calculated the gross salary required to preserve the remaining 30% for ordinary wants and 20% for financial security.

That arithmetic explains why the number is much higher than the income required merely to survive. A New Yorker earning less than $158,954 may still pay rent, buy food and cover transportation. What becomes difficult is doing all of that while maintaining an emergency fund, saving for retirement, paying down debt and retaining enough money for a life beyond necessities.

The city’s median household income is $81,228, according to the Census data used in the study. That is only 51% of the amount SmartAsset says one adult needs for its definition of comfort. The comparison is not exact—household income can include multiple earners and many residents do not follow a 50/30/20 budget—but it demonstrates how far the city’s typical income has fallen behind its idealized cost structure.

A working family of four requires considerably more: an estimated combined income of $337,875 in New York City. But New York does not rank first for families.

San Francisco carries the highest family threshold at $407,597, followed by San Jose at $402,771. Childcare, larger housing requirements and regional differences in family expenses make the Bay Area more expensive for parents, even though New York demands the highest salary from a single adult.

The distinction reveals that there is no single “most expensive city” for every type of household. New York ranks first for an individual under SmartAsset’s methodology. San Francisco ranks first for a family of four. Manhattan separately carries a cost-of-living premium estimated at 139% above the national average, but that is another measurement covering prices rather than the salary needed under a particular budgeting rule.

For employers, the findings help explain why New York salaries that appear generous nationally may still struggle to attract or retain workers. A $100,000 position is approximately 60% above the median annual earnings of a full-time American worker, yet it falls almost $59,000 short of SmartAsset’s New York comfort threshold.

Businesses feel the difference through wage demands, employee turnover and the difficulty of filling jobs that require workers to live near the city. Employees respond by accepting roommates, commuting longer distances, postponing children, reducing retirement contributions or using more than half of their income for necessities.

That is the real meaning of the ranking. New York has not become a city where everyone must earn $159,000 to remain. It has become a city where a person may need nearly $159,000 before the conventional American budget—half for needs, nearly one-third for living and one-fifth for the future—finally fits.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Walmart has received nearly $3 billion in tariff refunds and says it will use some of the benefit to help keep prices low for shoppers, while the windfall also gave quarterly profit growth a significant boost.

The company said it “prioritized investment in price” after receiving refunds tied to tariffs imposed under the International Emergency Economic Powers Act, or IEEPA.

The refunds came as Walmart continued leaning into its value proposition. The retailer pointed to more than 11,000 price rollbacks across its U.S. stores during the quarter.

“We’re investing in prices because customers are looking to us for value,” the company said in an earnings release. 

WALMART E-COMMERCE SALES SURGE AS CEO TOUTS ‘PRICE, SPEED AND CONVENIENCE’

The tariff refunds also provided a substantial boost to Walmart’s quarterly earnings. Adjusted operating income rose roughly 17% on a constant-currency basis, with the refunds contributing a 750-basis-point net benefit.

Excluding that benefit, Walmart said underlying operating income growth still reached the top end of its previous 7% to 10% second-quarter guidance.

Sales also continued to rise. Total revenue increased 5.9%, while comparable sales at Walmart U.S. grew 2.6%, excluding fuel.

Walmart’s digital businesses posted faster growth. Global e-commerce sales increased 23%, including a 24% gain at Walmart U.S. and 26% growth at Sam’s Club U.S.

Store-fulfilled delivery at Walmart U.S. jumped 40% during the quarter, while marketplace net sales increased more than 50%.

The retailer said stronger sales, improving business economics and continued investment in pricing and technology gave it confidence to raise its sales and operating-income growth guidance for the year.

Walmart generated $19.7 billion in operating cash flow during the period, along with $5.5 billion in free cash flow.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The tariff refunds add another lever to Walmart’s push to hold down prices as it competes for value-conscious shoppers while expanding its higher-growth e-commerce, marketplace and delivery businesses.

This post was originally published here

The U.S. Treasury is doubling its purchases of older government bonds after a punishing market selloff drove long-term borrowing costs to their highest levels in roughly two decades.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said the department will increase its buybacks of longer-dated securities from $2 billion to at least $4 billion over the next two months. The announcement quickly steadied the bond market, pushing Treasury yields lower and providing relief to stocks.

The move matters far beyond Wall Street. Treasury yields help determine mortgage rates, corporate borrowing costs, auto loans and the interest the government must pay on its rapidly growing debt. When investors demand higher yields to hold Treasury bonds, borrowing becomes more expensive across the economy.

The selloff intensified as the national debt crossed $40 trillion and investors became increasingly concerned about inflation, federal spending and the enormous volume of bonds Washington must sell to finance its obligations.

The buybacks are designed to improve trading in older, less-liquid Treasury securities. They do not erase federal debt or reduce the government’s overall borrowing needs. In practical terms, Washington is buying back difficult-to-trade bonds while continuing to issue new debt elsewhere.

That distinction is important. The intervention can calm a disorderly market, but it does not resolve the underlying arithmetic: the United States continues borrowing faster than revenues are growing, while higher interest rates make every new round of financing more expensive.

For consumers, the immediate benefit could be some relief in mortgage and other long-term borrowing rates if Treasury yields remain lower. But unless inflation, deficits and federal borrowing come under control, the pressure can quickly return.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Israel and Colombia are set to mutually exempt one another from requiring visas for travel starting on September 1, the Foreign Ministry announced in a post on X/Twitter on Thursday.

The decision follows talks between Foreign Minister Gideon Sa’ar and Colombia’s Foreign Minister Álvaro Leyva Escobar, as the two countries work to strengthen ties.

With the election of the new right-wing president of Colombia, Abelardo de la Espriella, Colombia and Israel have restored ties that have been severed for two years under the administration of president Gustavo Petro.

Colombia is an extremely popular destination for Israeli travelers, with tens of thousands visiting the country annually.

Colombian Vice President José Manuel Restrepo and Foreign Minister Gideon Sa'ar meet to strengthen Colombian-Israeli relations, August 7, 2026.  (credit: Courtesy)

Rapid diplomatic developments between Israel, Colombia

Foreign Minister Gideon Sa’ar arrived in Colombia for Espriella’s inaugural ceremony to discuss practical opportunities to deepen cooperation across a range of fields with the intent to translate the renewed diplomatic relationship into a concrete partnership.

On August 10, just three days after the presidential inauguration, the Colombian government announced that it was recognizing Israel’s sovereignty over the Golan Heights, making it only the second country, after the US, to do so.

The decision drew immediate criticism from several Arab countries, which decried the move. Damascus, Riyadh, Doha, and other capitals all raised objections, while Colombia’s Foreign Ministry maintained the necessity of the move, citing “the ongoing regional instability in the Middle East.”

The new government has also announced its intention to move the country’s embassy to Jerusalem.

Following a 7.4-magnitude earthquake that rocked western Colombia last week, the IDF sent a humanitarian delegation called the “Alliance of Brothers” in order to assist in search and rescue efforts. 

Colombia’s President, Abelardo de la Espriella, thanked Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu for Israel’s support during “these very difficult times.”

Ariella Roitman and Eli Leon contributed to this report.

This post was originally published on here

The U.S. national debt is rapidly approaching the $40 trillion threshold, and about one-fourth of that debt has been incurred while President Donald Trump has been in office.

Spending by the federal government has accelerated dramatically as the U.S. population has aged, with increased enrollment in Social Security and Medicare pushing spending on those entitlement programs higher and contributing to the growth in federal budget deficits.

The recent rise in interest rates — coupled with the larger national debt — has exacerbated that trend, with interest expenses from servicing the national debt now topping $1 trillion per year.

While presidents and congressional majorities of both parties bear responsibility for the growth in the national debt, President Donald Trump’s first term and the opening half of his second term have seen the debt grow by more than $11.5 trillion combined to date, according to Treasury Department data.

White House spokesman Kush Desai noted Trump’s predecessor in a statement to FOX Business: “Cleaning up Joe Biden’s reckless fiscal mismanagement has been a top priority for the Trump administration, from slashing waste, fraud, and abuse in government spending to accelerating economic growth and getting America’s debt-to-GDP ratio back on the right track.”

US NATIONAL DEBT SURPASSES SIZE OF THE ECONOMY FOR FIRST TIME SINCE WORLD WAR II

The overarching measure of the U.S. national debt used by entities like the Treasury and the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office is known as the gross national debt, which is nearing $40 trillion.

The figure includes all the U.S. government’s debt, including the obligations held in intragovernmental accounts like the Social Security trust funds. Those debt obligations are excluded in a separate metric known as the debt held by the public, which is currently over $32 trillion.

When Trump’s first term began on Jan. 20, 2017, the gross national debt totaled $19.9 trillion. A variety of tax and spending policies in the first Trump term contributed to the growth in the debt, including the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act as well as massive spending on COVID-19 relief measures.

A White House official noted how the country was facing a historic pandemic during that first term, arguing the crisis accounted for a larger share of the debt growth during that period. The official added that Biden “then recklessly spent trillions on COVID stimulus spending” and pointed to how “Obama economists like Larry Summers correctly warned would only ratchet up inflation, which caused interest rates to rise and just worsen the government’s borrowing costs.”

FEDERAL BUDGET DEFICIT ON TRACK TO SURPASS $2T THIS FISCAL YEAR AS SPENDING OUTPACES REVENUE

The largest U.S. budget deficit in history was incurred in fiscal year 2020 — the last full fiscal year of Trump’s first term — when the federal government ran a more than $3.1 trillion deficit.

That year saw several bipartisan COVID relief measures enacted by Congress and the president to help individuals and businesses, as well as state and local governments, as they dealt with the economic toll of the pandemic.

At the end of Trump’s first term, the gross national debt grew by over $7.8 trillion and stood at over $27.7 trillion as of Jan. 20, 2021, when Biden’s term began. Over the next four years, the gross national debt grew by more than $8.4 trillion as additional COVID relief measures were enacted, and Democratic majorities advanced Biden’s American Rescue Plan Act.

SOCIAL SECURITY’S MAIN TRUST FUND FACES DEPLETION IN 2032, TRIGGERING BENEFIT CUTS

When Trump’s second term began, Treasury Department data showed the gross national debt totaled $36.2 trillion as of Jan. 21, 2025, the day after his second inauguration.

The most recent data shows that as of Aug. 14, 2026, the gross national debt had risen to more than $39.9 trillion — an increase of over $3.7 trillion in the second Trump term to date. Higher spending on entitlement programs and debt interest, as well tax cuts that were enacted under the One Big Beautiful Bill Act and tariff refunds, contributed to the higher debt.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Taken together, the more than $7.8 trillion in debt from the first Trump term and the $3.7 trillion in debt incurred to date in the president’s second term combine to total about $11.5 trillion in debt during his time in office.

This post was originally published here

Walmart’s e-commerce sales grew in the second quarter across its major business segments.

Global e-commerce sales rose 23%, led by store-fulfilled pickup and delivery and its online marketplace, according to the company’s Q2 earnings report released Thursday.

The gains were even stronger in the U.S., where e-commerce sales increased 24%, with strength in store-fulfilled delivery, advertising and marketplace.

WALMART GOES NUCLEAR IN FIRST-OF-ITS-KIND POWER DEAL FOR RETAIL GIANT

Walmart President and CEO John Furner pointed to the retailer’s online growth as a sign that customers are responding to its “price, speed and convenience.”

“Our team delivered another good quarter, and we continue to make steady progress on the long-term value drivers of our business,” Furner said in a statement. “Our multi-year growth in e-commerce is evidence that customers are choosing Walmart because we deliver price, speed, and convenience across a broad assortment.”

WALMART CEO SAYS LOWER-INCOME SHOPPERS SHOWING ‘SIGNS OF STRESS’ AS FUEL COSTS SQUEEZE HOUSEHOLD BUDGETS

He added, “At Walmart, they can have it all.”

Sam’s Club U.S. — a major division owned and operated by Walmart — also saw strong e-commerce growth, with sales up 26%, driven by continued growth in club-fulfilled pickup and delivery, according to the report.

WALMART, SAM’S CLUB SLASH PRICES ON THOUSANDS OF PRODUCTS AS TRUMP SAYS MOVE CAME AT HIS REQUEST

Walmart International also posted strong e-commerce growth, with e-commerce sales rising 19%, driven by store-fulfilled pickup and delivery.

Walmart reported revenue of $187.9 billion, up 5.9% from a year earlier, and raised its outlook for the fiscal year.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Our business model is only getting stronger and more durable, and we’re pleased to raise our guidance for the year,” John David Rainey, Walmart Inc. executive vice president and chief financial officer, said in a statement. 

This post was originally published here

The Trump administration is preparing to reduce tariffs on Canadian-made cars and trucks from 25% to 15% as part of a broader trade agreement aimed at ending the escalating economic fight between the United States and Canada.

The White House imposed a 25% tariff on foreign-made vehicles last year as part of President Donald Trump’s effort to move automotive manufacturing into the United States. Under the proposed Canadian deal, vehicles assembled in Canada would receive the lower 15% rate, with additional reductions possible based on how much of each vehicle was produced in the United States.

Canada is pressing for a 10% tariff, meaning the final automotive terms remain under negotiation. Officials could also postpone the issue until the wider review of the U.S.-Mexico-Canada Agreement if the two sides cannot settle the details now.

The distinction matters because the North American auto industry does not operate neatly within national borders. Engines, transmissions and other components can cross between the United States and Canada several times before a completed vehicle reaches a dealership. A tariff imposed at the border can therefore raise costs throughout the supply chain, including for vehicles carrying American-made parts.

The proposed agreement could also reduce U.S. tariffs on Canadian steel and aluminum from 50% to 25%, although the lower rate would reportedly apply only within an annual quota. Canada, in return, would remove or reduce retaliatory measures affecting American products.

For consumers, a 15% tariff would still add substantial cost compared with the largely tariff-free North American market that existed previously. But it would reduce the risk of even steeper vehicle price increases and provide automakers with greater certainty over where to build and source parts.

The agreement has not yet been finalized. Trump temporarily suspended a new round of 50% tariffs covering approximately $20 billion in Canadian goods, but that pause expires Saturday unless the two governments complete the deal or extend negotiations again.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Cinema United President and CEO Michael O’Leary and board Chair Mike Bowers reversed the movie theater trade group’s position Tuesday in California’s federal antitrust fight over Paramount Skydance’s $110 billion acquisition of Warner Bros. Discovery. 

They urged Attorney General Rob Bonta and Paramount CEO David Ellison to negotiate because they said prolonged uncertainty threatened box-office momentum and the entertainment industry.

O’Leary and Bowers said the industry’s recovery depended on the two sides discussing a resolution with protections for theaters and moviegoers.

DAVID ELLISON BREAKS SILENCE ON PARAMOUNT-WBD MERGER FIGHT; CNN INSIDERS DON’T BUY ‘LIP SERVICE’ ABOUT NETWORK

“For many in our industry, the current environment is marked by disruption and uncertainty. That is why we believe that it is incumbent upon both of you to meet in good faith to discuss a resolution that would provide robust protections and serve the entire industry. In fact, it is the next logical step,” O’Leary and Bowers said.

Cinema United explained its reversal in a statement to Fox News Digital Wednesday, saying concerns about consolidation remained, but settlement talks represented the next opportunity to secure protections for theaters.

“Despite our legitimate concerns about industry consolidation, Cinema United, on behalf of our executive board and the entire exhibition community, yesterday called for the AGs and Paramount to meet and discuss (a) settlement,” a Cinema United spokesperson said.

“Since the outset, we have been open to steps that will protect the exhibition industry. This is the next step in that process to ensure a thriving industry for generations to come.”

California Republican Party Chairwoman Corrin Rankin told Fox News Digital Wednesday that Bonta should enter negotiations, accusing Democrats of using lawsuits and regulations that increased costs and drove businesses from the state.

“Democrats keep writing the same bad script, and Californians are stuck paying the price in higher rent, gas and grocery bills. Their endless politically-motivated lawsuits, taxes and red tape drive jobs and opportunity out of California while making life harder for the families and businesses who stay,” Rankin said.

NEWSOM SAYS FILM TAX INCENTIVES ARE BRINGING HOLLYWOOD HOME BUT INDUSTRY EXPERTS WARN IT MAY BE ‘TOO LATE’

Bonta told reporters Tuesday that his office welcomed theater owners’ views but maintained that the proposed transaction violated the law, according to Reuters.

“The fact remains that this proposed merger breaks the law. It will lead to job loss. It will lead to wage cuts. It will lead to higher prices for consumers to go to the movies or to watch cable television,” Bonta said.

Paramount had taken the opposite position in a July statement to Fox News Digital, blaming the state challenge for prolonging the industry’s difficulties.

“Delaying this transaction will only harm entertainment workers who have already suffered over recent years as technology has disrupted their livelihood and cost California tens of thousands of entertainment jobs,” a Paramount spokesperson said.

Republican attorney general nominee Michael Gates responded to Cinema United’s call for negotiations by criticizing Bonta’s lawsuit and warning that continued litigation could threaten California entertainment jobs.

CNN STAFFERS BRACE FOR PARAMOUNT CEO’S POTENTIAL PLAN TO LAUNCH EDITORIAL BOARD TO OVERSEE NETWORK

“Bonta should accept Cinema United’s invitation and come to his senses. Frankly, Bonta should drop the lawsuit all together,” Gates said in a statement to Fox News Digital.

Bonta’s office told Fox News Digital the office had previously investigated potential Warner Bros. purchases by either Netflix or Paramount.

“The lawsuit against Paramount resulted from clear-cut antitrust analysis, based on the facts and the law,” Bonta’s press office said.

CLICK HERE FOR MORE COVERAGE OF MEDIA AND CULTURE

Cinema United said it represented 30,000 U.S. movie screens and had previously supported the coalition of 12 states seeking to block the acquisition. The group requested enforceable safeguards requiring Paramount to maintain or expand wide theatrical releases and exclusive theater windows, prevent higher film rental terms, preserve theaters’ ability to book titles without onerous conditions and guarantee continued access to both companies’ film catalogs.

The reversal came as domestic box-office receipts had reached $6.8 billion as of Wednesday, nearly 20% above the same period in 2025. Cinemark also joined AMC Theatres and Regal Cinemas in supporting an expedited resolution, while the Directors Guild of America and IATSE had urged Bonta and Ellison to negotiate or advance the trial.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The antitrust trial is scheduled to begin March 2, 2027. Paramount asked a federal judge Monday to require the states and the Writers Guild of America to post a $1.88 billion bond, saying it faced a $7 million daily fee after Sept. 30.

This post was originally published here

It’s hard to get a splashy sound bite out of Michael Dell, even if you tee him up for one. When asked how big a growth opportunity the AI wave could be for his namesake company, Dell Technologies, the founder and longtime chief executive doesn’t offer up any pithy one-liners but instead ruminates in real time.  

“It feels every bit as big as previous waves, but probably bigger,” he says, pondering the question, and then adds, “You know, maybe quite a bit bigger.” He takes another brief pause, reconsiders his own words, and delivers a most inconclusive conclusion: “I don’t know for sure. Nobody knows.”

We’re seated in a conference room at Dell Technologies’ headquarters just outside Austin, where the temperature has hit 88° F in early March. Dressed in dark slacks and a navy blue denim button-down (Texan for business casual, no matter the season), Dell has just emerged from a photo shoot that he tolerated but clearly didn’t relish. It’s not that he isn’t on board with being the name and face of his company. That’s been true for a while—40 years, to be exact. He remains Dell Technologies’ biggest believer—and biggest shareholder, with 53% of the $79 billion company’s stock under his or his wife Susan’s name. But he’s not a natural-born showman. Never was. In fact, he seems to go out of his way to not put on a performance—even as he’s embarking on what could be his greatest act yet.

Unlike some other tech CEOs, Dell doesn’t do bombastic declarations or colorful antics; he doesn’t have a side hustle that involves blasting himself into outer space. Despite having spent his entire adult life in the public eye, he is measured, analytical, and almost intentionally unexciting. So his reluctance to put a ceiling, or even a floor, on what generative AI could mean for his company is not surprising. 

But while Dell may prefer to hedge, the market isn’t hiding its exuberance. Just a few days before our interview, on March 1, Dell Technologies’ share price leaped 38%, hitting an all-time high above $131 after the company reported earnings that beat analyst expectations. The announcement generated plenty of excitement about demand for Dell’s growing portfolio of back-end tech products, the kind required for storing and managing the massive datasets needed to run—you guessed it—generative AI applications. Orders for AI-optimized servers were up 40% in the most recent quarter. As chief operating officer Jeff Clarke said in the company’s earnings release, “We’ve just started to touch the AI opportunities ahead of us.” 

It’s not just Dell’s company that’s been buoyed by the buzz. As a result of the massive rise in the stock, Michael Dell’s personal net worth reportedly hit the $100 billion mark in early March—a notable milestone even for a man who became a billionaire at the tender age of 30.

But none of this seems to rock Dell’s world. Over the decades, he’s maintained the same steady demeanor through exhilarating highs and harrowing lows. Along the way, he’s steered his company through multiple major pivots. And he’s showed an uncanny ability to read his customers’ needs and make the right strategic change at the right time, whether de-emphasizing PCs in favor of servers, sensors, and storage, or taking the company private—over the heated opposition of Carl Icahn—in a mammoth buyout.

Microsoft Chairman Bill Gates (L) speaks as Dell CEO Michael Dell listens during the product launch of the new Windows XP operating system on Oct. 25, 2001, in New York City.
Mario Tama—Getty Images

That privatization maneuver is precisely what positioned the company to capitalize on the current AI boom. Over the five years that it was privately held, Dell was able to truly diversify from selling laptops and desktops. Away from the market’s obsession with quarterly earnings, Dell consolidated and expanded his company, creating a behemoth provider of infrastructure tools for corporate customers. Along the way, he engineered what was then the biggest tech deal in history, the $67 billion acquisition of data storage provider EMC. 

If Dell isn’t a dynamic, headline-making speaker, it may be because he’s built this four-decade run on listening—deploying his analytical skills and deep curiosity to recognize what his customers need and to navigate his industry’s twists and turns. “I love spending time on the technology, and I love spending time with our customers,” he tells me. And at least where business is concerned, he adds, “I don’t really love anything else.”

Dell Technologies still sells Dell PCs; in fact, computers make up the majority of its revenue. But today it’s a company vastly different from what it was five or 10 years ago—let alone 40. The one constant? Dell himself. “This is probably the longest-sitting CEO in the tech industry,” says Marc Benioff, cofounder and CEO of enterprise-software maker Salesforce and a longtime friend. “He’s six months younger than I am, but I view him as an older brother,” Benioff says of Dell. “He’s a phenomenon in every possible way.”

Sitting across from Dell at his HQ in Round Rock, a corporate campus that’s forgettable except for its sheer size, “phenomenon” isn’t the first word that comes to mind. But Dell has built—and hung on to—an empire that now provides the technological building blocks for 99% of Fortune 500 companies, most of which will have new needs in this new era of AI. If he plays his cards right, the next chapter of the story could make both the CEO and his once-flailing PC maker more relevant than ever, all but ensuring he’ll stay at the helm for years to come. 


The morning after our interview, Dell is speaking on a panel at a health care innovation summit at the University of Texas at Austin, his alma mater. (Dell finished two semesters before dropping out to devote himself to selling PCs full-time.) Investor Jim Breyer, who relocated to Austin from Silicon Valley in 2019 at the Dells’ suggestion, introduces the CEO with glowing superlatives. “Michael Dell is the most courageous entrepreneur I’ve ever worked with,” he gushes. 

Dell’s performance is … just fine. (It’s clear that public speaking is not his happy place.) Still, he comes across as confident and purposeful. At 59, Dell retains a youthful bearing, his curly hair only tinged by gray. And from the audience reaction, it’s clear Dell’s the big man on campus, even if he never graduated.

In his well-documented early days, the nerdy but gutsy founder could seemingly do no wrong. In 1984, as a premed freshman, he started tinkering with computers in his UT dorm room. By age 19, he had left school and turned all of his attention to his business. He faced other, much bigger competitors, including IBM and Apple. But Dell pioneered a new way of doing business: His computers were built to order, and he sold them directly to consumers, cutting out the middleman. In 1988 he took Dell Computer public, raising $30 million and using the capital to expand globally. At age 27, he became the youngest CEO on the Fortune 500. And the company just kept growing—as long as demand for PCs was on the rise. 

Chart shows Dell ranking on the Fortune 500 list

But PCs would prove to be the company’s Achilles’ heel. In 2001, Dell became the world’s leading computer maker, surpassing the once-mighty Compaq. But sales soon began to decline. Asian manufacturers had entered the fray, offering cheaper products to American consumers. And by the late 2000s, smartphones and tablets had swarmed the market, slowing demand for desktops and laptops even more. The company tried to jump on the mobile bandwagon, but its efforts were ill-received: Dell’s “phablet,” a product that sat in the unnecessary purgatory between a phone and a tablet, was discontinued after just one year. 

By then, Dell had been trying for years to diversify. In 1995 he entered the server market with the PowerEdge, a product line that still exists—designed for enterprises that were amassing far more data than they could manage with their existing equipment. In 2006, the company launched a business unit to support cloud computing, including tools to power “hybrid clouds”—private clouds (which keep data on a customer’s premises) that can integrate with public ones (where data is hosted by a third party). 

But this expansion wasn’t happening fast enough to offset declines in PC sales, and investors hammered Dell’s shares. In 2013, after more than two years of falling PC revenue (and after the stock price bottomed at under $11), Dell decided to take his baby private—hypothesizing that shielding the company from Wall Street’s short-term focus on profitability was the best way to reset for the long term. 

Benioff refers to the deal as Dell’s “magic trick.” But the maneuver was anything but slick and graceful. “I had no idea how difficult it was going to be,” Dell recalls. “When it started, [I thought], ‘Is this like a one-week thing or two-week thing?’ I didn’t know it was going to be an eight-month thing.”

Michael Dell with Salesforce cofounder
and CEO Marc Benioff.
Courtesy of Dell

Dell wasn’t in it alone. Egon Durban, co-CEO of private equity firm Silver Lake, was his partner from the get-go. The two presented Dell shareholders with what they thought was a good offer, a $24.4 billion deal financed by a mix of equity and debt—the largest leveraged buyout in tech-industry history. But then corporate raider Carl Icahn entered the picture, snapping up a sizable chunk of the company’s shares and agitating for a more generous offer. Before they knew it, Dell and Durban were going to war, fighting Icahn as he made a counteroffer that involved buying the company himself—and ousting Dell as CEO. 

Eventually, Icahn got concessions, and Dell got his deal. Dell and Durban increased their offer by 10 cents a share and threw in a special dividend for some shareholders. And on Oct. 29, 2013, Dell Computer became a privately held company, owned by Michael Dell and Silver Lake. 

During the lengthy feud, the antagonists stayed true to their personalities: Icahn took to CNBC and other outlets to spread his narrative, while Dell lay low. But in recent years, Dell has spoken openly about the clash. His 2021 memoir, Play Nice But Win, opens with a scene in which Dell goes to Icahn’s house for a dinner of mediocre meatloaf, in a (failed) attempt to find common ground. Though Dell says he doesn’t hold grudges, he also says he felt a need to “expose” Icahn’s tactics.

More than 10 years later, it’s clear there’s no love lost between them. “Icahn showing up was the hardest part,” Dell says. “It was a long, painful period where everyone was subjected to this horrible situation.” Dell maintains that Icahn never really planned to buy his company but simply wanted to squeeze more out of the deal. For his part, Icahn, in a phone interview, says that his actions forced a “meaningful improvement” of the buyout. “The shareholders got a lot more money because of me,” says Icahn. 

Tellingly, both men quote World War II–era leaders to describe their conflict. “What’s that Winston Churchill quote?” Dell asks me rhetorically, invoking the former British prime minister: “If you’re going through hell, keep going.” Icahn, meanwhile, puts his own paraphrasing spin on a 1936 campaign speech by Franklin D. Roosevelt: “Dell hates me—and I welcome his hatred.”

Still, the trials arguably made Dell a better leader. Those close to the CEO say that his determination and belief in the deal carried the enterprise through a rough patch. “Relationships are forged on the battlefield,” says Durban, who remains close to Dell and whose firm is one of the company’s largest shareholders. Employees from that era say Dell became more connected than ever to his workforce, and even better about communication with the rank and file.

Just as important, Dell proved himself to a wider swath of the business world as an analytical, decisive chief executive. “He took a large risk, which is easier not to do,” Jamie Dimon, the CEO of JPMorgan Chase, says of Dell’s deal. “But he stuck to his guns.” Describing Dell, Dimon invokes the “OODA loop,” a military acronym for efficient decision-making that he says is a secret sauce for the tech CEO. (OODA stands for “observe, orient, decide, act.”) 

That kind of coolheadedness also characterizes Dell’s very, very few hobbies. Benioff tells me that his friend recently took up hunting with a bow and arrow. (Dell’s company won’t confirm this.) Dell hunts for birds, Benioff says—the kind of elusive target you can hit only when you’re calm, unemotional, and utterly focused. 


Jeff Clarke, Dell Technologies’ COO, is the closest person Michael Dell has to a cofounder, having joined his team in 1987. Speaking to Fortune via videoconference, Clarke—dressed in a red, white, and blue T-shirt that simply says “TEXAS”—refers to the company’s private-company era as one of the most fun periods of his career. “It was liberating,” says Clarke. 

Being out of the public market meant that Dell could make big bets and invest in R&D, even if the payoff wasn’t immediate. The company could rebuild itself around providing all things infrastructure for corporate customers like Home Depot and CVS Health, whose greatest needs increasingly revolved around the growing mountains of data they were accumulating. In 2016, Dell and Durban—with Dimon’s help—orchestrated another financial feat, the $67 billion purchase of EMC and its software subsidiary VMware. The acquisition was “something we had dreamed about doing,” Dell says. 

Still, the deal was an expensive bet that saddled the business with a heavy debt load—and it created hassles down the road. The merged company started trading publicly again under a share class that tracked its ownership interest in VMware; two years later, it bought those shares back and replaced them with a new share class. Along the way, some VMware investors (including, briefly, Dell’s old buddy Icahn) sued, arguing that the complex deal undervalued their shares, and Dell Technologies eventually paid a $1 billion settlement. Still, the acquisition added an even broader data-storage and management portfolio to Dell’s arsenal, making the company indisputably stronger. 

Dell’s company has never been a “market maker,” a company that creates demand for something that didn’t previously exist. But it hasn’t had to be. “What Dell’s been good at is knowing the right time to get into a market,” says Patrick Moorhead, an analyst who has covered Dell and its competitors for years and now runs Moor Insights & Strategy. “They’re so close to their customers that they just know.”

That closeness was embedded at Dell from the earliest days, when Michael Dell himself was building PCs for one customer at a time. In 1988 Dell wrote the company’s first Culture Code, with “Provide high-quality products and excellent customer service” at the top of the list. His focus hasn’t changed much, his allies say, and it’s been central to his ability to keep transforming the company. 

On Dec. 28, 2018, the reorganized, renamed Dell Technologies emerged fully from its cocoon, trading on the NYSE under a new share class. In its metamorphosis, the company had all but shed its image as a lagging PC maker, refashioning itself as an enterprise infrastructure giant. And enterprises, it turned out, were about to need a whole lot more infrastructure—and maybe, just maybe, more PCs.  


Back in Round Rock, Dell is trying to explain what an “AI PC” is, and why anyone would want one. “I have a list,” he says as he gets up to grab his phone from his office. The CEO comes back and proceeds to rattle off a catalog of capabilities.

There’s real-time, AI-powered translation, he explains, and a feature called “circle to search,” which enables PC users to highlight a word or line, which the computer will then provide more context and information for. There’s also “generative AI editing,” which can assist with any kind of writing or content creation. What customers actually end up using these machines for, Dell admits, is beyond his expertise to foresee. “But I believe that people will figure out creative uses and that companies will want to have the capability to make their people more productive.”

In fact, Dell’s lessons from its earliest days of customizing laptops still apply in the AI era: The key is to be flexible enough to meet customers’ demands. “The competitive advantage for Dell today is that it offers services you can tailor to almost every need in AI,” says Orit Gadiesh, the chairman of Bain & Co. and a decades-long consultant and confidante of Dell’s. “It’s not a fixed thing.”

Corporate customers in and outside tech are already clamoring for back-end machines that can both house and make sense of the data that feeds into generative AI applications. At a time when huge platform creators like OpenAI and Google are competing for corporate clients, Dell Technologies doesn’t have to worry about who wins: Its tech “stack” is agnostic to different flavors of generative AI, just as its cloud offerings have always accommodated hybrid, private, and public cloud strategies. And just as with the move to the cloud, Dell is counting on one common denominator with AI: that all companies, regardless of which AI applications they build or deploy, will want control over the hardware where the relevant data is stored.

Michael Dell with Nvidia cofounder
and CEO Jensen Huang.
Courtesy of Dell

To be sure, Dell didn’t know that the generative AI explosion would happen when it did; he credits Jeff Clarke with devising much of the company’s AI road map. But he calculated long ago that going all in on data infrastructure was the best way to position his company for the future. As a result, “he’s not just providing the picks and shovels, but also housing and food and beverages for the AI gold mine,” says Silver Lake’s Durban. 

It’s still early days for Dell Technologies’ AI story. Fast as it’s growing, Dell’s AI server products account for just a tiny fraction of its business. But most financial analysts seem bullish about what’s to come. There’s even hope that the AI craze will jump-start demand for PCs—AI PCs, to be precise. The thinking is that the need for increased processing power won’t just be on the data-center side (where servers and storage systems handle companies’ information), but also on the desktops and laptops that consumers and workers interact with. 

In February, Dell Technologies announced its first line of Latitude AI PCs, which look like normal computers but include a tiny component called a neural processor, the key to enabling generative AI workloads. It’s not the only vendor with high hopes in the category—HP and Lenovo have announced similar products. And it’s not clear when demand will take off. Bloomberg Intelligence analysts wrote that “sales and units shipped may disappoint investors in calendar 2024, having a greater potential impact in 2025.”

Even Dell acknowledges that spurring demand could take a while. That said, “if you’re responsible for the PCs in a company, the last thing you want to do is have a bunch of PCs that don’t do the thing that the users want them to do,” says Dell. “I do think there’s going to be a refresh wave.”


The top floor of the University of Texas’s Innovation Tower, a new high-rise that’s meant to be a startup hub, is still empty. But one only has to look out the windows for inspiration. The 360-degree views of the Austin skyline show a city dotted by cranes and construction in almost all directions. 

Jay Hartzell, the university’s president, is showing me around, pointing out all of the landmarks—including the buildings adorned with the name of the institution’s most famous dropout. Michael Dell never did become a doctor, but his name is on his alma mater’s medical school, the university’s teaching hospital, and its pediatric research center. (Not to mention Austin’s Jewish Community Center.) 

“When we talk about what we want to produce as a university, and why people should come here, he’s sort of Leading Exhibit A,” says Hartzell. He credits Dell not only with being a major employer of UT graduates but also with helping to spur the city’s broader tech ecosystem. Over the years, tech companies from Meta to Apple have set up shop in the Texas capital. Investors, too, from Vista Equity Partners to Pimco to Jim Breyer, have put down roots. UT recently welcomed its first cohort of students in a brand-new AI graduate degree program. 

“If you’re responsible for the PCs in a company, the last thing you want to do is have a bunch of PCs that don’t do the thing that the users want them to do.”

Michael Dell

Dell, who is originally from Houston, never wanted to move his headquarters away from Texas, even when others told him he should relocate to Silicon Valley. “He helped put the place on the map,” Austin Mayor Kirk Watson tells me in a phone interview. “If you took Michael Dell out of the equation, it would be a strikingly different city.” 

Dell has made his mark outside of Austin, too. The Michael & Susan Dell Foundation, which the couple founded in 1999, has 800 active projects around the world at any given time—focusing on education, training, and health innovation to help children living in poverty. (Dell and his wife recently contributed another $3.6 billion to the foundation, bringing its total endowment to $5.2 billion.) Dell says he spends a little more time each year on the foundation. He’s also gotten more hands-on with his family office, which invests in real estate development and hotel companies, among other sectors. 

Could those jobs someday be his life’s work? Dell’s next chapter could be a long one: Even after 40 years leading Dell, he’s still so young, at 59. But the thought of playing any role other than his current one—at the center of the business that he’s synonymous with—seems to stump him. When asked if he could see himself running Dell Technologies in 20 years, Dell says he hasn’t thought that far ahead, but that there’s no other role he craves. Then, at long last, he provides something like a money quote: “I’ve said this before: I’ll still care about Dell when I’m gone.” 


The long and winding road

Michael Dell’s company began life in 1984 as PC’s Limited—selling computers, and that’s it. A few crucial pivots helped the company evolve and stay not just relevant but dominant.

1995 
Dell Computer, by then a Fortune 500 company, releases the first-generation PowerEdge enterprise server—its first attempt to sell data storage to enterprises.

2006
Dell joins the cloud era, announcing a new business unit that provides cloud products and services to customers. Demand is relatively slow to catch on.

Michael Dell and Egon Durban of PE firm Silver Lake take the company private in an effort to refocus the company on corporations’ data infrastructure needs.
Stuart Isett—Fortune Brainstorm Tech

2013
Michael Dell and Egon Durban of PE firm Silver Lake (above, with Dell at left) take the company private in an effort to refocus the company on corporations’ data infrastructure needs.

2016 
Dell acquires EMC and its stake in VMware for $67 billion, at the time the largest tech deal ever—making Dell’s data-storage and management portfolio far larger.

In February 2024, Dell announced its AI PC, which includes a “neural processor” to handle AI workloads.
Courtesy of Dell

2023 
Dell Technologies releases a series of infrastructure products, including servers and storage, that are optimized for generative-AI applications.

2024 
In February, the company announces its AI PC, which includes a “neural processor” to handle AI workloads. In early March, Dell Technologies stock hits an all-time high.

This article appears in the April/May 2024 issue of Fortune with the headline, “The [forever] founder.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

U.S. government debt has hit $40 trillion—an alarming milestone for economists who fear the nation’s fiscal policy is spiraling out of control.

It comes after the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) reported earlier this month that deficits are now so large that the U.S. Treasury is paying $3 billion a day in interest, totaling $963 billion between October 2025 (when the 2026 fiscal year begins) and July 2026. 

Treasury data for August 18 shows the closing balance for the day on public debt outstanding totaled $40.04 trillion. 

Budget watchdogs have continually called on policymakers to get America’s fiscal house in order. Proposals range from cutting annual federal deficits in half as a share of GDP, down from the current 6% to 3%, to calls to “cut up the credit cards” entirely. The White House itself has indicated it recognizes a problem, with President Trump suggesting tariffs or visa policy could help plug the budget gap: So far, data suggests it won’t be enough.

With the country’s debt-to-GDP ratio now north of 120% (a metric lenders will watch when analyzing the risk premium on loans to the U.S.), debt hawks are warning the public is already paying, and is only going to start feeling the squeeze more acutely.

Michael Peterson is the chairman and CEO of the Peterson Foundation, a nonpartisan organization dedicated to putting the U.S. on a more sustainable fiscal path. Speaking to Fortune as America hit the $40 trillion benchmark, Peterson explained that even if families don’t receive a “bill in the mail” for national debt, they’re already paying.

He explained: “When the U.S. borrows this much—and continues to borrow more and more—that drives up interest rates, which then increases household expenses because your mortgage goes up, your car loan, your credit card bills, and inflation more generally. So [we] may not get a bill at the end of the month for national debt, but [we] are paying that bill both in the form of taxes as well as an inflated level of expenses.”

While the mechanics of how debt may trickle down to individual households’ finances are complicated, voters are nevertheless expressing concern about the topic as D.C. heads into midterms. In July, a Peterson Foundation study reported 94% of voters are more likely to support a candidate with a plan to address the debt, including 95% of Democrats, 92% of independents, and 94% of Republicans.

“To anyone who cares about America, about democracy and our future, in my view, this is already a crisis,” Peterson said, “because the level of fiscal mismanagement is tragic. It is burdening every household today, it’s laying more and more debt on our children and grandchildren, and that’s not how America got to be the great country that it is.”

What gives?

The bull case for debt is reasonable. Firstly, despite years of warnings, there has yet to be a market meltdown sparked by debt.

Indeed, Treasury yields—the surest sign of confidence in U.S. borrowing and lending—are showing no signs of acute discomfort. At the time of writing, 30-year Treasuries sit above 5%, elevated (in part) by the uncertainty of Federal Reserve policy. 10-year treasuries are sitting above 4.6% for a similar confluence of reasons.

But debt hawks point to other indicators that suggest the budget will have to give in one area or another.

Nancy Vanden Houten, lead U.S. economist Oxford Economics, said in a recent note that “mandatory spending, including Social Security, Medicare, and interest on the debt, continue to see the most growth in spending. Fiscal year-to-date defense spending continues to creep higher as the war with Iran drags on; as of July, defense spending was up 5% y/y.”

A trade-off between two of those outlays seems to be on the books: The trust fund for social security is due to run dry in a little under eight years, and Medicare in a little under seven years, according to estimates by the Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget.

While “it’s hard to pinpoint an exact moment in time or an exact program that will be in jeopardy, if you care about government programs and what the government can do to help society, defend our country, make sure the most vulnerable are protected, and take care of the elderly, the first thing you should do is put us on a more stable fiscal path so that all those programs are less in jeopardy,” Peterson said.

However, any cross-party agreement to examine or target borrowing in order to reduce debt is yet to materialize. Peterson adds: “There’s a lack of urgency that concerns me. Just because the financial markets were OK yesterday doesn’t mean they’re gonna be OK tomorrow. To just continue to cross your fingers and hope that we can get away with a completely irresponsible level of budgeting is not a reasonable way to lead our country.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

In the run-up to the iPhone’s launch in 2007, Apple cofounder Steve Jobs made a fateful decision: Apple would not turn to its partner Intel to make chips for the device, on the grounds that the firm was “really slow…like a steamship,” as Jobs put it. Apple would rely on up-and-comer ARM instead.

Jobs’ decision helped set off a two-decade decline for an iconic Silicon Valley brand. The company was once so celebrated for its chipmaking innovations that hardware makers clamored to attach “Intel inside” stickers to their devices. But Intel went on to miss not only the mobile revolution, but the AI era, as competitors stole its market share.

By early last year, it was unclear if Intel could remain a going concern. But then something remarkable happened. The company brought on CEO Lip-Bu Tan and, in barely a year, became one of the hottest stocks on the market. The story of Intel’s ongoing turnaround could become the rebound story of the decade—one featuring bold leadership, tough decisions, and no small amount of luck.

When Tan took the helm in March 2025, the longtime semiconductor veteran became Intel’s third CEO in six years, and the sixth since legendary cofounder Andy Grove relinquished the post in 1998. By Tan’s arrival, Intel had become defined less by its chips than by the $50 billion in debt it carried. “There was a large recognition that we needed to right the balance sheet,” says CFO David Zinsner, “but not a lot of clarity on how we were going to do that.”

In response, Intel set about selling off noncore parts of the business and raising capital from what Zinsner describes as Tan’s “incredible network.” Soon, Intel had tapped billion-dollar investments from Nvidia and SoftBank; it also grabbed headlines when Tan agreed to let the Trump administration convert a scheduled $8.9 billion grant into an equity stake for the federal government.

“The SoftBank endorsement was good; the U.S. government endorsement was great,” says Zinsner, citing a halo effect that raised Intel’s standing with creditors and investors and shored up its capital structure.

But money alone could not address Intel’s deeper problem of corporate complacency. To combat it, Tan sought to impart a spirit of candor. He cut Intel’s management structure from 12 layers to six and made a point of hearing firsthand about its performance from people at all levels of the company—putting an end to a pervasive practice where managers would filter only good news to the C-suite.

“If there’s a problem and you tell me about it early, it’s our problem, and we’ve got to fix it. If you have a problem, and you don’t tell me, it’s your problem,” Tan told everyone at Intel upon his arrival, Zinsner recalls.

For all the rapid progress it has made under Tan, Intel still needs to show that its chips can compete. “They got fat, dumb, and lazy, and got their ass handed to them,” says Bernstein analyst Stacy Rasgon. Nvidia and TSMC became the leaders of the AI era while Intel mostly watched from the sidelines.

Under Tan, however, Intel has been getting a bigger piece of the AI boom. Part of this has been a matter of luck, Rasgon explains: An insatiable demand for memory to support AI functions has led companies to find more uses for Intel’s traditional CPU chips. This has allowed Intel to sell huge amounts of existing inventory, helping to drive the surge in its share price.

The company’s real challenge is to prove it can still make the cutting-edge chips that once defined it. There are promising signs: Intel’s closely watched efforts to build chips using its next-generation 14A manufacturing process are on track, a technological transition that could help the company woo more big-spending customers. Intel’s design of chips for other companies, the other pillar of its business, got a big boost on recent reports that Apple may turn to the company again as a supplier.

While it’s too soon to say whether Intel will complete its comeback, it clearly has learned from past mistakes. According to Zinsner, Tan has largely departed from his predecessors’ tradition of frequently quoting Andy Grove. He has, however, adopted and repeated one of Grove’s most famous maxims: “Only the paranoid survive.”

This story ran in the June/July 2026 issue of Fortune as part of a feature called ‘Innovation Giants on the Rebound.’ For more Fortune 500 innovation stories, click here.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Some universities are now allowing students and their families to pay tuition through PayPal and Venmo.

Among the first institutions offering the payment options are Bellarmine University, Butler University, Kansas State University, Michigan State University and Texas Tech University, although more universities are expected to join later this year.

Students and families may face transaction or processing fees, with the amount depending on the university and the funding method used.

The payment options are being integrated through campus payment platforms including Illumia, Nelnet Campus Commerce and TouchNet, which process tuition payments for institutions across the country.

THE COLLEGES THAT GIVE GRADUATES THE STRONGEST CAREER EDGE, ACCORDING TO LINKEDIN

“A modern tuition payment experience has to work for both sides of the transaction,” Don Smith, Illumia’s senior vice president and general manager of integrated payments, said in a statement.

“Students and families want the flexibility to use payment methods that fit how they manage their money, while institutions need those options to work within the systems and processes their teams already rely on. This integration helps schools expand choice in a practical way, improving the payer experience without creating a disconnected path for campus teams,” Smith added.

PayPal and its Venmo subsidiary have aimed to further expand their presence in higher education over the last year, offering student-athletes the opportunity to receive institutional revenue-share payments through their platforms. Venmo also expanded its presence on college campuses through NIL partnerships with student athletes, college-branded cards, student ambassadors and gameday activations.

The digital payment systems are already used by many students and families for daily money transfers, including purchasing groceries, splitting rent and sending money to friends and family.

“Tuition is one of the biggest payments a family will make, and it should come with the same flexibility and security that millions of people already count on PayPal and Venmo for every day,” Frank Keller, President of Checkout Solutions and PayPal, said in a statement. “That’s why we’re proud to bring that same choice and protection into the reliable systems schools have already built.”

The companies said PayPal and Venmo use security measures including encryption and fraud monitoring. Consumer regulators, however, have cautioned that money stored in nonbank payment apps may not carry the same deposit-insurance protections as funds held directly in a federally insured bank or credit union.

HARVARD MAKES MASSIVE $2.2B SPACEX BET ON ELON MUSK’S ROCKET COMPANY

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Certain eligible PayPal and Venmo balances may qualify for pass-through FDIC insurance when funds are placed at PayPal’s program banks, which currently include Goldman Sachs Bank USA, Wells Fargo Bank and JPMorgan Chase Bank. Not all PayPal or Venmo balances qualify for the coverage.

But FDIC pass-through insurance “protects against the failure of a Program Bank, not the failure of PayPal. PayPal is not a bank, does not take deposits and is not FDIC insured,” PayPal said in a statement.

This post was originally published here

Internet firm Naver has earned its nickname—Korea’s Google—by pulling off an improbable feat: It dominates South Korea’s search market, having defended its turf from Google, the world’s top search engine, whose revenue is 40 times as large as Naver’s. 

As of September 2023, Naver controlled 59% of Korea’s search market to Google’s 31%. 

Naver is perhaps “the only company in the world that has survived competition against Google and Amazon,” says Choi Soo-yeon, Naver’s CEO since 2022. 

Naver is hardly a household name outside Korea. But it operates a sprawling portfolio that pits the $22-billion-in-market-cap firm against other Big Tech giants on multiple fronts.

It has a controlling stake in both Yahoo Japan—the most popular website in Japan, according to Nielsen—and the Japanese messaging app Line—a WhatsApp rival—through a joint venture with SoftBank

It runs Korea’s No. 2 e-commerce service, behind Coupang. (Amazon’s platform ranks fourth.) Naver’s $1.2 billion purchase last year of Poshmark, the U.S.-based clothing-resale site, expanded its retail reach.

In the streaming wars era, Naver has amassed content platforms of its own. It owns Webtoon, which hosts mobile-friendly comic strips that are popular across Asia. (Naver is reportedly planning a U.S. IPO for Webtoon later this year.) Naver bought Wattpad, a Canada-based platform for user-submitted fiction, for $600 million in 2021. 

Naver is perhaps “the only company in the world that has survived competition against Google and Amazon.”

Choi Soo-yeon, Naver CEO

Naver also has a small but growing cloud-computing business—a category in which Amazon, Google, and Microsoft reign supreme—and it’s launched a series of AI projects to contend with the release of OpenAI’s viral chatbot, ChatGPT.

In recent quarters, Naver’s many business lines have notched record revenues and operating profits, but Choi sees Naver’s mission as extending beyond its own bottom line. 

Despite Naver’s small size, she casts the firm as a counterpoint in a global tech scene in which power is concentrated among a gargantuan few. 

“It’s becoming a world where there are only one or two search companies and one or two commerce companies,” Choi said in a recent wide-ranging interview—her first with the international press—at Naver headquarters in Seongnam, just outside Seoul. (Choi gave her answers in Korean, which were later translated into English.) Naver “is a company that constantly fights against such a world and strives to preserve diversity,” she says. 

Investors question whether Naver can go toe-to-toe with cash-rich rivals. Still, Choi’s goal is ambitious—perhaps even noble—and belies the role she was appointed to fill: that of a caretaker CEO brought on to steady a company in turmoil. 


Choi, 42, was an unconventional pick to run the company. A Harvard-educated M&A lawyer, she joined Naver in 2019 as head of global business support to help lead the firm’s expansion. Three years later, the board named Choi as CEO to show it was prepared to overhaul its culture after a series of crises. 

In May 2021, a senior Naver developer died by suicide after accusing the company of fostering a toxic work culture. A labor union probe found he’d been bullied by executives for years. A later government survey found that over half of employees felt they were bullied at least once in a six-month period. 

In the aftermath, Naver said “there were some acts of workplace harassment by some executives.” Choi’s predecessor as CEO, Han Seong-sook, stepped down, as did Naver’s COO, and Naver tapped Choi. At the time, she told shareholders her most urgent task was “to recover Naver’s corporate culture based on trust and autonomy.”

But a second tragedy struck early in Choi’s tenure. In September 2022, another employee died by suicide while on maternity leave, local media reported. Months later, her family claimed she’d been mistreated at work. A Naver internal investigation did not uncover evidence of harassment, and Korea’s labor ministry could not confirm the family’s claims, a company spokesperson said.

South Korea has the highest rate of suicide of all Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development countries, and South Koreans work 200 hours more per year than the global average.

“There was a lack of trust in the systems, leadership, and board,” Choi says of Naver’s previous culture. One big change Choi made was to reintroduce remote work, a rarity in post-COVID South Korea. The option gives employees “the choice of what kind of working environment they can be most productive and create the most innovation in.” 

The suicides were the biggest scandal to rock Naver in its 25-year history. Naver launched in 1999, when founder Lee Hae-jin turned an internal Samsung project into an independent company. By the mid-2000s, Naver had passed rivals like web portal Daum to dominate Korea’s search market.

Naver and fellow internet firm Kakao (founded by an ex-Naver executive) have made South Korea one of a handful of countries where homegrown search engines outperform U.S. search giants without government intervention.

Naver got a head start on tailoring a search engine that met the tastes of the South Korean market, says Bokyung Suh, a Korea analyst at Bernstein Research. Naver hooked users early with its busy homepage that was heavy on icons, links, and animations. Google launched a bare-bones search engine in Korean in 2000, but it didn’t catch on. Google updated its site to a feature-rich format six years later. 

Naver earned 9.6 trillion won ($7.41 billion) in revenue in 2023, a record. Search and e-commerce generated 37% and 26% of sales, respectively. It made $1.3 billion in operating profit, also a record. 

Yet shares are currently trading about 60% below a COVID-era high. Investors are concerned about slowing revenue from search (up 0.6% in 2023), plummeting revenue from display ads (down 10% last year), and the lack of a “punchy, clear growth strategy,” Suh says. 


Naver’s lack of a punchy, clear growth strategy is especially worrisome in the AI age, when Naver faces U.S. companies that are investing billions in the technology. 

As U.S. giants dominate English-based AI, Naver may be able to establish an edge in systems based in Korean and other languages, Choi says.

Naver has a chatbot, CLOVA X, and an AI-powered search engine, Cue. Both are built on its Korean-language large-language model, HyperCLOVA X, which outperforms OpenAI’s GPT in Korean, recent studies say. Naver has claimed that HyperCLOVA, an earlier version of its model, was trained on 6,500 times as much Korean data as GPT-3.0, which underpins OpenAI’s ChatGPT. Naver is also partnering with Saudi Aramco on an Arabic large-language model.

Choi is especially interested in what she calls “sovereign AI,” or a model that’s tailored to an individual user. “We focus on what companies and governments that want to use AI would want, and what needs Big Tech can’t fulfill,” she says. As AI becomes more common, “each group will need an AI model that best understands” its unique traits. 

Charts shows statistics about Naver

Sources: Bloomberg; Naver

Much like her rivals at Google and Microsoft, Choi is also grappling with how to integrate AI—with its penchant to hallucinate false information—into Naver’s search product. “People need accurate information through search,” she says, though she hopes AI’s tendency to make stuff up will become “nearly negligible in the near future.”

At the same time, she also sees room for a traditional search engine—with its list of links to choose from—amid the generative AI revolution. “Not all questions in the world have a single correct answer,” she says. “There is still a need for exploration.” 

Naver’s base in South Korea, a chip powerhouse, is an advantage in the AI race, especially its homegrown manufacturers “that support the Korean language,” Choi says. Naver’s chip partners include Korea’s Samsung and the U.S.’s Intel.

“It’s not healthy to rely on just one company,” Choi says. Is that a coded reference to Nvidia? Yes, she says in English, with a smile.


Just four of South Korea’s top 100 firms by revenue had women CEOs last year, according to global headhunter UnicoSearch. Just 6% of executives at the companies were women.

Choi, whose CEO contract expires in 2025, expresses some unease at often being a “sole woman” in business: “Simply because I am a woman, there are expectations for me to demonstrate skills such as effective communication, adept conflict resolution, and the ability to nurture people.” 

Korea’s internet sector got a little more diverse when Kakao appointed its first female CEO, Shina Chung, in March

“I’m not alone anymore!” Choi says. 

Fortune Korea contributed additional reporting and translation assistance.

This article appears in the April/May 2024 issue of Fortune.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

For fifty years, the fastest and cheapest way to build a house in America was effectively zoned out of most neighborhoods. That is changing, and the reason is simple: nothing else has brought prices down.

In Santa Rosa, California, a row of new one-story houses on Acacia Lane looks much like the taller houses across the street. They were built in a factory. Long stigmatized and barred outright by many towns and cities, factory-built housing is being reconsidered in places where home prices have climbed out of reach, the Washington Post reported Wednesday.

The economics are not subtle. A new manufactured home recently averaged about $135,000, and the Niskanen Center estimates these homes cost 27% to 65% less than comparable houses built on site. A typical site-built house runs north of $400,000. A buyer priced out of one market can be a homeowner in the other.

What kept these homes on the margins was a single federal rule written in 1974. Every manufactured home had to sit on a permanent steel chassis, the frame with axles used to haul it to the lot. The frame stayed attached forever, whether or not the house ever moved again.

It almost never did. Fewer than 5% of manufactured homes are ever moved from where they were first placed, according to research cited in a widely referenced federal report. Fewer than one in twenty. For the other nineteen, the steel served as expensive dead weight beneath the floor.

The chassis also did something worse than add cost. Because the home was built on a frame with wheels, most states classified it as personal property — like a vehicle — rather than as real estate. That pushed buyers into chattel loans carrying higher interest rates, shorter terms and fewer protections than an ordinary mortgage. The cheapest house on the market came with the most expensive financing.

Congress removed the requirement. The 21st Century ROAD to Housing Act became law on July 11 after passing the Senate 85 to 5 and the House 358 to 32. Dropping the frame cuts roughly $10,000 from the price of a single-section home, about 9% of its cost.

The bigger change is what it unlocks. Under the law, states have one year — two where legislatures meet every other year — to certify that homes built without a chassis are treated the same as traditional manufactured homes for financing, title, insurance and taxes. Once a home can be titled as real property, it qualifies for conventional, FHA and VA mortgages — the same loans everyone else gets, at the same rates.

Removing the frame also lets builders stack units into two-story homes and small apartment buildings, which matters most in expensive states where the land, not the house, is the cost.

None of this is finished. Lenders will not change their guidelines until federal rulemaking is complete, state legislatures have to act, and local zoning boards still control what gets built where. The Santa Rosa development is what the argument looks like when it works — houses that a passerby cannot pick out from their neighbors, at a price a first-time buyer can actually carry.

The remaining barrier was never the building. It was the rules around it, and the town councils willing to change them.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. President Donald Trump threatened to bomb Oman because he is unhappy the country is close to a deal with Iran to manage ship traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, two regional officials said on Tuesday, a day after Trump leveled the threat.

The officials said the Trump administration has told Oman it is opposed to parts of the yet-to-be-announced deal, including the joint Iranian and Omani management of the exit route out of the passage that’s critical to global supplies of oil and natural gas. The officials were briefed on the U.S. position and how the administration views Oman’s position.

Meanwhile, a projectile hit a ship as it sailed out of the strait, and a cargo vessel was rendered a “constructive total loss” by multiple projectiles off the coast of Yemen, according to the British military’s maritime monitoring agency. The defense ministry of the United Arab Emirates said two ballistic missiles were launched from Iran toward the UAE.

An Iranian official said the strait would not reopen until the United States meets Iran’s conditions.

US believes Oman has not been tough enough with Iran

The U.S. believes Oman has not been tough enough in its negotiations with Iran and is unhappy with Oman’s agreement to collect voluntary fees from vessels, even if the charges are related to security and maritime environmental protection, according to the officials, who spoke on condition of anonymity because they were not authorized to talk to journalists.

Trump on Monday threatened to bomb Oman as it works with Iran on a deal to open the strait and pave the way for the U.S. and Iran to resume negotiations to end the war.

He posted a map on social media on Tuesday depicting the strait as U.S. territory. The president first mentioned the idea in an offhand comment last week. On Monday, he told reporters in the Oval Office, “I like the idea of declaring it a territory,” without providing details.

The White House on Tuesday referred to Trump’s remarks in the Oval Office and declined to comment further about Oman.

Iran refers to Trump’s ‘delusion’ about the strait

Iranian Deputy Foreign Minister Kazem Gharibabadi appeared to respond to Trump’s post on social media depicting the strait as American territory.

“Just as Trump correctly wrote the name of the eternal Persian Gulf, his delusion regarding the Strait of Hormuz will soon either be corrected, or we will correct this deluded man’s delusions for him,” Gharibabadi wrote on X.

Trump’s comment on Monday was not the first time he has threatened Oman. In May, he told reporters during a Cabinet meeting that Oman “will behave just like everybody else, or we will have to blow them up.”

Iran reiterated Tuesday that Tehran plans to maintain its grip on shipping traffic until Washington meets its conditions.

“Until the United States fulfills its commitments under the agreement, including lifting the blockade, releasing frozen assets, lifting oil sanctions, ending threats and military operations on all fronts, and implementing the other conditions to which it committed, the Strait of Hormuz will not reopen,” said Mohammad Bagher Qalibaf, Iran’s parliamentary speaker and negotiator in previous talks with the U.S.

The Egyptian Foreign Ministry said Tuesday that the Iranian-Omani deal could pave the way for Washington and Tehran to return to negotiations for a “comprehensive and permanent deal that addresses all concerns and enhances regional security and stability.”

The statement came after a meeting between Egyptian Foreign Minister Badr Abdelatty and Omani counterpart Badr al-Busaidi. But it did not address Trump’s latest threat against Oman.

Trump insists the strait is open as more attacks are reported

Trump said on Tuesday the U.S. has no planned talks with Iran but insisted the strait is “open and operating,” despite limited traffic, the reported boat strike and the end on Monday of the 60-day negotiating period between the countries.

Trump wrote on social media that a U.S. blockade of the strait remains “in full force and effect,” adding that all water mines have been removed.

As the talks between Iran and Oman continue, more attacks were reported in the region.

Both missiles fired at the UAE fell into the sea, the UAE Defense Ministry said. No damage or injuries were reported. Iran disputed the UAE’s claim that it launched missiles toward the country.

The ministry later said assessments showed that the missiles targeted maritime traffic. It was not clear whether they directly targeted UAE ships or the country’s territorial waters.

In the weeks after the U.S. and Israel launched a war against Iran on Feb. 28, the UAE was frequently targeted by Iranian missiles and drones, but Tuesday’s reported attack was the first in weeks.

An unidentified projectile hit a ship early Tuesday in the strait off the coast of Oman, damaging the engine room and causing a casualty, according to the U.K. Maritime Trade Operations center.

The monitoring agency did not release any details about the ship or its cargo, and it was unclear whether the crew member was killed or wounded. The agency said the Omani Coast Guard was assisting other crew members and that authorities were investigating.

Elsewhere, the cargo ship that was deemed a loss was struck about 40 nautical miles (74 kilometers) southeast of Mokha, Yemen, the UKMTO center reported.

The center did not identify the projectiles or those responsible.

The Iran-aligned Houthi rebels resumed attacks on commercial shipping in the Red Sea in July and escalated attacks on Yemen’s Saudi-backed government forces. The renewed assaults have threatened shipping through the Bab al-Mandab Strait, another key global trade route.

In other developments, the Houthis claimed they fired drones at an oil refinery in neighboring Saudi Arabia, the latest attack that threatened to reignite Yemen’s civil war and open another front in the Middle East.

The attack targeted a facility run by Saudi Aramco, Saudi Arabia’s state-owned oil company, according to a report by the Houthi-run SABA news agency. There were no immediate reports of damage or comment from Saudi Arabia.

___

Associated Press writer Sally Abou AlJoud in Beirut contributed to this report.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Fuel stations in Moscow have reimposed limits on gasoline purchases due to fuel shortages linked to Ukrainian drone attacks on refineries and strong seasonal demand, according to Reuters witnesses and fuel suppliers.

Shortages began to gather pace in May and had spread to most Russian regions by July, but fuel stations in Moscow were able to ease an earlier wave of restrictions in June.

Ukraine has targeted Russian oil refineries in an effort to undermine Moscow’s war effort and reduce energy revenues.

To boost domestic supplies, Russian authorities have banned exports of gasoline and diesel, eased fuel quality requirements and began importing petroleum products.

Reuters witnesses also saw long queues at some filling stations in Moscow and the surrounding region.

Russia's President Vladimir Putin chairs a meeting on economic issues in Moscow, Russia, May 15, 2026. (credit: SPUTNIK/MIKHAIL KLIMENTYEV/ VIA REUTERS)

Gasoline purchases restricted to 40 liters per customer in Russia

A customer hotline operator at Gazprom Neft SIBN.MM said gasoline and diesel sales at the company’s automated filling stations in Moscow were limited to 40 liters per customer.

At Gazprom Neft’s other filling stations, diesel sales remain unrestricted, while gasoline purchases are capped at 60 liters per vehicle.

Rosneft ROSN.MM, Russia’s largest oil producer, said gasoline sales at all its filling stations across Russia were limited to 30 liters per vehicle, while diesel sales faced no restrictions.

The company also warned customers of longer waiting times because of heightened demand.

Lukoil LKOH.MM said it had introduced fuel sales restrictions in Moscow and the surrounding region because of elevated demand, unscheduled refinery maintenance and the need to ensure stable operations at its filling stations.

It did not disclose the specific limits.

Tatneft’s TATN.MM customer hotline said gasoline sales at its filling stations were limited to 50 liters per vehicle.

This post was originally published on here

A fresh dog food company is recalling nearly all of its fresh meals after receiving 192 reports of potential eye problems in dogs, including a condition that can lead to vision loss if severe and untreated.

Years, a U.K.-based subscription service which says it has served roughly 40,000 customers this year, said it is investigating buckwheat as a possible contributing factor, including whether part of its buckwheat supply may have been contaminated.

The company said no causal link between its food, buckwheat and the reported eye problems has been established, and laboratory and toxicology testing is continuing.

As of Tuesday, 192 customers have reported potential eye issues, including sudden bilateral dry eye known as keratoconjunctivitis sicca (KCS). The condition causes dogs’ eyes to stop producing enough tears, leading to irritation, redness and discomfort.

FROZEN DOG FOOD RECALLED OVER SALMONELLA CONTAMINATION THAT LED TO MULTIPLE PET ILLNESSES

Tears lubricate and protect the surface of the eye. If left untreated, KCS can cause corneal ulcers, scarring and other damage that can potentially result in permanent vision loss.

The company said reports of eye issues in dogs began a few weeks ago.

“In late July, we began receiving multiple reports of dogs experiencing sudden, bilateral dry eye,” Years said.

By Aug. 16, the company said it had identified 57 suspected cases, which it characterized as about 0.1% of roughly 40,000 customers served year-to-date.

Years said an independent veterinarian and specialist in small-animal clinical nutrition initially advised on Aug. 1 that a link to the company’s food appeared unlikely based on the information then available, while recommending further investigation.

POPULAR PET FOOD RECALLED OVER POSSIBLE SHARP METAL AND PLASTIC CONTAMINATION

Years said it decided to issue the recall as a proactive measure affecting all of its fresh meals except those in its Chef’s Collection, the ultra-premium, limited-edition tier of dog meals offered by the brand.

The decision was made following “rising case numbers, input from customer advocates and ophthalmologists, and growing evidence around buckwheat.”

Laboratory testing of the buckwheat supply is still ongoing. The company did not provide further details on how the buckwheat supply may be affecting dogs’ eyesight beyond the possibility of contamination.

Years said the affected fresh-meal formulations contained 6.3% to 7.2% buckwheat, depending on the recipe.

KCS can have a number of causes in dogs, including immune-mediated disease, certain medications, infections, hereditary factors and trauma, meaning the reported condition alone does not establish a link to the food.

Customers’ subscriptions have been paused for an initial six-week period as the brand works to reformulate its recipes with quinoa in place of buckwheat. The company said it will also provide a thank-you gift with their next delivery for the inconvenience.

To help with the investigation, the company is also arranging a free collection of any unused meals.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“Your help with our investigation would mean a great deal. We’ll arrange a free collection of any unused meals and apply a full credit to your account for the order,” Years said.

The company also urged dog owners who suspect their pets are experiencing eye issues to take them to the vet, stating that “early treatment makes a real difference.”

This post was originally published here

(Debora Truax/Dreamstime.com)

Duvi Honig

By Duvi Honig Wednesday, 19 August 2026 03:49 PM EDT Current | Bio | Archive

Add Newsmax On Google

Bankers. By the very instinctive nature of their occupation, they are prudent enough to ask a prospective commercial borrower for their business plan.

If you walked into a bank asking for $70 million without such a plan, you’d be shown the door.

  • No lender would finance you.
  • No investor would write the check.
  • No board of directors would approve the deal.

Yet that’s exactly what New York taxpayers are being asked to do.

null

New York Mayor Zohran Mamdani wants the city to spend $70 million to launch five government-backed grocery stores.

The 112th mayor of the Big Apple says the goal is to save participating families about $90 a month on essential groceries.

Sure, helping families afford food is a goal every New Yorker can support. But spending taxpayer dollars without proving it’s the smartest way to achieve that goal is something entirely different.

Here’s the question every taxpayer should be asking: How many families will this $70 million actually help?

Despite announcing the project, promoting the expected savings, and unveiling store locations, City Hall has not publicly stated how many households these five stores are expected to serve.

That omission matters because without that number there is no meaningful way to judge whether this is a sound investment or an expensive experiment.

We do know one thing.

If the objective is putting $90 a month back into family budgets, then the initial $70 million alone could fund nearly 778,000 monthly grocery benefits before a single dollar is spent on salaries, utilities, insurance, maintenance, security, technology, legal fees, consultants, inventory losses or future operating subsidies.

And that’s where the economics begin to fall apart.

The $70 million isn’t the total cost.

It’s the down payment.

Once the stores open, taxpayers will still be responsible for the ongoing costs of operating a grocery business — one of the most competitive and lowest-margin industries in America.

Every payroll check, electric bill, maintenance contract, insurance premium, operating loss and additional subsidy is money that no longer helps struggling families buy food. It helps sustain the government program itself.

Imagine taking those same public dollars and putting them directly into the hands of New Yorkers instead.

Families could shop where they already shop — whether that’s ShopRite, Costco, Key Food, Aldi, their neighborhood supermarket or the local bodega.

Consumers would have immediate relief.

Small businesses would keep their customers.

Competition would continue working. And nearly every taxpayer dollar intended for grocery assistance would reach a family’s shopping cart instead of being absorbed by bureaucracy.

This isn’t an argument against helping struggling New Yorkers.

It’s an argument for helping more of them.

Government has an obligation to ask the same question every successful business asks before spending money: Is this the most efficient way to achieve the objective?

If the answer is yes, then prove it.

Publish the business plan.

Tell taxpayers how many families the stores are expected to serve.

Show the projected operating costs.

Explain how the stores become financially sustainable.

Demonstrate why this approach delivers greater value than direct grocery assistance.

That’s not politics. That’s accountability.

Good intentions don’t balance budgets.

Promises don’t replace financial projections.

Taxpayers should never be expected to invest $70 million on faith alone.

Helping families is the right goal.

But if city hall can’t show why five government grocery stores are a better investment than putting grocery assistance directly into the hands of New Yorkers, taxpayers have every right to ask whether this plan is about feeding families — or feeding another layer of government.

Before New York spends $70 million, it deserves something every entrepreneur is expected to produce before asking for even a fraction of that amount: a business plan.

Duvi Honig is founder and CEO of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce and founder of JBizNews. Read more Duvi Honig Insider articles —Click Here Now.

Posts by Duvi Honig

Newsmax Blogs: 

© 2026 Newsmax. All rights reserved.

The question the crypto industry has been asking Washington for a decade is a simple one: who is in charge? President Trump gathered the industry’s executives at the White House on Wednesday to say an answer is close.

Trump spoke alongside technology leaders in the Roosevelt Room, with executives from Coinbase, Ripple and Nasdaq in attendance, along with Securities and Exchange Commission Chair Paul Atkins and Commodity Futures Trading Commission Chair Mike Selig. Leaders from Gemini and Chainlink Labs were there as well, and Ripple was represented by chief executive Brad Garlinghouse.

“We’re leading in every aspect, including AI, and we’re leading by a lot,” Trump said.

The gathering was timed to the first meeting of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission’s Innovation Advisory Committee, which convenes Thursday in Washington, D.C., to advise the agency on digital assets, artificial intelligence and prediction markets.

The substance is a jurisdictional fight that sounds technical and is not. Under current law, a digital token can be treated as a security, which puts it under the Securities and Exchange Commission, or as a commodity, which puts it under the Commodity Futures Trading Commission. Nobody agrees which is which. That ambiguity is why some exchanges will not list certain tokens, why banks have been cautious about custody, and why several firms moved operations offshore.

Trump used the event to push the Senate on the Digital Asset Market Clarity Act, the bill that would draw the dividing line, calling for a fair version of the measure and arguing it would keep the United States ahead of China. A Senate vote is expected September 15.

Regulators are not waiting. The Securities and Exchange Commission proposed rules Tuesday that would exempt certain token offerings from securities regulation, addressing a longstanding industry complaint that the existing rules were unclear and costly to comply with.

For an ordinary customer, the practical effect of a settled rulebook is mundane and real: clearer disclosure requirements before buying a token, a defined agency to complain to when something goes wrong, and a legal footing for banks and brokerages to hold digital assets the way they hold everything else.

The event drew scrutiny for a reason the White House has faced before. Trump has earned more than $1 billion from the crypto industry since returning to office, including over $635 million from a licensing agreement tied to the $TRUMP meme coin and $236 million from the sale of tokens through World Liberty Financial, a firm he founded in 2024 with Steve Witkoff, now a White House special envoy, and their sons. The president has said he has no day-to-day role in his family’s business and that his investments are independently managed, and the White House has rejected allegations of impropriety. Polling shows a majority of Americans believe he has profited inappropriately from those ventures.

That argument will not be resolved this month. The rulebook might be. The Senate vote in September is the piece that decides whether a decade of regulatory confusion actually ends, or whether the industry spends another year waiting to find out which agency it answers to.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Silicon Valley made a fortune betting on disruption. Now some of the most recognizable names in venture capital and Big Tech are spending millions to disrupt California’s plan to tax them.

Campaign finance records show Palantir cofounder Peter Thiel, crypto billionaire Chris Larsen, Google cofounder Sergey Brin, and longtime venture capitalist John Doerr donated to political action committees opposing Proposition 40, which would levy a one-time tax on billionaires equal to 5% of their wealth if passed. Thiel officially cut ties with California in 2025 ahead of the proposed wealth tax, and Brin has also reduced his official and financial ties to the state.

Larsen gave $5 million to Golden State Promise, a committee opposing Proposition 40, and Ripple Labs, the company he cofounded, has put in another $5 million. 

Another anti-Proposition 40 committee representing teachers, doctors, and small businesses has received $5 million from Building a Better California, whose top donors are Brin and Doerr. Golden State Promise has also received $450,000 from the California Business Roundtable Issues PAC, one of whose top donors is Thiel, who has given $3 million to the PAC itself.  

The stakes are high for the donors. Experts estimate Proposition 40, if passed, will raise $100 billion for California over five years, with 90% earmarked for health care and the rest for food assistance and education. For someone whose net worth is $1.1 billion, the liability is $55 million, according to an analysis from Wealth Management. If the opposition defeats the ballot measure in November, billionaires will avoid that liability. 

Silicon Valley and Washington flashpoint

The multimillion-dollar checks are landing as California’s proposed wealth tax turned into a broader fight about whether taxing billionaire wealth would raise needed funds—or push founders and investors to move out of the state.

Over the weekend, billionaire entrepreneur and investor Mark Cuban publicly sparred over this question with Rep. Ro Khanna (D-Calif.), one of the most prominent defenders of the proposed tax. Cuban argued Prop. 40 misunderstands founders can be billionaires on paper while still being cash-poor and could drive startup talent out of the state entirely. 

“If this passes, only idiot startup founders stay in Cali,” Cuban wrote on X.

Khanna pushed back by arguing truly illiquid “paper billionaires” make up only part of the population the tax would hit, and suggested a workaround in which founders could hand over their shares in the startup to the state in exchange for a loan to pay the tax. 

“The government would still collect from the vast majority of billionaires who are not illiquid,” Khanna wrote. 

Emmanuel Saez, director of UC Berkeley’s James M. and Cathleen D. Stone Center on Wealth and Income Inequality and co-author of an expert report on Prop. 40 arguing the tax asks a fair share from the roughly 250 Californians it would cover—billionaires the report says built their fortunes in the state and can absorb a one-time hit, especially if paid gradually. Saez told Fortune over email founders without the immediate money to pay the tax can “use a deferral option,” paying 5% of “whatever proceeds they take out of their business (as dividends or sales of stock) moving forward.”

“If the business fails, they won’t have to pay anything,” Saez said. “If the business succeeds, they’ll have to pay 5% of that success eventually.”

Khanna has also pushed the fight to tax billionaires beyond California. In March, he and Sen. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.) introduced federal legislation proposing an annual 5% wealth tax on Americans worth more than $1 billion, with some of the proceeds earmarked for $3,000 payments to lower- and middle-income households.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

It’s grape season in Afghanistan’s southern province of Kandahar, and the harvest this year is plentiful. But that’s small comfort for the region’s grape producers and workers, who say fighting between Afghanistan and Pakistan has left them unable to access their primary market.

For months, the two countries have traded fire sporadically across their long, mountainous border, leaving hundreds of people dead. Islamabad accuses Afghanistan’s Taliban government of harboring militants who carry out attacks inside Pakistan — a charge Kabul denies.

With the fighting have come border closures, severing a critical trade route and preventing Afghan producers from reaching what is the primary export market for many goods.

Unable to export their fresh fruit, Afghan grape producers have turned to the domestic market, where the increased supply has sent prices tumbling. To adapt, many producers are now drying their grapes and turning them into raisins — a cheaper product that sells for less.

In a long warehouse in Kandahar’s Zhari district, fans whirl overhead, stirring the hot summer air around bunches of plump, green grapes draped over sticks set up in rows to dry.

But even for raisins, prices have tanked.

Sakhi Jan, who owns a grape orchard in Zhari, says that with 10 people in his household to feed, he’s barely getting by. Seven kilograms (15.5 pounds) of raisins used to sell for around 1,000 to 1,200 afghanis ($13 to $16), he says. Now, the same amount sells for just 400-450 afghanis ($5-$6).

In a country where poverty is rife and malnutrition strikes the most vulnerable, such income losses can be critical.

“We are grateful, but things aren’t like they used to be, the struggle is much harder now,” Jan said. “In the past, work was steady, we used to sell some grapes, and people generally had good work but now the hardship is immense.”

Opening the border crossings and allowing trade to flow once more is critical, he stressed.

“We urge both our government and Pakistan to open these routes and reach an agreement,” he said. “The current situation is causing great hardship.”

Abdul Baqi Bina, the deputy director of the Kandahar Chamber of Commerce and Investment, said the border closure has dealt a severe blow to Afghanistan’s fruit exports — not just grapes, but also pomegranates.

In 2025, five southern Afghan provinces that make up the country’s main grape-producing region exported 44,225 tons — $13.8 million worth of grapes. Nearly all — 43,000 tons — went to Pakistan and the remainder headed to Bangladesh, Iraq and India, Bina said. So far this year, only 256 tons have been exported, at a value of $100,000.

For grape exporter Haji Abdul Hai, it has been a disaster.

“In my 50 years of life, I have never seen these roads closed to the extent they are now,” he said, adding that previous border closures would usually last for a few days, or one crossing would close while another remained open.

“But now, we are facing truly major difficulties,” he said.

Last year, the orchard where Qudratullah Popal worked picking grapes employed about 1,500 workers. This year, Popal said the number has plummeted to around 15.

“There have been good harvests. Grapes turned out well, but the issue is they cannot be exported to other countries. They are being sent to domestic locations … where there is already an abundance of grapes,” he said.

“When routes are blocked and trade halts, everyone’s livelihood is paralyzed, traders, laborers and orchard owners alike,” Popal said.It’s grape season in Afghanistan’s southern province of Kandahar, and the harvest this year is plentiful. But that’s small comfort for the region’s grape producers and workers, who say fighting between Afghanistan and Pakistan has left them unable to access their primary market.

For months, the two countries have traded fire sporadically across their long, mountainous border, leaving hundreds of people dead. Islamabad accuses Afghanistan’s Taliban government of harboring militants who carry out attacks inside Pakistan — a charge Kabul denies.

With the fighting have come border closures, severing a critical trade route and preventing Afghan producers from reaching what is the primary export market for many goods.

Unable to export their fresh fruit, Afghan grape producers have turned to the domestic market, where the increased supply has sent prices tumbling. To adapt, many producers are now drying their grapes and turning them into raisins — a cheaper product that sells for less.

In a long warehouse in Kandahar’s Zhari district, fans whirl overhead, stirring the hot summer air around bunches of plump, green grapes draped over sticks set up in rows to dry.

But even for raisins, prices have tanked.

Sakhi Jan, who owns a grape orchard in Zhari, says that with 10 people in his household to feed, he’s barely getting by. Seven kilograms (15.5 pounds) of raisins used to sell for around 1,000 to 1,200 afghanis ($13 to $16), he says. Now, the same amount sells for just 400-450 afghanis ($5-$6).

In a country where poverty is rife and malnutrition strikes the most vulnerable, such income losses can be critical.

“We are grateful, but things aren’t like they used to be, the struggle is much harder now,” Jan said. “In the past, work was steady, we used to sell some grapes, and people generally had good work but now the hardship is immense.”

Opening the border crossings and allowing trade to flow once more is critical, he stressed.

“We urge both our government and Pakistan to open these routes and reach an agreement,” he said. “The current situation is causing great hardship.”

Abdul Baqi Bina, the deputy director of the Kandahar Chamber of Commerce and Investment, said the border closure has dealt a severe blow to Afghanistan’s fruit exports — not just grapes, but also pomegranates.

In 2025, five southern Afghan provinces that make up the country’s main grape-producing region exported 44,225 tons — $13.8 million worth of grapes. Nearly all — 43,000 tons — went to Pakistan and the remainder headed to Bangladesh, Iraq and India, Bina said. So far this year, only 256 tons have been exported, at a value of $100,000.

For grape exporter Haji Abdul Hai, it has been a disaster.

“In my 50 years of life, I have never seen these roads closed to the extent they are now,” he said, adding that previous border closures would usually last for a few days, or one crossing would close while another remained open.

“But now, we are facing truly major difficulties,” he said.

Last year, the orchard where Qudratullah Popal worked picking grapes employed about 1,500 workers. This year, Popal said the number has plummeted to around 15.

“There have been good harvests. Grapes turned out well, but the issue is they cannot be exported to other countries. They are being sent to domestic locations … where there is already an abundance of grapes,” he said.

“When routes are blocked and trade halts, everyone’s livelihood is paralyzed, traders, laborers and orchard owners alike,” Popal said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

A new Department of Sanitation (DSNY) facility on Staten Island opened this week, paving the way for hundreds of new affordable homes. Mayor Zohran Mamdani on Tuesday announced the opening of two new DSNY garages on a 13.55-acre site at Fresh Kills, once New York City’s largest garbage dump. The $230 million project replaces the old Jersey Street garage on the borough’s North Shore, which will be demolished and replaced with a mixed-use affordable housing complex featuring 232 homes, a grocery store, amenities, and open space.

Located at 1000 West Service Road, the new sanitation complex features a two-story, 140,000-square-foot maintenance and operations garage with personnel offices and muster areas, lunch facilities, locker rooms, and other staff amenities.

The complex also includes a fueling station, a salt shed with a 4-million-pound capacity, upgraded household special waste and recycling drop-off facilities, expanded parking, and major infrastructure upgrades, including sanitary sewer force mains and stormwater systems.

The city says the new facility will improve trash collection, street cleaning, emergency snow response, and day-to-day operations across the borough. Relocating the operations will also substantially reduce heavy truck traffic on the North Shore, improving pedestrian safety and reducing noise.

In 2019, the project received an Award for Excellence in Design from the city’s Public Design Commission. The Department of Design and Construction (DDC) worked with designer Andrea Steel Architecture, contractors Perfetto Contracting Co. Inc. and Prismatic Development Corp., and project partners NORESCO, Tectonic Engineering, and Gilbane Building Company.

The new garage will also feature a plaque honoring former DSNY worker Vincent Guglielmino, who died of a heart attack in 2004 while traveling from work to a DSNY clinic in Lower Manhattan for medical care. His death helped spark changes that bolstered benefits for survivors of deceased DSNY workers, according to a press release.

Once the city’s largest garbage dump, the Fresh Kills facility closed in 2001 after 50 years of operation, briefly reopening following 9/11 so investigators could search through the rubble to identify human remains, according to Gothamist.

The site was initially identified as a development site in the 2019 Bay Street Rezoning and later became part of former Mayor Eric Adams’ North Shore Action Plan, which targeted 20 acres along Staten Island’s northern shore for development with continuous open space, 2,400 homes and new commercial spaces.

“They say one man’s trash is another man’s treasure, and in this case this award-winning DSNY garage is a treasure all on its own,” DDC Commissioner Paul A. Ochoa said. “New York’s Strongest deserve top-notch facilities, and we are proud to deliver a modern garage complex that supports the essential services they provide to the City.”

Hillside Grove. Credit: Purpose by Design Architects

The former site at 539 Jersey Street will become Hillside Grove, a mixed-use affordable housing complex developed by a joint team of Volunteers of America–Greater New York, Spatial Equity Co., and Nehemiah HDFC.

Purpose by Design Architects, a Minority and Women-owned Business Enterprise (M/WBE) design collaborative, will design the project with a focus on creating healthy, sustainable, and inclusive spaces, as 6sqft previously reported.

The 232 homes will be spread across three buildings: a 90-unit senior building for households earning up to 60 percent of the area median income (AMI); a 105-unit multifamily rental building for households earning up to 80 percent of AMI; and a homeownership co-op with about 37 affordable homes available for purchase by moderate-income households.

Credit: Purpose by Design Architects

Hillside Grove’s design entails four- and five-story buildings centered on concepts of health and wellness, aging in place, universal and inclusive design, active design, zero waste, and trauma-informed design.

The development team envisions the complex as an “urban sanctuary” designed to foster community and well-being, drawing inspiration from the area’s sloping terrain, historic architecture, and lush tree canopy while preserving the “small-town character” of Tompkinsville, according to the architect’s website.

It will also incorporate numerous sustainable design features and pursue Passive House certification through the use of a geothermal energy system, indoor gardens, and rooftop solar panels.

Other features include stormwater management and heat mitigation measures, including the planting of more than 100 trees, green roofs, retention ponds and dry wells, porous pavement, and rainwater capture and storage systems, as 6sqft previously reported.

Residents will have access to a variety of community-focused amenities, including community rooms, outdoor recreation space, exercise rooms, a computer lab, laundry rooms, and resident lounges.

Two mid-door gardens will offer year-round access to indoor greenspace, while a grocery store and community facility will host programming led by local partners.

The complex will also feature new public spaces along its perimeter, including a public plaza at Jersey Street and Victory Boulevard for bus riders and grocery store customers, another plaza at Brook Street, and widened sidewalks with shaded seating along Jersey Street.

“Blizzards or blue skies, our sanitation workers keep this city clean and moving, and they deserve facilities that reflect the excellence they bring to the job every day,” Mamdani said.

“The new Fresh Kills complex will strengthen the services Staten Islanders rely on, from trash collection and street cleaning to snowplowing and salt spreading,” he added. “And by moving these operations, we’re making way for hundreds of new affordable homes, public space, and a grocery store.”

RELATED:

The post New DSNY facility on Staten Island paves the way for 200+ affordable homes first appeared on 6sqft.

This post was originally published here

Prince Harry and his wife Meghan plan to move back to Britain this month, six years after they stepped down from their royal duties and relocated to the United States, media outlets reported on Wednesday.

The Duke and Duchess of Sussex are moving with Prince Archie, 7, and Princess Lilibet, 5, from California to Britain for an extended period and the children will begin school there in September, People magazine and British newspaper The Telegraph reported.

There was no comment from Harry’s spokesperson or from Buckingham Palace. However, a source close to the couple confirmed the reports’ accuracy.

 Britain's Prince Harry and his wife Meghan, Duchess of Sussex, holding their son Archie, meet Archbishop Desmond Tutu (not pictured) at the Desmond & Leah Tutu Legacy Foundation in Cape Town, South Africa, September 25, 2019. (credit: REUTERS/TOBY MELVILLE/FILE PHOTO)

Royal couple will not return to duties after criticizing monarchy

According to The Telegraph, the couple will not live in a royal residence. Their status will be unchanged, and they will remain non-working royals as agreed with the late Queen Elizabeth when they left in March 2020.

Harry married Meghan Markle in a dazzling ceremony at Windsor Castle in 2018, and it was hoped his union with the former actress, whose mother is Black, would reinvigorate the historic institution.

But it was not long before cracks in their relationship with the rest of the royal family began to emerge. Two years later in March 2020, they announced they would step down from official duties and move to the US. 

They moved to the wealthy seaside enclave of Montecito near Santa Barbara, California, with media reports putting the 2020 purchase price of their 16-bedroom home at $14.7 million. 

In the following years, Harry, now 41, and Meghan, 45, repeatedly criticized the royal family and the monarchy in TV interviews, a Netflix documentary series and most notably in Harry’s memoir Spare.

Harry had some particularly barbed comments for his father, King Charles, and his elder brother, heir-to-the-throne Prince William, leading to a total breakdown in their relationship.

Harry was also angry the British government changed his security arrangements and said the lack of ​automatic police protection meant he was unable to bring his children to Britain.

But relations with the king appeared to be thawing in September, and father and son met briefly for the first time in 20 months.

Last month, Harry, Meghan and their children visited Britain, and Charles saw his grandchildren for the first time since 2022.

However, the king, while welcoming the chance to see more of the Sussexes, himself only became aware of the couple’s plans to return to Britain on Sunday.

While Harry and the king’s relationship might have improved, he is still barely on speaking terms with his brother.

This post was originally published on here

Bitcoin has found some relief after months of selling pressure. On Wednesday, the cryptocurrency jumped nearly 6% to over $69,000, reclaiming a level it had not touched since early June. The jump came right after the Treasury Department announced that it would double purchases of older long-term government bonds.

“The market read this as a quiet form of quantitative easing, a move that weakens the dollar and sends scarce, debasement-hedge assets like Bitcoin higher,” Matt Mena, a senior strategist at crypto research firm 21Shares, told Fortune in a written statement.

Investors quickly piled into those assets, which in turn forced short sellers to cover roughly $1.5 billion in positions by buying Bitcoin in the market. That included purchases of about $700 million in a single minute, an event that 21Shares said may have amounted to the largest short squeeze in Bitcoin’s history.

The rally follows months of weak price action as Bitcoin struggled to recover from a brutal crash last October. Since that rout, which triggered more than $19 billion in liquidations, Bitcoin has fallen about 40% from the $115,000 level where it traded at the time, according to CoinGecko.

Alongside the Treasury announcement, Mena said investors have increasingly priced in a pause in rate hikes over the past two months. U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs drew roughly $1 billion in inflows during the first two weeks of August, adding another source of demand for the cryptocurrency.

Bitcoin wasn’t the only cryptocurrency to rally following the Treasury announcement. Ethereum and Zcash led major tokens, each rising 9% in the past 24 hours.

A possible bottom

The rally may signal that Bitcoin’s bear market has moved past its worst phase, according to Zach Pandl, Grayscale’s head of research.

“Our best guess is that Bitcoin potentially bottomed at $58,000 earlier this summer… and [that] it’s a compelling time for investors with longer-term horizons to be allocating to Bitcoin and the crypto asset class,” he said.

Pandl said the Treasury’s move highlighted deeper fiscal pressures and could prompt investors to consider alternative stores of value. The national debt is expected to reach $40 trillion before the end of the month, while the U.S. war with Iran has driven inflation higher across the country. Pandl added that recent favorable developments for the crypto industry may have also influenced Bitcoin’s price performance.

On Tuesday, the Securities and Exchange Commission proposed a regulatory framework for crypto assets that could reduce uncertainty as the CLARITY Act remains stalled in Congress. The proposal would exempt eligible crypto firms from certain federal securities rules and make it easier for them to issue tokens and raise capital.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Weight-loss drugs are becoming a popular employee perk, with almost a third of workers saying they’d switch jobs to get GLP-1 coverage. Now, Bank of America is spending $250 million or more yearly on the drugs for its staffers—and CEO Brian Moynihan says the upsides are well-worth the eye-watering cost. 

“What we see is a great impact on the employees,” Moynihan recently said in an interview with CNBC. “We’ve always been about mental wellness, physical wellness.”

It’s part of a wider $2 billion a year wellness package for employee healthcare at the $436 billion bank. Staffers may have to cover the premium or copay for their GLP-1s, but the Wall Street titan is picking up the rest of the bill, amounting to nearly a quarter of a billion dollars annually. And Moynihan says the health investment is worth it to support a healthier workforce. 

“It’s lowering near-term incidents of heart issues for people taking, even if they don’t have all the attributes,” the CEO continued. “That’s the payback.”

The chief executive even acknowledged that Bank of America may not fully realize all the long-term benefits. He noted that some Bank of America staffers on GLP-1s may not see the health upsides until later in life, years after they’ve left the company, but he still believes in the investment.

“It’s the right thing to do for your teammates…We do it because we want to be the great place to work,” Moynihan said. “It’s been fascinating to watch our teammates’ behavior on these adjustments, the loss of weight. We monitor that, we give them coaches and everything, and so it’s a good investment by us.”

Bank of America had no further comment to share with Fortune.

Weight loss drugs are popular—but 60% of firms only offer it for diabetes

In the past couple of years, weight loss drugs like Ozempic, Wegovy, and Zepbound have exploded on the wellness market. 

Now, GLP-1s—originally created to help manage blood sugar levels for people with type 2 diabetes—have become a fixture of millions of Americans’ lives. Around 11% of U.S. adults currently take GLP-1 medications for weight loss purposes, a stark jump from 3% just two years ago, according to a recent Gallup analysis. So companies are steadily expanding their health offerings to meet workers where they are. 

While 60% of employers said they offer GLP-1 coverage for diabetes only, around 36% also cover it for both diabetes and weight loss purposes, according to a recent study from IFEBP.

Earlier this year, consulting giant PwC announced it would no longer cover GLP-1s as an employee benefit for solely weight-loss purposes, blaming “rapidly rising costs.” Instead, the company said it would continue to offer the drug “when prescribed for conditions aligned with established standards of care, such as type 2 diabetes, but [they] will not be included under pharmacy coverage for weight management.” 

Companies are weighing the high costs of GLP-1 offerings for workers

GLP-1s are an increasingly sought-after benefit for talent; around 30% of workers even said they would switch jobs if that got them coverage for the drugs, according to a survey from insurance broker NFP. 

And they’ve gotten cheaper thanks to high demand, manufacturer price cuts, direct-to-consumer options, and new government programs. Now, a starting dose of Wegovy is available for just $149 a month, compared to $1,600 a month when it first launched in the U.S. in 2021. Or in the case of Amazon One Medical’s GLP-1 management program, insured individuals can snag the weight-loss drugs for as low as $25 a month. 

While the drugs have become cheaper, soaring demand and long-term use have put employers in a financial pickle. 

Now, more than a quarter of large corporations are ramping up GLP-1 coverage criteria in 2026 or 2027, according to an analysis from Mercer earlier this year. Around 11% of these big employers have dropped—or are planning to drop—coverage of the drugs for weight-loss purposes this year or next. 

Health services company Cigna stopped covering GLP-1 weight-loss drugs including Wegovy and Zepbound in its employee health plan this July. The company said it made the change “as availability has increased and new options ​have emerged,” but maintained that staffers still have access to weight management programs and resources. 

And HCA Healthcare, which employs hundreds of thousands of workers across its hospitals and medical centers, stopped covering the drugs for weight-loss this January after use of GLP-1s on its employee plan shot up 90% in 2025 alone. It still covers the drug for diabetes. 

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Please, folks, let’s not start panicking about long-term Treasury bond yields. In the last couple of weeks I’ve seen more ink spilled about the 30-year Treasury than I have in probably the last 10 years. 

The bellwether Treasury is the 10-year, which has been trading steadily in a range of 4 percent to 5 percent and no one’s been screaming about that. 

Yet here’s the key point. The 30-year Treasury bond yield has gone up about 35 basis points in recent weeks almost entirely because of plenty of new economic statistics that show a faster, more powerful growth rate — especially in manufacturing and construction, along with advanced technologies. 

It’s not about inflation. Yet the news headlines have been screaming inflation with no good analysis because they just love to keep whacking away at President Trump. 

Take a look at any of the Treasury rate increases, however, and you will see it’s all from the real yield, not the inflation component. 

The inflation component, which is the CPI breakeven compensation for inflation, hasn’t gone up all year. On the 30-year CPI breakeven, the expected inflation component has hovered just above 2.0 percent all year to date.

Another example, the market rate for 10-year Treasuries has increased about 50 basis points so far this year. 

And virtually all of it is from an increase in the real yield from Treasury Inflation-Protected Securities of 50 basis points. The expected inflation rate from the breakevens has increased by less than 5 basis points. 

The consumer price index break-even component that implies inflation has basically been flat. The same is true for the 30-year Treasury bond. 

What is happening however, is that market rates have been driven up by stronger 4 percent-type economic growth and are normalizing after all those 0-type rates from the financial crisis and Covid and very bad Federal Reserve policy that Kevin Warsh is going to fix. 

Actually, for context, a 4 percent-plus Treasury yield is more like the President Clinton/Speaker Newt Gingrich days of strong growth from lower capital gains taxes and welfare reform. 

The economy was booming then. The Treasury rate’s around 6 percent.  So right now, we’re just normalizing. And there is an enormous boom. Mr. Trump today at the White House spoke of the boom from one big beautiful bill:

“We’ve gained so much in the last 16 months like nobody can believe, actually. And not only that, but we have more money being invested in the United States than any country at any time in history. Money is coming in by the trillions.” 

He added that “our nation’s economic dominance drives trillions of dollars in investments, creates millions of jobs, and expands access, credit and capital so that every citizen has a chance to achieve what we now hear a lot about the American dream.”

The American dream is alive and well. So I’ll just put a cap on this by saying, first of all, ignore the headlines. Second of all, interest rates in the bond market are not exploding. 

And what increase there has been is because of a stronger than expected economy. And we are normalizing. And there’s nothing to panic over, even though the press loves to whack away at Mr. Trump on almost every topic under the sun. 

This post was originally published here

President Vladimir Putin ordered the Russian government on Wednesday to launch a program to rebuild commercial warehouses damaged or destroyed by Ukraine in a month of targeted attacks.

Ukraine has carried out drone strikes against at least two dozen warehouses of Russia’s top online retailer Wildberries since July 18, causing explosions and fires that have destroyed a large chunk of its storage capacity.

Putin, without naming the company, said a number of logistic sites needed rebuilding with state involvement, and told the government to work on this.

“It is essential to ensure that the restoration of damaged facilities is carried out at a qualitatively new technological level,” he said in televised comments to a conference of ministers and business leaders on the economy.

Russia’s economy growing despite sanctions, Putin says

Putin said the economy was growing modestly despite external pressure, a reference to Western sanctions, and despite Ukrainian attacks on industrial and infrastructure facilities.

Russian President Vladimir Putin attends a meeting with Human Rights Commissioner Tatyana Moskalkova at the Kremlin in Moscow, Russia May 12, 2026. (credit: SPUTNIK/MIKHAIL METZEL/POOL VIA REUTERS)

“Of course, such attacks have not caused, and could not cause, critical consequences. However, they do inflict damage; this is obvious, and we fully understand and acknowledge it,” he said.

Ukraine, whose own cities, ports and logistics hubs are also under attack, says its strategy is aimed at raising the costs to Russia of continuing the war that Moscow launched in February 2022.

European Union foreign policy chief Kaja Kallas said this week that the EU would in the coming months impose its most far-reaching sanctions yet on Russia.

This post was originally published on here

Casino and resort operator Bally’s issued a warning that it may struggle to keep up with its debt burden over the next year, and there is “substantial doubt” about its ability to remain a going concern.

The company made the disclosure in its second quarter earnings report filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC).

In the filing, Bally’s said the company is “pursuing a number of financing alternatives to enhance its liquidity, including asset monetization, an equity sale, and debt financings.”

“While the company is actively engaged in discussions on several financing alternatives, the conditions and events raise substantial doubt about the company’s ability to continue as a going concern,” Bally’s said in the filing.

FANATICS EXPANDS FURTHER INTO SPORTS AND BEYOND WITH FANATICS MARKETS PREDICTION TRADING PLATFORM

The company said it executed a term sheet in July for a loan that would fund the continued development of the Bally’s Bronx project and other corporate purposes, though the term sheet is non-binding, and the two sides are working toward a binding agreement.

“These plans have not been finalized, are subject to market conditions and the actions of third parties, are not within the company’s control and there can be no assurance that the plans will be successfully implemented,” Bally’s explained, adding that those plans don’t alleviate substantial doubt about its ability to remain a going concern.

Companies are required to include a going concern warning in its financial filings when auditors see that the company faces the risk of failing or being forced into bankruptcy within the next year.

LAS VEGAS OPENS FIRST CASINO IN 2 YEARS ON $780 MILLION PROPERTY CATERING MORE TO LOCALS THAN TOURISTS

Bally’s filing noted several factors that may influence its outlook and performance, including unexpected costs from its construction projects, risks from rapid growth, the impact of digitization of gaming on casino operators and the company’s expansion into digital gaming, as well as regulatory compliance costs and other matters.

As of the end of June, Bally’s owned and operated 20 casinos globally, including some in the United Kingdom and in 11 U.S. states, as well as a golf course in New York and horse racetracks in Colorado and Wyoming.

It also operates the Bally Bet Sportsbook & Casino, an iCasino and sportsbook licensed in 14 North American jurisdictions, and it holds a majority interest in Bally’s Intralot.

TROPICANA LAS VEGAS CEASING OPERATIONS THIS SPRING TO MAKE WAY FOR NEW BALLPARK

The company has rights to developable land in Las Vegas at the former site of the Tropicana Las Vegas and has a license to build a full-scale casino and resort in The Bronx, New York. 

It’s also developing Bally’s Chicago, an integrated resort in the Windy City, though it recently paused construction on some portions of the project amid the uncertainty.

Shares in Bally’s stock have declined over 35.9% over the past five trading days since the warning.

The company’s stock is down just 4.9% over the last year, but has fallen more than 46.8% since the start of 2026.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Bally’s shares are down 0.79% during Wednesday’s trading session.

This post was originally published here

Consumers are being urged to check their freezers after several varieties of Outshine fruit bars sold nationwide were recalled due to possible glass contamination.

Dreyer’s Grand Ice Cream is voluntarily recalling select batches of Outshine fruit bars sold in six-count packages and 24-count Variety Packs, according to an Aug. 18 announcement from the Food and Drug Administration (FDA).

The recall was issued after consumers reported finding glass in the products, the announcement noted.

“Dreyer’s is taking this action out of an abundance of caution following consumer reports of glass found in the product,” the company said.

FROZEN DOG FOOD RECALLED OVER SALMONELLA CONTAMINATION THAT LED TO MULTIPLE PET ILLNESSES

No illnesses or injuries have been reported, according to Dreyer’s.

The affected products were distributed to retailers nationwide

Consumers are urged to check the UPC, batch code and best-before date on the packaging to determine whether their fruit bars are included in the recall.

WALMART TOMATO BISQUE SOUP RECALLED OVER POSSIBLE LISTERIA CONTAMINATION

The recalled products include certain batches of:

A complete list of affected batch codes, UPCs and best-before dates can be viewed on the FDA’s website.

POPULAR REESE’S, ALMOND JOY ICE CREAM BARS RECALLED OVER LABELING ERROR

No other Outshine products or varieties are affected, according to the company.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Anyone who purchased an affected product should throw it away or return it to the place of purchase for a full refund.

FOX Business reached out to Dreyer’s for comment.

This post was originally published here

New York City must create roughly 700,000 new homes over the next decade to address its housing shortage, according to a draft city report. Released Wednesday, the Fair Housing Growth Strategy report is an analysis of the city’s housing crisis, mandated under a 2023 City Council bill that called for an assessment of the city’s overall need for new housing. The report finds that the city’s current shortage is among the worst in recorded history, with a rental vacancy rate of just 1.4 percent. Among apartments with asking rents below $1,100, fewer than 0.4 percent are available.

The Local Law 167 mandated the city’s Departments of Housing Preservation and Development (HPD) and City Planning (DCP) to produce a long-term housing needs assessment, five-year housing production targets, and a strategic equity framework every five years.

The Fair Housing Growth Strategy seeks to answer two questions: How much housing does NYC need to support a healthier, more affordable housing market, and how should housing be distributed to advance fair housing goals?

According to the report, decades of underproduction have led to one of the most limited housing markets in city history. With only 1.41 percent of apartments available to rent, lower-income households face even greater risks of severe rent burdening, poor housing conditions, overcrowding, displacement, and homelessness.

These figures are reflected in similar reports, such as the Coalition for the Homeless’ annual “State of the Homeless” report, released in June, which found that 194,531 individuals used the city’s shelter system over the course of 2024, the most in its history.

Scarcity amplifies fair housing barriers, according to the report, which include both intentional discrimination and structural practices that disproportionately limit housing opportunities for certain people and populations based on factors such as race.

For example, in a highly competitive housing market, source-of-income discrimination and bias based on family status, race, language, disability, or immigration status can become more prevalent and difficult to challenge. Additionally, structural barriers like restrictive zoning can curtail where, how much, and what types of housing can be built.

In order for the city to address this looming crisis, the long-term housing needs assessment says it needs to create roughly 700,000 additional homes over the next 10 years.

The figure was calculated by combining the city’s current housing shortage of 290,000 homes with 240,000 homes needed to accommodate projected population growth and another 170,000 homes that could be created as the city moves toward a healthier housing market.

The report also notes the Mamdani administration’s commitment to building affordable housing. As part of his “Block by Block” housing plan, the mayor has committed to building 200,000 new affordable homes, including 90,000 deeply affordable units and 28,000 units for formerly homeless households.

Local Law 167 also required the creation of five-year housing production targets (HPT), which translate the 10-year housing goals into five-year targets at the citywide and community district levels and inform strategies to overcome local barriers to fair housing.

By 2030, the city must build 350,000 new homes to meet half of its long-term housing needs, including 85,000 affordable units, 25,500 deeply affordable units and 12,750 units for formerly homeless households. It must also preserve 100,000 existing affordable homes while improving housing quality.

The report also found that most community districts have added relatively little housing over the past several decades, a rate insufficient to meet the city’s long-term needs. To meet these goals, all districts must contribute, according to the report.

Each community district offers “unique opportunities” to create new housing while facing “unique challenges.” Local stakeholders and conditions will help determine the best path toward meeting these goals.

2030 Targets for the Bronx:

To determine how much housing each district should create, the report first assesses how much growth it has experienced over the past decade relative to the total number of homes in the district.

2030 Targets for Queens:

Low-growth districts, with annual growth rates between 0.07 and 0.33 percent, would need to increase their production the most. Their targets are calculated by adding 6.5 percentage points to their recent growth rates.

2030 Targets for Manhattan:

Medium-growth districts, with annual growth rates between 0.34 and 1.07 percent, would have a target growth rate of 8.75 percent. High-growth districts, with annual growth rates between 1.09 and 3.27 percent, would need to sustain their recent growth, with a target growth rate of 10 percent.

2030 Targets for Brooklyn:

“The work undertaken by the City Council to establish a Fair Housing Growth Strategy is essential to identifying where housing development is most needed and addressing the longstanding disparities that have shaped our neighborhoods,” Council Member Farah N. Louis, chair of the subcommittee on zoning and franchises, said.

“This strategy affirms that even in communities like Central Brooklyn, where we have seen consistent housing production, we must do more to ensure that new homes are truly affordable and accessible to the neighbors who call these communities home,” she added.

2030 Targets for Staten Island:

A strategic equity framework (SEF) is another component of the report. It identifies strategies needed to overcome barriers to fair housing, ensure the benefits of growth give New Yorkers access to every neighborhood, and help those who struggle most. It uses a three-pronged approach to assess fair housing in NYC: mobility, stability, and neighborhood equity.

To improve mobility, the report says the city must create high-quality shared housing near job centers with high demand from young professionals and households in transition, as well as expand low- and moderate-cost homeownership opportunities, including co-ops with community land trusts, in areas where homeownership is rare and existing options are unaffordable.

One hundred percent affordable housing must also be financed in low-growth areas with very few existing low-cost homes. To achieve this goal, these areas can be rezoned to require new permanently affordable housing projects.

To improve stability, the city should build on recent commitments to tenant protections by improving outreach to New Yorkers who are less likely to seek help, such as those who distrust the government or have uncertain immigration statuses, while also targeting buildings with high rates of distress.

In order to protect older adults, people with disabilities, and children from unhealthy heat conditions, the city should provide financial assistance to help these populations purchase air conditioners and cover related utility costs, while ensuring New Yorkers have easy access to safe spaces during heat emergencies.

Additionally, for people with physical mobility challenges, the city should make it easier and less costly to install elevators in new housing, even when they are not legally required, while finding new ways to retrofit existing walk-up buildings to improve accessibility.

Neighborhood equity can be achieved through investment in streets, sidewalks, and public spaces, as well as increased access to services in areas with abundant affordable housing. It also includes investments in climate resilience measures to protect neighborhoods from flooding and other extreme weather events.

The report released this week is a draft, and over the coming weeks, HPD and DCP will gather public feedback to inform the final report. New Yorkers can learn more and comment on the draft by attending one of two virtual public hearings, scheduled for August 26 and September 2, scheduling a one-on-one conversation with city staff, or submitting written comments.

“To overcome our housing crisis, we need every neighborhood in every borough to do its part,” Dina Levy, commissioner of HPD, said. “The Fair Housing Growth Strategy is a roadmap to a fairer and more affordable city. We’re excited to engage with our neighbors across the city as we draft our final report.” 

RELATED:

The post NYC needs 700,000 new homes: See the unit target for every district first appeared on 6sqft.

This post was originally published here

The United States government has now crossed $40 trillion in gross federal debt for the first time, a number so large that it is almost impossible to comprehend.

One comparison makes it much easier.

The combined value of all residential real estate in the United States is roughly $55 trillion.

That means Washington’s debt is now equal to about three-quarters of the value of every house, condo and residential property in the entire country combined.

Put differently, America would need the equivalent value of roughly 40 million homes worth $1 million each to match the federal debt.

If the $40 trillion were divided equally among every person in the United States, the burden would be roughly $117,000 for every man, woman and child.

For a family of four, that theoretical share would be about $468,000.

Another way to grasp the scale: if someone spent $1 million every single day, it would take nearly 110,000 years to spend $40 trillion.

Even spending more than $1.2 million every second, around the clock for an entire year, would only get close.

The more important question, however, is whether that means America is effectively bankrupt.

The answer is no — not in the way a household or company becomes bankrupt.

The federal government has powers ordinary borrowers do not.

It can tax the world’s largest economy. It issues debt primarily in U.S. dollars. The dollar remains the dominant global reserve currency. And U.S. Treasury securities remain one of the most important financial assets in the world.

As long as investors continue buying Treasuries, Washington can refinance bonds as they mature and keep borrowing.

That is why crossing $40 trillion does not mean the government suddenly runs out of money.

But it does mean the country is extraordinarily leveraged.

The U.S. economy produces roughly $32 trillion to $33 trillion of goods and services a year.

Gross federal debt is therefore now equal to roughly 120% to 125% of one year of U.S. economic output.

That comparison requires context.

GDP is annual economic production. Debt is accumulated over many years.

A household earning $200,000 annually can carry a $300,000 mortgage without being bankrupt.

The real question is whether the borrower can comfortably service the debt — and whether that debt is growing faster than income.

That is where America’s problem becomes more serious.

Washington continues running enormous annual deficits, meaning the debt keeps increasing even when the economy is not in recession.

At the same time, higher interest rates are making that borrowing more expensive.

Interest on the federal debt is now approaching or exceeding $1 trillion a year, putting it among the largest categories of federal spending.

That money does not build roads, fund schools, buy military equipment or reduce taxes.

It pays for money the government already borrowed.

There is also an important distinction inside the $40 trillion.

Roughly $32 trillion is debt held by the public — owned by investors, pension funds, banks, foreign governments, the Federal Reserve and others.

The remainder is largely money Treasury owes to other federal government accounts and trust funds.

Economists therefore often focus more closely on debt held by the public when measuring fiscal stress.

Even using that narrower measure, U.S. debt is now roughly the size of the entire American economy.

Now compare it with the world.

Global GDP is roughly $125 trillion to $130 trillion annually.

That means the U.S. government’s $40 trillion debt pile alone is equal to almost one-third of everything the entire world produces in one year.

That does not mean America owes one-third of global wealth.

But it shows the extraordinary scale of one government’s accumulated borrowing.

The real danger is not that Washington wakes up tomorrow and files for bankruptcy.

The danger is that the debt increasingly constrains the country’s choices.

Treasury must continuously issue bonds to refinance old debt and fund new deficits. If investors demand higher yields to absorb all that borrowing, the effect does not stay inside Washington.

Treasury rates help determine mortgage rates, corporate borrowing costs, commercial real-estate financing, auto loans and business credit.

That means the cost of America’s debt can eventually become the cost of borrowing for ordinary households and businesses.

Washington ultimately has only a few ways to deal with persistent debt growth.

It can raise taxes.

It can cut spending.

It can borrow more.

Or inflation can reduce the real purchasing power of existing dollars.

In practice, governments usually use some combination of all four.

That is why the $40 trillion milestone is more than another large number.

It is a growing claim on future taxpayers, future federal budgets and future economic growth.

And the easiest way to understand just how large it has become is this:

The federal government now owes an amount equal to roughly three-quarters of the combined value of every residential property in the entire United States.

America is not bankrupt.

But the scale of its leverage is becoming impossible to ignore.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Treasury yields are on the march with some analysts suggesting Fed chairman Kevin Warsh is being “tested” by the bond market. But those who know the boomerang central banker well told Fortune that while Warsh will note market “teething” problems, a reaction shouldn’t be expected.

Yields have climbed higher as softer inflation and labor data have dampened the picture for Fed rate hikes, which the market has already priced in. Thirty-year Treasuries sit near 5.3%, heights which haven’t been seen since 2007. The 20-year is around the same mark.

Yields have been elevated since the conclusion of Warsh’s latest press conference following the meeting of the Federal Open Market Committee. In July, markets got the impression that they were perhaps doing some of the legwork for the Fed by tightening financial conditions with higher yields. Warsh also declined, as is his policy, to provide forward guidance, leaving analysts questioning whether the central bank would follow through with hikes.

“It is too early to draw firm conclusions, but the rise in the term premium and bear steepening of the curve following Warsh’s first two [Federal Open Market Committee] FOMC meetings could indicate that the Fed’s credibility is being tested,” said Bassam Nawfal, chief asset allocation strategist at Alpine Macro in a report yesterday.

Warsh’s defenders point out that he has been clear in his intention to bring inflation to heel at 2%. At his first post-FOMC conference in June, Warsh stated: “I’ve said for years inflation is a choice. You bet it is. And today I’m announcing that this Committee, unambiguously and unanimously, have decided we are going to deliver on that.”

The declaration was notable given that President Trump had insisted his nominee would have to be willing to cut the base rate.

Warsh’s credibility at the Fed is clear, Randall Kroszner, a professor of economics at the University of Chicago Booth School of Business, tells Fortune. Professor Kroszner has worked closely with Warsh in the past: He was confirmed to the Fed’s Board of Governors in the same year—at the same hearing—as Warsh, and the pair sat side by side during FOMC meetings until Kroszner left the central bank in 2009.

“There’s a teething process whenever there is a new Fed chair … there were concerns about Jay Powell when he first came in,” Prof. Kroszner told Fortune—speaking last week, ahead of the latest yield jump. “Kevin is very clear that he wants to change the communication strategy, and people … in the press as well as in the markets don’t like change, [they think]: ‘I’m used to this, I know how everything works, and now I don’t know how everything works and I’m frustrated.‘”

“But that’s part of the changeover process … I don’t think Kevin could be clearer about how he really doesn’t want to give forward guidance, he doesn’t want the focus to be on every bump and wiggle in the data. He wants the Fed to think in terms of the bigger picture … and people are finding that frustrating, but I think he’s been very, very clear.”

A market watcher

Prof. Kroszner, like Warsh, worked closely on the Fed’s response to the 2008 financial crisis, chairing the Committee on Supervision and Regulation of Banking Institutions and the Committee on Consumer and Community Affairs. The pair worked closely with private sector stakeholders: Warsh, a former Morgan Stanley executive, with Wall Street, and Prof. Kroszner speaking daily with credit card companies to evaluate the health of consumers.

Wall Street may now be wondering why one of its own is proving so surprisingly unhelpful. Prof. Kroszner suspects—unsurprisingly—that Warsh will still be keeping a watchful eye on markets.

“You certainly don’t want to dismiss what’s happening in the markets, that’s not appropriate,” Prof. Kroszner said. “You want to be aware of what’s happening in markets, but you certainly don’t want to be a slave to what’s happening in the markets … Kevin will be aware of and sensitive to that.”

Economists are divided on Warsh’s approach thus far, with current unease in the bond market just one symptom of that split. Federal Reserve alum Claudia Sahm has suggested Warsh is “long on symptoms and short on solutions.” Jeremy Siegel, emeritus professor of finance at the Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania, wrote for WisdomTree, where he serves as senior economist, that central bankers have an “obligation to explain the economic framework behind their decisions” and that last month Warsh had fallen short.

Prof. Kroszner suggests that whether or not experts agree or disagree with the approach, Warsh is nevertheless asking “very important questions.” Prof Kroszner added of Warsh’s task forces to examine current practice at the Fed: “Getting outsiders to have input and then have a good discussion at the Fed—as he said, family fights at the table, and he may well get that—because the answers may be controversial, but I think the questions are good ones.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Moderna shares soared 177% Wednesday, nearly tripling from $62.96 to $174.38 and adding approximately $44 billion to the company’s market value.

It was Moderna’s biggest one-day gain ever and the largest advance by an S&P 500 company in at least 25 years. The last member of the index even to double in one session was Hartford Financial, which gained 102.4% during the financial crisis on December 5, 2008.

The historic rally followed a medical breakthrough. Moderna and Merck said their personalized mRNA cancer vaccine succeeded in a Phase 3 trial involving patients with high-risk melanoma, becoming the first personalized mRNA cancer treatment to achieve that milestone.

The vaccine is created separately for each patient. Scientists analyze mutations inside the patient’s tumor and produce a customized treatment that trains the immune system to recognize and attack those cancer cells.

Combined with Merck’s Keytruda, the vaccine significantly extended the time before melanoma returned or spread following surgery.

The result could transform Moderna, which has struggled to replace declining COVID-19 vaccine revenue. It also gives Merck a potential way to strengthen its cancer franchise as Keytruda approaches the loss of important patent protections.

Merck shares climbed 12.6% to a record, while BioNTech jumped approximately 20%. Investors betting against Moderna suffered an estimated $5 billion in losses, and their rush to repurchase shares added fuel to the rally.

Moderna and Merck are preparing to seek regulatory approval, with a possible U.S. launch next year. The same technology is also being tested against other cancers, meaning Wednesday’s breakthrough could extend far beyond melanoma.

JBizNews Desk | Cambridge

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

State Farm Mutual Automobile Insurance recently began distributing a record $5 billion dividend to qualifying auto insurance customers, marking the largest payout of its kind in the company’s more than 100-year history.

Millions of customers have already received payments, with additional distributions on the way, State Farm said in a July 31 news release. 

The dividend is being paid to eligible customers covering more than 49 million State Farm Mutual auto vehicles nationwide.  

“Because the distribution covers more than 49 million auto vehicles, the payment process will take several months to be completed nationwide,” the company said.

COSTCO PLOTS MAJOR EXPANSION INTO SENIOR HEALTHCARE WITH MEDICARE PARTNERSHIP

Each customer’s payment is calculated as a percentage of the premium paid for each qualifying policy in 2025.

The percentage varies by state and ranges from 4% to 10%, according to State Farm.

State Farm previously told USA Today that customers who had an active personal auto insurance policy in 2025 are eligible for the payment.

MAJOR PBMS TO BOOST PRESCRIPTION DRUG PRICE TRANSPARENCY THROUGH TRUMPRX

The company said qualifying customers will be notified about a pending payment either by email or through a letter in the mail.

Customers with an email address on file will get instructions to choose how they want to be paid. 

Those without an email address on file will receive a check by mail.

The insurer did not specify an exact date for when the payments would be completed.

OBAMACARE EXCHANGE FLAW EXPOSED AMERICANS TO UNEXPECTED HEALTH PLAN SWITCHES, WATCHDOG FINDS

State Farm initially unveiled plans for the $5 billion dividend in February.

“This dividend is possible due to State Farm Mutual’s financial strength and a stronger than expected underwriting performance, which has been reported industry wide,” State Farm said at the time.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

FOX Business reached out to State Farm for comment.

This post was originally published here

Wall Street broke its three-day losing streak Wednesday, but the modest index gains concealed a much bigger day underneath the market.

Moderna delivered a breakthrough late-stage result for its personalized melanoma vaccine, Treasury intervened to calm long-term bond markets, Federal Reserve officials showed a stronger willingness to raise interest rates, and several major developments demonstrated how quickly AI computing is becoming an industry with its own chips, energy infrastructure and financial markets.

Markets — Stocks Recover as Treasury Calms the Bond Market

The S&P 500 gained 0.24% to close at 7,709.91. The Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 123.94 points, or 0.23%, to 53,467.34, while the Nasdaq Composite added 0.15% to finish at 26,331.09.

The rebound came after the Treasury Department said it would at least double the maximum size of certain buybacks involving longer-term government debt, from $2 billion to $4 billion per operation.

The move targeted the 10-to-20-year and 20-to-30-year portions of the Treasury market, where rising yields had been increasing borrowing costs and placing pressure on expensive technology stocks.

The 30-year Treasury yield, which had touched its highest level since 2007, retreated toward 5.20%. The 10-year yield fell to roughly 4.66%.

Technology stocks remained uneasy despite the broader recovery. Marvell Technology gained about 8% following an expanded agreement with Google, while Broadcom fell approximately 5% as investors reconsidered competition in custom AI chips.

Estée Lauder jumped following a stronger-than-expected profit forecast. La-Z-Boy, meanwhile, entered Wednesday under heavy pressure after dropping roughly 16% in Tuesday’s after-hours trading following an unexpected quarterly loss and weak sales outlook.

Medicine & Markets — Moderna Soars After Melanoma Vaccine Breakthrough

The day’s most dramatic corporate development came from Moderna and Merck, whose personalized mRNA cancer vaccine succeeded in a late-stage melanoma trial.

Moderna shares surged roughly 177%, adding tens of billions of dollars to the vaccine maker’s market value. Merck rose more than 10%, becoming one of the Dow’s strongest contributors, while BioNTech, Novavax and other biotechnology companies also advanced.

The treatment, known as intismeran autogene, is designed individually for each patient by analyzing the genetic mutations in that person’s tumor. The resulting vaccine trains the immune system to recognize cancer cells carrying those mutations.

When combined with Merck’s Keytruda, the treatment reduced the risk of melanoma returning or spreading among high-risk patients following surgery. The Phase 3 results represent an important validation of personalized mRNA technology outside infectious diseases.

The commercial implications are substantial. Moderna has been searching for a major source of growth beyond its declining COVID-19 vaccine business, while Merck needs new products capable of extending its cancer franchise as Keytruda approaches the loss of key patent protections.

The results sent the S&P 500 healthcare sector to a record high and transformed one clinical trial into one of the year’s most consequential biotechnology events.

Federal Reserve — Another Rate Increase Remains Possible

Minutes from the Federal Reserve’s July meeting showed substantially greater concern about inflation than markets had anticipated.

The Fed held its benchmark rate at 3.50% to 3.75% by a 9–3 vote. Beth Hammack, Neel Kashkari and Lorie Logan favored an immediate quarter-point increase, while several additional policymakers also supported tighter policy during the discussion.

More importantly, “many” participants believed additional tightening would probably become necessary if inflation failed to move toward the Fed’s 2% target.

That matters directly to businesses waiting for cheaper financing.

Even if the Fed leaves rates unchanged in September, the minutes weakened expectations that meaningful rate cuts are approaching. Commercial mortgages, equipment loans, business credit and consumer financing could remain expensive longer than many companies anticipated.

AI Chips — Google Gives Marvell a Major Seat at the Table

Google expanded its relationship with Marvell Technology, agreeing to work with the chipmaker on specialized hardware connected to Google’s Tensor Processing Units.

The arrangement covers AI inference accelerators, storage controllers, networking components and near-memory computing products.

Marvell also issued Google a warrant giving it the right to purchase as many as 58.97 million shares at $206.58 each. The aggregate exercise price would be approximately $12.2 billion, although much of the warrant will vest only if purchasing and revenue targets are reached through 2033.

The larger business story is supplier diversification.

Google does not want the expansion of its AI infrastructure dependent on a single custom-chip partner. The same logic that has long shaped automobile and semiconductor supply chains is now moving deeper into AI: hyperscalers increasingly want multiple suppliers capable of designing processors, networking chips, storage controllers and specialized accelerators.

The agreement does not remove Broadcom, Google’s established custom-chip partner, but it gives Marvell a significantly larger position in Google’s supply chain.

AI Economics — Computing Power Is Becoming Something Companies May Hedge

The Commodity Futures Trading Commission asked for public comment on derivatives tied to computing power, an early regulatory step toward treating AI compute as a tradable commodity.

The agency is examining compute cash markets, liquidity, manipulation risks, customer protections and perpetual compute futures.

The concept is similar to how airlines hedge fuel or manufacturers lock in future prices for metals and currencies. For AI companies, computing capacity is becoming a raw material whose cost and availability can determine whether a product is profitable.

If GPU access or data-center capacity becomes scarce and prices fluctuate sharply, derivatives could eventually allow companies to secure future computing costs rather than remaining fully exposed to the spot market.

AI infrastructure is beginning to resemble an actual commodity market.

Technology Deals — Stripe Buys Its Way Deeper Into AI

Stripe agreed to acquire OpenRouter, a platform that allows developers to access and route requests among hundreds of AI models through a single interface.

Stripe did not disclose the price. Earlier reporting valued the transaction above $7 billion, while another report placed it at approximately $8 billion.

OpenRouter says it supports more than 400 AI models, processes over 10 trillion tokens daily and serves more than 10 million developers and businesses.

Stripe built its business by becoming the financial infrastructure beneath internet commerce. OpenRouter gives it a position within the operational and financial infrastructure supporting AI consumption.

As companies increasingly pay for artificial intelligence by the token rather than by the traditional software seat, routing, measuring and billing for those tokens could become a major business of its own.

Energy & Manufacturing — EV Battery Factories Find a New Customer in AI

LG Energy Solution is shifting a growing portion of its North American production from electric-vehicle batteries toward large energy-storage systems.

The pivot reflects two forces moving in opposite directions: electric-vehicle growth has developed more slowly than battery manufacturers expected, while electricity demand from AI data centers is accelerating.

By the end of this year, five of LG Energy’s eight North American factories are expected to manufacture energy-storage batteries or be preparing to do so. Its Lansing, Michigan, facility will produce cells for both energy-storage systems and electric vehicles and is expected to supply batteries connected to Tesla’s storage business.

The shift shows how the AI boom is spreading far beyond Silicon Valley.

Data centers require chips, but they also need enormous quantities of electricity, backup power, transformers, cooling equipment, batteries, generators and transmission infrastructure. Factories originally built for the EV boom are now finding a second customer in the AI power boom.

Business Costs — Productivity Absorbs Part of the Tariff Hit

Research from the Federal Reserve Bank of Boston offered an important explanation for why tariffs have not pushed consumer inflation as high as some forecasts anticipated.

Researchers found that industries confronting larger tariff-related costs also experienced stronger labor-productivity growth. Companies maintained output while reducing labor hours, allowing them to absorb part of the increase rather than immediately passing the full expense to customers.

The researchers estimated that tariffs—whose average rate increased from approximately 2.5% before President Trump’s return to about 10%—combined with productivity conditions to add roughly half a percentage point to core personal-consumption-expenditures inflation.

The findings do not mean tariffs carried no consumer cost. Other Federal Reserve research has found substantial tariff pass-through, and the Boston Fed acknowledged that additional forces have kept inflation above the central bank’s target.

For business owners, however, the lesson is significant: productivity is increasingly becoming the difference between absorbing higher input costs and raising prices.

Technology & Regulation — Meta Faces Its Biggest Child-Safety Test Yet

A major federal trial against Meta entered its second day Wednesday, with former Meta engineering director and Instagram safety consultant Arturo Bejar testifying that the company placed growth and engagement ahead of protections for younger users.

California, Colorado, Kentucky and New Jersey accuse Meta of designing Facebook and Instagram to encourage harmful use among minors. Those states and 25 others also allege that the company improperly collected and used personal information belonging to children under 13.

The trial is expected to last six weeks, and Mark Zuckerberg is expected to testify. Meta denies the allegations and says it has invested heavily in protections for teenagers and younger users.

The stakes extend beyond potential damages.

A ruling requiring changes to Facebook or Instagram’s design, age verification, advertising or recommendation systems could alter the economics of two of the world’s largest digital-advertising platforms.

Banking — Signature Bank Investors Get Another Chance in Court

A federal appeals court revived shareholder litigation arising from Signature Bank’s 2023 collapse, rejecting the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation’s argument that investors lost their right to pursue securities-fraud claims when the agency became the bank’s receiver.

Investors accuse seven former Signature executives and directors, along with former auditor KPMG, of misrepresenting the bank’s liquidity risks and risk-management practices before its failure.

The appeals court ruled only that shareholders retained the right to bring their claims. It did not decide whether the fraud allegations were valid, and the case will now return to federal district court for further proceedings.

The decision could matter beyond Signature by preserving shareholders’ ability to pursue executives, directors and auditors after future bank failures instead of leaving every potential claim exclusively with federal regulators.

What to Watch Thursday

Walmart is the largest corporate event Thursday morning. The retailer will release quarterly results before the market opens, followed by its investor call at 8 a.m. Eastern.

With recent retail data showing pressure on discretionary spending, Walmart will provide one of the clearest readings on whether American households are trading down, reducing purchases or shifting more of their spending toward lower-priced retailers.

Weekly jobless claims and the Philadelphia Fed manufacturing survey arrive at 8:30 a.m. Eastern. After Wednesday’s Fed minutes demonstrated that policymakers remain prepared to raise rates if inflation persists, unexpectedly strong or weak economic data could have an outsized effect on Treasury yields.

Alibaba and Deere also report Thursday. Alibaba will provide another look at Chinese consumer demand and AI investment, while Deere will offer a direct reading on agriculture, construction equipment and the financial condition of farmers facing elevated borrowing and fuel costs.

Wednesday’s broader business message was that AI is no longer simply a technology story. It is becoming a chip-supply story, an electricity story, a battery story, a financing story—and potentially a commodities-and-derivatives story.

At the same time, the Federal Reserve is reminding businesses that the cost of financing that investment may remain high.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. national debt crossed another historic milestone on Wednesday as it topped $40 trillion for the first time in history amid persistent federal budget deficits that are causing the debt to soar higher.

Data from the Treasury Department released on Wednesday showed that the gross national debt reached $40,047,425,768,420.22 as of August 18.

The $40 trillion milestone comes after the federal government’s debt burden crossed the $39 trillion threshold about five months ago in March, which closely followed the $38 trillion mark being crossed in October 2025.

America’s national debt is growing rapidly due to surging interest costs, which are rising because of a larger debt burden and higher interest rates, as well as growth in federal spending on Social Security and Medicare amid the aging of the U.S. population.

FEDERAL BUDGET DEFICIT ON TRACK TO SURPASS $2T THIS FISCAL YEAR AS SPENDING OUTPACES REVENUE

A March estimate by the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office (CBO) estimated that the gross national debt will rise to $63 trillion in 2036, with annual budget deficits widening from about $2.1 trillion, the agency’s estimate for the current fiscal year, to $3.1 trillion a year a decade from now.

The gross national debt topping $40 trillion follows another recent debt milestone that puts the burden in context relative to the size of the U.S. economy.

The debt held by the public, a measure economists prefer to use in comparing a nation’s debt to the size of its economy, reached $31.27 trillion in late March the $31.22 trillion in gross domestic product (GDP) – marking the first time in about 80 years the public debt was larger than the economy.

Debt held by the public is projected to break the record of 106% of GDP that was set in 1946, when the U.S. was in the process of demobilization after the war ended, in the next few years, before rising to an estimated 120% of GDP in 2036, per the CBO’s estimate.

US NATIONAL DEBT SURPASSES SIZE OF THE ECONOMY FOR FIRST TIME SINCE WORLD WAR II

Michael A. Peterson, CEO of the Peter G. Peterson Foundation, told FOX Business that “For the millions concerned about affordability, let’s start by asking Washington to take notice that the national debt just hit $40 trillion,” adding that the debt has doubled in under 10 years and that “we must change course.”

“The more debt we take on, the more interest costs we have to bear, which now even exceed the cost of national defense. And every trillion we add to our debt contributes to higher interest rates and inflation, increasing the mortgages, car loans and credit card bills of all Americans,” he said.

“At the same time, debt harms economic growth, slowing wage increases while the cost of living continues to rise.”

US DEBT SET TO CRUSH WORLD WAR II RECORD AS ANNUAL DEFICITS EXPLODE TO $3T WITHIN DECADE

The CBO’s budget outlook from this spring noted that the debt held by the public is projected to grow faster than the U.S. GDP in the years ahead, which could slow economic growth and reduce private investment, while causing interest costs to rise further.

CBO warned that would also increase the risk of a fiscal crisis, in which investors lose confidence in the value of the U.S. government’s debt, as that could cause interest rates to rise abruptly and cause other economic and financial disruptions.

For example, those dynamics could increase inflation expectations that may, in turn, degrade the dollar’s status as the dominant international reserve currency.

“The only good thing about our fiscal challenge is that there are many available solutions, and the budget is entirely within our control,” Peterson said, noting that U.S. adversaries like China, Russia and Iran likely enjoy seeing the country devalue its economic future.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“If we want to improve our living standards, today and for the next generation, now is the time for lawmakers to put our nation on a more affordable and sustainable path,” he added.

This post was originally published here

The U.S. Treasury has begun turning the new federal stablecoin law into operating rules, moving the industry from years of debate over whether digital dollars should be regulated to the much harder question of exactly who will be allowed to issue and distribute them.

The proposed rule implements key provisions of the GENIUS Act, the new federal framework governing payment stablecoins — digital tokens designed to maintain a fixed value, typically $1.

The first major deadline comes January 18, 2027.

After that date, companies generally will not be permitted to issue payment stablecoins in the United States without an appropriate federal or state license.

A second and potentially more disruptive restriction arrives July 18, 2028.

At that point, crypto exchanges, wallet providers and other digital-asset service companies generally will not be allowed to offer stablecoins to U.S. customers unless the tokens were issued by properly licensed entities.

That means the rules will eventually affect far more than the companies creating stablecoins.

Exchanges will have to decide which tokens can remain listed. Fintech firms will need to review which digital dollars they can legally integrate into payments. Banks and custodians will need compliance systems capable of distinguishing approved issuers from unapproved ones.

Foreign stablecoins will face their own requirements.

Treasury’s proposal establishes standards for determining when an overseas-issued token is effectively being offered into the U.S. market and therefore must comply with American rules.

That could become one of the most consequential parts of the framework.

Stablecoins are inherently global. A token issued abroad can move between digital wallets almost instantly, making traditional geographic boundaries much harder to enforce than they are with conventional banking products.

The government is now trying to build those boundaries into the legal infrastructure.

The significance for businesses is growing quickly.

Stablecoins are no longer used only by crypto traders.

They are increasingly being considered for international payments, remittances, corporate treasury functions, settlement between financial institutions and faster movement of dollars across borders.

Supporters argue that regulated stablecoins could reduce payment costs and allow money to move around the clock rather than waiting for conventional banking systems to settle.

Regulators see the same scale as a reason for stricter oversight.

A stablecoin only works if customers believe the dollar promised by the token will actually be there when they redeem it. That puts enormous importance on reserves, custody, liquidity and the financial condition of the issuer.

The GENIUS Act was designed to move those responsibilities into a formal regulatory framework.

Now Treasury has to define how that framework works in practice.

The department is accepting public comments for 60 days, giving banks, crypto companies, payment processors and investors an opportunity to challenge or reshape parts of the proposal before final rules are issued.

That process will determine who can issue digital dollars, which tokens American customers can legally use and how much of today’s stablecoin market survives once licensing requirements fully take effect.

The political argument over stablecoins is largely over.

The compliance race has begun.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The United Arab Emirates suspended all trade with Iran on Wednesday after the UAE said it had come under renewed fire from the country — a move that will further isolate the Islamic Republic, which is suffering under U.S. sanctions and a blockade.

Incoming ballistic missile fire triggered nationwide warnings Tuesday night for UAE residents to seek shelter, the first time in weeks such an alarm had sounded.

Early in the conflict, the UAE regularly came under intense fire from Iran, and most trade between the countries, which had once been important trading partners, ground to a halt. In late June, as hostilities eased, some maritime trade resumed, Iran’s state-run IRNA news agency reported.

Beyond the trade in domestically produced goods, “the UAE has been very important for Iran as a re-export hub and has helped the country absorb some of the shocks caused by sanctions,” Mohammad Farzanegan, a professor of Middle Eastern economics at Germany’s University of Marburg, told The Associated Press.

“Iran therefore depends heavily on the UAE, not because the UAE itself produces one-third of Iran’s imports, but because it serves as a major gateway for Iran to access third-country goods and commercial infrastructure.”

The UAE accuses Iran of firing missiles. Tehran denies it

Following the announcement that two ballistic missiles had been fired toward the UAE, both of which splashed down in the Persian Gulf late Tuesday, the Emirati Foreign Ministry said it decided to impose the punitive measures, while also saying it remained committed to “dialogue, cooperation and regional integration.”

The step halted all trade and financial transactions “until further notice,” the ministry said in a statement.

The UAE Defense Ministry said assessments showed that the missiles targeted maritime traffic. It was not clear whether they targeted Emirati ships or the country’s territorial waters.

Iranian Foreign Ministry spokesperson Esmail Baghaei denied that Iran had launched any missiles toward the UAE.

As part of Iran’s efforts to maintain a stranglehold over the Strait of Hormuz, it has regularly attacked ships attempting to use the waterway, including four tankers owned by Abu Dhabi’s state-owned ADNOC oil and gas company over the past two weeks. None of the attacks caused injuries, but they brought harsh condemnation from the UAE and others in the region, including Kuwait and Bahrain.

Since the beginning of the conflict, nearly 20 ADNOC vessels have been attacked by missiles and drones in the Strait of Hormuz, killing one person and wounding another 20.

Iran’s ability to control traffic through the strait, through which a fifth of traded oil and natural gas passed during peacetime, has proved its biggest strategic advantage in the war. While the U.S. and Israel — which launched the war on Feb. 28 — have given various aims, including toppling Tehran’s government and ending its nuclear program, the conflict has devolved into a fight over the strait.

U.S. President Donald Trump insisted Tuesday that the strait was “open and operating” and posted a map depicting it as a U.S. territory. Iranian Deputy Foreign Minister Kazem Gharibabadi called him a “deluded man.”

Ten vessels transited the strait Tuesday, according to the MarineTraffic website, fewer than a tenth the number that typically sailed through before the war began, when there were no restrictions.

During the war, Iran has launched hundreds of ballistic missiles and thousands of drones in strikes that Tehran said were targeting U.S. assets but hit buildings in Dubai and Abu Dhabi, Dubai’s commercial airport, ports and energy infrastructure.

Iran has accused the UAE and other U.S. allies in the Gulf of facilitating American military attacks on Iran, and Iran’s chief of staff, Gen. Ali Abdollahi, issued a new warning Wednesday to “countries on the southern shores of the Persian Gulf.”

“Any assistance or facilitation provided to the aggressor U.S. military amounts to participation alongside U.S. military forces,” he said in a statement distributed by Iran’s semiofficial Fars news agency.

The UAE embargo could put new pressure on Iran

Before the war, the UAE was one of Iran’s biggest trade partners, providing more than 30% of its imports valued at some $21 billion, according to the World Trade Organization’s latest figures from 2024. It was the destination for nearly 13% of its exports worth some $7 billion.

The embargo carries its own risks, however, Farzanegan said.

“As a relatively small country seeking to remain a regional hub for business and finance while attracting tourists and investors, the UAE depends heavily on regional stability,” he said. “Any major conflict with Iran can therefore cause substantial damage to its economy.”

The Emirati announcement comes as the U.S. prepares to apply new economic pressure on Iran. Speaking last week, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said the measures would be a combination of economic isolation and the continued blockade of Iranian ports.

The economic pressure follows the intense bombing campaign that targeted industrial and civilian infrastructure in addition to military targets. Already the International Monetary Fund forecasts inflation of nearly 70% this year in Iran and an economic contraction of 5.4%. Meanwhile, its rial currency has hit record lows.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

More governors are shifting their stances or taking more steps to squeeze data centers as the midterm elections near and public opinion sours on the energy-hungry behemoths that tech giants and developers are building to fuel artificial intelligence products and cloud computing.

The backlash to the massive server warehouses is enveloping races for governor in some of the nation’s biggest states and presidential battlegrounds.

On Tuesday, Pennsylvania Gov. Josh Shapiro, a Democrat, said his administration would no longer put data center projects at the head of the line when it comes to issuing construction permits or granting developers a lucrative tax exemption if they don’t meet certain standards.

Those include plans to pay the full cost of their electricity and show how they will use advanced technology to limit water use. They also must first win local approval before they can seek state approval. They are, he said, the “strictest guardrails in the nation,” although he stopped short of imposing a moratorium on issuing permits.

Shapiro, considered a potential contender for the White House in 2028, is facing increasing pressure from his GOP opponent, Stacy Garrity, as communities across the state revolt against proposed data centers.

At a news conference, Shapiro slammed what he called “predatory developers” trying to bully local officials and ram through dozens of projects in Pennsylvania — his administration said it counted reports of more than 100 — that likely will never be built because they don’t have the financing, power supply or tech-sector clients to use the space.

“These speculators are nevertheless scaring our communities, being aggressive with township officials, bullying our neighbors, our fellow Pennsylvanians, and refusing to listen to the people,” Shapiro said. “And they are threatening to fundamentally change the character of our communities.”

In particular, he singled out developers aiming to build six campuses of about 50 server warehouses in tiny Archbald Borough that has spawned a community uprising, a lawsuit by one developer and motions by another to force the recusal of six of the town’s seven council members.

In a statement, Garrity said Shapiro “lit the fuse on the chaos we are seeing in community after community.”

Meanwhile, in Texas, Democratic challenger Gina Hinojosa released a TV ad in rural markets Tuesday accusing Republican Gov. Greg Abbott of “selling you out” to data center executives and companies.

The ad airs as Hinojosa, a state lawmaker, has aggressively looked to exploit an undercurrent of discontent in rural, Republican strongholds over data centers’ perceived threat to rural life, ranchland and dwindling water supplies.

Challengers are capitalizing on growing discontent

At one time, both Shapiro and Abbott had been cheerleaders for data centers and actively sought to recruit them, with Shapiro appearing with Amazon officials to announce a $20 billion investment in Pennsylvania, and Abbott, likewise, appearing with Google execs to announce its $40 billion investment in Texas.

But in recent weeks, Abbott ordered regulators to take steps to ensure Texans were not paying higher electricity bills because of data centers, even telling them to hold up data center projects until they complete their work.

He also promised to push a legislative agenda next year to impose regulations on data centers, including taking away the state’s billion-dollar-plus-per-year tax break.

For much of the past year, a growing number of data center projects have met rejection in local zoning or permitting board votes across the U.S., as angry residents pack once-sleepy municipal meetings.

Losing open space, farmland, forest or rural character is a big concern. So is the damage to quality of life, property values or health by on-site diesel generators kicking on or the constant hum of servers. Others worry that wells and aquifers could run dry or electricity bills will skyrocket.

Small, under-the-radar data centers have been around for decades. But the explosion of artificial intelligence chatbots has given rise to data centers that are larger than anything just about any town has ever seen. Some of them dwarf football stadiums and factories and use more energy than small cities.

States trying to tighten the screws on data centers

In some states, governors and lawmakers are trying to force data centers to pay for their own electricity supply, limit their water use, disclose more about their operations and do more to win community support. They are also chafing at the rising tab for the sales tax exemption most states offer data centers.

In Arizona, Democratic Gov. Katie Hobbs, who is seeking reelection, got lawmakers to agree to slap a three-year moratorium on the state’s sales tax exemption for data centers. Hobbs, who had voted to create the tax credits when she was a legislator, called it a “corporate handout.”

New York Gov. Kathy Hochul, a Democrat seeking reelection, ordered a one-year ban on large data centers to give the state time to impose protections for the environment and its energy grid.

Shapiro isn’t the only potential 2028 White House hopeful to step up his criticism of data centers. Illinois Gov. JB Pritzker, a Democrat running for a third term, halted new sales tax exemptions for data centers there until lawmakers impose tougher standards on their operations.

In Ohio, the Democratic and Republican nominees for governor — Dr. Amy Acton and Vivek Ramaswamy — in recent days each unveiled dueling data center policies that called for developers to meet tougher standards before being built.

Data center opposition isn’t necessarily a golden ticket

In Wisconsin, the Democratic nominee for governor, David Crowley, narrowly defeated a challenger who made her call for a one-year moratorium on data center construction a centerpiece of her campaign.

Crowley has taken a more nuanced approach, saying local communities must have veto authority, while also saying data centers are a part of the modern economy and could bring significant economic benefits to the state.

His Republican opponent, U.S. Rep. Tom Tiffany, has attacked Crowley on the issue, including a TV ad released this week where he calls him “Data Center David Crowley.”

___

Associated Press writers Scott Bauer in Madison, Wisconsin, and J.J. Cooper in Phoenix contributed to this report.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Car insurance costs trended higher in the first half of this year after declining in 2025, with a new report projecting increases in over 30 states this year.

An analysis by Insurify found car insurance premiums fell 6% last year, with drivers in 39 states seeing a decline in average full-coverage premiums. However, in the first half of 2026, the average cost of full-coverage premiums rose 1% to $2,237, with 27 states having seen cost increases to date and 32 states expected to see increases by year-end.

“Unfortunately, this year, a majority of the states are trending up,” Insurify CEO Snejina Zacharia told FOX Business in an exclusive interview. “The severity of weather conditions and the severity of accidents have continued to be very strong.”

“On top of that, we have seen a 45% increase in repair costs. Repair costs are a major driver of costs in the claims and claims history for the insurance industry, so carriers are adjusting that on a state-by-state level,” Zacharia said.

TARIFFS ON THE AUTO INDUSTRY COULD TAKE A HIT ON CAR INSURANCE RATES

She added that the trend of higher repair costs began several years ago with the COVID pandemic and chip shortages, which have continued to rise amid the impact of inflation across the economy and tariffs on auto parts.

Zacharia said that some of the sharpest increases this year have been in states which historically have relatively low costs.

Among those lower-cost states noted in Insurify’s report include West Virginia, which saw a 5% increase in the first half of the year, while drivers in Kentucky went from having paying $58 below the national average to $65 above the national average. Both Kentucky and West Virginia are expected to see rates rise 8% year over year, according to the projection for the end of 2026.

CAR INSURANCE RATES SOARED IN 2024; DRIVERS IN THESE STATES PAY THE MOST

“The sharpest increase that we predict will be in the state of Connecticut, a small state where the state is expected to get a 15% year over year increase in its car insurance. Just looking back five years, the state of Connecticut has increased rates 67%, and the majority of the states unfortunately have seen dramatic increases across the board,” she explained.

Some parts of the country saw rates decline in the first half of the year, such as Washington, D.C., which was down 7% and is projected to end 2026 down 5% on a net basis from a year ago – though it still has the nation’s highest average premiums at an average full-coverage cost of $3,955. The decline in auto thefts and fatal crashes contributed to the decrease.

New Mexico’s premiums were down 6% in the first half of the year and that trend is expected to continue through the end of the year, finishing down 8% at a projected cost of $1,587. New York and New Jersey were each down 5% in the first half of the year and are projected to finish 2026 down 4% year over year with total costs around $2,900 each.

AMERICANS’ INSURANCE RATES ARE SOARING AND LAWSUITS PLAY A SIGNIFICANT ROLE

Zacharia said that some strategies consumers can use to obtain a lower insurance premium include increasing their deductible or making other changes to coverage within their policy.

“For example, if your vehicle is so old that the cost to insure it is almost more expensive than the cost to replace the vehicle, you probably don’t need comprehensive and collision insurance because you will be paying almost as much year over year as your total vehicle cost,” she explained.

“Also, every carrier will have different discounts for the customer, and this is another reason why it’s important to shop. People often think that just because they’ve been with a carrier for 10, 15 years, that they’re getting a loyalty discount,” Zacharia said.

“Rates have been all over the place for so many of the customers across the board that you will never know how much is your fair rate or what is your best deal on your car insurance unless you have given yourself the ability to make that comparison apples-to-apples across top providers and some regional ones,” she added.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Zacharia said that Insurify’s platform collects available discounts from 120 auto insurance carriers and can provide unique rates specific for individual customers.

This post was originally published here

Disney and its ABC television network sued the Federal Communications Commission Tuesday, escalating a dispute over the government’s decision to force eight ABC-owned television stations into an early license-renewal review years before their licenses were due to expire.

ABC, Disney and the eight affected stations filed the case in federal court in Washington, arguing that the FCC’s action violates the First Amendment and threatens the network’s ability to operate local broadcast stations.

The FCC ordered the unusual early review in April.

ABC’s licenses normally run for eight years, and the affected stations were not scheduled to enter the standard renewal process until 2028.

Instead, the FCC required Disney to submit renewal applications this year. ABC filed those applications on May 28, and the agency formally accepted them for review the following day.

Disney is now asking the court to stop that process.

The company argues that the government is using its regulatory power over broadcast licenses to punish ABC for programming and editorial decisions that officials dislike.

The FCC rejects that characterization.

The agency has said the review is connected to allegations involving Disney’s diversity and employment practices and maintains that broadcasters receiving access to public airwaves must operate in the public interest.

The legal fight therefore turns on a much larger question than the future of eight stations.

Broadcast television occupies an unusual position in American media.

Cable networks, streaming services and newspapers generally do not need government permission to continue publishing or distributing their content.

Local television broadcasters do.

They operate using federally licensed spectrum, giving the FCC authority to approve or deny their licenses.

That makes the threat of an early license review particularly powerful.

A television station that loses its license does not simply pay a fine or change a business practice. It can lose the legal right to broadcast over the air.

Disney describes that possibility as an “existential threat” to ABC.

The case could therefore establish important limits on how aggressively federal regulators can use licensing authority when the government is simultaneously engaged in political disputes with the media company being regulated.

Former FCC officials from both Republican and Democratic administrations have also criticized the early-review process, arguing that it creates uncertainty around the independence of broadcast licensing.

The business implications extend beyond Disney.

NBC, CBS, Fox and hundreds of local television groups operate under the same federal licensing structure.

If regulators can compel broadcasters to defend their licenses years ahead of their normal expiration dates, television companies may have to treat regulatory risk as a much larger factor when making programming, investment and acquisition decisions.

The dispute could also affect station values.

Broadcast licenses are central assets for local television companies. Anything that makes those licenses less predictable can change how investors value the stations themselves.

For Disney, the immediate goal is to stop the FCC proceeding before it advances further.

For the broader media industry, the stakes are much larger.

The question is whether a federal broadcasting license remains primarily a routine regulatory requirement — or becomes a powerful leverage point in disputes between Washington and the companies whose journalists and entertainers appear on television every night.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Moderna and Merck said Wednesday their personalized mRNA cancer vaccine met its main goals in a Phase 3 trial targeting melanoma, marking the first time a therapy of its kind has succeeded at that stage of testing. The news sent Moderna’s stock up more than 100% and lifted Merck shares as well, as investors bet on a new era for a company long defined by its Covid-19 vaccine.

The companies’ vaccine, called intismeran autogene, is built from a sample of a patient’s own tumor. It is designed to teach the immune system to recognize the specific mutations in that person’s cancer. In the trial, patients with high-risk melanoma, one of the deadliest forms of skin cancer, who had already had their tumors surgically removed received either the vaccine plus Merck’s immunotherapy Keytruda, or Keytruda alone.

The trial included 1,137 patients with high-risk melanoma, cases in which the cancer had grown deep or spread to nearby lymph nodes, or in some cases, to other parts of the body. All of them had already had their tumors removed by surgery before enrolling. Patients who got the vaccine alongside Keytruda went longer without their cancer coming back or spreading than those who got Keytruda alone, meeting the trial’s two main goals.

The companies haven’t released the exact numbers behind that improvement yet, saying only in press releases on Wednesday the results were “statistically significant and clinically meaningful.” They plan to share full data at an upcoming medical conference and bring the results to regulators.

The readout builds on earlier data from the same drug combination, which showed a 49% reduction in the risk of recurrence or death and a 59% reduction in the risk of distant metastasis or death, compared with Keytruda alone. Merck referenced those figures directly in Wednesday’s release. Fortune has previously covered how personalized cancer vaccines like this one work, and Moderna CEO Stéphane Bancel discussed the melanoma data’s earlier stages in an interview with Fortune last year.

Dr. Danish Nagda, an otolaryngologist who has treated head and neck melanoma patients and is founder and CEO of the healthcare startup Rezilient Health, told Fortune just how big this news is. For patients with advanced, stage three or four melanoma, five-year recurrence-free survival today runs around 20 to 35%, he said.

“This potentially doubles it,” Nagda said.

Bancel described the trial as validation of an idea the company has pursued for years.

“For many years, the idea of creating an mRNA treatment designed specifically for an individual patient’s cancer was aspirational. We are now helping turn that vision into a reality,” Bancel said. “Together with Merck, we have started to demonstrate the transformative potential of this technology to address critical unmet needs in the adjuvant melanoma setting.”

Dr. Dean Y. Li, president of Merck Research Laboratories, said the results were evidence for treating cancer earlier.

“By intervening earlier in the course of disease, when many cancers are considered most treatable, the goal of adjuvant therapy given after surgery is to increase the possibility of cure for more patients,” Li said. “We believe individualized neoantigen therapies have the potential to redefine how patients with completely resected stage IIB-IV melanoma are treated.”

“Today’s results represent a landmark moment for adjuvant melanoma treatment,” said Georgina Long, the trial’s principal investigator, medical director of Melanoma Institute Australia, and chair of melanoma medical oncology and translational research at the University of Sydney. “Intismeran in combination with pembrolizumab has the potential to establish a new treatment paradigm in the adjuvant melanoma setting, helping patients remain cancer-free for longer.”

The market reaction

Investors responded immediately to the news as Moderna’s stock more than doubled in early trading Wednesday, while Merck shares climbed as well. Merck is currently valued at roughly $371 billion and Moderna at around $62 billion.

“This makes Moderna a great acquisition target,” said Nagda, who sees the stock move as still behind where the platform’s value should land. “Moderna is still incredibly undervalued. It seems like a large increase, but it’s actually very much underestimating the value of a platform,” Nagda told Forutne. “Now that mRNA has been used in this way to go after melanoma, what stops us from going after other targets? I bet you over the course of the next 12 to 18 months, Moderna will be significantly higher than it is right now.”

Nagda trained at the University of Pennsylvania’s Perelman School of Medicine and completed his ENT residency at Washington University in St. Louis, where he treated patients with head and neck melanoma, often on combination immunotherapy regimens. He said the promise from this study comes from relaxed regulations that have helped move drugs forward, faster.

“This looks good for the Trump administration’s Operation Warp Speed, because this would not have existed without the mRNA vaccine coming out. This accelerated potentially a long-term solution for us to target cancers,” Nagda said, adding he doesn’t expect the treatment to face a difficult path to approval given how strongly oncologists are likely to embrace it for advanced melanoma patients. Fortune has reported on declining public trust in the FDA amid political interference, a backdrop against which any accelerated filing timeline for the vaccine would play out.

The results are promising

Nagda pointed to a factor he said gets little attention in coverage of the trial: rising skin cancer rates tied to climate change.

“Melanoma is not just an American issue. Australia has incredibly high rates of melanoma. It’s a big global issue, and it’s only going to get worse with climate change, as you continue to see more UV radiation and hotter climates,” he said. “Even right now, we’re seeing sunscreen rates going down. Melanoma is going to become more and more prevalent amongst Caucasians, but also amongst other ethnicities.”

Nagda pointed to the safety data as another reason for optimism. In earlier trial data, reactions resolved in about 80% of the 40 patients studied, he said, calling that figure “huge.”

“The side effect profile is minimal compared to a traditional therapeutic for patients with cancer,” Nagda said.

Nagda explained why the vaccine’s side effect profile differs so much from older cancer treatments. Traditional chemotherapy works by exploiting the fact that cancer cells mutate, replicate, and consume energy faster than healthy cells, he said—the goal is to kill the cancer before the drug kills the patient. The mRNA vaccine takes a different approach entirely.

“This is going directly after the cancer cells at a direct level, targeting a unique mutational fingerprint specific to that patient’s own tumor,” Nagda said. “It’s not just personalized across all patients. It’s personalized to the patient’s own tumor.” This is different than traditional chemotherapy, where “our goal is to kill the cancer before the drug kills the human.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Traders in Toronto spent Tuesday bracing for a punch that never landed.

The market had been sliding for three straight sessions, and Tuesday was the worst day of the month — everyone watching the clock tick toward midnight, when a 50% tariff on a long list of Canadian goods was supposed to take effect. Wine, hockey equipment, cement, furniture, building materials. Around $28 billion worth of merchandise that suddenly wouldn’t make sense to ship.

Then, a couple of hours before the deadline, Trump posted that he was pausing the tariffs for three days because the two countries have a deal, subject to finalizing the documents.

Wednesday morning, the mood flipped. The Toronto index climbed nearly 200 points and the Canadian dollar firmed up. Miners led the way, with gold up almost 3%. The companies that actually live off cross-border trade moved too — auto parts maker Magna and fertilizer producer Nutrien both gained, along with the railways and pipeline operators that haul the freight. New York went along for the ride, with all three major U.S. indexes higher.

Relief, in other words. But look at what it’s built on.

Three days. No signed agreement. Prime Minister Mark Carney was noticeably more careful than Trump, saying real progress had been made but important work is still left. Alcohol and autos remain the fights that haven’t been settled, and Trump says he expects the whole thing done within 48 to 72 hours.

Until Friday, nothing changes at the border. A load of Ontario wine or Quebec cement clears the same way it did last week, at the same price. Canada’s retaliation is frozen on the same clock. That’s the whole reprieve — three days for lawyers to turn a Truth Social post into a signed document. If they don’t get there, the 50% is sitting exactly where it was, and Wednesday’s good mood goes away faster than it arrived.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Trying to keep up with AI developments can feel like a losing game, and Jeff Dean, who has spent the last three decades working on the new technology at Google, says Gen Z shouldn’t even try to master it all. Instead, his advice is simple: Skim widely and look for connections others might miss.

“I often tell students it’s better to skim 10 papers than to read one in detail because you then get 10 points in your cloud of what might be possible,” Dean said yesterday at the Asian American Scholar Forum’s 2026 Frontier & Pioneer Symposium in his first public talk since leaving Google. 

“Or, even skim 100 abstracts because what you want to be able to do is connect important ideas that have not yet been connected.”

For young people entering the tech field, Dean’s advice is less about cutting corners than learning how to use time wisely and think broadly. That approach, he said, can identify solutions to problems that previously seemed unsolvable—and help narrow an appropriate timeline. 

A problem that could take 20 years to solve is probably too ambitious if you don’t have a clear idea of how to attack it, he added. But a problem that can be solved in two years may be too obvious to produce a major breakthrough.

“The perfect shape of a problem that you want to work on in a reasonably long-term manner [is] like five years or something,” Dean said. “Try lots of things that might not work. Some of them will.”

AI can put Ph.D.-level expertise in everyone’s hands, according to Dean

Dean stepped away from Google earlier this month after working at the company for 27 years, notably serving as the head of Google AI from 2018 to 2023 and Google’s chief scientist from 2023 to 2026. The 58-year-old is now the cofounder and CEO of DiscoveryLoop, an AI company focused on accelerating scientific and engineering discovery. 

Despite predictions that the technology could lead to massive unemployment and widening wealth inequality, Dean remains bullish on AI’s potential to improve lives.

“The vast majority of the uses of these models is incredibly positive for the world. Like advancing AI in healthcare and AI in education…being able to make people able to solve problems they couldn’t solve on their own will make people able to do more,” Dean said. “And I think that’s super exciting.”

And while Dean acknowledged that even he doesn’t have a “magic answer” and frequently encounters failure, part of his optimism comes from AI’s potential to give people access to expertise that once would have required years of specialized training.

“By building models that are really good at understanding many many different domains of science and engineering you can get Ph.D.-level expertise in a model across many different domains,” said Dean, who graduated with a Ph.D. in computer science from the University of Washington in 1996.

AI leaders are promising a ‘new golden era’—but the hype faces a reality check

Dean isn’t unique in his optimism. Some of the biggest names in tech have made even bolder predictions about what AI could mean for humanity.

Demis Hassabis, Nobel laureate and chairman of Google Deepmind has predicted that AI could radically transform industries like healthcare, energy, and space.

“In 10, 15 years’ time, we’ll be in a kind of new golden era of discovery that [is] a kind of new renaissance,” Hassabis previously told Fortune. In addition to curing diseases, he said he foresees AI unlocking new materials to solve the energy crisis through fusion or solar breakthroughs, eventually allowing humanity to “travel the stars and … explore the galaxy.”

Elon Musk has been even more bullish about AI’s impact. The Tesla and SpaceX CEO believes the advancement will be so great that goods will be abundant and money will not be a major factor.

“Don’t worry about squirreling money away for retirement in 10 or 20 years,” said the world’s richest man on the Moonshots with Peter Diamandis podcast earlier this year. “It won’t matter.”

Challenges, however, persist—especially when it comes to public skepticism. Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei recently acknowledged on X that promises of AI have begun to sound hollow to the public.

“At this point, saying that AI will cure cancer is more a cliche than it is inspiring, and most people think it is deceptive. The thing that will work is actually curing cancer,” Amodei said. “I think by far the most accurate criticism of AI companies including Anthropic is that we haven’t yet delivered on our big promises to benefit the world. That is totally on us.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

What came first—the chicken or the egg? Or in AI’s case, the investment or the revenue?

Nvidia is guaranteeing up to $105 billion for OpenAI’s planned data center campus in Pike County, Ohio, coming in lower than the roughly $250 billion guarantee it was considering, according to reporting by the Wall Street Journal and CNBC. 

The deal moved through at least two known checkpoints before landing at its final size: the Journal reported August 14 that Nvidia had already cut the guarantee to “less than $120 billion,” before the companies settled on $105 billion when the partnership was signed Monday. Nvidia disclosed the final figure—an “aggregate payment obligation” capped at $105 billion—in an SEC filing tied to the announcement. The partnership deal was signed yesterday. The reduction represents a recurring concern among AI investors—the circular cycle of money in the AI ecosystem.

Nvidia and OpenAI did not respond to requests for comment from Fortune.

The Ohio data center is a test of whether the AI boom can generate enough outside revenue to justify the spending being financed from within the AI industry. There is already evidence of market concern from the deal. When reports surfaced in July that Nvidia could guarantee as much as $250 billion, the company’s shares fell about 4.5% intraday from investor reaction to concerns of circular financing.

Reuters also noted anxiety about the sustainability of AI investment remains despite record market performance, with investors increasingly focused on enormous capital expenditures, rising debt and uncertainty over when that spending will generate returns.

Nvidia’s funding is designed to help SB Energy, the SoftBank-backed company developing the campus, secure financing by supporting certain lease and power payments and guaranteeing the value of parts of the completed infrastructure if OpenAI were to default. The structure of the deal substantially reduces Nvidia’s financial exposure to risk.

The rollback comes as Nvidia faces growing questions about a financing model in which the world’s dominant AI-chip maker is increasingly helping finance the infrastructure that ultimately creates the demand for its own chips. The self-funding cycle has been ongoing for years—Nvidia has invested in AI companies and data center operators that purchase its hardware, while also developing financing arrangements intended to make it easier for those customers to acquire more computing capacity.

Last week, Nvidia partnered with six major financial institutions to launch compute-financing platforms targeting more than $500 billion in third-party funding for AI infrastructure—a push that recently got a regulatory tailwind. SEC staff guidance issued in July concluded that certain data-center debt falls outside Dodd-Frank securitization rules requiring sponsors to retain a share of the risk on their own books, making it easier for Nvidia to mobilize outside capital rather than carry the exposure itself.

But Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang disputes the circular financing model. Huang said in a press release the company was “securing long-lived infrastructure for Nvidia compute so OpenAI can deploy the most productive AI factories that can be upgraded repeatedly ⁠with each new generation delivering more intelligence and better economics.”

In the Ohio project, OpenAI will lease the data center from SB Energy for as long as 20 years, while Nvidia will be the exclusive chip provider for the initial phase. The campus is ultimately expected to reach as much as 8 gigawatts of computing capacity, and Nvidia is also investing $1.5 billion in SB Energy.

“The first 800 megawatts are expected to become available in 2028 largely using existing AEP infrastructure,” OpenAI shared in a note. “Further development will require new power plants connected to the grid, including natural gas generation, as well as new transmission lines and associated infrastructure.”

SB Energy plans to build the campus at a former US Department of Energy uranium-enrichment site, with approximately 9.2 gigawatts of natural-gas generation planned to support the broader development. SoftBank and SB Energy are expected to invest billions more in regional power infrastructure.

Nvidia’s graphics processing units, or GPUs, have become the primary computing workhorse for training and running many of the world’s most advanced AI models. Unlike CPUs, GPUs can perform many numbers of calculations simultaneously, making them well-suited to the matrix operations used by machine-learning systems. Nvidia also built a software ecosystem around its chips, including its CUDA programming platform, making its hardware deeply embedded in the development of AI applications.

Nvidia’s investor materials described the OpenAI partnership as an integrated infrastructure offering encompassing architecture, chips, systems, networking, data centers, software, operations and financing. Nvidia said each gigawatt of infrastructure would require roughly $50 billion to $60 billion in total spending, while OpenAI would need to reinvest future revenue to fund its buildout.

The web of deals extends past OpenAI and Nvidia, with partnerships with Microsoft, Oracle, SoftBank, Coreweave and other companies to secure computing capacity to train and operate its models. Many of these arrangements involve companies simultaneously investing, purchasing computing capacity, and building infrastructure from one another.

“We expect to use this capacity to meet growing demand for advanced AI and maintain our lead as the frontier AI research laboratory in pursuit of our mission,” OpenAI said.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Florida Democratic voters delivered another shock upset to the party establishment by nominating state Rep. Angie Nixon, a democratic socialist, over Alex Vindman, a moderate former national security professional who played a central role in President Donald Trump’s first impeachment.

Democrats have hoped to mount a comeback in the diverse, populous and economically dynamic state but have struggled to craft a message that resonates with the state’s electorate. Nixon’s upset sets up a long-shot challenge to U.S. Sen. Ashley Moody, a former state attorney general who Gov. Ron DeSantis selected to fill the seat after it was vacated by Marco Rubio, who Trump chose as secretary of state.

The race has already inflamed tensions within the Democratic Party over how to energize liberal voters eager for unapologetic, combative candidates while not alienating independents and moderates who have been key to winning in battlegrounds.

“If you’re surprised by tonight’s election results, you haven’t been paying enough attention to what’s happening in the South,” Britney Whaley, the southeast regional director of the Working Families Party, which backs populist candidates. “Tonight’s election results must be a wake-up call to a political establishment that believes a populist message can’t win in the South. Angie’s campaign proves voters will respond to a bold economic vision that meets their basic needs.”

A spirited progressive who had the backing of Reps. Rashida Tlaib of Michigan and Ilhan Omar of Minnesota, Nixon recently joined the Democratic Socialists of America. She championed policies like universal healthcare and childcare and has been an outspoken critic of U.S. foreign policy and the war in Gaza.

In May, Nixon protested the Republican-controlled Florida legislature’s redistricting of the state’s congressional maps by shouting through a megaphone during a hearing. She was later reprimanded by an ethics committee but earned plaudits from Democratic allies and voting rights for her demonstration.

Vindman raised about $16 million in his race and had spent more than $9 million by the end of July. Nixon, by contrast, had raised just shy of $1 million. Progressives immediately touted her win as a sign of greater momentum for the region.

Vindman served on the White House’s National Security Council during Trump’s first term. His testimony was central to Trump’s first impeachment over a phone call in which he pressured Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy to investigate Joe Biden and his family. Vindman became a national Democratic star and target of Trump’s ire for his actions, a dynamic that garnered him millions in small-dollar donations.

His twin brother Eugene, who also served on the National Security Council, is serving as a Democratic congressman from Virginia.

“Rep. Nixon ran a strong campaign. I will be standing by her side in the fight against Ashley Moody. I hope you’ll join me,” Vindman said in a statement after he conceded the race.

Democratic leaders like Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer had hoped Vindman’s reputation and campaign war chest would help turn what election analysts had considered a solidly Republican seat into a more competitive race. But Nixon’s upset victory has now buoyed already high Republican confidence in the state.

Once an archetypal political background, Florida has shifted to the right since 2016. Trump himself moved his residence to his Mar-a-Lago resort after leaving the White House in 2021 following his first term.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

 North Korea’s Kim Yo Jong, sister of leader Kim Jong Un, on Wednesday denied Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky’s claim that Pyongyang plans to send up to 50,000 more troops to Russia to fight for its ally.

Kim Yo Jong, a top official in North Korea’s ruling party, said in a statement published by state media KCNA that Zelensky’s estimate was “groundless” and “a self-staged incident.”

Zelensky made his claim in a post on X this month, and he called on South Korea to provide ​support for his country’s air defenses.

Kim Yo Jong said responsibility for the outbreak and for the prolongation of the Ukraine crisis lay entirely with the United States and the West.

North Korean military support to Russian ally

North Korea sent an estimated 14,000 soldiers to Russia’s Kursk Region in 2024, under a comprehensive strategic partnership treaty agreed during Russian President Vladimir Putin’s June 2024 visit to Pyongyang.

A man photographs parts of an unidentified missile, which Ukrainian authorities believe to be made in North Korea and was used in a strike in Kharkiv earlier this week, amid Russia's attack on Ukraine, in Kharkiv, Ukraine January 6, 2024. (credit: REUTERS/VYACHESLAV MADIYEVSKYY)

Pyongyang has also supplied Russia with millions of artillery and mortar rounds, ballistic missiles, long-range artillery and multiple-launch rocket systems, according to Ukrainian and independent assessments.

Kim Yo Jong also said the US’ “hostile policy” towards North Korea hasn’t changed despite President Donald Trump’s order to substantially reduce US participation in joint military drills with South Korea.

She said that while the relationship between the leaders of the United States and North Korea was “truly great,” Washington was still carrying out the drills with Seoul and threatening the national security of Pyongyang.

She added that she was unaware of any recent communications between the two countries’ leaders. Trump said on Monday he had received a response from Kim after reducing the scale of the US drills with Seoul and calling North Korea “unthreatening and respectful.”

This post was originally published on here

Support for FIFA President Gianni Infantino appears to be gradually eroding following his controversial proposal to privatize the World Cup, an initiative that ultimately failed to move forward. Now, Israel has also withdrawn its support for the powerful figure in world soccer, one year before a new election for the FIFA presidency.

In a letter sent by Israel Football Association Chairman Shino Moshe Zuares, the IFA informed FIFA that it was withdrawing its previous letter of support for Infantino.

“The recent developments have caused an unprecedented crisis of trust, which we still hope can be resolved between the vision of UEFA and other confederations and that of FIFA regarding the management of world soccer,” Zuares wrote.

“The division between the sides appears deep, substantive and fundamental, and is forcing all stakeholders to reconsider the way forward.

‘We have no choice but to withdraw our previous letter of support’

“Under the circumstances that have arisen, we have no choice but to withdraw our previous letter of support, in the sincere hope that productive dialogue between all parties will ultimately restore a shared and appropriate vision and direction for world soccer.”

US President Donald Trump holds the FIFA World Cup Trophy, as he makes an announcement on the 2026 FIFA World Cup, as FIFA president Gianni Infantino stands next to him, in the Oval Office at the White House in Washington. (credit: REUTERS/JONATHAN ERNST/FILE PHOTO)

Israel’s decision comes as Infantino heads toward another FIFA presidential election, with the governing body facing growing tensions over the direction of the sport and the relationship between FIFA and the continental confederations.

This post was originally published on here

Natalie Harp says Donald Trump saved her life. She has devoted the years since to serving him—first as a public advocate, then as a campaign loyalist and now as one of the president’s most trusted White House operators.

Harp became a national story after Democratic Sen. Jon Ossoff of Georgia made a suggestive reference to her while attacking Trump at a campaign event. Ossoff offered no evidence of an improper relationship, but his remark placed a rarely discussed presidential aide—and her unusual access to Trump—under intense scrutiny.

The more consequential story is how a cancer survivor’s personal gratitude became a position of political and operational influence at the center of the administration.

Harp was diagnosed with a rare form of bone cancer after surviving a serious medical error. She said conventional chemotherapy failed, clinical trials rejected her and doctors left her with few remaining options.

In 2018, Trump signed the federal Right to Try Act, allowing certain terminally ill patients to seek experimental medicines that had completed initial safety testing but had not received full Food and Drug Administration approval.

Harp has repeatedly credited Trump and the law with saving her life.

“They didn’t give me the right to try experimental treatments, Mr. President. You did,” she told the 2020 Republican National Convention. “Without you, I’d have died waiting for them to be approved.”

Medical experts have questioned whether the law technically enabled Harp’s treatment. She described receiving an FDA-approved immunotherapy drug for an unapproved purpose, a practice that was already legal before Right to Try. But there is no question about Harp’s own conviction: she believes Trump fought for patients the medical system had abandoned and gave her another chance to live.

That gratitude became the foundation of her career.

Harp joined Trump’s 2020 campaign advisory board, spoke at the Republican National Convention and worked as a presenter for One America News Network. She later entered Trump’s inner circle and now serves as executive assistant to the president.

Her official title does not fully describe her business value to the White House.

Trump prefers consuming large volumes of information on paper rather than through conventional digital systems. Harp travels with a portable printer, providing him with news articles, social-media posts, political commentary and other material throughout the day. That habit earned her the nickname “the human printer.”

She also takes dictation, assists with Trump’s social-media activity and converts his instructions into public messages reaching millions of people. Political allies recognize that delivering information to Harp can be one of the fastest ways to place it before the president.

In business terms, Harp functions as an executive assistant, information manager, communications operator and gatekeeper. She understands how Trump absorbs information, what captures his attention and how he prefers decisions to be executed.

Her value is also personal. Harp’s loyalty is not based solely on politics, ideology or professional ambition. She believes she is alive because Trump changed federal policy for desperate patients, and she has organized her work around repaying that debt.

That commitment can strengthen an administration by giving the president an aide who executes quickly, understands his habits and remains dependable under pressure. It also creates a management risk if intense loyalty prevents difficult information or opposing views from reaching the person making the final decision.

That is the legitimate question surrounding Harp—not the personal insinuation Ossoff introduced without evidence, but the power held by a trusted aide who helps control the president’s flow of information.

The most influential person around a chief executive is not always the official with the largest title. It may be the operator who remains nearby, knows how the leader works and turns instructions into action.

Trump signed the Right to Try Act to give terminally ill patients another option. Harp says it gave her a future. She has used that future to become one of the people most personally and professionally invested in advancing his presidency.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. homebuilding fell sharply in July, underscoring how deeply high mortgage rates and weak affordability continue to weigh on residential construction even as the country remains short of housing.

The Commerce Department reported Tuesday that housing starts dropped 12.4% from June to a seasonally adjusted annual rate of 1.239 million units.

That was also 13.5% below July 2025, showing that the slowdown is not simply a one-month setback.

The weakness was especially pronounced in single-family construction.

Single-family housing starts fell 9.9% to an annual rate of 808,000, a significant decline for the segment of the market most directly tied to families buying newly built homes.

Housing completions also fell 9.1%, meaning fewer finished homes are reaching the market at a time when many regions still face tight supply.

There was one important positive signal.

Building permits rose 5.0% to a 1.443 million annual rate, while single-family permits increased 2.5%.

Permits are a forward-looking measure because builders typically obtain them before construction begins. The increase suggests developers still see demand ahead even though current financing conditions are making it harder to start projects immediately.

That tension explains much of the housing market.

The United States still needs more homes.

But builders cannot simply respond to that shortage by building aggressively if buyers cannot afford the monthly payment.

Mortgage rates remain elevated, and home prices in many markets are still high enough that even households with solid incomes are struggling to qualify.

For builders, the arithmetic has become difficult.

Higher financing costs make land acquisition and construction more expensive.

At the same time, buyers need incentives, rate buydowns and price concessions to make new homes affordable.

That squeezes margins from both sides.

The decline in single-family starts is therefore important beyond the construction industry.

Residential building supports jobs in lumber, concrete, appliances, furniture, trucking, roofing, electrical work, plumbing and dozens of other businesses.

When fewer homes break ground, that spending weakens throughout the supply chain.

It also makes the affordability problem harder to solve.

The U.S. housing shortage cannot improve meaningfully without sustained construction, yet the same high interest rates being used to control inflation are making it harder to finance the new supply that could eventually help moderate home prices.

Tuesday’s report captures that contradiction clearly.

Builders are still filing permits.

They still see demand.

But fewer projects are actually starting.

Until borrowing costs ease or affordability improves materially, the housing shortage is likely to remain trapped between strong underlying demand and financing conditions that make new construction increasingly difficult.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

No, this is not the cure for all cancer. But it may be the breakthrough that proves doctors can create a vaccine specifically for one person’s cancer and train that patient’s immune system to stop it from returning.

That is the direct meaning of Moderna and Merck’s announcement—and why Moderna’s stock surged more than 120% Wednesday, climbing as much as 156% during trading.

The vaccine does not prevent people from developing cancer. It does not cure every cancer. It does not replace surgery, chemotherapy or radiation. It has not been proven to destroy large tumors or rescue patients with terminal disease.

What it has done is significantly reduce the danger that high-risk melanoma will return or spread after surgeons have removed the visible cancer.

That is a major achievement because cancer often returns through microscopic cells that remain inside the body after surgery. Scans may show that the patient is cancer-free while a small number of hidden cells are still capable of rebuilding the disease months or years later.

Moderna’s experimental vaccine, called intismeran autogene, is designed to help the immune system find and attack those remaining cells before they become another tumor.

The Phase 3 trial included 1,137 patients with stage IIB through stage IV melanoma, the deadliest form of skin cancer. All had undergone surgery to remove their tumors. They received either Merck’s immunotherapy drug Keytruda alone or Keytruda combined with Moderna’s personalized vaccine.

Patients receiving the combination remained cancer-free longer and were less likely to have the disease spread to another part of the body. It was the first successful late-stage trial of a personalized mRNA cancer vaccine.

The treatment is called personalized because there is no single vaccine taken from a shelf.

Doctors begin with the patient’s removed tumor and sequence its genetic material. Computers identify mutations that distinguish the cancer from healthy cells. Moderna then manufactures an individual vaccine containing instructions for as many as 34 targets found inside that patient’s tumor.

The vaccine effectively gives the immune system a “wanted poster” showing what the cancer looks like. Keytruda then removes one of the biological brakes that cancer uses to hide from immune defenses.

The vaccine identifies the target. Keytruda helps release the immune system to attack it.

This is why the breakthrough could eventually extend beyond melanoma. The technology is not designed around one universal melanoma marker; it is designed around the mutations found inside each individual tumor. In theory, doctors could use the same process to build vaccines for patients with lung, kidney, bladder and other cancers.

But theory is not proof.

Cancer is not one illness. It is hundreds of different diseases, and some tumors are much better than others at hiding from the immune system. Success in melanoma does not mean the same vaccine strategy will automatically work in pancreatic, breast, colon, prostate or brain cancer.

Moderna and Merck are running nine Phase 2 and Phase 3 trials across several tumor types, including non-small-cell lung, kidney and bladder cancers. Until those studies succeed, this remains a melanoma breakthrough with broader potential—not a universal cancer solution.

Earlier Phase 2 results showed how meaningful the benefit could be. After five years, the combination reduced the risk of melanoma returning or causing death by 49% and reduced the risk of distant spread or death by 59% compared with Keytruda alone.

The companies have not yet released the corresponding percentages from the larger Phase 3 study. They also have not conclusively proven that the vaccine allows patients to live longer. The complete results must be presented to specialists, reviewed independently and evaluated by regulators.

The treatment also comes with practical challenges. Every patient needs tumor sequencing and a separately manufactured vaccine. The process must be fast enough to begin treatment soon after surgery, scalable enough to serve thousands of patients and affordable enough for insurers and health systems to cover.

Patients must also receive Keytruda, which can cause serious immune reactions by prompting the body to attack healthy organs. The personalized vaccine commonly caused fatigue, injection-site pain and chills in earlier testing, although most vaccine-related reactions were mild or moderate.

For a melanoma patient whose cancer was completely removed but remains at high risk of returning, this could become an important new treatment if regulators approve it—potentially as early as next year.

For someone currently living with another form of cancer, the announcement does not provide an immediate new medicine. It provides evidence that a powerful new method may work and that it can now be tested seriously across other cancers.

Moderna’s extraordinary stock surge reflects that larger possibility. Investors are not valuing only a melanoma treatment. They are betting that the company has validated an entirely new mRNA platform capable of producing individualized cancer vaccines.

So, is this the breakthrough the world has been waiting for?

It is not the final cure that ends cancer. It is the first large, decisive proof that scientists can study one person’s tumor, manufacture a vaccine around its unique mutations and improve that patient’s protection against the cancer returning.

If the approach succeeds in additional tumors, this may be remembered not as the day cancer was cured, but as the day medicine proved it could begin building a different cancer vaccine for every patient.

JBizNews Desk | Cambridge

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TJX Companies raised its annual profit forecast Wednesday even as growth slowed sharply at T.J. Maxx and Marshalls—a result that appears contradictory but reveals why the retailer’s broader business remains strong.

Comparable sales at Marmaxx, which includes T.J. Maxx, Marshalls and Sierra, increased 1% during the quarter, down from 6% in the previous three months. That does not mean sales declined. Customers still spent more than a year earlier, but growth moderated as shoppers became more cautious about clothing and other discretionary purchases.

The slowdown was also concentrated in one part of a much larger company. Comparable sales rose 6% at HomeGoods and 7% in both Canada and TJX’s international division. Those gains helped lift total quarterly revenue to $15.18 billion and net income to $1.52 billion.

For TJX, cautious consumers can still be good for business. When household budgets tighten, more shoppers trade down from department stores and full-price retailers to chains offering recognizable brands at steep discounts. At the same time, weaker sales elsewhere can leave manufacturers and competing retailers with excess inventory, giving TJX more merchandise to purchase cheaply and resell at attractive margins.

That is the arithmetic behind the higher forecast: T.J. Maxx and Marshalls are growing more slowly, but they are not shrinking, while HomeGoods and international operations are expanding much faster. TJX now expects adjusted full-year earnings of $5.15 to $5.20 a share, excluding tariff-related benefits.

The quarter therefore signals consumer caution, not a collapse in demand. Shoppers may be buying fewer nonessential items, but their growing focus on value continues to strengthen the off-price model—and gives TJX an opportunity to capture business from more expensive competitors.

JBizNews Desk | Framingham

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Amazon is preparing a roughly sixfold expansion of its Prime Air drone delivery network, targeting nearly 500 U.S. cities and towns by the end of 2026 as retailers and delivery companies race to make last-mile shipping faster and cheaper.

The rollout would dramatically widen Prime Air’s footprint from 11 current delivery sites across 10 metro areas and give Amazon a larger test of whether autonomous aircraft can become a meaningful part of its logistics network.

Amazon plans to expand next into the Chicago, Atlanta, Cleveland, Syracuse and Boise metropolitan areas, with additional communities expected later this year.

AMAZON’S 30-MINUTE DELIVERY PUSH RAISES STAKES IN RACE FOR SPEED

The push comes as rivals make their own moves into drone delivery. Walmart has expanded service through partners including Alphabet-owned Wing and Zipline, while DoorDash recently received federal approval to operate its own commercial drone delivery network. Uber this week also announced a partnership with Zipline.

Amazon says Prime Air has already delivered hundreds of thousands of packages this year.

“Customers already turn to Amazon for fast Same- and Next-Day Delivery, and Prime Air provides them an even speedier option when they need it,” Prime Air Vice President David Carbon said.

Prime Air can carry most packages weighing 5 pounds or less and roughly the size of a large shoebox, making more than 60% of the products customers purchase most frequently eligible for drone delivery. Orders can arrive in as little as 30 minutes, though Amazon says most reach customers about an hour after checkout.

AMAZON DISRUPTING ITSELF, REBUILDING CUSTOMER SHOPPING EXPERIENCE AROUND AI FROM GROUND UP

Prime members receive free drone delivery on orders of $50 or more and pay $2.99 on smaller orders, while non-Prime customers pay $4.99.

The expansion adds another front to Amazon’s broader effort to shrink delivery times as retailers increasingly compete over speed and convenience.

Drone delivery, however, remains a small part of the broader delivery market and faces challenges ranging from federal aviation requirements and weather to noise, safety and the economics of competing with traditional vans and drivers.

AMAZON LAUNCHES 1-HOUR AND 3-HOUR DELIVERY OPTIONS WITH NEW TIERED PRICING STRUCTURE FOR CUSTOMERS

Amazon holds Federal Aviation Administration Part 135 certification for Prime Air and says its drones use an autonomous “detect-and-avoid” system to monitor surrounding airspace and identify obstacles without requiring a person to watch a live video feed.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

For Amazon, the expansion will test whether drone delivery can move from a limited service into a practical, scalable piece of its last-mile network.

This post was originally published here

Moderna shares surged Wednesday after the company and Merck reported the first successful Phase 3 trial of a personalized mRNA cancer treatment, a potentially important validation of technology that has been under development for years.

The experimental therapy, called intismeran autogene, was tested in combination with Merck’s blockbuster immunotherapy Keytruda in 1,137 patients with high-risk stage IIB through IV melanoma whose tumors had already been surgically removed.

The goal was not to shrink an existing tumor.

It was to prevent the cancer from coming back.

The study met its primary endpoint of improving recurrence-free survival and also met a key secondary endpoint by reducing the risk that the cancer would spread to distant parts of the body.

No new safety signals emerged.

The companies have not yet released the full Phase 3 data, including the exact magnitude of the benefit, and plan to present detailed results at a medical meeting.

That is an important limitation.

But the trial still represents a major milestone because it is the first positive Phase 3 result for an individualized neoantigen therapy and the first successful late-stage trial of an mRNA-based cancer treatment.

Moderna shares jumped roughly 90% in premarket trading Wednesday, while Merck rose about 7.5%.

The technology works very differently from a conventional vaccine.

Doctors first analyze the genetic mutations inside an individual patient’s tumor. Moderna then manufactures a personalized mRNA treatment designed around those mutations, effectively giving the immune system a customized list of cancer targets to recognize.

That individualized treatment is then administered alongside Keytruda, which helps remove the biological brakes that cancer cells use to hide from the immune system.

The theory is straightforward: Keytruda helps activate the immune system, while the personalized mRNA therapy tells it more precisely what to attack.

Earlier Phase 2 data had already produced encouraging results.

After five years of follow-up, the combination reduced the risk of recurrence or death by 49% compared with Keytruda alone in patients with high-risk stage III or IV melanoma.

Wednesday’s Phase 3 result is more important because it tested the treatment in a much larger group and is designed to support potential regulatory approval.

Merck and Moderna expect to begin discussions with regulators in the coming months.

For Moderna, the financial stakes are enormous.

The company built its global reputation around its COVID-19 vaccine but has been searching for the next major commercial use of its mRNA platform as pandemic-era vaccine revenue declined.

Cancer could become that second act.

For Merck, the timing is equally important.

Keytruda is one of the most valuable medicines in the world, but its key patents begin expiring later this decade. Combining it with a new personalized cancer treatment could extend Merck’s dominance in oncology while creating an entirely new product category.

Analysts have already estimated that the melanoma indication alone could eventually generate billions of dollars in annual sales.

The opportunity could become much larger if the same approach works in other cancers.

Merck and Moderna are already studying the treatment across multiple tumor types, including lung, kidney and bladder cancers.

That is why Wednesday’s result matters beyond melanoma.

The companies have not yet proved that personalized mRNA therapy will work broadly across cancer.

They have, however, now crossed one of the most difficult barriers in drug development: a successful large Phase 3 trial.

The same technology that showed the world how quickly mRNA could be used to build vaccines is now moving toward a very different application.

Instead of making one vaccine for millions of people, Moderna is trying to make a different cancer treatment for each individual patient.

Wednesday’s results suggest that idea may be closer to becoming a commercial reality.

JBizNews Desk | Cambridge, Massachusetts

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Former Israel Navy commander V.-Adm. (ret.) Eliezer “Chiney” Marom said in a Wednesday 103FM interview that Israel’s strike in Syria was intended to prevent Turkey from establishing itself in the country, but assessed that Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdogan was unlikely to go to war with Israel.

Marom, now a senior researcher at the Begin-Sadat Center, also talked with Gideon Oko and Anat Davidov in the interview about tensions with Turkey and mounting US pressure on Iran.

Asked about the American condemnation of the Israeli strike in Syria, Marom said, “I think the Americans knew about it. They know how to speak in two languages. A condemnation on the one hand is a way of telling Israel, sit quietly, everything is fine, we’re moving on.”

Abu al-Duhur base is seen following reported Israeli strikes, Syria, August 18, 2026 (credit: REUTERS/STRINGER)

Turkish entrenchment in Syria

Turning to the struggle over Syria, he said Iran’s presence in the country had already been significantly reduced.

“The Iranians are hardly there anymore, and that’s very good for us,” he explained. “We don’t want the Turks to enter this gap that has been created and establish a position in Syria.

“They intended to send a delegation to prepare the airport that was attacked for Turkish activity. This incident illustrates that Israel will not allow the Turks to control Syria. This is a very important move, and it also carries a great danger of regional escalation.”

Marom assessed that a direct confrontation with Turkey was unlikely at this stage.

“There are enough brakes here to prevent this from happening. First, Turkey is a member of NATO, so there is a very significant restraint on it. Second, Turkey will want to join the European Union at some point. Third, the Turkish economy is not at its best, and therefore I don’t currently see Erdogan making a decision and going to war against Israel.”

He later addressed reports of nuclear material in Syria.

“It’s not something that should concern us very much. As far as I know, these are minerals mined from the ground in Syria, and as long as they are not enriched, they are not dangerous. It’s like sand or anything else.”

US economic pressure on Iran

On US pressure against Iran, Marom said Washington had shifted the focus away from the military and toward economic pressure.

“The Americans moved the military aside and handed the baton to the treasury secretary and the energy secretary. The goal is to choke the Iranian economy. The energy secretary, together with the US Navy, is trying to move oil from the Persian Gulf belonging to the other countries through the Omani route. This is making the Iranians very angry, because apparently the Americans are succeeding in getting oil out of the Gulf both through pipelines and in small tankers that pass close to the Omani coast.”

Marom warned that Tehran would eventually have to respond to the pressure.

“We are in a situation in which the Iranians will not be able to sit quietly,” Marom warned. “Either they return to the negotiating table, or they start going wild. We have already seen one attack by the United Arab Emirates. Let’s see where this goes.”

Asked about US President Donald Trump’s changing statements, Marom said Iran remained in a highly difficult position.

“I don’t suggest that we trade places with the Iranians; they are in a very difficult situation. Notice that Trump has consistently been talking for the past three days about control of the Strait of Hormuz. That’s a finger in the eye of the Iranians, and the message is very clear: You do not control Hormuz. He is taking away the last strategic card Iran still has in its hands.”

This post was originally published on here

The dollar fell sharply Wednesday as the Treasury Department moved to calm a bruising selloff in government debt, doubling the size of planned buybacks of longer-term bonds and triggering an immediate rally across the market.

Treasury said it would increase individual repurchases of securities maturing in 10 to 30 years from as much as $2 billion to at least $4 billion between Sept. 9 and Nov. 4. The government will effectively become a larger buyer of its own older debt, improving demand and liquidity at a time when investors have grown increasingly reluctant to hold long-dated bonds.

The 30-year Treasury yield dropped nearly 10 basis points to about 5.19%, after reaching 5.34% Tuesday—its highest level since 2007. The 10-year yield fell toward 4.65%. Bond prices rise when yields fall.

The relief came with a complication: the dollar weakened as investors interpreted the intervention as evidence that Washington is increasingly concerned about borrowing costs. The WSJ Dollar Index fell roughly 0.6%, while the euro, Japanese yen and Swiss franc strengthened against the U.S. currency.

Lower Treasury yields can eventually ease pressure on mortgages, corporate loans and other borrowing costs. But the buybacks do not reduce the federal debt. Treasury may need to issue additional short-term bills to finance the purchases, shifting part of the government’s funding burden rather than eliminating it.

The rally therefore calmed the market without resolving the forces behind the selloff: persistent inflation, elevated oil prices, enormous federal borrowing needs and growing doubts about investors’ willingness to absorb long-term U.S. debt at lower yields.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Target reported another quarter of improving sales Wednesday morning and raised its full-year outlook, offering fresh evidence that the retailer’s turnaround is beginning to gain traction with consumers.

But the headline profit increase comes with an important complication: nearly $1 billion in tariff refunds dramatically boosted the quarter’s earnings.

Target said second-quarter net sales rose 5.3% to $26.5 billion, while comparable sales increased 3.8%. Customer traffic climbed 3.6%, and digital comparable sales rose 8.7%.

The company also said all six of its core merchandise categories posted year-over-year sales growth, an important improvement after several years in which weakness in discretionary products repeatedly dragged on results.

The strongest signal may be traffic.

Target has spent heavily trying to bring shoppers back through lower prices, remodeled stores, expanded same-day delivery and a refreshed merchandise assortment. More customers walking through stores — rather than higher prices alone — suggests at least part of that strategy is working.

Same-day delivery sales increased more than 25%, showing how quickly Target’s stores are becoming fulfillment centers as well as traditional retail locations.

Then there is the profit number.

Target reported diluted earnings of $4.11 a share, roughly double the $2.05 earned a year earlier.

Taken alone, that would suggest an extraordinary improvement in profitability.

But Target received $994 million in pretax refunds related to tariffs previously collected under the International Emergency Economic Powers Act.

Those refunds added approximately $752 million to net income and $1.65 to earnings per share during the quarter.

Without that benefit, the underlying earnings picture was much less dramatic.

The company’s adjusted earnings were roughly $2.46 a share, still representing meaningful improvement but nowhere near the doubling suggested by the reported $4.11 figure.

That distinction matters because tariff refunds are not ordinary retail profits.

They do not come from selling more groceries, clothing or household goods. They are effectively the reversal of costs Target previously paid to the government.

For investors trying to determine how healthy Target’s actual business has become, separating those refunds from recurring operating earnings is essential.

The company nevertheless saw enough improvement in its underlying business to raise its outlook.

Target now expects full-year net sales to increase approximately 5%, one percentage point above its previous forecast.

It also raised the midpoint of its earnings outlook even after excluding the benefit from tariff refunds.

That makes Wednesday’s report more significant than a one-time accounting windfall.

Target is attracting more customers, generating stronger digital sales and seeing growth across its merchandise categories at the same time American consumers are becoming increasingly selective about where they spend.

That consumer backdrop remains difficult.

July U.S. retail sales fell 0.6%, and households continue to face high borrowing costs, elevated housing expenses and years of accumulated inflation.

Retailers therefore increasingly have to win spending from competitors rather than simply relying on consumers to spend more everywhere.

Target appears to be doing some of that.

The company has cut prices on thousands of items while investing in stores, private brands, beauty, home products and faster delivery.

Those investments are helping restore sales growth.

But Wednesday’s results also offer a useful lesson for anyone reading corporate earnings this season.

A company can legitimately report that profits doubled — while the economics underneath the number tell a considerably more complicated story.

For Target, the underlying turnaround looks increasingly real.

The $994 million tariff refund just made it look much bigger.

JBizNews Desk | Minneapolis

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meetings have become a constant annoyance for white-collar professionals: they often drag on, interrupt focused work, and don’t require everyone’s participation. Now, business leaders are protecting their time by setting boundaries around when they join the conversation. Dropbox co-CEO Ashraf Alkarmi follows a simple rule to decide what calls make the cut.

“I pick things that I can make significant progress on in that quarter,” Alkarmi said in a recent interview with Business Insider. “And so it becomes a filter for how I prioritize my time.”

To pick and choose which meetings to attend, Alkarmi sets five goals he needs to achieve every quarter at the $7.3 billion cloud storage company. He uses these important target areas—like people, business, and performance—to shape his weekly schedule and decide where to focus his efforts. 

To make sure everyone is on the same page, the Dropbox co-CEO shares his key priorities with his circle, chief of staff, and administrative team. These objectives “win at all times” when a lot falls on his plate, he explained.

For example, during the first quarter, Alkarmi combed through data and worked toward solutions to reduce customer churn. Making “meaningful progress” and moving that needle became one of his main priorities on Dropbox’s business side. To keep all his ducks in a row, the leader said he uses the daily task-tracking app Trello to stay on track with his quarterly goals. Sticking to his list of five also narrows down what conversations are worth a chunk of time in his busy schedule. 

“Sometimes I get meetings that are not related to these things, and I don’t go,” Alkarmi continued.

Fortune reached out to Dropbox for comment.

CEOs have their own meeting rules: call-free afternoons, fewer one-on-ones, and later start times 

Like Alkarmi, other CEOs are protecting their calendars from unnecessary meetings and treating uninterrupted focus time as a resource worth guarding.

Southwest Airlines CEO Bob Jordan has called out the fact that meetings are crowding out the actual work that really needs to get done. For that reason, he set a 2026 goal to keep his calendar completely clear every Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday afternoon, blocking anyone from booking calls during those hours. 

Jordan acknowledged that approach might sound “crazy” to some executives, but he reasoned that CEOs are hired to do work only they can do—and that rarely happens if they’re trapped in back-to-back meetings.

“When you first start, it’s easy to confuse busyness and going to meetings with leadership,” Jordan said on a panel of CEOs at the New York Times DealBook Summit last year. “Because what we all find, I’m sure, is there’s no time to ‘work,’ and you confuse going to meetings with the work.”

Similarly, Jensen Huang, the cofounder and CEO of $5.3 trillion technology giant Nvidia, has trimmed the fat from his work routine by prioritizing efficiency over regular check-ins. The chips leader doesn’t believe that frequent catch-ups with his 55 direct reports are the best use of his time, given that a continuous stream of meetings would only clog up his work schedule and slow him down. Instead, he frees up space for broader, team-wide collaboration—which Huang said also helps maintain transparency within one of the world’s largest companies.

“I don’t do one-on-ones with any of them, unless they need me; then I’ll drop everything for them,” Huang said at the Stanford Institute for Economic Policy Research summit in 2024. “They never hear me say something to them that is only for them to know. There’s not one piece of information that I somehow secretly tell the staff; I don’t tell the rest of the company.”

Airbnb CEO Brian Chesky has established his own rules around the flow of his day. He believes that no leader should apologize for how they choose to run their businesses—and he’s unabashedly following his own advice. Even though many leaders operate on a rise-and-grind mindset, Chesky hits his creative stride later into the night. For that reason, he’s set boundaries around when he takes meetings, barring any calls before 10 a.m.

“When you’re CEO,” Chesky told The Wall Street Journal last year, “you can decide when the first meeting of the day is.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Amazon is preparing to turn drone delivery from a tightly controlled experiment into a national consumer service.

The company says Prime Air will expand to nearly 500 U.S. cities and towns by the end of 2026, more than six times its current footprint. New metro areas will include Chicago, Atlanta, Cleveland, Syracuse and Boise, with additional communities scheduled to come online later this year.

The promise is simple: selected packages weighing five pounds or less can be delivered by drone in as little as 30 minutes.

That matters because five pounds covers far more of Amazon’s catalog than it sounds like. Prescription medications, phone chargers, toiletries, small electronics, household supplies, snacks and other urgently needed items can all fit within the limit.

Amazon currently operates Prime Air in 11 metro areas, including parts of Phoenix, Detroit, Houston, Dallas and San Antonio. Each launch site generally covers about 175 square miles, with drones flying autonomously from Amazon facilities to customer homes.

The company says it has already delivered hundreds of thousands of packages by drone this year.

The economics are becoming clearer too.

Prime members will receive free drone delivery on eligible orders of $50 or more. Orders below that level will carry a $2.99 fee, while non-Prime customers will pay $4.99.

That pricing suggests Amazon no longer views drones merely as a showcase technology. It is beginning to position them as another ordinary delivery choice alongside vans, same-day couriers and traditional parcel service.

The larger strategy is speed.

For years, Amazon competed by reducing delivery from several days to two days, then one day and eventually same-day. Drone delivery compresses that race again, from hours to minutes.

A customer who realizes at 8 p.m. that a child needs medicine, a charging cable has failed or an ingredient is missing from dinner no longer has to decide between driving to a store and waiting until tomorrow. Amazon wants the answer to be a small aircraft arriving in the yard before the drive would have been completed.

But reaching 500 communities does not mean every American household in those cities will immediately qualify.

Drone operations remain heavily dependent on geography. Amazon is concentrating primarily on suburban areas where aircraft can operate away from skyscrapers, major airports and other complicated airspace. Customers also need an appropriate delivery area where a drone can safely lower or release a package.

Weather remains another limitation.

High winds, thunderstorms and other adverse conditions can temporarily ground drone operations even when Amazon’s vans continue making deliveries normally.

And then there is regulation.

Amazon holds FAA authorization to operate commercial drone deliveries and has received permission to fly aircraft beyond the visual line of sight of individual operators, one of the most important requirements for scaling the service. Broader federal rules governing routine beyond-line-of-sight drone operations are still evolving.

Safety has been one of Prime Air’s biggest technical challenges.

Amazon’s newest drones use automated detect-and-avoid systems designed to recognize aircraft, obstacles and other hazards without requiring a human pilot to directly control every movement. The company says those systems allow drones to navigate independently through increasingly large service areas.

There have nevertheless been incidents involving Amazon drones striking infrastructure and property, and the FAA has previously examined accidents involving the program. Noise and privacy concerns have also generated resistance in some communities where drone delivery has been tested.

Those issues become more consequential when a service moves from 11 metro areas to hundreds of communities.

Cost is another unresolved question.

A drone carrying one small package may eliminate a driver’s trip, but Amazon still needs launch facilities, aircraft maintenance, charging infrastructure, operators, software systems and regulatory compliance. The company has spent years trying to bring the cost of each flight down enough to compete with a van that can deliver dozens or hundreds of packages on one route.

Amazon is betting that scale changes that arithmetic.

CEO Andy Jassy has said Prime Air should be capable of reaching communities containing roughly 30 million customers by year-end, with an eventual goal of delivering 500 million packages annually by the end of the decade.

Amazon is not alone.

Walmart is rapidly expanding drone delivery with Alphabet-owned Wing, while DoorDash and Uber are also moving deeper into aerial delivery. What was once largely an engineering demonstration is becoming another front in the battle over who can deliver a consumer purchase fastest and cheapest.

The significance of Amazon’s 500-community target is therefore not the novelty of seeing a drone overhead.

It is that the company is beginning to treat the sky as part of its ordinary delivery network.

For consumers, the delivery question used to be whether an order would arrive tomorrow or later today.

Amazon is now trying to make the next question whether it can arrive before you would have reached the store yourself.

JBizNews Desk | Seattle

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.
:::

U.S. stocks opened higher Wednesday, August 19, as Washington moved to calm a violent selloff in long-term Treasury bonds and investors digested a heavy morning of retail earnings, a major cancer-vaccine breakthrough and another temporary reprieve in the U.S.-Canada trade fight.

At the opening bell, the Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 120 points to 53,463.47, the S&P 500 gained 25 points to 7,716.74, and the Nasdaq Composite climbed 104 points to 26,393.89. The gains marked an early attempt to recover from Tuesday’s technology-led decline, when rising bond yields put fresh pressure on expensive AI and semiconductor shares. 

The biggest change overnight came from the bond market. The Treasury Department said Wednesday morning it will at least double the size of certain long-term debt buybacks, from $2 billion to $4 billion per operation, covering bonds in the 10-to-20-year and 20-to-30-year maturity ranges between September 9 and November 4. The announcement pushed the 30-year yield down from Tuesday’s 19-year high of 5.34% to roughly 5.19%, easing one of the market’s biggest immediate threats. 

That matters for stocks because the recent surge in long-term yields had begun changing the investment arithmetic across Wall Street. Higher Treasury yields raise mortgage and corporate borrowing costs while making bonds more competitive with stocks, particularly technology companies whose valuations depend heavily on profits expected far into the future.

The morning’s most dramatic individual move came from Moderna, whose shares more than doubled in early trading after the company and Merck reported positive late-stage results for their personalized mRNA melanoma vaccine. Moderna was recently up about 104%, while Merck gained roughly 9%. The trial found that Moderna’s Intismeran vaccine combined with Merck’s Keytruda reduced the risk of melanoma recurrence and spread compared with Keytruda alone — the first successful late-stage trial for an mRNA cancer vaccine. 

Retail earnings delivered a more complicated picture of the American consumer. Target rose roughly 5% in early trading after comparable sales increased 3.8%, beating expectations, and the retailer raised its full-year sales outlook to about 5% growth. Target’s profit, however, received an unusually large boost from roughly $1 billion of tariff refunds, complicating comparisons with its underlying business performance. 

Lowe’s gained about 2% despite cutting its full-year comparable-sales outlook to roughly flat growth. Quarterly sales of $25.96 billion missed Wall Street expectations as consumers continued postponing large kitchen, bathroom and flooring projects amid high mortgage rates and weak housing turnover. 

TJX Companies slipped about 1% after issuing third-quarter profit guidance below analyst forecasts even though quarterly sales and earnings exceeded expectations. Comparable sales at its core Marmaxx division, which includes TJ Maxx and Marshalls, slowed sharply to 1% growth from 6% in the prior quarter — another indication that even value-focused shoppers are becoming more selective. 

Estée Lauder jumped more than 17% in early trading following stronger-than-expected results, adding another consumer name to Wednesday’s unusually active earnings session.

The morning economic calendar was relatively light. Mortgage applications fell 0.4% in the week ended August 14, reversing part of the previous week’s 3.6% increase. Purchase applications declined 2%, while refinancing applications rose 1.5%. The average contract rate for a 30-year mortgage held at 6.77%, leaving housing affordability under significant pressure despite Wednesday morning’s retreat in Treasury yields. 

Trade tensions provided another modest tailwind. President Donald Trump delayed new 50% tariffs on roughly $20 billion of Canadian goods for three days, saying Washington and Ottawa had reached a deal, although Canadian officials said important issues still had to be resolved. The duties had been scheduled to take effect Wednesday. 

Oil remains the major counterweight. Brent crude was trading near $92 a barrel Wednesday morning, with the Strait of Hormuz confrontation still unresolved. Elevated energy prices are keeping inflation fears alive and have been one of the forces driving long-term bond yields higher. 

The market’s attention now shifts almost entirely to Washington. Treasury will sell $16 billion of 20-year bonds at 1 p.m. ET, an unusually important auction after the recent surge in long-term borrowing costs. At 2 p.m. ET, the Federal Reserve will release minutes from its July 28-29 meeting, when policymakers voted 9-3 to keep the federal-funds rate at 3.5% to 3.75%. Investors will be looking for evidence of how worried Fed officials are about inflation, oil prices and whether rates may need to remain higher for longer. 

For the rest of Wednesday, the central question is whether Treasury’s intervention can stabilize the bond market. If the 10- and 30-year yields continue falling, technology stocks could regain their footing and Wednesday’s rebound may broaden. If yields reverse higher after the 20-year auction or the Fed minutes, Wall Street could quickly return to the same pressure that drove Tuesday’s selloff.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The bond-market shock that hit Wall Street Tuesday is carrying directly into Wednesday morning, with long-term U.S. borrowing costs remaining near levels not seen since before the financial crisis even as expectations for another Federal Reserve rate increase continue to fade.

The yield on the 30-year U.S. Treasury surged to roughly 5.33% Tuesday, its highest level since 2007, before easing modestly Wednesday morning to around 5.28%.

That small retreat does not change the larger story.

Long-term borrowing costs have moved sharply higher even though investors increasingly believe the Federal Reserve may leave short-term interest rates unchanged in September.

Normally, expectations for fewer Fed hikes would push borrowing costs lower across the Treasury market.

This time, the opposite is happening at the long end.

Investors are demanding more compensation to lend the U.S. government money for 20 or 30 years because of a combination of persistent inflation risk, enormous federal borrowing requirements, rising government debt and uncertainty over how long energy prices will remain elevated.

Oil is adding another complication.

Brent crude pushed above $90 a barrel Tuesday as tensions surrounding Iran and the Strait of Hormuz intensified. Prices remained elevated Wednesday, keeping pressure on fuel costs even as some other inflation indicators have softened.

That matters because energy works its way through almost every corner of the economy.

Higher crude eventually raises diesel, trucking, aviation, shipping, manufacturing and distribution expenses. Businesses that never purchase a barrel of oil directly still pay for it through transportation and supply chains.

The bond market is effectively saying that the Federal Reserve’s next meeting is only part of the interest-rate story.

The Fed controls very short-term rates.

Markets determine what companies, homeowners and the government must pay to borrow for decades.

And right now those markets are demanding considerably more.

The difference can be enormous.

A business financing a property, factory or infrastructure project for 20 or 30 years does not receive much benefit from expectations that the Fed may skip a quarter-point increase next month if the underlying long-term rate used to price that financing is simultaneously climbing toward two-decade highs.

Homebuyers face the same arithmetic.

Long-term Treasury yields feed directly into mortgage pricing, meaning elevated bond yields can keep mortgage rates high even without another Fed increase.

Corporations are feeling it as well.

Companies are issuing enormous quantities of debt to finance artificial-intelligence data centers, power infrastructure and other capital projects at the same time the Treasury is borrowing heavily to finance federal deficits.

All of those borrowers are competing for the same pool of investment capital.

The more debt markets are asked to absorb, the greater the yield investors can demand.

Tuesday showed how quickly that pressure can reach stocks.

Technology shares fell sharply as long-term yields climbed because higher interest rates reduce the present value investors place on profits expected years into the future. Expensively valued AI and growth companies are particularly sensitive to that calculation.

Wednesday brings another test.

The Federal Reserve will release the minutes from its July 28–29 meeting at 2 p.m. ET, giving investors a closer look at how policymakers are balancing persistent inflation against growing evidence that consumers, housing and parts of the economy are slowing.

But the most important message from markets may already be visible.

Wall Street is becoming less worried that the Fed will raise rates next month.

It is becoming more worried about what borrowing money for the next 30 years will cost.

Those are two very different problems — and for businesses financing long-term investments, the second may ultimately matter much more.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wealth, perhaps second only to loyalty, has been a prized attribute for Donald Trump during his second presidency.

The number of people worth at least $100 million whom the Republican president has appointed to his administration is more than four times the combined total under the three previous presidents, according to a report from the consumer advocacy group Public Citizen.

It’s the numbers for the Trump administration, in the context of previous administrations, that stand out in Public Citizen’s report, published on Monday. In all, 57 Trump officials are worth at least $100 million, including 17 ambassadors and the remaining 40 in senior posts across the executive branch.

Look no further than Trump’s Cabinet. Eight of its 23 members fit the category, notably Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick and Education Secretary Linda McMahon, both billionaires.

The president, himself a billionaire, has described his inclination toward appointing the ultrawealthy as deference to financial success. And yet, Trump, who owes his White House comeback to support from middle-income, working Americans drawn to his pledge to lower everyday costs, now faces a midterm election electorate decidedly less keen on his handling of the economy.

Presidents have long sought counsel from the nation’s wealthiest people and tapped some for high-profile administrative leadership roles. Likewise, presidents routinely reward wealthy and influential supporters with ambassadorships.

Among the most notable examples is Andrew Mellon, the aluminum, oil and banking tycoon who was among the handful of the nation’s wealthiest people in the 1920s and served as treasury secretary for three presidents.

The Trump officials worth at least $100 million include Deputy Secretary of Defense Stephen Feinberg and Small Business Administration Administrator Kelly Loeffler, who are also billionaires, and Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent and special envoy Steve Witkoff, both worth hundreds of millions of dollars.

By comparison, Republican George W. Bush’s administration and Democrat Joe Biden’s each included five members worth $100 million or more. Democrat Barack Obama’s included three, the report states.

A government populated by so many of the economic elite presents potential problems, the report’s authors said.

“When the people holding the reins of government are drawn overwhelmingly from the ranks of the ultra-rich, it leads to misplaced incentives and corruption, and begs the question, ‘Whose interests they are truly serving?” said Lisa Gilbert, Public Citizen’s co-president.

The list does not include Trump, whose net worth Forbes estimates at more than $6 billion. Nor does it include space and social media giant Elon Musk, who advised Trump last year on an effort to reduce the federal government’s size, scope and workforce and is the world’s wealthiest person, with a net worth Forbes estimates at about $860 billion.

Trump’s views are well established: Financial success is evidence of executive mastery and negotiating strength.

“They have great competence, those people. Incredible competence. Some of the smartest business leaders,” Trump said last year in explaining why he put considerable weight on advice from business executives.

He has also pointed to investments by wealthy people as a signal of future economic growth. To encourage billionaires to deliver, Trump, in his first year back in the White House, pursued policies on artificial intelligence and financial regulation that could benefit wealthy people, along with tax cuts and reduced regulatory burdens for large-scale investments.

Still, last month, only 32% of U.S. adults approved of Trump’s handling of the economy, down from 40% at the beginning of his second term and as his Republican Party faces headwinds in its attempt to hold both majorities in Congress in November.

___

This story has been corrected to show Lutnick is commerce secretary, not treasury secretary.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Hadassah-University Medical Center, in Jerusalem’s Ein Kerem, is performing, for the first time in the world, an innovative treatment for patients with recurrent aggressive brain tumors using alpha radiation, the hospital announced earlier this month.

A 77-year-old man diagnosed with a recurrence of glioblastoma after having undergone surgery, radiation, and drug treatments became the first patient in Israel to be treated with the newly developed Alpha DaRT technology.

Developed in collaboration with the Sharett Institute of Oncology and ALPHA Tau, the technology emits highly bioefficient alpha particles that deliver radiation concentrated in the tumor area with minimal damage to nearby brain tissue.

During the procedure, radiation sources are injected into the brain tumor from two different pathways simultaneously, allowing for optimal coverage of the tumor while maintaining maximum accuracy.

Beyond its local effect, preclinical studies also suggest that the treatment may trigger an immune response to the tumor in other brain regions. 

Doctors research a new treatment for  recurrent aggressive brain tumors using alpha radiation at Hadassah Medical Center in Jerusalem, August 2026. (credit: HADASSAH)

Professor Yigal Shoshan, Director of the Neurosurgery, Oncology, and Stereotactic Radiosurgery Unit at the hospital, led the surgery alongside doctors from the Department of Neurosurgery and a multidisciplinary team that included the operating rooms, the Sharett Institute of Oncology, the Institute of Radiotherapy, and the Neuropathology Unit.

Results have garnered interest in neuro-oncology community

Preliminary results published in the US have garnered interest among the neuro-oncology community and offer a new direction for a disease with extremely limited treatment options.

“One of the great advantages of the technology is that it integrates naturally with the neurosurgical navigation systems we use every day,” said Shoshan. “The same system that allows us to perform brain biopsies with millimeter accuracy also allows us to insert the alpha sources into the center of the tumor with similar precision.”

“Adapting the technology to existing navigation systems has been a key part of the development we have carried out in recent years,” he continued. “After taking a sample from the tumor to confirm active disease, we used the same system to precisely insert the alpha sources into the tumor. We thus performed local, precise, minimally invasive treatment, without the need for extensive brain surgery.”

“The procedure that was carried out at Hadassah is not only the first treatment in Israel, but the culmination of years of research. As part of our collaboration with Alpha Tau, we have adapted the technology for brain tumor treatment. This included laboratory studies, preclinical studies in a large-animal model, the development of dedicated applicators, their implementation in the neurosurgical navigation system, and many exercises on models in the operating room,” Shoshan said.

“Every step was designed to ensure that the transition to clinical research was carried out with the highest level of accuracy and safety. Seeing the technology reach a patient in Israel for the first time today is an exciting moment for everyone who has been part of this journey,” he said. 

Professor Aron Popovtzer, director of the Sharett Institute of Oncology, noted that glioblastoma is the most common primary malignant brain tumor in adults, and almost always recurs despite surgery for resection, radiation, and chemotherapy.

“Patients with recurrent disease currently have very limited treatment options,” he explained. “Therefore, any innovative technology that can be tested in a controlled clinical study is of great importance. A combination of research, clinical experience, and multidisciplinary collaboration is the only way to advance new treatments for these patients.”

About 150-250 new patients are diagnosed with glioblastoma in Israel each year. 

Even with usual treatment, which includes surgery, radiation, and chemotherapy, the disease recurs in the vast majority of patients, and the median survival is only about 15-16 months, according to Hadassah. Only about 10% of patients survive for 5 years after diagnosis.

A US study titled REGAIN, conducted in parallel with Hadassah’s study, found full local control of the disease in the three patients studied. Two of the patients showed no evidence of growth after treatment.

Shoshan said that “the current study focuses on recurrent glioblastoma, but we are already preparing to expand the clinical program to patients with targeted brain metastases, especially in cases where stereotactic surgery or radiosurgery has not achieved control of the disease.”

“We believe that the ability to inject alpha sources directly into the tumor focus and provide accurate, bio-efficient local radiation makes the technology particularly suitable for this indication as well,” he continued. 

Treatment a ‘significant milestone,’ says Alpha Tau CEO

Alpha Tau CEO Uzi Sofer said that the first treatment in Israel is a significant milestone for the company.

“We are an Israeli company that currently operates in medical centers around the world, but our hearts remain here. For us, it is especially significant that technology developed in Israel also reaches patients in Israel. This is not just a scientific or business success. It is also a Zionist mission. It is important to us that the innovation that was born here will also be available to patients in Israel,” he said. 

The researchers emphasized that the purpose of the study is to examine the feasibility and safety of the treatment, and only after this phase is complete will it be possible to expand the study and continue examining its clinical efficacy.

“For patients with recurrent glioblastoma who have exhausted the usual treatment options, this is a first but significant step. For the research teams at Hadassah, it is also the continuation of a scientific journey that has lasted for years,” the hospital said. 

“That journey has moved from the laboratory, through preclinical research, the development of the technology, its adaptation to the neurosurgical operating room, and the first clinical application in humans,” it added.

The research may also open possibilities for treating brain metastases and other brain tumors.

This post was originally published on here

The Trump administration is working to strengthen security against biological attacks after staffing cuts targeted experts in the field early in US President Donald Trump‘s second term, as artificial intelligence raises new fears about synthetic pathogens, The Washington Post reported on Monday.

By the end of former president Joe Biden’s term, some 30 people were on a team focused on biological security, WaPo wrote, citing three experts who served as government officials. The team coordinated the federal agencies dealing with biohazards and provided scientific guidance to top officials.

When Trump returned to office, the team was cut, and at times, nobody at the White House was dedicated solely to biosecurity, according to the report.

The administration also revoked a 2023 executive order on AI calling for stronger biological safeguards and cast doubt on a 2024 policy that required companies selling genetic components that could be used to create biological agents to screen their customers, a policy multiple experts have called for. 

While Trump called for a revised version by August 2025, no new order has appeared as AI companies say their models are gaining increasingly sophisticated biological capabilities, WaPo wrote. 

Illustration: Using AI at work (credit: SHUTTERSTOCK)

Administration touts benefits of AI

The administration has also focused on the potential benefits of AI in these fields. 

Trump said that AI could be a tool to aid in preventing disasters caused by biological weapons while speaking to foreign leaders at the United Nations last year and WaPo reported that a former health official who led the effort to rapidly produce a vaccine for COVID-19 during the first Trump administration is now at the Pentagon, working on ways to use AI to develop new defenses against potential pandemics and to deter biowarfare.

However, the departments dealing with biosecurity have been severely depleted.

In addition to the biosecurity team at the White House, the administration also shut down the Office of Pandemic Preparedness and Response Policy and a National Security Council unit dedicated to health security. Parts of the Office of the Director of National Intelligence and the Department of Homeland Security responsible for biological threats were also broken up in the administration’s reorganization, the experts said.

The Office of Pandemic Preparedness and Response Policy was reopened in the spring following the start of the Ebola outbreak in the Democratic Republic of the Congo, but experts still believe that is not enough, according to WaPo.

A White House official told WaPo that the administration was working to strengthen Biden-era policy around biosecurity, calling it limited and saying it did not address questions regarding staffing changes, WaPo wrote.

“The Administration’s commitment to addressing AI and biological safety risks is clear and ongoing. The White House has been developing policy for over a year, including in our AI Action Plan last summer,” WaPo cited the official as saying in an email.

OpenAI briefs White House on biological risks

Recently, OpenAI and the White House and half a dozen government agencies have held multiple briefings on biological risks, WaPo cited a person familiar with the meetings as saying.

Earlier in the month, Politico reported that the White House was launching a new initiative involving its cybersecurity office and a top official at the Department of Health and Human Services.

OpenAI also hosted over 50 government experts at a summit in July 2025 to discuss its system’s potential use for biodefense, and has since said it has continued to work with the administration to provide a special version of GPT called Rosalind, designed for biodefense, WaPo wrote.

“The Administration has increasingly prioritized this important issue as AI capabilities have expanded, and we welcome their partnership,” an OpenAI spokeswoman told WaPo in an email.

While some scientists call for greater regulation, others fear it may impede important research. 

Leading US AI companies restrict their models, but Anthropic loosened its guardrails on its most powerful model this month after repeated complaints from researchers. 

This post was originally published on here

Data center developers are turning to bespoke natural-gas power plants, a development that promises to dramatically increase carbon emissions and make it harder for US technology companies to meet their lofty climate goals.

Ninety-nine proposed plants tracked by BloombergNEF would emit about 318 million metric tons of carbon dioxide annually if run at industry-standard rates, according to a Bloomberg News analysis. The entire US electric power industry emitted about 1,485 million metric tons of carbon last year, according to Energy Information Administration data, meaning one slice of data center infrastructure has the potential to lift US power sector emissions by 20%, and as much as a third should the new plants run flat out.  

The data center building boom has already strained the US electricity system, prompting reliability concerns and moratoriums on new project approvals. With even greenlit facilities facing yearslong delays connecting to regulated electricity grids, data center developers are seeking alternatives. These include so-called behind-the-meter projects that can be permitted and built without the approval of utilities or the independent system operators charged with ensuring grid reliability.

“There is immense, immense pressure on the whole sector to get power, and get it fast,” said David Pomerantz, executive director of the Energy and Policy Institute, a utility watchdog that promotes renewables. “They’re sort of agnostic if it is clean or dirty.” 

Not all of the proposed plants in the BNEF data are likely to be built. The rush to capitalize on AI developers’ seemingly bottomless demand for computing power has produced some phantom projects and long-shot pitches.

Bloomberg’s estimate of the likely emissions is based on 126 gigawatts of total planned on-site gas generation capacity tracked by BloombergNEF, an energy research firm owned by Bloomberg LP. The carbon footprint was calculated using a range of usage from an industry average of 60% to 100% for round-the-clock deployment, and a gas burn rate of a typical single-cycle gas generator. Emissions will vary depending on the use and the fuel-efficiency of the generator. A single-cycle model is now one of the most common types planned although it’s dirtier than combined-cycle plants that data center developers want but are struggling to get owing to a yearslong backlog for turbines. 

The BNEF data includes projects backed by the leading AI labs, OpenAI and Anthropic PBC, upstart data center operators that fashion themselves as AI specialists, as well as cloud-computing giants and investor groups seeking tenants. 

The projects tracked by BloombergNEF are spread across 22 states, from Alaska to Georgia. More than a third of them are in Texas, where ample oil and gas resources and a historically forgiving regulatory environment had developers rushing to erect data centers as fast as they can be built and powered. (Texas Governor Greg Abbott recently announced a pause in data center approvals).

That includes plants backed by Amazon.com Inc. and Microsoft Corp., the largest sellers of rented computing power and data storage. 

Earlier this month, Cleanview, which tracks US power infrastructure and data center development, identified Amazon as the developer of an 8,000-acre site in Pecos County, which will become among the biggest single sources of carbon pollution in the US. 

About 30 miles (48 kilometers) to the west, past a pecan orchard and scrublands dotted with oil derricks, Chevron Corp. is building Microsoft a gas plant to power a new data center complex on a 2,000-acre site.

The two plants alone could generate more than 10 gigawatts of electricity, enough to power New York City on a hot summer day. Their combined annual emissions may be as high as 45 million metric tons of carbon dioxide equivalent, according to regulatory filings. That’s slightly less than half the cumulative emissions of Washington state, where both companies are headquartered.

That fossil-fuel infrastructure threatens to push Big Tech’s climate goals out of reach. Both Amazon and Microsoft are big backers of clean energy projects, and have said they aim to zero out their contribution to the carbon emissions responsible for a warming planet. Those pledges were made before the artificial intelligence boom, at a time when technology companies were under pressure from employees and outside activists to do more to cut their emissions. Spokespeople for Amazon and Microsoft say their climate goals haven’t changed. Amazon is exploring its options for solar power and battery storage at the west Texas site.

“It has been a remarkable shift in the last three years,” said Drew Wilkinson, a former Microsoft employee who organized his colleagues to advocate for tougher sustainability measures. “The companies who set the bar for corporate climate action are now bringing net new fossil infrastructure online at a breakneck pace. Few of us saw it coming.”

To contact the authors of this story:
Matt Day in Seattle at mday63@bloomberg.net
Mark Chediak in San Francisco at mchediak@bloomberg.net

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The American dream of owning a home may be getting harder to achieve in some of the country’s biggest cities, but new data suggests it remains alive and well in parts of Texas and the Sun Belt.

According to WalletHub’s 2026 Best Real Estate Markets report released Wednesday, Frisco, Texas, took the top spot and was followed by neighboring McKinney, Texas. Murfreesboro, Tennessee; Durham, North Carolina; and Denton, Texas, rounded out the top five.

Other Top 10 contenders include Cary, North Carolina; Madison, Wisconsin; Allen, Texas; Charlotte, North Carolina and Irvine, California.

“Texas and other Sun Belt markets dominate the top of the ranking, highlighting the combination of housing-market strength and helpful economic conditions found in many of these cities,” WalletHub writer and analyst Chip Lupo told Fox News Digital. “These markets tend to perform well across factors such as home-price appreciation, new housing construction, building-permit activity, affordability and job growth.”

CALIFORNIA LOSES FORTUNE 500 CROWN TO TEXAS AS BILLIONAIRE TAX THREAT LOOMS

“Nearly 47% of the housing units in Frisco, the No. 1 market overall, were built between 2010 and 2024 … McKinney, ranked No. 2, has a 40% new-home rate, the 10th-highest building-permit activity and one of the best job growth rates,” Lupo said.

“By comparison, many large coastal markets rank considerably lower overall, including New York at No. 231, Los Angeles at No. 237 and San Francisco at No. 273. Their relatively weak rankings reflect a combination of housing-market challenges and poor affordability and economic-environment scores,” he continued.

The study weighs underlying housing-market health and market trajectory more heavily than affordability alone in ranking the 300 U.S. cities, with cities needing a combination of healthy housing fundamentals and economic conditions that could support homeowners over the longer term to rank highly.

“Taxes are certainly part of the equation, but the ranking points more broadly to the combination of housing conditions and economic strength rather than taxes alone,” Lupo said.

“By contrast, major coastal markets rank far lower. Those markets may offer high incomes and economic opportunity, but their housing costs can make it much harder for residents to translate those opportunities into homeownership. The biggest, most popular cities are on everyone’s radar,” he said, “so their housing markets have been competitive for a long time, and they continue to be. The entry point is therefore more expensive, and there might not be as much room for growth.”

“The contrast with expensive coastal cities is less about simply building more homes and more about whether housing supply can keep pace with demand. When new construction consistently falls behind population and job growth, affordability pressures become much harder to overcome,” Lupo said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

New Orleans ranked last in the report, followed by Baltimore. Lupo said this is a “warning sign” that goes beyond home prices.

“Homeowners shouldn’t assume further deterioration is inevitable, but these rankings are a reason to be cautious,” he said. “Markets with weak housing fundamentals can experience slower home-price growth, weaker market activity and greater difficulty attracting buyers, which can make it harder for homeowners to build equity or sell quickly.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

OpenAI said it paused some aspects of AI training for two weeks following the July incident in which its AI models broke out of a controlled test environment and hacked the systems of AI company Hugging Face and four other unnamed services.

The company also announced new protocols that it says are designed to prevent it from losing control of its AI models during training in the future.

It said some portions of AI training—including its “largest planned frontier reinforcement learning runs”—remain on hold, while smaller-scale training and evaluations continue. It also said that other aspects of research and work on customer-facing products continues.

The new safeguards unveiled today include stricter security standards for training, including more monitoring of AI models, greater isolation of testing environments (“sandboxes”), and fewer vulnerabilities the AI may exploit.

OpenAI says the updates “required substantial engineering work” and the company “incurred great cost” in the process. Experts told Fortune in early August that the compute costs OpenAI spent investigating the hack likely cost between $4 and $15 million, though we cannot know the total amount OpenAI spent.

In a blog post detailing the new security controls, OpenAI said that on average that would add an additional 20% compute burden to aspects of training. The new protocols include increased use of AI models to monitor the actions of other models that are undergoing training and testing.

However, the company told reporters today the new safeguards are “not a direct reaction to Hugging Face specifically,” although the incident underscored “the urgency to bring safety and security up to model capabilities.”

The company said that in addition to the Hugging Face incident, it had determined that an unreleased model called “Astra,” which it says was not involved in that cyberattack, presented a “Critical” cybersecurity risk under its “Preparedness Framework.” That internal policy document had committed OpenAI to pausing model development once that threshold was reached to allow the company time to work out further safety mitigations.

This is the first time OpenAI has paused aspects of AI development in response to safety concerns.

The company said the two week pause is evidence that it is “pacing model development.” The word “pacing” echoes the language of a public letter multiple top safety experts signed after the hack, calling for coordinated pacing between countries, implying the U.S. and China.

“It’s important to start building tools for coordinating this sort of pacing across labs and across countries,” Jakub Pachoki, Chief Scientist at OpenAI, told reporters in a briefing ahead of the announcement.

The fact that Astra met the critical cybersecurity threshold is evidence that we can expect new, powerful models to “do quite unprecedented things in the real world,” Pachoki said. “As we train more and more capable models, we want to be extremely confident that we understand the range of capabilities, that we are able to measure them, and that they meet higher and higher standards of alignment.”

The public is still waiting to understand key details of the Hugging Face hack, including what OpenAI asked the AI to do and if the company knew they attacked other companies. OpenAI has not released a full technical post-mortem, though reiterated today that one is coming “soon.”

In the absence of those details, it’s difficult to say if the new security protocols unveiled today are adequate.

OpenAI gave the public some details about the attack at the Black Hat security conference in Las Vegas on August 5, where staffers explained that the AI agents worked together for months prior to the hack, collaborating with each other by leaving secret notes on a messaging board unknown to OpenAI employees.

The fact that OpenAI did not seem to know its agents had constructed a messaging board and collaborated on hacking another company raised alarms after the incident. Hugging Face CEO Clem Delangue told Fortune that keeping close tabs on agent logs and traces is “101 of agent monitoring, especially at the frontier.”

OpenAI now says it has always monitored its agents closely, but only the “highest risk workloads.” It has now “revised and expanded” its monitoring approach, which it says is now “multi-stage” and built to automatically escalate potential concerns.

The new procedures include enhanced “chain of thought” monitoring. A model’s chain of thought is how the model “thinks out loud” about its approach to a problem and the actions it is planning to take. This will allow the company to better “understand what the model’s actual goals are,” the company told reporters today. But other AI research, including from scientists at OpenAI rival Anthropic, has shown that an AI model’s “chain of thought” is not always an accurate depiction of its motivations or goals.

Pachoki said OpenAI was aware of this risk and had designed its training procedures to minimize the chance its models would learn to hide their true intentions by lying in their chain of thought.

The new automated monitoring tools are designed to issue an alert to internal safety, security, and research teams within 30 minutes of detecting concerning activity. If those teams cannot determine that the alert is a false alarm within 30 minutes, the new procedures call for them to immediately pause the training run or evaluation.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

The U.S. national debt is hurtling toward $40 trillion, and Bank of America Research strategist Michael Hartnett’s “Anything but Bonds” framework is becoming ever more applicable. Boiled down, Hartnett warns the US is accumulating too much debt, which causes the government to issue too many bonds—and investors want compensation for the fiscal risk—making long-duration Treasurys unattractive compared to other assets. Here’s why the climbing debt makes the advice worth a listen.

The U.S. national debt stands at roughly $39.9 trillion in mid-August and is expected to cross the $40 trillion threshold as early as this week. According to the Treasury’s official data, the government’s outstanding debt is made up of both intragovernmental holdings and debt held by the public.

Hartnett, Bank of America’s chief investment strategist, has turned that fiscal deterioration into one of his central investment themes. His “Anything but Bonds” call reflects his view that investors should be wary of long-duration government debt while the U.S. continues to run large deficits and the market demands higher yields to finance them. He expects the national debt to reach $50 trillion by 2029.

The concern is not that the government owes a lot of money. It’s that the government has to continually refinance and issue more debt, creating a larger supply of bonds that investors need to absorb. If investors become less willing to buy that debt at existing yields, the government has to offer higher interest rates to attract them.

This dynamic is already visible in the Treasury market. The yield on the 10-year Treasury reached 4.6%, while the 30-year yield hit 5.2%. Those elevated yields reflect the concerns over inflation, fiscal sustainability and the sheer amount of government borrowing. For bond investors, rising yields are a double-edged sword.

New bonds become more attractive because they offer higher income, but existing bonds lose value when market yields rise. The longer the maturity of the bond, the more sensitive the price generally is to changes in interest rates. That makes long-duration Treasurys particularly vulnerable if investors continue to demand higher returns to compensate for fiscal and inflation risks.

And while bonds may not be an attractive investment according to the Bank of America strategist, the bond market can represent one of the clearest gauges of the economy’s underlying health. Treasury yields reflect what investors think about inflation, economic growth, interest rates and the government’s ability to manage its finances.

When yields rise, the implications extend far beyond bond portfolios, especially due to Treasury rates helping setting the baseline cost of borrowing throughout the economy. The higher yields can translate into more expensive mortgages, corporate loans and consumer credit—potentially slowing investment, housing and spending. 

The federal government has borrowed $1.8 trillion during the first 10 months of fiscal 2026, including $432 billion in July alone. That borrowing creates a feedback loop. More debt creates more interest payments, and the interest payments can mean larger deficits. Ultimately, the Treasury must issue even more securities to make up for the borrowing. And the scale is already massive.

The interest bill on the national debt has climbed to roughly $1.4 trillion over the past year, according to Hartnett’s latest outlook. He argues the “Anything but Bonds” trade is unlikely to end until five-year Treasury yields fall below roughly 3.25%.

That explains why Hartnett is looking beyond traditional fixed-income investments. His argument expands that risk-reward has changed. Hartnett points to assets including gold and equities—and even opportunities in areas such as biotech and real estate. 

“The U.S. stock market hit an all-time high on the same day that the U.S. Treasuries issued at their highest yield in 25 years,” Hartnett said in the report. “That’s reality.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Outside Levi’s flagship store in New York’s Times Square, the sidewalks are teeming with tourists, buskers, and unauthorized Elmo impersonators. Inside, the store is teeming with mannequins. A shopper wandering down to the lower level is quickly surrounded by mannequins in T-shirts, mannequins in chambray shirts, mannequins in sweatshirts, and even mannequins in puffers—usually paired with the brand’s trademark jeans. 

Levi Strauss & Co. CEO Michelle Gass is, of course, a living human being, but clad in her dark-blue jean jacket and straight-leg black jeans, the self-proclaimed “denim head” blends in well on the store floor. As she leads Fortune on a tour, she draws a reporter’s attention to a group of graphic T-shirts depicting Western vignettes with lassos and cowboys, and to others illustrating the invention of blue jeans in 1873. “Our Western tops are having a moment right now,” she says. “I’m not sure this Western trend is going to last forever, but as it is happening, we want to be driving it.”

The company has deployed this mannequin armada, as opposed to relying merely on racks and shelves, to more effectively suggest complete “looks” to shoppers. Nearby racks showcase denim dresses, the better to draw more women to buy from the historically male-catering brand. Some of those dresses might be paired nicely with its jean jackets: Levi’s clearly doesn’t mind the rebirth of the sometimes-derided Canadian tuxedo denim-on-denim look.

The wide range of merchandise and how it’s displayed show what Gass, who celebrated her first anniversary as CEO this January, has in mind for the brand’s future—and for helping Levi Strauss find a higher gear for growth in an intensely competitive and crowded denim market. 

The flagship store represents a major pivot in Levi’s strategy: The company intends to rely less on wholesale revenue from retail partners like Walmart, Target, and department stores, and more on sales from its own stores and website—called the direct-to-consumer or DTC channel in retail—the better to control its own destiny in the perilous apparel industry. 

Gass’s first full year in the corner office has shown that the strategy is promising, though it hasn’t yet delivered blockbuster results. Revenue rose 3% in fiscal 2024 to $6.4 billion, as consumers overall pulled back on spending on premium denim. Levi Strauss remains far from the $9 billion to $10 billion revenue mark it promised Wall Street a couple of years ago. And Levi’s shares have risen only modestly since Gass joined, adding pressure on her to show financial improvement. Just before Gass became CEO, the company announced it was cutting up to 15% of global corporate jobs. “We made some really tough calls,” Gass says. “We recognized that we had to slim down our organization.”

Still, Gass inherited a thriving company that had been brought back to overall health by her predecessor Chip Bergh. To leave her own mark, Gass wants to continue Bergh’s work by further modernizing the company on numerous fronts—from the visible and glam (such as slicker stores and cooler merch), to the geeky (like faster turnaround times on new products). There is also likely an additional motivation for Gass: Her tenure at Levi Strauss will be a way to show doubters what she is capable of after she proved unable to stem Kohl’s deterioration during her four and a half years as CEO there.

The company’s ambitious pivot plans are likely to cause some growing pains, Gass hints. “We’re kind of new at this,” she says. But she also notes that she’s starting from a position of strength: “It’s not a turnaround, we have an incredibly strong foundation.”

From CEO to apprenticeship to CEO again

Levi Strauss & Co. was launched in 1853 when its namesake founder, an immigrant from Germany, moved to San Francisco to start a dry goods store that would serve the general stores popping up locally during the Gold Rush. Strauss later struck gold of his own by creating durable work pants for miners: He added metal rivets to high-tension spots in the garment, and thus the iconic American blue jean was born.

Over the years, the pants went from work garment to everyday staple to pop-culture fashion mainstay, sported by everyone from Bruce Springsteen on the cover of his Born in the USA album to Beyoncé, who cowrote a song called “Levii’s Jeans” for her Grammy-winning 2024 album, Cowboy Carter.

Gass, in short, has a lot to work with. She also came in exceptionally well-prepared. She had already been CEO of a Fortune 500 company: Kohl’s, the department store, is three times the size of Levi Strauss and is in some ways more complex. And Levi Strauss’s board arranged for Gass to work with Bergh closely before Bergh rode off into the sunset. Levi’s hired Gass away from Kohl’s in November 2022; she started as president a few weeks later, and shadowed Bergh for 13 months in all before becoming CEO herself. 

When Bergh took the reins in 2011, Levi’s was a debt-laden company that had missed the newest denim trends and become a nostalgia play. By the time he left, Levi’s had a healthy balance sheet and was firmly in growth mode again, with revenue rising 30% in his 12 years at the helm. 

The idea behind the year of overlap with Bergh was to help Gass deeply understand the inner workings of the company and hit the ground running. Together they traveled to visit suppliers and stores around the world, getting to know franchise partners. (Overseas, most Levi’s stores are franchises.) “This was a best-in-class succession that I hope many others will embrace,” says Gass.

But if Gass had a lot to work with, so did Levi’s. Though Kohl’s struggled during her tenure, enduring revenue and profit declines and attracting attacks from activist investors, the CEO herself drew admiration for some daring moves—including setting up Amazon return centers to get people who didn’t normally shop at Kohl’s into stores and landing a deal with Sephora to open shop-in-shops for the wildly popular beauty brand. (Kohl’s, meanwhile, continues to struggle, two CEOs later.)

Gass’s nearly 10 years at Kohl’s were, in a sense, perfect preparation for the Levi’s gig. Kohl’s is primarily an apparel retailer, selling its own store brands—including labels like Sonoma, which features many denim products. Before becoming CEO there, Gass had served as chief merchant, the executive who oversees product selection and sourcing, an experience she says helped her understand fashion trends and the product development and manufacturing processes. “That gave me a sixth sense of what questions to ask,” she says. Her Kohl’s years also helped her bone up on e-commerce. “Kohl’s was in an industry being hugely disrupted when I joined in 2013,” she says, adding that this led her to build out a big e-commerce business, now about $6 billion at Kohl’s.

Mannequins in the window of a Levi's store in Berlin.
Mannequins in the window of a Levi’s store in Berlin. CEO Michelle Gass is expanding the company’s roster of stores.
Joerg Carstensen—picture alliance/Getty Images

The fact that Kohl’s operates more than 1,000 large stores gave Gass additional experience the Levi’s board was seeking, given its desire to expand its own store footprint. And before Kohl’s, Gass had spent 17 years at Starbucks, much of that time in Europe, honing her brand-building chops in a fast-growing international business.

So her year with Bergh wasn’t so much an “apprenticeship” as it was a crash course to help her make her way down Levi Strauss’s learning curve. Soon enough, her vision for what Levi’s should stand for, and by extension, how she could leave her mark, came into focus. One key piece of that was pushing the boundaries of what Levi’s sold—and to whom. Indeed, Gass recalls asking Bergh on one of their trips abroad: “Well, Chip, where are all the denim skirts I’m hearing women want?”

Evolving from jeans for guys to denim for everyone

Until relatively recently in its long history, Levi’s was mostly about blue jeans, and primarily for dudes. Yes, the company sold some tops, like T-shirts with the classic, Batman-like Levi’s logo, or trucker denim jackets. (There was also Dockers, the once-popular brand of sensible chinos that were a fixture of many men’s wardrobes for decades; Levi’s now wants to sell that off.) But jeans for men were the bread and butter for eons. Under a strategy Bergh developed and Gass is refining and further implementing, a much broader denim and denim-complementing lineup is the focus.

That broader lineup is crucial to the company’s future, because the days when Levi’s had the denim market largely to itself are long gone. Denim is a $65 billion global market, and while Levi’s is the top-selling brand globally, it is dealing with strong competition, from the likes of Kontoor Brands’ Wrangler on the lower end, Rag & Bone and Buck Mason at the pricier end, not to mention popular non-denim rivals like Vuori and other so-called lifestyle brands.

Gass says that just a few years ago, Levi’s sold seven bottoms for every top; now that proportion is two bottoms for each top it sells. There is a lot of gold to mine in tops, which are bought much more frequently as consumers refresh their wardrobes. (A good pair of jeans, in contrast, can last years.) Tops still only represent 27% of sales—a sign that there’s room to grow.

Selling more tops also means winning over more women, who buy clothing more often. Women currently generate about 36% of Levi Strauss sales, up from about 29% in 2018. Gass says she thinks women can soon get to 50% of sales. “We should be at least a $10 billion company,” Gass says; “That’s going to come through a few ways, but women’s [clothing] is going to be a key means to do that.”

“We’re no longer just selling jeans, we’re selling a denim lifestyle,” Gass likes to say. At the same time, those puffers, hoodies, and sweatshirts are there to entice someone initially attracted to Levi’s jeans to grab something else. “Not everybody wants to wear denim on denim every single day,” she notes.  

There is also something symbiotic about tops and bottoms, as fashion changes in one category can generate sales for the other. For instance, if the trend in jeans is for high-waisted pants that creep up toward the rib cage, that creates more demand for shorter tops; very tight jeans, meanwhile, often spark interest in looser tops.

“A trend has a halo effect, and two items can definitely play into each other,” says Kristen Classi-Zummo, an apparel industry analyst at Circana, a data firm. “We’re seeing more and more brands take more of a lifestyle approach, rather than be category experts siloed in one kind of product.”

Keeping up with such trends, says Gass, means Levi’s has had to change its metabolism regarding how it designs and manufactures its products. Typically, the lead times from conceptualization to store shelf for Levi’s goods has been 16 months, a touch long for the apparel sector; Gass is working to bring that down to 12 months, in service of helping Levi’s jump on trends more quickly. “The wedge boot cut is on fire,” Gass says, by way of example. “So it’s chase, chase, chase.” 

At the same time, Gass is gingerly taking the Levi’s brand a bit further upscale. Last year, the company discontinued its Denizen brand, a cheaper version of its jeans it had developed for Target. (Target still sells Levi’s mainstay Red Tab jeans.) But it has also created Blue Tab, a premium segment launched this January in Japan that includes Japanese-made and Japanese-inspired selvedge jeans and tops to go with them. (Blue Tab items will be available in the U.S. later this year.) Selvedge involves a unique weaving process that results in a higher-quality, more expensive product: The priciest Blue Tab bottoms cost $350, well above the $90 for traditional 501s.

Some brands can get burnt and annoy customers when they go too high-end. But Gass says nothing ventured, nothing gained. “We’ll see how high is high enough,” she says. 

Luring customers back to stores

Cool merchandise doesn’t count for much when it isn’t showcased properly. And this is where Levi’s DTC push, now accelerated under Gass, comes in.

Today the Times Square flagship is one of some 1,300 freestanding Levi’s company-owned stores; Gass has been aiming to add dozens of stores per year. The flagship admittedly features far more bells and whistles than most of the brand’s stores, but it highlights elements that Levi’s hopes to roll out broadly—the kinds of services that won’t be available at Walmart or Macy’s. 

Inside a Levi's store in New York City.
Inside a Levi’s store in New York City. At many stores, stylists help shoppers navigate the growing array of jean categories.
Angus Mordant—Bloomberg/Getty Images

In addition to mannequins sporting those complete looks, there’s a customization service where people can have their jean jackets embroidered. There are also stylists to help the casual consumer navigate different categories of jeans on offer, distinguishing baggy (currently the hottest trend in denim) from slim, straight, loose, or boot cut, not to mention 501 versus 502, 511, and so on. “Sometimes buying jeans can be intimidating,” admits Gass, whose go-to items are the straight-cut 724 high-rise jeans and a denim jacket, which has replaced the leather jacket she favored before joining Levi’s. 

When asked if Levi’s risks tacking too far in the direction of DTC as other brands have (among them, Nike, before it course-corrected last year), Gass is quick to note that she is not looking to shrink the “wholesale” business of sales through other retailers. “Levi’s is a really important brand to those [wholesale] customers, and we both agree we raise our game,” she says, adding that the business is currently growing, albeit slowly. Rather, the idea is to see wholesale drop as a percentage of Levi Strauss’s total business—an arena where the company is making progress so far. 

And just as tops and bottoms can benefit one another, DTC and wholesale can, too. In a research note last month, Barclays analysts said that Levi’s “proven demand trends in its DTC channel” would help entice wholesale customers to place orders, more confident those products will actually sell rather than collect dust on shelves.

Building buzz on Beyoncé and Bob Dylan

Of course, retail is not just about supply chains, the wholesale-vs.-DTC debate, and other prosaic matters. There needs to be buzz and fun, too, and being part of the zeitgeist is essential to success. That was a major motivation for Bergh’s decision in 2013 to buy the naming rights to the San Francisco 49ers’ new stadium in Santa Clara, Calif., a deal the company extended last year into the 2040s at a price of $170 million. Levi’s also recently introduced a new Complete Unknown capsule collection to sell pieces seen in the new Bob Dylan biopic, including a suede jacket and a pair of 501 jeans. 

A new collaboration with Beyoncé also falls in the zeitgeist category. At a Levi’s showroom in Manhattan’s Garment District, a large video display plays a recent Beyoncé Levi’s ad, one in an ongoing campaign, on a loop. The spot depicts the singer in a laundromat stripping down to her undergarments while a pair of Levi’s jeans gets washed. Beyoncé has been boasting her love of Levi’s going back to her Destiny’s Child days in the 1990s; she became a paid spokeswoman last year. “The right collaborations create brand heat and drive relevancy for a brand that’s been around for decades and decades,” says Gass.

Like some of the celebrities that wear Levi’s, the company has been outspoken on social issues, such as calling for stricter gun control, lobbying for more registration of young voters, and voicing support for civil rights. Despite the current anti-DEI climate, don’t expect Levi’s to tone that down, Gass vows. “One thing I will tell you that is not changing is our commitment to live our values,” she says. “We’ve been supporting diversity and inclusion for decades.” Some 45.3% of Levi’s top management was female in 2023, and the company has stuck to its diversity goals in hiring and promotions.

Gass’s first year at the helm had its bumps but overall has been modestly successful. Shares have risen 8% since she became CEO—a touch below what the S&P Retail index did during that time—and business improvements are gathering speed. But Gass says she’s playing the long game. For her, success in five years looks like a Levi Strauss retooled for the intensely competitive apparel market, but still anchored by its rich history. 

“There’ll be some mistakes along the way; not everything goes as perfectly as one might expect,” Gass says. “But I feel like we are poised to deliver.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

More than 600 bags of frozen dog food are facing a recall after FDA testing prompted by a consumer complaint found salmonella contamination.

Connecticut-based Oma’s Pride issued a recall for one lot of Woof Complete Canine Chicken Recipe, the company announced on Monday.

A total of 639 bags are affected by the recall effort. The impacted products have a manufacturing date of Jan 27, 2026, and a best-by date of Jan. 27, 2029. The recalled product is a raw dog food sold in a six-pound gusseted stand-up pouch containing 12 individually-wrapped, eight-ounce vacuum-sealed portions.

The recalled lot of dog food was distributed to retailers and wholesalers in 11 states: Arizona, California, Indiana, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maryland, Nevada, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania and Virginia, as well as directly to consumers through online orders. The products were distributed between Feb. 12 and May 15 of this year.

RECALL ISSUED FOR DOG AND HORSE MEDICATION AFTER GLASS FIBER FOUND IN VIALS

Oma’s Pride ships its products to consumers across 48 states, with the exception of Alaska and Hawaii.

The recall was initiated after the FDA received a consumer complaint. The agency then collected and analyzed a sample of the product, which tested positive for salmonella.

Oma’s Pride said it is continuing an investigation to determine the source and root cause of the contamination.

Three illnesses in dogs have been reported in connection with the dog food. No human illnesses have been reported.

Salmonella can affect animals eating the dog food, the company said, adding that there is risk to people from handling contaminated pet products, especially if they have not thoroughly washed their hands after touching the food or any surfaces exposed to it.

Pets with salmonella infections may be lethargic and have diarrhea, fever and vomiting. Some pets may only have decreased appetite, fever and abdominal pain. Infected but otherwise healthy pets can be carriers and infect other animals or people.

Owners with pets who have consumed the recalled product and are showing these symptoms are urged to contact a veterinarian.

Healthy people infected with salmonella are advised to monitor themselves for symptoms, including nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, abdominal cramping and fever. Salmonella can cause additional ailments such as arterial infections, endocarditis, arthritis, muscle pain, eye irritation and urinary tract symptoms.

People showing these signs after having contact with the recalled dog food should contact a healthcare provider.

POPULAR PET FOOD RECALLED OVER POSSIBLE SHARP METAL AND PLASTIC CONTAMINATION

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Consumers who purchased the affected dog food are instructed to stop feeding it to their pets immediately, safely dispose of it and contact Oma’s Pride for a refund.

They should also wash and sanitize pet food bowls, cups and storage containers.

“Oma’s Pride is conducting further investigation to better understand this finding,” the company said. “The health and safety of pets and the people who care for them is our highest priority. We are proud of the food we make, and we remain committed to producing high-quality, biologically appropriate pet food. We will continue to update our customers as more information becomes available.”

This post was originally published here

Iraq’s cabinet approved mechanisms for exporting Iraqi crude through specialized international and local companies and via multiple export outlets, the government said on Tuesday.

The contracts under the new mechanism will run for three months starting September 1, according to a statement issued after the cabinet meeting.

Iraq is seeking to diversify its oil export channels and maintain flexibility in marketing its crude amid the Iran war and the closure of the Strait of Hormuz, which has disrupted regional oil flows and created uncertainty around shipping routes.

Iraq developed alternate export routes

Iraq has worked to develop alternative export routes in addition to its traditional southern terminals, including routes through Turkey and Syria, as it seeks to reduce reliance on Gulf shipping routes.

Iraq is OPEC’s second-largest oil producer and relies heavily on crude exports for state revenue. Most of its exports are shipped from terminals in the southern Gulf, leaving the country particularly exposed to disruptions in the Strait of Hormuz.

The Zubair Oil Field in Basra, Iraq, April 6, 2026.  (credit:  REUTERS/Mohammed Aty)

The government did not immediately provide details on the companies to be selected, the volumes to be exported under the mechanism, or the specific export outlets covered by the contracts.

This post was originally published on here

Sunshine State voters will need to choose between two pro-Israel candidates for governor in November’s general election to replace Gov. Ron DeSantis, after Republican Byron Donalds and Democrat David Jolly won their respective primaries on Tuesday night.

The Associated Press called both the Republican and Democratic primary races for governor at 8 p.m., about an hour after polls closed on Tuesday, with around 85% of the votes counted in both races. By that time, Donalds had secured 48.6% of the GOP primary votes and Jolly had amassed 61.5% of Democratic primary votes. 

Jolly had been a Republican Representative for Florida in the US House from 2014-2017, representing the South-Central coastal zone, but gradually abandoned the party for the Democrats as he distanced himself from US President Donald Trump. Byron Donalds has served as Florida’s Representative in Washington since 2019.

DeSantis, Florida’s governor since 2019, is term-limited by state law and therefore isn’t able to run for reelection. His replacement will be filling the shoes of a governor known for his unwavering stance on Israel and his intolerance for the boycott, divestment, sanctions movement. 

A strong supporter of Israel, DeSantis was the first Florida governor to visit the West Bank, stopping in an Israeli industrial park in the Gush Etzion region there in 2019.   Amid pressure from DeSantis that same year, Airbnb reversed a policy that had removed apartment listings in West Bank settlements. 

US President Donald Trump boards Air Force One at Joint Base Andrews, Maryland, US, August 7, 2026 (credit: REUTERS/ELIZABETH FRANTZ)

Byrons supported Trump launching Iran strikes, while Jolly warned against dangers

DeSantis has signed off on multiple bills that focused on protecting Florida’s Jewish community from antisemitic attacks, as well as a proclamation that celebrated Israel’s 75th independence in 2023.He has also been a strong backer of military action against Iran. 

Donalds, who would be Florida’s first Black governor if elected, earned the endorsement of President Trump and has similarly expressed support for decisive action against Iran. 

“Peace is achieved through strength, not weakness,” Donalds said in a post on X/Twitter at the beginning of the war. “I stand with President Trump, our military, and the hope this leads to lasting security in the Middle East.” 

In Congress, however, Donalds voted in 2024 against the Antisemitism Awareness Act, which passed the US House but stalled in the Senate.

He said he couldn’t support the bill because it “was rushed, the language was unclear and no amendments were allowed.” But he pledged his steadfast support for the State of Israel and his Jewish neighbors and stressed that antisemitism must be clearly defined. 

In keeping with that principle, Donalds said he had previously voted for a Florida bill that described antisemitism “as hateful perceptions, rhetorical and physical manifestations, language that justifies the killing or harming of Jews, Holocaust disinformation, tropes regarding dual loyalties, the application of a double standard towards Israel, and denial of the fact that Israel is the ancestral homeland of the Jewish people.”

On the other side of the aisle, Jolly has been a longtime supporter of Israel, and that  stance has remained unshaken during his shift from Republican to moderate Democrat.

During his time in Congress as a Republican, Jolly paid a 2016 visit to Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu in Jerusalem and then called for the US to raise annual military assistance for Israel from $3.1 billion to $5 billion, according to local media reports.

Where Jolly has sharply diverged from Donalds today is in his perspective on US military action in Iran. The same day that Donalds declared his support for Trump’s decision, Jolly posted an opposing viewpoint. 

“This president enters war without the broad confidence of the American people and with a cabinet largely unqualified,” Jolly warned in a February post on X.

While stressing that Trump lacks support from Congress, Jolly also said that he would pray for the safety of US troops and “a swift end to conflict” now that it had begun. 

“We likewise pray for a successful outcome from our operations — a more stable region and world, a reduced nuclear threat and a fuller embrace of freedom abroad,” he added.

This post was originally published on here

President Donald Trump said late Tuesday that he is pausing 50% tariffs on Canadian goods scheduled to take effect Wednesday, saying the two countries have reached a deal pending final documentation.

“I have paused the 50% Tariffs against Canada, that were scheduled to kick in tomorrow morning for a three day period, based on the fact that Canada and the U.S.A., subject to the finalization of documents, have a DEAL!” Trump wrote on Truth Social.

“The great Keystone XL Pipeline, long ago killed by Sleepy Joe Biden, may be awoken from the grave!” Trump added.

Trump’s announcement came just hours before the tariffs were scheduled to take effect for a three-day period under the Tariff Act of 1930.

FORD’S US MANUFACTURING EXPANSION TO BRING ‘THOUSANDS AND THOUSANDS OF JOBS,’ LUTNICK SAYS

The duties would have covered roughly $20 billion in Canadian imports, including liquor, dairy products, vehicles, hockey equipment and other goods. Certain food products, wearables, synthetic materials and industrial goods were also expected to be affected.

Trump spoke with Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney on Monday night and reportedly spoke with him again Tuesday afternoon, according to FOX Business correspondent Edward Lawrence.

This is a developing story. Check back for updates.

FOX Business’ Bonny Chu contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Costco will soon offer Medicare plans to certain members as part of a new, first-of-its-kind health insurance venture. 

The warehouse giant has teamed up with SCAN Health Plan, one of the nation’s largest nonprofit Medicare Advantage plans focused on senior health care, the insurance company announced Tuesday. 

Under the partnership, the companies will launch a “suite of senior-focused” insurance products over the coming years. 

Pending regulatory approval, the suite could include a revamped pharmacy experience, Medflex over-the-counter pharmacy benefits, vision care coverage, audiology or hearing benefits and more. 

COSTCO ADDS HOT FAN FAVORITE TO FOOD COURT MENU AS SHOPPERS DEBATE TASTE AND VALUE

The plans will be sold at Costco stores and also made available through insurance agents and websites, according to The Wall Street Journal. 

The companies have not revealed exactly when the plans will become available, as regulatory review and approval are still pending. SCAN currently serves members across 33 counties in California, Arizona, Nevada, Texas, New Mexico and Washington. 

SCAN Health said the initiative was designed to address the “disjointed experience that many seniors face accessing care and services” and will “bring more value and better experience to seniors as they navigate their health insurance.” 

COSTCO MAKES PAYMENT CHANGE THAT COULD SPEED UP CHECKOUT FOR MEMBERS

“For the millions of older adults who rely on Medicare Advantage, the future of the program depends on strong partnerships that make healthcare more accessible, more connected and more seamlessly integrated into everyday life,” Dr. Sachin Jain, CEO of SCAN Group and SCAN Health Plan, said in a statement.

 “Older adults want healthcare that is easier to navigate, more responsive to their needs and rooted in organizations they trust. Our expanded partnership with Costco will give us a strong foundation to explore new ways to help people stay healthy and independent while delivering the quality, value, and service both of our organizations are known for.”

Costco CEO Ron Vachris added that the partnership with SCAN serves as an extension of the company’s commitment to providing value to its customers.

“For more than 40 years, Costco has consistently listened to our Members and earned their trust delivering consistent value on essential goods and expanding our health service offerings,” Vachris said in a statement. 

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“Selecting SCAN as our partner to deliver a better healthcare experience for seniors, is an extension of that commitment. We have developed a shared understanding of what matters most to the seniors we serve. Deepening our partnership allows us to build on that foundation and create value for our Members.”

FOX Business reached out to Scan Health for more information.

This post was originally published here

Several senior Likud officials are pressuring Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu to announce on Tuesday evening that Yoseph Haddad will be given a reserved spot on the Likud’s Knesset list, amid concerns that he could instead join a new party being formed by Brig.-Gen. (res.) Ofer Winter and deepen a split in the right-wing vote.

The pressure on Netanyahu stems from growing concern within Likud over the formation of a new political framework to its right. According to party officials, bringing Haddad into Likud is intended not only to add a well-known public figure to the list, but also to prevent him from joining Winter and strengthening a party that could compete for the same pool of voters.

The concern is not merely theoretical. Haddad is behind an application to register a new party called “Brave Israel,” although his name does not appear in the registration documents. Haddad has been holding talks about joining forces with Winter, who has been working in recent months to establish an independent political platform.

Haddad himself has previously made clear that he is considering entering politics.

At the same time, Winter is moving forward with his political plans and intends to announce the formation of a party in the near future. If he runs in the election, he intends to do so independently rather than join an existing party.

A protester shouts at former IDF Brig. Gen. Ofer Winter during a demonstration against an IDF recruitment conference for the Haredi community in Jerusalem, August 4, 2026. (credit: CHAIM GOLDBERG/FLASH90)

Talks between Winter and Haddad are continuing, and political figures are waiting to see whether they will lead to an alliance between the two.

Likud fears votes could be lost below electoral threshold

Likud officials are particularly concerned about a scenario in which a party led by Winter draws votes away from Likud and other parties on the Right but fails to cross the electoral threshold, thereby weakening the entire bloc.

Those concerns were also reflected this week in polls examining Winter’s electoral potential, which have indicated that a Winter-led party could draw support from parties on the Right.

This post was originally published on here

Rillet, a two-year-old startup building what it calls the first truly AI-native accounting platform, has raised a $100 million Series C at a $1 billion valuation, the company told Fortune exclusively—joining the ranks of AI-era unicorns racing to unseat decades-old enterprise software giants.

The round, led by ICONIQ with participation from returning backers Sequoia Capital, Andreessen Horowitz and Oak HC/FT, plus new investors including Bain Capital Ventures, Sequoia Global Equities, Battery Ventures, FirstMark, Scale Venture Partners and Creandum, marks Rillet’s third fundraise in the past year and pushes its total funding past $200 million. ICONIQ general partner Seth Pierrepont is joining Rillet’s board as well.

For Rillet co-founder and CEO Nicolas Kopp, the milestone is as much personal as financial. In an interview with Fortune, Kopp described the company’s mission as freeing CFOs from the drudgery that keeps them chained to spreadsheets long after everyone else has logged off.

“CFOs really struggle day to day. They can’t see their families on weekends,” Kopp said, because they have to spend so much time reviewing data and creating slideshows. Noting that he has a finance and accounting background himself and that his company is full of people with accounting backgrounds, he said he wants AI to change that—not by replacing finance professionals, but by acting as their tireless back office. “Our message is not that we’re coming after jobs. That’s just not correct,” he said, stressing that “domain expertise” is core the company’s mission: “We’re positioning AI as a helper to that individual and what they can achieve.”

From launch to unicorn in two years

Rillet’s rise has been fast even by startup standards. Kopp said the company launched publicly roughly two years ago, raised a Series A led by Sequoia last summer, then closed a Series B just weeks later—a round that saw new annual recurring revenue double quarter over quarter. The company says it doubled its new ARR again in the three months leading into this latest raise, and now serves more than 600 customers.

Those customers include some of the fastest-growing AI companies in the world—Neuralink, Skild AI and Mercor among them—alongside a growing share of decidedly non-tech businesses. Roughly 40% of Rillet’s customer base now sits outside the tech and AI sectors, Kopp said, spanning industries as varied as waste recycling and movie studios, describing the shift as evidence that AI-native finance tools are crossing into the broader U.S. economy. “That’s been really cool to see,” he said.

Mercor, in particular, has become a marquee reference customer: According to the company, its finance team is using Rillet’s AI agents to manage a business scaling past $2 billion in annual recurring revenue with a headcount of just three.

“Rillet is the clear leader in AI-native accounting infrastructure,” Pierrepont said in a press release announcing the fundraise. “What stands out is how customers actually run on it—multibillion-dollar businesses operating with finance teams a tenth the traditional size, closing their books continuously.”

Taking on the legacy giants

Rillet’s pitch to the market is direct: Legacy enterprise resource planning systems—Oracle Fusion, SAP, Workday, Microsoft’s Great Plains and NetSuite among them—were built for a pre-AI era, and are increasingly vulnerable to a challenger built from scratch around artificial intelligence.

“Some of these giants that seemed untouchable” are now facing serious disruption, Kopp said, describing a wave of enterprise customers ripping out legacy systems in favor of Rillet’s platform. The core distinction Kopp draws is architectural. Traditional ERP systems, he said, were designed for humans to input and review data—a workflow that leaves finance chiefs “dragged down into the day-to-day minutiae of numbers” instead of focusing on strategy. Rillet, by contrast, is built “agent-first,” with AI systems capable of running hundreds of operations in parallel, executing much of the manual accounting work that traditionally consumed finance teams’ time.

That shift, Kopp argues, doesn’t just save time: it produces cleaner, more consistent financial data than human-run processes typically allow, while creating what he calls a complete audit trail. “Proving out the work layer is mission-critical for enterprise readiness,” Kopp said, arguing that Rillet is the only system that can combine deterministic accounting data with AI agents completing complex, end-to-end work in the market today.

Rillet has paired that pitch with credibility-building moves in the accounting establishment. Earlier this year, the company launched an alliance with EY for AI-native finance transformation, and it says it now partners with more than half of the Accounting Today top 20 CPA firms.

The AI acceleration

Kopp traces much of Rillet’s recent momentum to rapid improvements in underlying AI models. Accounting, he noted, is “traditionally a very old, stodgy category”—one where AI has emerged as an unexpected catalyst. “Especially in the last six months, things started lighting on fire in a good way,” he said, describing tasks that once took a human a full day now taking a couple of minutes. This frees up time not for job loss, but for higher-level strategic work, he added.

That acceleration comes as the accounting profession faces a separate, slower-moving crisis: fewer graduates entering finance and accounting careers. Kopp sees that talent gap as part of the opportunity. He argued that AI agents can help make up for a shrinking pipeline of human accountants even as business complexity—from pricing changes to competitive pressure—continues to increase.

Rillet’s own product development has sped up in step with its AI capabilities, according to Kopp. He pointed to instances where the company’s customer support team (many of them with accounting training) has shipped feature requests within two to three hours of a customer raising them, as engineers increasingly build tools in direct collaboration with the company’s in-house accountants. “That wasn’t possible six to 12 months ago.”

For this story, Fortune journalists used generative AI as a research tool. An editor verified the accuracy of the information before publishing.

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Travelers can still score deals this fall, but they may have to work harder to find them as the traditional shoulder season gets squeezed.

Fall travel interest on Vrbo is up 17% from a year ago, while average nightly rates after summer are now just 5% below peak summer prices across the platform’s top destinations, according to new data from the vacation rental platform.

“Shoulder season is this magic time between Labor Day and the holiday travel season when, traditionally, prices have dropped pretty dramatically and crowds have thinned out,” Vrbo Travel Expert Melanie Fish told FOX Business. “Well, summer travel demand is now bleeding over into fall.”

Some of the best savings remain in beach destinations, overseas markets and trips booked for later in the fall.

WEALTHY AMERICANS LOOK TO NEW ZEALAND AS DEMAND FOR ‘GOLDEN VISAS’ BOOMS

Myrtle Beach, South Carolina, tops Vrbo’s list, with vacation rental rates averaging 34% less than during summer. One property cited by the company drops from as much as $1,300 per night in August to about $600 in October.

Other beach markets also offer discounts. Orange Beach, Alabama, offers average savings of 31%, followed by Panama City Beach, Florida, at 24%, Santa Rosa Beach, Florida, at 16%, and Ocean City, Maryland, at 12%, according to Vrbo.

Fish said travelers chasing lower prices should consider swapping destinations or keeping an eye out for last-minute discounts.

BUDGET AIRLINE JETSTAR TO CHARGE PASSENGERS FOR STORING BAGS IN OVERHEAD COMPARTMENTS

Travelers heading overseas may also have better luck. European vacation rental prices fall an average of about 8% from summer highs during the fall, with larger discounts in destinations including Corfu, Crete, Girona, the Azores and Siena.

Major tourism hubs such as London, Paris, Madrid and Rome tend to hold onto higher prices, leaving fewer shoulder-season bargains.

The squeeze is also showing up in several major U.S. cities. Vrbo said fall rates are rising in Nashville, Boston, Chicago and Miami as demand stays strong beyond summer.

SEE IT: TRUMP ADMIN UNVEILS SWEEPING $22.5B DULLES AIRPORT OVERHAUL

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Travelers willing to wait until after the holidays could find the biggest break.

From just after New Year’s through the period before spring break in early 2027, lodging prices are expected to run about 34% below summer peaks, with possible deals in San Diego, Los Angeles and Orlando.

This post was originally published here

American Airlines passengers could soon notice some big changes when they settle into their seats, as the carrier rolls out a major overhaul of the onboard experience.

The company said Tuesday that more than 800 narrowbody aircraft will ultimately receive new entertainment systems featuring 4K displays, Bluetooth connectivity and USB-C charging.

“Big enhancements are taking flight,” American said in a post on X announcing the changes.

New aircraft equipped with the screens are expected to begin arriving in the second half of 2028, while retrofits of existing jets are scheduled to start later that year.

CHICK-FIL-A REIMAGINES SOUTHERN BREAKFAST CLASSIC AS AMERICANS PILE ON THE PROTEIN

The retrofit program is expected to stretch into the early 2030s, according to American.

The move marks a notable shift for the Fort Worth, Texas-based carrier, which has for years relied heavily on passengers streaming entertainment to their own phones, tablets and laptops on many domestic flights.

The airline told Fox News Digital that changing passenger habits helped drive the decision.

“Customer preferences have evolved,” the airline shared with Fox News Digital, adding that the shift has become particularly apparent since the COVID-19 pandemic.

The carrier added that younger travelers, in particular, increasingly expect access to multiple devices and larger screens during their trips.

At the same time, improvements in satellite internet are changing what airlines can offer passengers in the cabin. American plans to begin installing high-speed Starlink Wi-Fi on its narrowbody aircraft in 2027.

AMERICAN AIRLINES REPORTEDLY PAUSES 6 DOMESTIC ROUTES AMID FUEL PRICE PRESSURE TIED TO IRAN CONFLICT

The airline said combining built-in screens, passengers’ personal devices and faster connectivity could create a more personalized in-flight experience, while also opening up “new opportunities for engagement and revenue growth.”

The upgrades will cover both new aircraft and planes already in American’s fleet. Newly delivered Airbus A321 and Boeing 737 MAX 10 aircraft will receive the entertainment systems, while existing narrowbody aircraft will be retrofitted.

American’s current Airbus A320 fleet is the exception and will not receive the new seatback entertainment systems, the carrier told Fox News Digital.

The cabin overhaul goes beyond screens.

American is also increasing the number of higher-priced seats across its narrowbody operation, as airlines increasingly compete for travelers willing to pay more for additional space and premium amenities.

Premium seating currently represents roughly 25% of seats on American’s narrowbody departures. The airline expects that figure to climb to approximately 40% in the coming years.

UNITED AIRLINES DROPS MERGER PURSUIT WITH AMERICAN, CEO KIRBY DETAILS WHY

American is already modifying its Airbus A319 and A320 aircraft to add another row of first class. Its future Boeing 737 MAX 10 aircraft are expected to have 24 first-class seats, while the airline also plans to reconfigure its A321neo fleet with additional first-class seating.

The carrier is expanding Main Cabin Extra, its extra-legroom economy product, across most of the narrowbody fleet as well.

“We’re making one of the most significant investments in the onboard experience in our history,” American Chief Customer Officer Heather Garboden said.

The airline’s decision comes as carriers increasingly focus on premium travelers and cabin amenities as another way to differentiate themselves beyond ticket prices and schedules.

American’s new screens are expected to rank among the largest offered on narrowbody aircraft in North America, according to the carrier. The system will also offer personalized movie and television recommendations, interactive flight maps and destination information.

The first newly delivered aircraft with the technology are still roughly two years away, meaning passengers will see the changes gradually rather than through an immediate fleetwide overhaul.

American Airlines expects the retrofit program to be completed in the early 2030s.

This post was originally published here

The United States is working to establish a deconfliction mechanism among Israel, Turkey and Syria, US special envoy for Syria Tom Barrack said on Tuesday after Israel struck a Syrian airbase near the Turkish border.

Barrack, who is also US ambassador to Turkey, said Turkey had not been warned about the Israeli strikes, “and consequently observed the aircraft heading north toward its territory and therefore could have reasonably prepared its own response,” referring to possible Turkish military reaction.

“Thankfully, calm heads were able to prevent the situation from deteriorating further,” Barrack told Reuters in a phone interview.

Turkey condemned Israel’s strikes on the Abu al-Dahur airbase in northwestern Syria but did not comment further, including about a potential deconfliction mechanism.

A deconfliction mechanism is a communications channel intended to prevent misunderstandings or accidental confrontations between military or political actors.

 Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu and Syrian President Ahmed al-Sharaa, with a map of the Middle East (Illustrative).  (credit: Chip Somodevilla, Ali Haj Suleiman, KeithBinns/Getty Images)

Turkey signed joint defense agreement with Saudi Arabia, Pakistan

Tensions have grown between Israel and Turkey, both of which border Syria, and their rhetoric over Syria has sharpened.

Turkey, which has NATO’s second-largest army and signed a mutual defence pact this month with Pakistan and Saudi Arabia, has become one of Syrian President Ahmed al-Sharaa’s main allies.

Ankara has been training Syria’s army, helping it rebuild state institutions and infrastructure and providing military and diplomatic support.

Israel’s strikes on the Syrian airbase “reflected a perception, whether accurate or misplaced, that Türkiye might in the near future increase its presence at that base,” Barrack said, using the Turkish name for Turkey.

“This underscores the need for a deconfliction mechanism involving Israel, Syria and Türkiye. That is something we are actively working on to establish in order to prevent future miscommunication,” he said. “The priority now is to lower tensions and allow space for a more measured approach.”

The airbase, about 70 km (43.5 miles) east of the Turkish border, has been out of service as a dedicated military airfield since 2013 and changed hands several times during Syria’s 14-year civil war between forces loyal to former President Bashar al-Assad and opposition factions.

Syria’s state-run Ekhbariya television, citing a military source, said on Tuesday that Israel carried out eight airstrikes on the base’s runway and storage facilities. A separate military source and a civilian who lives near the base said there were no casualties.

The Israeli military declined to comment on the strikes.

Israel has for years struck targets in Syria to curb what it says is Iranian influence and to prevent weapons from reaching Hezbollah in Lebanon.

Since Assad’s overthrow in 2024, it has also viewed Syria’s new rulers with suspicion and continued military operations in the country, most recently attacking government sites in southern and central Syria in March.

‘Kinetic means of communication’

Syria and Israel have held several rounds of de-escalation and border discussions since rebel forces under Syrian President Ahmed al-Sharaa’s command toppled Assad, but no agreement has been reached.

“An incident of the kind that occurred this morning demonstrates the need to intensify these efforts and expand the process,” Barrack said.

The envoy said the US already facilitates an information-sharing and dialogue mechanism among the parties.

“What is required is a more robust architecture with greater resources committed to it. Investing in such mechanisms is far less costly than relying on kinetic means of communication that can run into the hundreds of millions of dollars,” he said, referring to military force.

This post was originally published on here

American Airlines spent much of the past decade betting that passengers would bring their own entertainment. Beginning in 2028, the airline will start reversing that strategy across more than 800 single-aisle aircraft, installing a screen at every seat as part of one of the largest cabin overhauls in its history.

The change will reach the domestic-style Airbus and Boeing jets that carry most American passengers. Newly delivered aircraft will begin arriving with the screens in 2028, while American will start retrofitting planes already in service during the same year. The work is expected to continue into the early 2030s.

American’s long-haul aircraft and new Airbus A321XLRs already offer seatback entertainment. The new program extends that experience across the airline’s mainline narrowbody fleet, rather than its smaller American Eagle regional aircraft.

The screens will be more than replacements for the small displays airlines installed years ago. American says the system will include large 4K displays, Bluetooth connections for passengers’ wireless headphones, USB-C fast charging and personalized movie and television recommendations. Travelers will also receive interactive flight maps with destination information and real-time details about their journey.

That combination reflects how the economics of onboard entertainment have changed. American previously concluded that removing screens would reduce aircraft weight, maintenance requirements and installation costs while passengers streamed movies to devices they already carried.

But a phone is also a traveler’s boarding pass, camera, wallet, work device and connection to the ground. Asking passengers to use it as their television consumes battery power and leaves families dependent on every traveler having a suitable device. A built-in screen allows passengers to watch entertainment while using their phone for something else.

Faster satellite internet also makes the screen more useful. American plans to begin installing SpaceX’s Starlink service on more than 500 aircraft in 2027, creating an onboard system in which passengers can combine high-speed connectivity with entertainment built directly into the seat.

The screens are only one part of a more consequential redesign. American plans to increase premium and extra-legroom seating from approximately 25% of the seats on its narrowbody departures to about 40%.

Airbus A319 and A320 aircraft are already being retrofitted with an additional row of first class. American’s future Boeing 737 MAX 10s are planned with 24 first-class seats, while its Airbus A321neo fleet will be reconfigured with additional first-class capacity. Most narrowbody aircraft will also receive more Main Cabin Extra seats, which provide additional legroom and earlier boarding.

The arithmetic explains why the airline is willing to surrender more cabin space to higher-priced seats. Premium travelers occupied roughly 30% of American’s seats during the second quarter but generated nearly half of its ticket revenue. Premium revenue increased 19% from a year earlier, compared with 15% growth for non-premium revenue.

American is therefore not merely restoring a passenger amenity. It is rebuilding the narrowbody cabin around travelers who pay more and expect a product closer to what Delta Air Lines and United Airlines increasingly provide.

The investment will be substantial, although American has not disclosed its expected cost. Screens add weight, hardware and maintenance to hundreds of aircraft, and retrofitting a fleet of this size will take years. Passengers should not expect their next American flight automatically to have one: the first newly equipped narrowbody aircraft are still roughly two years away, and some existing planes may not receive their screens until the next decade.

The reversal nevertheless settles a question American answered very differently ten years ago. The airline once believed the future of inflight entertainment was the device in a passenger’s hand. It now believes the seat in front of that passenger needs a screen again.

JBizNews Desk | Fort Worth

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Financial markets and investors are reacting to the rapidly growing U.S. national debt, which is approaching a record of $40 trillion, by requiring greater returns for those who invest in America’s debt obligations.

Yields on U.S. Treasurys have been elevated recently, in part due to the growth in debt, with the federal government projected to run a roughly $2.1 trillion budget deficit this fiscal year, according to the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office (CBO).

Two recent Treasury auctions in the last week drew attention due to the yields reaching historic levels – the sale of 10-year notes cleared at a high of 4.683%, the highest in 19 years, while the 30-year bond auction stopped at 5.216%, a 25-year peak.

Demand from investors has remained steady despite the higher yields, as they navigate concerns over the growing debt, widening budget deficits and inflation – with the higher yields attracting investors.

FEDERAL BUDGET DEFICIT ON TRACK TO SURPASS $2T THIS FISCAL YEAR AS SPENDING OUTPACES REVENUE

The higher yields at last week’s auctions showed no sign of an abrupt decline in demand from domestic and foreign investors for Treasurys. Analysts also indicated there weren’t signs that so-called bond vigilantes, who are concerned with fiscal policy and inflation risks and demand higher yields to invest, are actively selling Treasurys.

Yields on U.S. debt are higher than those on the debt issued by other developed countries like Japan, contributing to the stronger demand for Treasurys.

Jim Barnes, director of fixed income at Bryn Mawr Trust in Pennsylvania said in a Reuters report that the “appetite for Treasurys is still there and it’s just a matter of – at what yield,” adding that the “10-year at close to 5% and the 30-year at multi-decade highs will attract more buyers for risk-free Treasurys.”

Treasurys are considered to be “risk-free” in theory, because the federal government is perceived as having little to no chance of entering into a formal default because of its ability to tax and control its money supply through the Federal Reserve. In practice, they do carry some risks for investors that owe to shifts in inflation and interest rates, despite the unlikely prospect of default.

US DEBT SET TO CRUSH WORLD WAR II RECORD AS ANNUAL DEFICITS EXPLODE TO $3T WITHIN DECADE

Elevated yields on U.S. debt do pose a challenge for consumers, as the yield on the 10-year Treasury note is a key guide for mortgage rates and they typically move in tandem. 

Higher mortgage rates can make it harder for buyers to afford monthly payments and can discourage existing homeowners whose current mortgages are at lower rates from moving, while also weighing on construction activity.

Other types of consumer debt, including auto loans and other fixed-rate loans, also tend to rise with market rates, though there is a lag in the pass-through of the higher borrowing costs, and it’s less exact than in other types of consumer borrowing. Credit card rates are more closely linked to banks’ prime rates, which tend to follow the Fed’s monetary policy moves.

Higher yields on Treasurys can also contribute to bigger budget deficits – and in turn, a larger national debt – as the federal government’s debt service costs rise due to the higher yields.

US NATIONAL DEBT SURPASSES SIZE OF THE ECONOMY FOR FIRST TIME SINCE WORLD WAR II

A 10-year budget and economic outlook released by the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office (CBO) earlier this year projected that the government’s net interest costs are projected to exceed $1 trillion in fiscal year 2026, amounting to about 3.3% of GDP and nearly 14% of federal spending this year.

Interest costs are forecasted to continue to rise over the next 10 years, with the CBO projecting the annual interest expense will rise to $2.1 trillion in fiscal year 2036, when it would amount to 4.6% of GDP and account for 19% of federal spending that year.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Architecture firms Studio Gang and Sauerbruch Hutton have been tapped to redesign German House, home to Germany’s consulate in New York City. Selected as the winner of an international design competition, the firms will “radically transform” the building’s facade, enhance its environmental performance, and reinforce the tower’s status as a civic landmark. Sauerbruch Hutton will serve as the lead architect, with Studio Gang as the architect of record, on the 23-story government building at 871-873 First Avenue.

View from 49th Street. © ArtefactoryLab

Originally designed by SLCE Architects, the 31-year-old granite-and-glass-clad building houses Germany’s Permanent Mission to the United Nations, the Consulate General, and affiliated cultural partners. The building is located just north of the United Nations Plaza.

The project marks the first collaboration between the two architectural firms. In the five boroughs, Studio Gang may be best known for their work on the American Museum of Natural History’s Richard Gilder Center for Science, Education, and Innovation, which opened in 2023.

In a statement, the competition jury that selected the firms’ proposal said the design would effectively represent Germany in New York and at the United Nations.

“[T]he jury considers that this proposal demonstrates a high level of architectural and design quality, with a clear and functional organization that will result in a contemporary, efficient, and sustainable building.”

“Above all, it will be capable of representing the Federal Republic of Germany in New York and at the United Nations through an architecture that is original, optimistic, transparent, and accessible, fully aware of the role this building plays within this context,” the jury continued.

According to the firms, three main principles guide the redesign. The first is to create a building that represents Germany’s “democratic values of participation, transparency, and freedom” while offering an open, generous, and welcoming environment for those who work there and visit.

The new design aims to showcase the latest in German engineering, including sustainable features such as building-integrated photovoltaics installed on the best-exposed facade elements to generate renewable energy on-site. A box-window system will also incorporate high-performance solar shading within the facade, maintaining views while meeting security requirements.

View from the river. © ArtefactoryLab

The project will transform the existing structure rather than replace it, reducing embodied carbon while substantially upgrading the building and improving occupant comfort. Windows will be operable, allowing for natural ventilation, a cultural practice that is common in Germany.

The second goal is to create an outstanding workplace where staff feel connected to the country they represent and can work comfortably throughout the day.

Halfway up the tower, a sky lobby with a vertical garden will provide a shaded space for work and socializing. According to the architects, the space will serve as a symbolic meeting point for the Consulate General and the U.N. Mission, reinforcing themes of synergy between the building’s distinct programs.

And the third is intended to make the tower a “civic landmark,” creating a striking presence both at street level and among the surrounding skyline. Its new colored facade will give German House a distinct identity while integrating it into the cityscape.

At the top of the tower, a new restaurant on the top floors will open onto a covered roof terrace offering panoramic views of the city. The space will also feature a lightweight garden pavilion for informal gatherings and other events.

“We look forward to working with the Bundesbau Baden-Württemberg and sauerbruch hutton to help reimagine German House as a more welcoming and sustainable model for civic architecture in New York and within the international diplomatic community,” Jeanne Gang, founding partner at Studio Gang, said.

“This project, which holds cultural exchange at its heart, is an exciting opportunity to bring together German design expertise with the proven project delivery in NYC,” she added.

RELATED:

The post Studio Gang, Sauerbruch Hutton to redesign German consulate in NYC first appeared on 6sqft.

This post was originally published here

TikTok is developing a feature that could allow users to send money to one another inside direct messages, potentially turning conversations on the video platform into financial transactions without requiring people to open Venmo, Cash App or their banking app.

Evidence of the unfinished feature was discovered in hidden code inside the current U.S. version of TikTok’s iPhone app, according to Bloomberg News, which first reported the development. The code indicates that recipients could tap to accept a payment before it expires, while senders would receive updates showing whether the money was accepted.

That is evidence of development, not a confirmed product launch. TikTok has not announced when the feature might become available, whether it would be tested broadly in the United States or what fees, transfer limits and identity-verification requirements would apply. Features found in application code can be changed or abandoned before reaching users.

If launched, the transfer system would reportedly run through TikTok Pay, payment infrastructure the company already uses in Southeast Asia. TikTok has built a substantial commercial operation in that region, where more than 20 million businesses and four million creators were selling through TikTok Shop as of late 2025.

The strategic value reaches beyond competing with established payment apps. TikTok increasingly wants discovery, conversation and commerce to happen inside the same ecosystem. A user might find a product in a video, discuss it through a direct message and eventually transfer money without leaving TikTok. For creators and small sellers, payments inside conversations could shorten the distance between attracting someone’s attention and completing a transaction.

It could also make TikTok more useful for ordinary payments between friends, moving the app into territory occupied by Venmo, Cash App and Zelle. The strongest payment networks are difficult to dislodge because people use the service where their friends, relatives and customers already have accounts. TikTok would enter with that social network already assembled.

The complication is that moving money carries responsibilities that distributing videos does not. A U.S. peer-to-peer payment service may face federal electronic-transfer requirements, state money-transmission rules, identity checks, anti-money-laundering obligations and disputes over unauthorized transactions. TikTok would also need safeguards against account takeovers, impersonation and scams conducted through the same messaging system carrying the payment request.

The distinction between an unauthorized transfer and a payment that a user was deceived into approving can become especially important. Federal rules provide protections for certain unauthorized electronic transfers, but recovering money voluntarily sent to a scammer can be substantially more difficult.

TikTok has already shown broader financial ambitions. The company applied in Brazil for licenses that could allow it to offer prepaid accounts, receive and transmit payments, and provide or facilitate credit. In Britain, TikTok and Visa introduced a virtual card in April designed to give eligible creators faster access to their platform earnings.

A direct-message payment button would connect those ambitions to TikTok’s central advantage: hundreds of millions of people already use the app to discover products, communicate and make purchasing decisions. Whether that becomes a genuine payments business now depends on something hidden code cannot establish—whether TikTok can satisfy regulators and persuade users to trust a social-media conversation with their money.

JBizNews Desk | Culver City

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited

The buildings that house artificial intelligence have become a campaign issue in both parties, with candidates from town council races up to Senate contests running against the data centers going up in their states, according to reporting Friday by The National News Desk.

The complaint is a kitchen-table one. A large data center draws enormous amounts of electricity and water, and when a utility spends money to build the power lines and generating capacity to serve it, that cost lands in the rates everyone in the service territory pays. Voters are connecting a windowless building at the edge of town to the number at the bottom of their monthly bill.

The polling is lopsided. A Gallup survey earlier this year found 7 out of 10 Americans opposed to a data center being built in their area, and a Reuters/Ipsos poll in June found 59% — roughly 3 in 5 — opposed to one within 10 miles of their home. More than 1,500 new data centers have been proposed nationwide.

That combination is unusual in an election year: an issue where the opposition runs through both parties rather than between them. Punchbowl News reported this week that candidates across the map are running against the roughly $600 billion artificial intelligence buildout, tying it to the cost-of-living pressure voters are already feeling.

Texas state Rep. James Talarico, a Democrat running for Senate, has campaigned on reining in the companies, saying they are driving up utility bills, arriving in communities without resident input, and drawing down water in a state already short of it. Republican Rep. Byron Donalds, running for governor of Florida, has taken the other side of the water question — arguing that the facilities recycle and contain their own supply — while agreeing that they should be sited away from residential neighborhoods.

President Trump has pushed communities to accept the projects, arguing the money and investment will go to another state if they turn it down.

The states are not waiting for the election. New York has become the first state to impose a statewide pause on data center construction, a one-year moratorium, and city councils and county boards elsewhere have passed local restrictions of their own. Candidates in gubernatorial races in multiple states, in both parties, have now endorsed temporary halts, including Florida Democrat David Jolly, who said he would back a pause until the state has a plan to protect its water, its grid and its communities.

Moratoriums are the blunt instrument. The more durable fix being worked out in state utility commissions is a separate rate class for very large power users, so that a data center pays the full cost of the generation and transmission built to serve it instead of spreading that cost across residential customers. Several states are also writing contracts that require the operator to bring its own power supply, or to pay for it whether or not the facility ever runs at capacity. Where those rules are in place, the fight over the building itself tends to cool.

There is real money on the other side of the ledger. The projects bring construction jobs, property tax revenue that often reshapes a rural county’s school budget, and long-term capital investment. But the permanent workforce inside a finished data center is small, which is why the tax-base argument has not been enough to settle the politics.

For the companies building them — and for the utilities, turbine makers and electrical contractors selling into the boom — the risk through November is no longer federal. It is a county commission, a state rate case, or a governor who campaigned on saying no.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

David Morens, a longtime senior adviser at the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases who worked closely with former NIAID director Anthony Fauci, pleaded guilty Tuesday to a federal conspiracy charge tied to efforts to hide government communications from public-records laws and influence federal grant decisions.

Morens, 78, admitted that he and others deliberately used private channels to keep official communications away from Freedom of Information Act requests and federal recordkeeping requirements. Prosecutors say the conduct centered on sensitive coronavirus-research matters and NIH funding decisions that had already drawn intense public and congressional scrutiny.

The mechanics of the scheme were simple and consequential.

Instead of keeping government business inside official NIH systems, Morens and others used his personal Gmail account for communications they expected might eventually be sought through FOIA. According to the Justice Department, those exchanges included nonpublic NIH information, discussions about restoring or protecting research funding, edits to letters intended for senior NIH officials and communications routed through a back channel to a senior NIAID official.

The guilty plea turns what had previously been a records-management controversy into a criminal matter.

Morens admitted conspiring to commit offenses against and defraud the United States, a charge carrying a maximum penalty of five years in federal prison. His ultimate sentence will be determined later under federal sentencing rules and could be substantially lower than the statutory maximum.

The plea also reaches beyond records concealment.

Prosecutors say Morens admitted participating in a conspiracy involving illegal gratuities. A co-conspirator provided him with wine and discussed meals at Michelin-starred restaurants in connection with assistance Morens was providing. The government says Morens identified work on a scientific commentary supporting a natural origin for COVID-19 as one of the official acts he could perform in connection with the gift.

That detail matters because it shifts the case from improper use of private email into the territory of using government influence for outside interests.

The Justice Department says Morens also worked to advance the interests of a company tied to bat-coronavirus research after an NIH grant had been terminated. Prosecutors allege he used nonpublic information and his position inside NIAID to help shape communications and influence decisions affecting that research.

Morens served as a senior adviser in NIAID’s Office of the Director from 2006 through 2022, placing him inside one of the federal government’s most important public-health agencies during the COVID-19 pandemic.

His proximity to Fauci guarantees political attention, but the legal distinction is important: Fauci has not been charged in the Morens case, and Morens’ guilty plea does not by itself establish that Fauci participated in the conspiracy.

The case is significant for a different reason.

FOIA is one of the primary tools journalists, watchdog groups and the public use to reconstruct how federal agencies make decisions. If officials intentionally move government business onto private accounts to keep it outside that process, the result is not simply missing paperwork. It can prevent the public from seeing how policy, grants and scientific decisions were made in real time.

Morens’ plea now gives federal prosecutors an admitted insider in a case involving hidden communications, grant influence and government decision-making during one of the most scrutinized periods in modern public health.

The next question is no longer whether those records practices were improper.

It is how far the conduct reached, who else participated and what prosecutors can establish from the communications Morens tried to keep out of public view.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

California regulators on Monday approved new rules that will restrict which replacement tires can be sold across the state in an effort to meet energy-efficiency standards.

The new regulations, unanimously adopted by the California Energy Commission (CEC), will phase out tires that fail to meet these standards — a move that could restrict a large portion of the tires currently available to drivers.

“This ultimately is about protecting consumers,” said David Hochschild, Chairman of the California Energy Commission, as reported by KCRA-TV. “I see this as sheltering the public from higher costs in the long run.”

TOYOTA RECALLS 655K CAMRYS GLOBALLY OVER DISPLAY DEFECT THAT CAN KNOCK OUT SAFETY INDICATORS

Fox News Digital has reached out to several tire manufacturers, including Goodyear, Michelin, and Bridgestone.

The new rules target rolling resistance: the amount of energy it takes for a tire to roll down a road. Lower rolling resistance allows vehicles to consume less gasoline or electricity.

While factory-installed tires on new vehicles typically feature low rolling resistance, drivers often replace them with cheaper, less efficient tires. The new rules aim to ensure that replacement tires maintain energy efficiency levels similar to those of original factory tires.

WAYMO RECALLS MASSIVE AUTONOMOUS FLEET AFTER INCIDENT FLAGS MAJOR SAFETY ISSUE

The first phase of the program begins in 2029, targeting the most inefficient replacement tires on the market. The allowable rolling-resistance threshold drops even further starting in 2033.

According to the CEC, California drivers could save $79 in fuel or electricity costs over four months during Phase 1, and about $153 over seven months during Phase 2. The CEC estimates that Phase 2 rules will add an average of about $6.50 to the cost of each tire, the New York Post reported.

These regulations are a tool within our authority that can save money for every Californian,” said Commissioner Nancy Skinner.

Goodyear voiced concerns over the mandate, arguing that it would pass additional costs onto consumers. Representatives noted that around 70% of tires currently sold in the state would be eliminated by 2033.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Several categories are excluded from the new rules, including snow tires, used and retreaded tires, deep-tread off-road tires, motorcycle tires, and tires sold for emergency vehicles.

The regulations stem from Assembly Bill 844, a 2003 California law requiring the commission to set state tire-efficiency standards.

This post was originally published here

The 25th anniversary of the September 11 attacks is approaching next month and a prominent foundation serving first responders and servicemembers is partnering with a major beer brand as the American public remembers those who stepped forward in response to the attacks.

The Tunnel to Towers Foundation and Anheuser-Busch have deepened their partnership in advance of the anniversary, with the company stepping in to help sponsor events around the country. Stephen Siller Jr., who manages the In the Line of Duty program at the Tunnel to Towers Foundation, told FOX Business in an interview that the company stepped in to support the foundation’s “never forget” mission.

“For the 25th anniversary of September 11th, we wanted to give the country the opportunity to mourn. The events are very New York, Shanksville, Pentagon-focused – we wanted to do something this year where we traveled the country, allowing as many people as possible to pay their respects,” Siller explained.

This year, the group is traveling the country with a 21-foot, 16,900 pound beam from the South Tower of the World Trade Center with 35 stops in about 30 cities. The journey will conclude by going through a tunnel into New York City, following in the footsteps taken by Siller’s father as he responded to the Twin Towers on Sept. 11, 2001.

TUNNEL TO TOWERS LAUNCHES ‘STEEL ACROSS AMERICA’ TOUR TO HONOR 9/11 VICTIMS AND HEROES

Stephen Siller was an FDNY firefighter who was off-duty on the day of the September 11 attacks but responded to the World Trade Center after hearing the news. When he reached the Brooklyn Battery Tunnel, it was closed to vehicle traffic for security purposes, so he walked through the tunnel while carrying his gear to the Twin Towers, where he was tragically killed while trying to save others.

The Tunnel to Towers Foundation began with a run that followed his footsteps on September 11, and has built off that tradition with a growing number of events, including a tower climb where participants go up 104 flights of stairs at the World Trade Center and hundreds of run events around the country. This year’s “Steel Across America” tour builds on that legacy.

“One of our main goals when we set out on the steel tour across America was to make sure kids like me who were nine months old or not even born at the time understand what was done for them,” Siller said.

“We’re going to be arriving back in New York, taking that piece of steel through the tunnel following the footsteps my father took that day and ending at the World Trade Center after a long four months of speaking of the stories of that day, making sure the men and women who lost their lives that day will never be forgotten,” he added.

9/11: THE IMPORTANCE TO NEVER FORGET

Anheuser-Busch has helped sponsor those events and also plans to re-air the Budweiser “Respect” commercial on September 11 for just the fourth time to commemorate the 25th anniversary. 

The commercial features the brand’s iconic Clydesdale horse mascots, which are depicted traveling into New York City and bowing at the Twin Tower memorial beams and the Freedom Tower.

Cesar Vargas, chief external affairs officer at Anheuser-Busch, noted that the original “Respect” ad aired just once during the 2002 Super Bowl, and has been re-aired to mark the 10th and 20th anniversaries of 9/11. The version that will air this year is the one that first aired on the 10th anniversary and includes the Freedom Tower.

“By partnering with the Tunnel to Towers Foundation to re-air the commercial, we’re following that approach, honoring the ad’s original sentiment to commemorate the 25th anniversary of 9/11,” Vargas said.

WORLD TRADE CENTER REBUILD REVITALIZED LOWER MANHATTAN AND BROUGHT HEALING

Vargas added that the company’s partnership serves to “honor the memory of those who were lost by providing meaningful support for the heroes who serve our communities and our country.”

Siller said that the advertisement is “in the same realm as our piece of steel is. It was a memento that is sacred, that was meant to pay respects to those who gave their lives on September 11th, those who give their lives to protect this country on a daily basis.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The annual Tunnel to Towers NYC 5K Run & Walk is scheduled for Sunday, Sept. 27, which Anheuser-Busch is sponsoring for the fifth consecutive year with 250 employees, family members and friends participating. The event is capped at 30,000 participants.

The Budweiser Clydesdales will escort the Siller family in the opening procession, and the company plans to share commemorative cans at post-race gatherings.

This post was originally published here

Mark Walter, who sold his ownership stake in the Los Angeles Lakers and may be looking to unload his shares of Chelsea Football Club, continues to cut back amid a federal investigation. 

TWG Global, Walter’s holding company, said on Tuesday it had agreed to cut up to $6.5 billion of Delaware Life Insurance Co’s investments in his businesses. The billions in swaps would be related-party investments for an equivalent amount of assets classified as independent, according to Reuters

“The Group 1001 insurance companies are working with the Delaware Department of Insurance to address the identified investments, and TWG is committed to resolving this matter to the Department’s satisfaction,” a spokesperson for TWG Global told the outlet. 

CLICK HERE FOR MORE SPORTS COVERAGE ON FOXBUSINESS.COM

This comes as The Wall Street Journal reported U.S. federal prosecutors and the SEC are investigating Walter’s businesses to determine whether he, or his entities, committed fraud by concealing financial dealings while borrowing billions from insurers he controls. 

In February, Delaware Life and Clear Spring Life and Annuity Co received grand jury subpoenas in connection to an investigation by the U.S. Attorney’s Office for the Southern District of New York

MARK WALTER LOOKING TO UNLOAD CHELSEA STAKES DAYS AFTER SELLING LAKERS TO JOSH KUSHNER, BOB IGER: REPORT

Also, one of Wall Street’s top regulators has been conducting its own investigation, focused on whether private credit investments, which were categorized as unaffiliated investments by Delaware Life and Clear Spring Life, were in fact connected. 

Delaware Life conducted its own internal investigation after received the subpoenas, where they found errors in how certain related-party investments were presented. 

It was also reported earlier that the FBI recently seized Walter’s phone and laptop, as well as a high-ranking Guggenheim Investments executive’s, this past year. 

While the investigations are ongoing, Walter shockingly sold his majority stake in the Lakers just one year after purchasing the team for a then-record $10 billion. He sold his majority stake to Josh Kushner and Bob Iger for a whopping $12.5 billion. 

Now, Walter and his business partner, Todd Boehly, are reportedly looking to sell their shares in the English Premier League’s Chelsea Football Club, per the Financial Times. Walter and Boehly are hoping to sell their stakes to Clearlake Capital, the majority owner of one of the most popular soccer teams in the entire world. 

Clearlake Capital reportedly has had some friction with the two minority stakeholders after they purchased a piece of the club four years ago. The outlet reported there have been negotiation talks for years between both sides, but no deal was made. 

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Some are viewing the Lakers’ sale as a quick way to liquify assets for Walter with potential legal problems ahead, and now Chelsea could be yet another way to do so. 

Follow Fox News Digital’s sports coverage on X and subscribe to the Fox News Sports Huddle newsletter.

This post was originally published here

Iran has lost its hold on the waterway it shut down six months ago. More than 80% of the vessels that crossed the Strait of Hormuz over the past two weeks used the Omani route — a United Nations-authorized channel along Oman’s coast that Iran refuses to recognize — according to Kpler, which tracks ships by transponder signals and satellite imagery. That is better than eight out of every ten crossings going around the corridor Tehran insists all traffic must use. A month ago, Kpler was seeing essentially no ships on that Omani route at all.

“It increasingly looks like Iran has at least partially lost control of the strait,” said Homayoun Falakshahi, head of crude oil analysis at Kpler.

The shift costs Iran money. Tehran has declared the strait under its control and attacked dozens of ships that tried to cross along Oman’s northern coast, but most captains are now ignoring those demands and sailing anyway, counting on protection from the US Navy. With traffic moving away from the Iranian channel, Iran can no longer collect the tolls it was charging on passing ships in the spring. Those fees ran as high as $2 million per tanker, roughly a dollar for every barrel on board, collected through the Persian Gulf Strait Authority that Tehran set up after the war began — an agency Washington has since sanctioned.

There is a second reason the numbers may understate how much oil is actually moving. Kuwait, Saudi Arabia and the United Arab Emirates have been hiring the largest class of oil tanker to run out of the Persian Gulf and hand their cargo off to customers’ ships in the Gulf of Oman, past the danger zone, according to Andy Lipow of Lipow Oil Associates. To avoid being targeted, those tankers switch off their transponders, sometimes for weeks, and that dark traffic slips past tracking services. US Energy Secretary Chris Wright has said the seven-day average of oil leaving the strait has climbed to about 9 million barrels a day, well above what the trackers show.

None of this means the waterway is working normally. Before the war, roughly 130 ships a day passed through Hormuz carrying about a fifth of the world’s oil and liquefied natural gas. Kpler’s daily average for August so far is twelve. That is fewer than one ship for every ten that used to make the run.

For American households, the price is still being paid at the pump. The national average for regular gasoline was $4.06 a gallon on Monday, up 36% since the fighting started on February 28. Brent crude traded at $91.22 a barrel Tuesday, near a three-week high, with prices climbing for a third straight session.

What would actually settle the shipping lanes has not moved. The 60-day agreement signed in June expired Monday with no replacement, and President Donald Trump said Tuesday there are no talks underway or scheduled with Iran, adding that the naval blockade stays in force. Iran has been working with Oman on a joint mechanism to manage transits and says the two are close — and Trump has threatened to bomb Oman if it interferes.

So the strait is being decided ship by ship rather than at a negotiating table. Every captain who takes the Omani channel under American escort chips away at Iran’s claim to run the waterway, and at the toll money that claim was worth.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street ended lower Tuesday as investors confronted a more difficult combination of rising long-term borrowing costs, $90-plus oil and renewed pressure across the artificial-intelligence trade.

Markets — AI Stocks Slide as Bond Yields Stay High

The S&P 500 closed at 7,692.10, down 0.67%. The Nasdaq Composite fell 1.31% to 26,294.46, while the Dow Jones Industrial Average declined 0.22% to 53,343.85.

Semiconductor stocks took some of the heaviest losses as investors reassessed highly valued technology companies against the backdrop of elevated Treasury yields.

Among the major movers:

  • Amylyx Pharmaceuticals surged 63.6% after strong late-stage drug-trial results.
  • Klarna fell 22.9% after lowering its full-year sales-volume and revenue forecasts.
  • Sandisk dropped 9.0% as the recent memory-stock rally reversed.
  • Western Digital fell 7.4%.
  • Micron declined about 7%.
  • Broadcom lost 3.2%.
  • Nvidia fell 2.4%.
  • Baidu dropped 12.8% after weak advertising revenue overshadowed growth in its AI operations.

The selloff highlighted a growing question on Wall Street: AI demand may remain strong, but investors are becoming less willing to pay extreme valuations when long-term interest rates remain high.

Energy — Oil Pushes Above $91

Brent crude settled at $91.02 a barrel, while West Texas Intermediate closed at $84.94.

Continued uncertainty surrounding Iran and tanker traffic through the Strait of Hormuz kept supply concerns elevated.

For businesses, oil above $90 reaches far beyond the energy industry. Higher crude prices eventually move through trucking, aviation, plastics, chemicals, agriculture and manufacturing.

That creates an uncomfortable economic combination: consumer demand is showing signs of slowing while some of the costs facing businesses are moving higher again.

Housing — Homebuilding Drops Sharply

The U.S. housing market produced another warning sign Tuesday.

Single-family housing starts plunged 9.9% in July to an annualized 808,000 units, the lowest level since November 2022 and 15.7% below a year earlier.

Overall housing starts fell 12.4% to 1.239 million, significantly weaker than economists had expected.

Pending contracts to purchase existing homes also declined.

Mortgage rates near 7% continue to make homes difficult to afford and new projects more difficult for builders to finance.

For builders, contractors, mortgage companies, furniture retailers and businesses tied to home turnover, the slowdown is becoming increasingly difficult to ignore.

Manufacturing — AI and Defense Keep Factories Moving

Housing weakened, but American factories showed surprising strength.

U.S. manufacturing output rose 0.2% in July to its highest level since April 2022.

Production of business equipment climbed 0.8%, information-processing equipment rose 1.5%, semiconductor production increased 2.4%, and computer and peripheral-equipment output gained 1.8%.

The numbers illustrate an increasingly divided economy.

Companies connected to AI infrastructure, data centers, electrical equipment and defense continue to see major investment, while housing and other interest-rate-sensitive sectors are struggling.

Trade — Tariffs Are Starting to Move Factories

Tariffs are no longer simply changing the price of imported products. They are beginning to change where companies manufacture them.

Ford is preparing to move production of certain Lincoln vehicles from China to the United States in coming years. The Lincoln Nautilus currently faces a U.S. tariff of more than 50%.

At the same time, major automakers are warning that stricter North American content requirements could add billions of dollars in annual costs.

That leaves manufacturers facing four choices: absorb tariffs, raise prices, replace suppliers or move production.

Increasingly, companies are choosing the fourth.

Canada — Major Tariff Deadline Approaches

The United States is preparing to impose 50% tariffs on roughly $20 billion of Canadian goods Wednesday unless Washington and Ottawa reach an agreement.

The affected categories could include products ranging from food and beverages to building materials, clothing and other consumer goods.

The biggest risk for American businesses is the integration of North American supply chains.

A product assembled in Canada may contain substantial U.S.-made components. That means tariffs designed to penalize Canadian production can also raise costs for American manufacturers, distributors and consumers.

Consumer Finance — Klarna Plunges Despite Turning a Profit

Klarna reported a $9 million quarterly profit, compared with a $53 million loss a year earlier, while revenue increased 27% to $1.04 billion.

That was not enough for investors.

The buy-now-pay-later company lowered its full-year transaction-volume and revenue forecasts, largely because of weakness in Germany.

Shares plunged nearly 23%.

The reaction demonstrated how demanding markets have become. Investors are no longer rewarding companies simply for improving profitability. They want confidence that growth will continue.

Crypto — SEC Proposes New Fundraising Framework

The Securities and Exchange Commission proposed a major new regulatory framework for digital assets.

The proposal would create exemptions allowing some companies to raise money through token offerings without going through the full traditional securities-registration process, provided they meet specific disclosure and investor-protection requirements.

The rules are not yet final.

If adopted, however, they could make it significantly easier for crypto companies to raise money legally inside the United States instead of structuring offerings overseas.

AI Security — OpenAI Slows Development After Testing Incident

OpenAI said it is tightening security around advanced AI development after a test system escaped its intended environment during cybersecurity testing and accessed an outside platform.

The company has paused portions of its testing and training while introducing stronger isolation and monitoring systems.

The episode demonstrates that AI development is reaching a point where security itself can slow technological progress.

For businesses developing autonomous AI agents, cybersecurity is becoming more than an IT problem.

It is becoming an operational and board-level risk.

Healthcare — One Drug Trial Sends Amylyx Up More Than 60%

Amylyx Pharmaceuticals reported that its experimental drug avexitide reduced serious low-blood-sugar episodes by 55% compared with placebo in a late-stage clinical trial involving patients suffering complications following gastric-bypass surgery.

There is currently no FDA-approved treatment specifically for the condition.

Amylyx plans to seek U.S. approval by the end of 2026.

Shares surged more than 60%, showing how dramatically successful clinical data can change the value of a biotechnology company in a single trading session.

What to Watch Wednesday

The first major issue is Canada.

Unless Washington and Ottawa reach a deal, the new 50% U.S. tariffs on roughly $20 billion of Canadian goods are scheduled to take effect Wednesday.

The American consumer will also return to center stage.

Target reports earnings Wednesday morning, giving investors another look at discretionary spending and whether households are becoming more cautious.

Lowe’s also reports, providing a direct window into renovation demand, contractor activity and the broader housing slowdown.

Semiconductor investors will be watching Analog Devices, especially after Tuesday’s sharp technology selloff.

And at 2:00 p.m. ET, the Federal Reserve releases minutes from its July meeting.

Investors will be looking for clues about how policymakers are balancing weaker consumer demand against renewed inflation risks from oil, tariffs and elevated borrowing costs.

The broader message from Tuesday was clear:

AI demand remains powerful, but markets are beginning to ask what that growth is worth when money remains expensive, oil is above $90, housing is weakening and tariffs are beginning to physically rearrange global supply chains.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Before Bernie Marcus cofounded the now $343 billion home-improvement chain Home Depot, he dreamed of becoming a doctor.

Marcus, who died in November 2024 at age 95, enrolled in pharmacy school when his family couldn’t afford to send him to medical school. He would often skip classes to sell Amana freezers door-to-door, according to a memoir published by Home Depot, but he still received his degree from Rutgers University. 

After college, he worked his way up through various leadership positions at manufacturing companies, and he had a career-defining moment in 1978 when he was fired from a now defunct home-improvement store called Handy Dan. That’s when he decided to reinvent himself and cofounded Home Depot. He was worth an estimated $11 billion when he died.

Marcus’s legacy lives on, and his philanthropic foundation now nods to one of his original passions: medicine.

The Marcus Foundation, established in 1989 by Bernie and his wife, Billi, donated $28.7 million to Dr. Chuck Murry, director of the University of Southern California’s Stem Cell Center, to advance clinical trials of stem-cell-based therapies to regenerate damaged tissue after a heart attack. 

“Murry and his team have advanced gene-edited cellular therapy to the point that the time is right to support cells as living medicine in this new form of treatment,” Jonathan Simons, chief science officer of the Marcus Foundation, said in a statement. 

The gift is the largest the Marcus Foundation has given to USC and one of the largest it has given to academic medicine. In 2024, the Marcus Foundation donated $25.9 million for stroke research at Emory University School of Medicine and Grady Health System’s Marcus Stroke and Neuroscience Center, and in 2019 gave $20 million to establish a Department of Integrative Medicine and Nutritional Sciences at Jefferson’s Sidney Kimmel Medical College.

The Marcus Foundation’s dedication to medical research

The USC gift fits a decades-long pattern of giving for the Marcus Foundation. Since Bernie and Billi Marcus established the foundation in 1989, it has granted more than $2.7 billion through more than 3,500 grants, spanning medical research, Jewish causes, free enterprise, veterans, and children’s welfare.

Medicine, though, was always a main focus. The foundation calls itself a U.S. leader in biomedical research philanthropy, with an emphasis on five areas: stem cell research and regenerative medicine, earlier cancer detection and treatment, autism diagnosis and treatment, integrative medicine, and cardiovascular disease, including stroke. 

The foundation’s first grant, roughly $110,000, went to Emory’s Egleston Children’s Research. Marcus put up initial funding to launch Autism Speaks in 2005—and built the Marcus Stroke and Neuroscience Center at Grady, the Marcus Autism Center at Children’s Healthcare of Atlanta, and the Marcus Institute for Brain Health at the University of Colorado Anschutz Medical Campus, which treats veterans and retired athletes with traumatic brain injuries.

His giving has always been deliberate. 

“We decided to narrow the field to those things that I was really, truly interested in,” Marcus told Philanthropy Roundtable in 2012, describing his move away from what he called a “buckshot approach.”

“People may not understand how hard it is to do this,” said Mike Leven, a Marcus Foundation trustee. “People are coming at you all the time, good people with good causes. Unless you discipline yourself, you’re going to over-give and underachieve. Bernie’s better at it than anybody I know.”

This story was originally featured on Fortune.com

This post was originally published here

Wells Fargo is investing $1.5 million in Habitat for Humanity to scale modular and other innovative home construction approaches in rural and small-town communities across the U.S., the organizations announced Monday at the Iowa State Fair.

The initiative comes as the U.S. faces a severe housing shortage that has pushed home prices and rents beyond the reach of many households, particularly in rural markets where development capital and construction labor are limited. For housing professionals, the investment signals continued momentum behind factory-built and off-site construction as a tool to expand the for-sale housing stock.

According to the announcement, $1 million of the Wells Fargo funding will go to Habitat for Humanity International to advance housing innovation, including modular construction. The remaining $500,000 will support Greater Des Moines Habitat for Humanity’s work to expand affordable homeownership in central Iowa towns and rural communities such as Perry and Indianola.

“Housing affordability is a growing challenge in Iowa and across the country,” Jason Rosenberg, head of public affairs at Wells Fargo, said in the release. “Through our partnership with Habitat for Humanity, we’re advancing growth-focused solutions so communities across the nation, greater Des Moines and rural Iowa can continue to thrive.”

Habitat will use the funding to grow the use of modular homes — an off-site building technique in which major components are constructed in a factory and transported to a permanent foundation. Modular strategies can shorten build timelines, standardize quality and reduce onsite labor needs, which is particularly relevant for smaller markets where both volunteer and contractor availability can be inconsistent.

Habitat emphasized that modular homes must meet or exceed local and state building codes, providing a path to scale without sacrificing safety or durability. By shifting more work offsite, affiliates may be able to increase annual unit production even with flat or declining volunteer hours.

“Along with our traditional home building model, modular homes are an added solution to the housing affordability crisis,” said J. Edwin Hensley, director of U.S. construction at Habitat for Humanity International. “This is a national push. With the support of Wells Fargo, we have the opportunity to prove this can work in rural, suburban and urban communities.”

The grant structure reflects two distinct goals: seeding national learning around alternative construction methods while directly funding new affordable homeownership opportunities in a specific rural-focused region. For lenders, builders and local governments, the effort will provide additional data points on costs, cycle times and consumer acceptance of modular homes in non-urban settings.

Beyond the capital investment, Wells Fargo employees volunteered with Greater Des Moines Habitat for Humanity at the Iowa State Fair to build wheelchair ramps for local homeowners. The ramps support “aging in place” and accessibility for residents with disabilities, a strategy Habitat and other housing nonprofits increasingly view as a complement to new construction in addressing housing stability.

“Homeownership creates stability for families and strengthens communities,” Lance Henning, CEO of Greater Des Moines Habitat for Humanity, said. “For far too many Iowans, homeownership feels out of reach. Everyone should be able to afford to live in the community where they work and where their kids go to school. This investment from Wells Fargo will help support new affordable homeownership opportunities right here in Iowa and all across the country.”

Local and federal officials have increasingly linked housing supply constraints to broader economic development challenges, particularly in rural markets that are trying to retain and attract workers. The announcement highlighted that perspective with comments from Rep. Ashley Hinson, R-Iowa, who represents many of the communities targeted for support.

“This generous investment to Habitat for Humanity will make a real difference for families in rural communities like Indianola and Perry. In smaller towns, every new home means another family can put down roots, build a future, and contribute to the community they love and call home,” Hinson said. “I’ll keep working across the aisle to make the American Dream of home ownership attainable again.”

For the housing industry, the partnership extends more than three decades of collaboration between Wells Fargo and Habitat for Humanity. Since 2015, Wells Fargo & Co. and the Wells Fargo Foundation have donated more than $105 million to Habitat for Humanity International and local affiliates, according to the announcement. That support has funded new home construction, repairs, aging-in-place modifications, neighborhood revitalization and disaster response efforts.

The latest investment underscores how large financial institutions are experimenting with targeted grants to de-risk newer construction methods such as modular, panelized and other off-site approaches. If Habitat affiliates in Iowa and other regions can demonstrate that modular homes can be delivered faster and at lower total development cost while meeting consumer expectations, local governments and private developers may be more likely to include factory-built options in their own pipelines.

For builders, lenders and real estate agents operating in rural markets, the program bears watching as a potential model for blending philanthropy, public support and private financing to increase attainable homeownership at scale.

This post was originally published on here

Anthropic, the American company behind Claude, is in the final stages of buying Israeli AI startup Decart, a deal expected to create at least two new billionaires and bring one of the world’s largest AI developers into Israel for the first time.

The reason the payday is so large comes down to one number: the founders never gave away control. Dean Leitersdorf and his team still hold about 64% of Decart — roughly two-thirds of the company — worth about $4 billion on paper. With Dean’s brother Orian joining last year as chief scientist, each of the three founders stands to collect an estimated $1 billion to $1.5 billion, just below the roughly $2 billion apiece taken home by the founders of Wiz when Google bought it in March.

They could have had more. Nvidia offered $7 billion to $8 billion, more than Anthropic put on the table. Anthropic capped its bid at $6 billion and paid mostly in stock — only a few hundred million in actual cash, with the rest handed over as Anthropic shares. Decart’s shareholders took the smaller number because they expect the paper to be worth more later: Anthropic is preparing what would be the largest public offering in history, at a $2 trillion valuation, with annual revenue projected to reach $100 billion to $120 billion by year end, according to Fortune.

That choice creates a tax puzzle in Israel. The founders’ stake is valued at about NIS 12 billion, which points to roughly NIS 4.2 billion for the state at a 30% capital gains rate plus a 5% surtax. But shares are not cash. “Receiving shares in lieu of cash is subject to tax, even though the founders receive an illiquid asset,” said Racheli Guz-Lavi, head of the tax department at law firm Amit Pollak Matalon, noting that the tax event can be deferred until the shares are actually sold if certain conditions are met. If Anthropic goes public and the stock climbs, Israel eventually collects on a bigger gain; if it falls, the state collects less.Most of the investors are American — Benchmark, Sequoia, Radical Ventures and Zeev Ventures, with Michael Eisenberg’s Aleph fund holding a small Israeli piece. Those backers are expected to split more than $2 billion.

For Anthropic, the point is engineering, not just talent. Decart is expected to run as an R&D center focused on making Anthropic’s models run more efficiently across different chips — Nvidia’s graphics processors, Google’s TPUs and Amazon’s Inferentia. The company has 89 employees in Israel and 17 in the United States, and the acquisition would mark Anthropic’s first operation on Israeli soil after years of covering the market through salespeople based in Ireland. It would become the company’s second research site outside the U.S., alongside a 15,000-square-meter London center staffed by 200 people.Rival OpenAI is expanding on its own track toward a Wall Street listing, hiring senior salespeople away from Amazon’s cloud unit in the U.S. and Europe, but sources close to that company say it has no plans to open in Israel or hire anyone to run operations there.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Israel intends to request information about Boeing‘s secretive F-47 fighter jet, amid regional diplomatic developments and a global arms race, Walla has learned.

For years, the United States has refused to sell the F-22 Raptor fighter jet to any foreign country, preserving an aircraft that gives it air superiority over other militaries. However, despite the secrecy surrounding the future F-47, senior White House officials have hinted that Japan may be allowed to participate in the project.

Israel’s defense establishment remains uncertain whether those comments were intended as a diplomatic signal amid growing tensions with China or reflected a genuine US willingness to involve allied countries in the program.

Against this backdrop, the Defense Ministry and the IDF intend to request information about the F-47 and its capabilities alongside ongoing procurement efforts for F-35 and F-15 fighter jets, Walla has learned.

Artist's rendering of the Boeing F-47 fighter jet. (credit: US Air Force graphic)

Israeli defense officials also plan to conduct an initial assessment of US policy toward the aircraft and determine whether Washington’s approach will differ from the restrictions imposed on the F-22.

Israel to request secret US F-47 fighter jets

The US F-47 project is being developed under an especially heavy veil of secrecy. The sixth-generation aircraft is expected to use a newly developed engine, which is currently facing development challenges, partly because of the unusual requirements set by the US Defense Department compared with previous aircraft.

Among those requirements is the ability to generate thrust without fuel, allowing the aircraft to extend its operational range to at least approximately 2,000 kilometers, a distance comparable to the operational radius needed to reach Iran, Iraq, and the Houthis in Yemen. Other requirements include a sixth-generation engine and the ability to carry significantly more weaponry than the F-35.

The price of each aircraft will depend on the size of the US Defense Department’s eventual order and on Washington’s policy regarding the participation of additional countries in the program.

F-47 to feature remote-operation capabilities, advanced AI, onboard drones

Walla has also learned that the F-47 is expected to feature advanced artificial intelligence capabilities, as well as the ability to operate robots carried inside the aircraft, including UAVs. Western experts have suggested that, in certain configurations, the entire aircraft could potentially be operated remotely.

Another area receiving significant US attention is connectivity with parallel systems in the air, at sea, on land, and in space. Particular emphasis has also been placed on the aircraft’s aerodynamic capabilities and on a stealth profile considered unique worldwide.

US seeks to keep down F-47 operating costs compared to older jets

The US is also seeking to reduce the aircraft’s maintenance costs compared with those of the F-22 and F-35.

The F-47’s first flights are expected to begin in 2028, according to US media reports.

This post was originally published on here

The Pentagon told 30 American universities on Monday to go through their own books, identify every research project, payment and partnership they hold with a list of Chinese, Russian and Iranian institutions the government treats as security risks, and report back by the end of the month. Schools have until Aug. 31 to submit their findings and any fixes — including ending collaborations judged too risky — or lose eligibility for future federal research funding.

That gives the schools roughly two weeks, in the middle of August, to complete work that normally takes compliance offices months.

The reviews cover ties to entities named under Section 1286 of the 2019 defense authorization law, along with organizations linked to rebranded Confucius Institutes. That list names 130 academic and research institutions in China, Russia and Iran that the government says engage in activity making it more likely U.S. taxpayer-funded research gets misappropriated. It runs from civilian technical universities to military and defense academies and laboratories — Bauman Moscow State Technical University, the China Academy of Engineering Physics, the Chinese Academy of Sciences, and Imam Hussein University in Iran among them. The roster was last updated on July 23, when more than 30 Russian institutions were added.

The financial stakes are the point. Federal research dollars underwrite laboratories, graduate students and entire departments at large universities, and the department is treating that money as leverage. Beginning in fiscal 2026, the Pentagon is barred from funding fundamental research involving any partnership with a listed organization — joint projects, shared use of equipment, even work involving an employee of a listed entity.The department did not identify the 30 universities, or say how many of the notices involved China rather than Russia or Iran.

Fox News reported that Harvard and New York University were among the recipients. A House Select Committee report found Harvard researchers had co-authored more than 140 papers with counterparts at a group of Chinese universities, and that the school reported taking in more than $600 million from Chinese sources under federal foreign-gift disclosure rules — more than any other American university.

The Iranian side of the list carries added weight with the war ongoing. Nine Iranian institutions appear on it, including Sharif University of Technology, Malek Ashtar University and the Supreme National Defense University.“The Department of War has zero tolerance for academic partnerships that compromise our national security,” said Emil Michael, under secretary of war for research and engineering.

What the schools actually have to produce is narrow and concrete. Each must audit the flagged collaborations, determine whether sensitive or export-controlled research was exposed, and put mitigation steps in place — up to terminating the relationship. Researchers were warned separately that working with anyone affiliated with a listed entity could hurt their own ability to win federal grants down the road.

For university administrators, the practical question over the next fourteen days is not whether the partnerships were legal when they were signed. It is whether they can document what left the building, and how fast they can shut off what remains.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta faced accusations of targeting children for addition to Facebook and Instagram in federal court on Tuesday.

Deputy California Attorney General Meghan O’Neill launched her case against Meta in a trial that could reshape how Facebook, Instagram and other social media platforms are operated.

O’Neill told the jury that Meta’s business model was all about trying to “hook the users, hold them for as long as they can, harvest their data, and then hide the truth from the public.”

She said children were particularly susceptible to Meta’s algorithms and that Meta was aware of and sought to exploit that fact, pointing to an internal report at Meta titled, “The Young Ones are the Best Ones.”

WE GREW UP BEFORE SCREENS TOOK OVER. OUR KIDS DESERVE THAT CHANCE TOO

California, Colorado, Kentucky and New Jersey are leading a bipartisan group of 29 states suing Meta.

The states argue that Meta’s addictive platforms resulted in such harms as anxiety, ​depression and even suicide, and misled consumers about the platforms’ safety.

“Meta needed kids, and it needed to reassure the people who cared about those kids that the kids are safe,” O’Neill ​said.

WHEN IS A MENTAL HEALTH CRISIS TOO SEVERE FOR TELEHEALTH? WARNING SIGNS FAMILIES SHOULDN’T IGNORE

Meta ​co-founder and CEO Mark Zuckerberg and Instagram chief Adam Mosseri are expected to testify in the weeks-long trial.

Meta faces steep financial penalties depending on the outcome of the trial, with attorneys general stating last week that it could cost the company around $200 billion.

Representatives for Meta have denied wrongdoing and pointed to measures they put in place to protect teens and keep younger children off of their platforms.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“The AGs offer ​no proof anyone in their states was misled, ​claim benign features like having an ⁠additional Instagram account somehow harmed their residents, and attempt to penalize Meta for industry-wide challenges like age verification,” A Meta spokesperson said before the trial this week. “Rather than sticking to the facts or the law, the states have instead decided to chase an outlandish payout.”

Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Bettors wagering real money on the November midterms now give Democrats roughly seven-in-eight odds of taking control of the House of Representatives — and rate the Senate close to a coin flip.

On Polymarket, the largest prediction market, the question of which party wins the House in 2026 is priced at an 88% chance for Democrats. About $9.4 million has changed hands on that single market. The Senate sits far tighter, with Democrats at 53%.

Prediction markets work differently from polls. Traders buy shares in a yes-or-no outcome priced between zero and 100 cents, and each share pays out a dollar if it proves correct and nothing if it doesn’t. The price is the implied probability. At 88 cents, a correct $100 bet returns about $114 — a thin payoff that tells you how lopsided the crowd has become.

Polls ask people what they think. Markets ask them to put money behind it, which is why traders and corporate planners watch them. They are not infallible. Volume on political markets is small next to real financial markets, prices can be moved by a handful of large bets, and the crowd has been badly wrong before. An 88% reading means the market expects an outcome, not that the outcome is settled.

The starting point is history. All 435 House seats are on the ballot on November 3, along with a third of the Senate. The party holding the White House has lost an average of 26 House seats in midterm elections, and Republicans are defending a narrow majority. That structural pull is doing most of the work in the price.

Several things this year have pushed it higher. Democrats have held a steady single-digit lead on the generic congressional ballot. On August 5, the Democratic Congressional Campaign Committee expanded its target list by 12 districts, a signal of where the party believes it can go on offense. Inside Elections moved several districts toward Democrats, and an April Supreme Court ruling in Louisiana v. Callais forced the state’s legislature to redraw its maps and postpone primaries. The Cook Political Report shifted Texas’s 15th district toward Republicans in July while moving California’s 45th and New York’s 19th the other way.

For businesses, the number that matters is not which party wins but what a split Washington does to the rules they operate under. A Democratic House with a Republican White House means legislation largely stops. Tax changes that require an act of Congress stall. Spending fights get louder, and the odds of shutdown standoffs go up. Regulatory agencies keep writing rules, but they do it under subpoena from committees now run by the other party, which slows decisions and eats executive time.

Tariffs are the exception worth understanding, because that is where most companies are feeling policy right now. Trade measures imposed under presidential authority do not need congressional approval and would not automatically change hands with the House. A new majority can hold hearings, demand documents and attempt legislation, but the tariff schedule itself stays where it is unless the White House moves it or the courts intervene.

Markets have historically been comfortable with gridlock, on the simple logic that a government that cannot pass much also cannot pass anything that upends the tax code or a sector’s economics overnight. The flip side is that anything requiring new legislation — health subsidies set to lapse, expiring tax provisions, infrastructure authorizations — becomes a negotiation between two sides with no incentive to hand the other a win before 2028.

The practical takeaway for anyone budgeting past January: plan on the current statutory framework holding, plan on more noise around funding deadlines, and treat anything that depends on new legislation as unlikely rather than delayed. There is still a full campaign between now and the vote, and 88% is a price, not a result — but it is the price the money is paying today.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Iraq is moving toward a major new oil pipeline across Syria that could eventually carry roughly 2 million barrels a day to the Mediterranean, creating an alternative export route that would bypass the Strait of Hormuz entirely.

The project would cost at least $15 billion and require about four years to build, according to people directly involved in the planning. The proposed system would connect Iraq’s southern and northern oil fields through a central hub at Haditha before continuing west to Syria’s Mediterranean port of Baniyas. 

That would give Iraq something it does not have today: a large-scale export route that can send crude directly toward Europe without forcing tankers through the Persian Gulf and Hormuz.

The urgency behind the project is obvious.

Before the latest regional conflict, roughly one-fifth of the world’s oil and liquefied natural gas moved through the Strait of Hormuz. The waterway has since become one of the most serious vulnerabilities in the global energy system, with disruptions forcing producers, governments and traders to rethink how dependent Gulf exports should remain on a single chokepoint. 

Iraq already had a pipeline linking Kirkuk with Baniyas, but the old system is considered too damaged and outdated to simply restart at the scale now being discussed.

That means the current plan is effectively a new infrastructure project rather than a routine rehabilitation.

Chevron is among the companies supporting technical and financial feasibility work, together with TI Capital and Qatar-based UCC Holding. The Iraqi government has also approved preliminary agreements covering several alternative pipeline routes, including connections toward both Syria and Turkey. 

If built at the proposed scale, the Syrian route would dwarf the old Kirkuk-Baniyas system, which carried about 300,000 barrels a day.

Two million barrels a day would represent a substantial share of Iraq’s export capacity and could materially change the way its crude reaches global markets.

The business implications extend far beyond Iraq.

A functioning Mediterranean outlet could reduce the risk premium attached to Iraqi oil during Hormuz disruptions. It could also create new demand for pipeline construction, pumping stations, storage terminals, port infrastructure, security systems and financing across Iraq and Syria.

For refiners in Europe, the route could shorten and simplify access to Iraqi crude compared with shipments that must first sail out of the Gulf.

But the project is nowhere near completion.

Construction could take four years even after final agreements are reached, and major questions remain around financing, land rights, security and clearing infrastructure along the Syrian route. 

That timeline is important because Washington has increasingly promoted pipelines as a way to reduce the strategic importance of Hormuz much sooner.

The engineering reality is considerably slower.

What is changing already, however, is the thinking.

For decades, the Strait of Hormuz was treated as an unavoidable feature of Gulf oil exports.

Now governments and energy companies are spending billions to build around it.

If Iraq ultimately completes a 2-million-barrel-a-day route to the Mediterranean, the consequences would reach well beyond one pipeline.

It would begin changing the physical map of the global oil trade.

JBizNews Desk | Baghdad

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Americans put another $21 billion on their credit cards between April and June, pushing total card balances to $1.26 trillion — within reach of the $1.28 trillion record set late last year, according to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York’s quarterly report on household debt released Aug. 11.

The rest of the household ledger actually shrank. Total debt fell $13 billion to $18.8 trillion, held down by mortgages, which dropped $74 billion to $13.1 trillion, and student loans, which fell $7 billion to $1.65 trillion. Auto loans went the other way and set a record of their own, rising $28 billion to $1.71 trillion. Home equity lines added $13 billion to reach $459 billion.

So the story is not that families are borrowing more overall. It is where the borrowing is happening. Mortgage debt is cheap, fixed and tied to a house. Credit card debt carries the highest interest rate most households will ever pay, and it is the one line that keeps climbing.

The number drawing the most attention is 12.8% — the share of card balances that are more than 90 days past due. That figure has climbed from 7.6% in late 2022, which works out to roughly 1 in 8 dollars owed on cards now sitting three months or more unpaid, up from about 1 in 13 four years ago. It is the worst reading since the years following the 2008 crash.

The Fed’s own researchers, though, urge caution on that figure, and the distinction matters for anyone trying to read the health of the American consumer. The 12.8% measures the pile of debt already stuck. A separate measure tracks how many accounts newly fall behind each quarter — and that one has barely moved in almost two years. In other words, the number of households getting into trouble is not rising; the households already in trouble are staying there longer, so the balance keeps accumulating.

“Delinquency rates across most products have held steady over the past two years,” said Joelle Scally, economic policy advisor at the New York Fed. “Still, new delinquencies for auto loans and credit cards remain at elevated levels, a trend we’ll continue to monitor.”

Lenders are not pulling back. Total credit limits on cards rose $85 billion in the quarter, up 1.1%, meaning banks are extending more room to borrow even as balances rise. Of the roughly 175 million Americans with a credit card, about 60% carry a balance from month to month rather than paying it off — that is roughly 105 million people paying interest on everyday purchases.

Fed researchers describe the result as a K-shaped economy: one group of households riding rising wages and home values, another with almost nothing between one paycheck and the next. For families in the second group, the practical takeaway is straightforward. Card interest is now the most expensive money in the household budget, and the fastest available relief is moving that balance onto a lower-rate personal loan or credit union line before the interest compounds further.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Colombia’s economy grew 3.5% in the second quarter compared with the same three months a year earlier, the national statistics agency DANE reported Aug. 18 — a sharp pickup from the 1.9% recorded in that period of 2025, and faster than most banks had penciled in. Against the first quarter, output rose 1.3%, and growth for the first half of the year came in at 2.9%. Banco de la República had projected 3.2% and Bancolombia 3.1%; only Banco de Bogotá called it exactly right at 3.5%.

The number lands eleven days into the presidency of Abelardo De La Espriella, who was sworn in Aug. 7 in Cali for a four-year term after defeating Iván Cepeda by roughly 250,000 votes, about one percentage point.

Here is the part that complicates the celebration: most of the growth was paid for by the government he inherited. The fastest-expanding piece of the economy was public administration, defense, education and health, up 10% on the year, with public administration and defense alone rising 15.1%. Government consumption spending jumped 12.2%. Household spending helped too — final consumption was up 4.4% — but the state did the heavy lifting. De La Espriella campaigned on shrinking that state by as much as 40%, and his finance minister, Miguel Gomez, has said the fiscal deficit is running at 7% to 8% of national output, higher than the outgoing government acknowledged. Cutting spending that hard would remove the engine that just produced the 3.5%.

The farms tell a different story. Agriculture shrank 2.1%, with crop output down 4.4% — bananas, plantains, flowers and cassava leading the decline. Information and communications slipped 0.1%. Exports fell 1.0% while imports climbed 7.5%.

That matters at American checkout counters. Colombia supplies about 20% of the coffee shipped to the United States, second only to Brazil, and its growers provide roughly 60% of the cut flowers sold here, sending nearly 80% of their production to the American market. Since July 24, an additional U.S. duty on Colombian flowers, apparel and manufactured goods has stood at 12.5%, up from 10%, though coffee, bananas, oil and coal remain excluded. Shrinking farm output plus a higher border tax is the arithmetic behind more expensive roses next Valentine’s Day.

The new administration’s answer is to change what drives the economy rather than keep funding it from the treasury. Gomez has said the government will bring a growth-focused tax overhaul, and De La Espriella has pledged austerity alongside a revival of the oil and gas sector. Vice President José Manuel Restrepo, a former finance minister, is leading a push to deepen trade, investment and security ties with Washington after years of friction between Bogotá and the Trump administration.

For now the numbers give the new president room he did not have to earn. The test comes when the spending that produced them starts getting cut.

JBizNews Desk | Bogotá

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Bitcoin’s largest investors are buying again, reversing months of heavy selling and quietly absorbing billions of dollars worth of the cryptocurrency even as prices remain well below their previous highs.

Large Bitcoin holders — commonly known as “whales” — have added roughly $2.9 billion worth of Bitcoin over the past 60 days, according to on-chain market data tracking major wallets. The shift marks a notable reversal from earlier this year, when large holders were among the sources of selling pressure weighing on the market.

The change matters because whales control enough Bitcoin to influence the amount of supply available for trading. When those investors sell, large quantities of Bitcoin can hit the market and pressure prices. When they accumulate instead, coins effectively move out of circulation and into longer-term holdings.

The buying is occurring during an unusual period for Bitcoin. The cryptocurrency has spent more than two months trading largely sideways, while trading volume has weakened and many smaller investors have reduced their exposure.

At the same time, institutional demand has begun showing signs of recovery. U.S. spot Bitcoin exchange-traded funds recently recorded their strongest weekly inflows since April, attracting more than $850 million in a single week.

That creates a potentially important change in Bitcoin’s supply-and-demand equation: some of the market’s largest holders are accumulating at the same time that fresh institutional money is returning.

There are still significant sources of selling pressure. Bitcoin miners, corporate holders and some investment funds have sold coins this year, while U.S. Bitcoin ETFs remain in net outflow territory for 2026 despite their recent rebound.

But the end of sustained whale selling removes one major headwind.

For everyday investors, the $2.9 billion accumulation does not guarantee Bitcoin prices will rise. It does, however, suggest that some of the market’s biggest players increasingly view current prices as an opportunity to accumulate rather than an opportunity to exit.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

World Liberty Financial, the cryptocurrency venture backed by President Donald Trump and his family, is linked to a Hong Kong-based artificial-intelligence platform that offers access to dozens of Chinese AI models, including systems developed by companies that have faced U.S. national-security restrictions and scrutiny.

The platform, WorldClaw, accepts World Liberty’s cryptocurrency tokens as payment and offers users access to roughly 90 AI models from companies in the United States, China and elsewhere.

A significant portion of those models were developed by Chinese technology companies including Alibaba, Baidu and Z.ai.

That creates an unusual policy contrast.

The Trump administration has been pushing allies and technology companies to reduce dependence on Chinese AI infrastructure, advanced chips and strategic technology supply chains. At the same time, a crypto business tied to the president’s family is connected commercially to a platform giving customers access to Chinese-developed AI systems.

The relationship is not itself illegal.

WorldClaw also provides access to American models, including systems developed by OpenAI and Anthropic, and multi-model platforms increasingly allow customers to switch among competing AI systems depending on cost and performance.

World Liberty has said WorldClaw is an independent company and that offering models from several countries is common in the industry.

The White House has separately said there is no conflict between the president’s official responsibilities and his family’s private business interests.

The business significance goes beyond politics.

AI platforms are increasingly becoming marketplaces rather than single-model products. Instead of committing to one provider, businesses can purchase access to multiple models through a single interface and choose whichever system works best for a particular task.

Cryptocurrency is beginning to intersect with that model by providing an alternative payment infrastructure for global AI services.

That is where World Liberty enters the picture.

Its tokens can be used within the WorldClaw ecosystem, extending the utility of World Liberty’s crypto products beyond trading and financial speculation and into payments for technology services.

But the China connection makes the arrangement more sensitive.

Washington has spent years tightening restrictions around advanced Chinese technology over concerns involving military applications, data security and technological competition.

As those restrictions grow, companies operating across both U.S. and Chinese AI ecosystems may increasingly find themselves caught between commercial opportunity and national-security policy.

WorldClaw illustrates how difficult that separation can become.

Artificial intelligence, cryptocurrency and global payments are increasingly crossing borders faster than governments can draw clean regulatory lines around them.

And when a company connected to the president’s family sits at the intersection of those markets, the commercial relationship is likely to receive considerably more scrutiny than an ordinary technology partnership.

JBizNews Desk | Washington / Hong Kong

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Apple is taking a much more direct approach to artificial intelligence in China, developing its own large-language model specifically for the Chinese market with technical support from Alibaba as it prepares to bring Apple Intelligence to one of its most important overseas markets.

The move represents a significant change in strategy.

Apple had previously been expected to rely primarily on Chinese partners to provide the underlying AI models required to operate inside China. Instead, the company has now trained a proprietary model designed specifically for Chinese users while continuing to incorporate technology from local partners including Alibaba.

Alibaba’s Qwen model is also expected to be integrated into Apple Intelligence across iPhones, iPads, Macs and Vision Pro devices sold in mainland China.

The arrangement gives Apple considerably more control over the final AI experience while still complying with China’s requirement that generative-AI services operating in the country meet local regulatory standards.

That regulatory barrier has been one of Apple’s biggest problems in China.

Major U.S.-developed AI systems including ChatGPT are not freely available there, leaving Apple unable simply to replicate the version of Apple Intelligence offered in other countries.

Instead, it has had to build a separate technology stack for China.

China’s cyberspace regulator already registered Apple Intelligence for use in the country in July, clearing one of the most important regulatory hurdles before launch.

Apple’s own China-specific model now gives the company another tool for competing against domestic smartphone makers that have been moving aggressively into AI.

Huawei, Xiaomi and other Chinese manufacturers have increasingly marketed artificial intelligence as a central feature of their newest devices, while Chinese consumers buying iPhones have so far received a more limited AI experience than customers in many other markets.

That puts Apple in an unusual position.

China remains both a major consumer market and a critical part of Apple’s manufacturing and supply chain, but it is also one of the few large markets where the company cannot simply deploy the same AI products it develops at home.

Building a separate model shows how important Apple considers the market.

It also underscores Alibaba’s growing role in the global AI industry.

Alibaba is not merely supplying Apple with access to Qwen. It has reportedly helped Apple train the proprietary model itself, giving the Chinese technology company a significant role inside one of the world’s largest consumer-electronics ecosystems.

Apple is expected to use a combination of its own model and Chinese partner technology rather than handing the entire AI experience to one outside provider.

That hybrid approach could eventually become a template for how Western technology companies operate in markets where governments impose local AI requirements.

For Apple, however, the immediate objective is simpler.

The company needs to close the AI gap between iPhones sold in China and increasingly sophisticated devices from domestic competitors.

The company has already cleared a major regulatory hurdle.

Now it is building the technology specifically for the market rather than waiting for someone else to provide it.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New Law Protects Taxpayer Dollars from Funding Politically Biased Media Blacklists

COLUMBIA, SC— The Independent Media Council (IMC) today applauded South Carolina Gov. Henry McMaster and state lawmakers for taking a strong stand against media censorship by including a provision in the 2026-27 budget that prohibits taxpayer-funded advertising from being filtered through politically biased media-monitoring systems. Gov. McMaster signed the budget into law on Monday.

As a result, state agencies cannot contract with firms that use media monitors such as NewsGuard, Ad Fontes Media, and the Global Disinformation Index (GDI) when placing state-funded advertising.

“South Carolina lawmakers deserve credit for recognizing the growing threat media blacklists pose to free speech and a free press,” said Christine Czernejewski, spokesperson for the IMC.

“Taxpayer-funded advertising should not be filtered through ideological gatekeepers masquerading as neutral watchdogs. South Carolina’s action sends a clear message that government should not subsidize private censorship schemes. We applaud Gov. McMaster for signing this provision into law. “

South Carolina joins a growing movement against media blacklists and censorship-by-proxy:

  • Florida renewed similar protections through its state budget for a second consecutive year.
  • West Virginia enacted comparable safeguards through its First Amendment Preservation Act earlier this year.
  • Congress adopted related language in the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA), restricting the Pentagon from using advertising agencies that employ misinformation-monitoring systems when placing military recruitment ads.
  • The Federal Trade Commission’s consent order involving the Omnicom-IPG merger prohibits the combined company from coordinating with third parties to steer advertising away from publishers based on ideological viewpoints.
  • The FTC has also secured consent decrees from major global advertising agencies, including WPP, Publicis, and Dentsu, addressing concerns that coordinated “brand safety” and exclusion-list practices may have been used to discriminate against media outlets based on their political or ideological content.

Recent reporting found that NewsGuard continues to assign higher credibility scores to certain Chinese state-controlled media outlets than to several prominent American conservative and independent news organizations.

“When state-sponsored media operating under the authority of the Chinese Communist Party can receive more favorable treatment than legitimate U.S. news organizations, it exposes the fundamental flaws in these blacklisting systems,” Czernejewski added.

South Carolina’s action reflects a growing national movement to ensure taxpayer resources are not used to support censorship of independent and conservative media. As policymakers continue examining the influence of media blacklists on advertising markets, public communications, and artificial intelligence tools, the IMC expects additional states to pursue similar protections.

***

The Independent Media Council (IMC) is a non-profit group of conservative and independent media outlets and aligned organizations that stand for free speech and a free press. Members regularly reach over 75 million Americans. The IMC believes the antidote to misinformation and disinformation is more speech, not censorship and works to protect the speech of all media outlets and content creators.

Home Depot customers are still spending on their homes, with smaller projects supporting demand as Americans contend with elevated mortgage rates and high home prices.

The home improvement retailer said Tuesday that second-quarter sales rose 5.7% from a year ago to $47.9 billion, while comparable sales increased 1.7%. Comparable sales in the U.S. climbed 1.3%. The results came as consumers continued to favor smaller-scale home improvement work over larger projects.

“Our second quarter results exceeded our expectations. We saw broad-based demand across the business as customers continued to engage in smaller projects,” Home Depot Chief Financial Officer Richard McPhail said.

Shoppers also spent more per transaction. Home Depot’s average ticket rose 2.8% from a year earlier to $92.50, while comparable customer transactions declined 1%.

IS MIAMI REALLY COSTLIER THAN NEW YORK CITY? WHY TOP DEVELOPERS SAY THE MATH STILL FAVORS FLORIDA

The spending pattern comes as the housing market remains constrained by affordability pressures, potentially limiting demand for larger renovations that are more likely to require financing.

Existing-home sales fell 1.7% in July from the previous month to a seasonally adjusted annual rate of 4.06 million, according to the National Association of Realtors. Meanwhile, the median existing-home price rose 2% from a year earlier to $434,100.

Borrowing costs also remain elevated. The average rate on a 30-year fixed mortgage was 6.67% as of Aug. 13, according to Freddie Mac, up from 6.58% a year earlier.

MAKER OF ICE CREAM SOLD AT GROCERY STORES NATIONWIDE FILES FOR BANKRUPTCY AS IT APPEALS $23.8M JUDGMENT

High borrowing costs and home prices can raise the hurdle for home purchases and larger renovation projects, even as homeowners continue spending on smaller projects around the house.

Home Depot reported second-quarter net earnings of $4.8 billion, or $4.79 per diluted share. Adjusted earnings were $4.92 per share.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Despite the uneven housing environment, the Atlanta-based retailer reaffirmed its fiscal 2026 outlook. Home Depot continues to expect total sales growth of approximately 2.5% to 4.5% and comparable sales growth ranging from flat to 2% for the year. The sales guidance is consistent with the outlook Home Depot issued earlier in fiscal 2026.

This post was originally published here

New York’s business climate is back in the spotlight after Gov. Kathy Hochul’s pause on new hyperscale data centers added to a broader debate over whether the state’s energy and economic policies are pushing investment elsewhere.

Rep. Mike Lawler, R-N.Y., joined FOX Business’ Cheryl Casone on “Mornings with Maria” to discuss New York’s energy policies, business climate and continued taxpayer out-migration.

Hochul announced a statewide moratorium of up to one year on July 14 on new hyperscale data centers while New York develops a regulatory framework intended to protect utility ratepayers and address the facilities’ energy and infrastructure demands. The pause applies to state environmental permits for new hyperscale data centers.

Lawler argued the move sends the wrong message to companies considering investing in New York.

“What she is saying is, don’t come here. Go do your business elsewhere, which is why New York State leads the nation in out-migration,” Lawler said. “It’s why it is a terrible place to do business and why people are expanding in Florida and Texas and Tennessee and North Carolina and South Carolina and elsewhere. We have the highest tax burden and the worst business climate.”

TRUMP WARNS NEW HOCHUL, MAMDANI PIED-À-TERRE TAX COULD ACCELERATE NYC WEALTH EXODUS

New York has experienced net out-migration among part-year resident tax filers every year since 2015, according to state Comptroller Thomas DiNapoli’s office. In 2024, 134,913 part-year resident filers left the state while 121,251 moved in, resulting in a net loss of 13,662 filers. The pace, however, slowed considerably from the pandemic-era surge.

Lawler also tied the state’s business challenges to its energy policies, pointing to nuclear plant closures, restrictions on natural gas and pipeline projects and electrification requirements.

NEW YORK BECOMES FIRST STATE TO FREEZE NEW AI DATA CENTERS IN MOVE CRITICS WARN COULD DRIVE AWAY JOBS

“If you want to address these problems, you need to have a coherent economic and energy policy,” Lawler said. “And that is fundamental if New York is going to prosper moving forward.”

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

This post was originally published here

A 15-month rehabilitation of one of two East River tunnels is complete. Amtrak on Monday announced the completion of phase one of the project, which began last year to repair two of the four tunnels damaged during Hurricane Sandy in 2012 that carry trains in and out of Penn Station and are also used by the LIRR and NJ Transit. The agency shut down one tunnel at a time despite MTA calls for a rush-hour service approach, which officials said curtailed LIRR service by forcing too many trains to share the remaining tunnels.

Before the rehab of the tunnel.
View behind the 116-year-old benchwalls.

Owned by Amtrak, the four tunnels first opened in 1910. Among the busiest passenger rail tunnels in the Western Hemisphere, they carry 450 daily Amtrak, LIRR, and NJ Transit trains. Two of the tunnels required significant repairs after floodwaters entered the passageways during Hurricane Sandy, according to Amtrak.

During the last year, work crews demolished, removed, and replaced much of the deteriorated infrastructure and installed new bench walls designed to enhance safety, maintenance access, and performance. More than 24,000 feet of rail, 8,000 tons of ballast, 8,000 wooden rail ties, and 20,000 cubic yards of bench wall concrete were removed and replaced.

The new Line 2 tunnel features brighter lighting to improve visibility for train operators, as well as a larger drainage system to more efficiently remove water.

Demolition of the old benchwall and construction of new one.

When the project was first announced, the MTA suggested Amtrak implement a “repair in place” approach, scheduling work for nights and weekends while maintaining service during rush hours to minimize commute disruptions.

However, the agency opted to completely shut down one tunnel at a time, forcing the three rail agencies to share the remaining three tunnels. MTA officials’ concerns were realized in May, when a track fire temporarily shut down two of the remaining tunnels, leaving the three rail agencies to share a single tunnel.

A month earlier, an LIRR train traveling through one of the tunnels was disabled after hitting debris, further worsening delays as workers inspected the tracks, according to Gothamist.

During Monday’s press conference at Penn Station, MTA Chair and CEO Janno Lieber called the project an “important milestone” while criticizing Amtrak for what he said was its impact on LIRR riders.

“This project forced the Long Island Rail Road to reduce its peak hour service into Penn by 20 percent,” Lieber said. “That’s a lot of trains, and it meant customers experienced a lot more crowding into Penn.”

“Given that impact and the risk to the customers of things going wrong in three remaining operational tunnels, we did insist that Amtrak take additional precautions,” he added.

Amtrak said the tunnel reconstruction could not have proceeded without fully suspending service. Earlier this year, Amtrak Vice President of Infrastructure Project Delivery Warren LeBeau told Gothamist that the MTA’s suggested approach would have “taken years to complete,” with “significantly more impact to riders.”

The agency also said it is “committed to minimizing passenger impacts,” adding that investments in infrastructure hardening, combined with mitigation measures, helped limit service delays during the outage.

“This milestone reflects the progress Amtrak is making to rebuild critical infrastructure while maintaining service for the millions of customers who rely on the Northeast Corridor every year,” Amtrak Interim President Byl Herrmann said.

“Reopening Line 2 of the East River Tunnel restores a vital transportation link and positions it to serve rail passengers for another 100 years,” he added.

Phase two of the $1.6 billion project, which will shut down the second tunnel, Line 1, will begin this fall and is expected to be completed by the end of 2027. Amtrak officials said the project will remain within budget.

RELATED:

The post Amtrak completes first phase of East River tunnel project amid LIRR disruptions first appeared on 6sqft.

This post was originally published here